/templatedata/automated/resource_documents_support/data/network/user/800_Administrators_Guide_V_8_0

[Type the document title]
Version 8.0 | December 2012 | 3725-74605-001
Polycom® RealPresence®
Collaboration Server
800s Virtual Edition Administrator’s Guide
Polycom Document Title
1
Trademark Information
POLYCOM® and the names and marks associated with Polycom's products are trademarks and/or service
marks of Polycom, Inc., and are registered and/or common law marks in the United States and various other
countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Patent Information
The accompanying product may be protected by one or more U.S. and foreign patents and/or pending patent
applications held by Polycom, Inc.
This software has not achieved UC APL certification.
This document provides the latest information for security-conscious users running Version 8.0 software.
The information in this document is not intended to imply that DoD or DISA certifies Polycom RealPresence
Collaboration Server systems.
For regulatory notices see the Polycom® RealPresence® Collaboration Server 800s Quick Start Guide.
© 2012 Polycom, Inc. All rights reserved.
Polycom, Inc.
6001 America Center Drive
San Jose CA 95002
USA
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Polycom, Inc. Under the law,
reproducing includes translating into another language or format.
As between the parties, Polycom, Inc., retains title to and ownership of all proprietary rights with respect to
the software contained within its products. The software is protected by United States copyright laws and
international treaty provision. Therefore, you must treat the software like any other copyrighted material (e.g.,
a book or sound recording).
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Polycom, Inc., is not
responsible for printing or clerical errors. Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
About the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide ................. 1-1
Who Should Read This Guide? .................................................................................... 1-2
Prerequisites ............................................................................................................ 1-2
How This Guide is Organized ...................................................................................... 1-2
About the Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s System ............................ 1-3
IP Network Guidelines .................................................................................................. 1-3
IP Networks ............................................................................................................. 1-3
Workstation Requirements ................................................................................................... 1-4
Conference Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Conferencing Modes .............................................................................................................. 2-1
Conferencing Capabilities in the Various Conferencing Modes ............................. 2-2
AVC Conferencing - Video Session Types ......................................................................... 2-3
Continuous Presence (CP) Conferencing .................................................................... 2-3
Video Protocol Support in CP Conferences ........................................................ 2-5
AVC Conferencing Parameters .................................................................................... 2-5
Basic Conferencing Parameters ............................................................................ 2-5
Supplemental Conferencing Features ................................................................. 2-6
Operator Conferences (CP only Conferences) ................................................... 2-7
Default Profile Settings in CP Conferencing Mode ................................................... 2-7
SVC-based Conferencing ....................................................................................................... 2-9
Guidelines ...................................................................................................................... 2-10
MCU Supported Resolutions for SVC Conferencing ...................................... 2-12
Default Profile Settings in SVC Only Conferencing Mode ..................................... 2-12
Mixed CP and SVC Conferencing ...................................................................................... 2-13
Default Profile Settings in Mixed CP and SVC Conferencing Mode .................... 2-14
Viewing Profiles ................................................................................................................... 2-16
Profile Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 2-17
Modifying an Existing Profile ............................................................................................. 2-18
Deleting a Conference Profile ............................................................................................. 2-18
Defining New Profiles ......................................................................................................... 2-18
Defining CP Conferencing Profiles ............................................................................ 2-19
Defining SVC Conferencing Profiles ......................................................................... 2-40
Defining Mixed CP and SVC Conferencing Profiles ............................................... 2-49
CP Conferencing Additional Information ........................................................................ 2-50
Site Names Definition .................................................................................................. 2-50
Guidelines .............................................................................................................. 2-50
Site Names Display Position ............................................................................... 2-51
Exporting and Importing Conference Profiles ................................................................. 2-53
Guidelines ...................................................................................................................... 2-53
Exporting Conference Profiles .................................................................................... 2-53
Exporting All Conference Profiles from an MCU ............................................ 2-53
Exporting Selected Conference Profiles ............................................................ 2-54
Polycom, Inc
i
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Importing Conference Profiles ....................................................................................2-55
Additional Conferencing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
H.239 .........................................................................................................................................3-1
SIP BFCP Content Capabilities .....................................................................................3-1
Defining Content Sharing Parameters for a Conference ...........................................3-3
Content Settings ..............................................................................................................3-6
CP Content Setting ..................................................................................................3-6
SVC Only and Mixed CP and SVC Content Setting ..........................................3-7
Content Protocols ............................................................................................................3-7
H.263 & H.264 Auto Selection (CP Only) ............................................................3-7
H.263 (CP Only) ......................................................................................................3-8
H.264 HD (CP Only) ...............................................................................................3-8
H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized ...................................................................3-10
Selecting a Customized Content Rate in AVC CP Conferences ............................3-12
Exclusive Content Mode ..............................................................................................3-15
Guidelines .............................................................................................................3-15
Stopping a Content Session .........................................................................................3-17
Content Broadcast Control ..........................................................................................3-17
Giving and Cancelling Token Ownership (AVC Participants) ......................3-18
Managing Noisy Content Connections .....................................................................3-19
Content Display Flags ..........................................................................................3-19
Forcing Other Content Capabilities ...........................................................................3-19
Video Preview (AVC Only Participants) ...........................................................................3-20
Video Preview Guidelines ...........................................................................................3-20
Workstation Requirements ..........................................................................................3-20
Testing your Workstation ....................................................................................3-21
Previewing the Participant Video ..............................................................................3-22
Auto Scan and Customized Polling in Video Layout (CP Only) ...................................3-23
Guidelines ......................................................................................................................3-23
Enabling Auto Scan and Customized Polling (CP Only) ........................................3-23
Auto Scan ...............................................................................................................3-23
Customized Polling ..............................................................................................3-24
Audio Algorithm Support ...................................................................................................3-25
Guidelines ......................................................................................................................3-26
SIP Encryption .......................................................................................................3-26
Mono .......................................................................................................................3-26
Stereo ......................................................................................................................3-27
Monitoring Participant Audio Properties .................................................................3-28
Media Encryption ................................................................................................................3-29
Media Encryption Guidelines .....................................................................................3-29
Mixing Encrypted and Non-encrypted Endpoints in one Conference .........3-30
Direct Connection to the Conference .................................................................3-31
Connection to the Entry Queue ..........................................................................3-32
Moving from the Entry Queue to Conferences or Between Conferences .....3-32
Recording Link Encryption .................................................................................3-33
Encryption Flag Settings ..............................................................................................3-34
Enabling Encryption in the Profile .............................................................................3-35
ii
Polycom, Inc
Table of Contents
Enabling Encryption at the Participant Level .......................................................... 3-35
Monitoring the Encryption Status .............................................................................. 3-36
Packet Loss Compensation (LPR and DBA) AVC CP Conferences .............................. 3-37
Packet Loss .................................................................................................................... 3-37
Causes of Packet Loss .......................................................................................... 3-38
Effects of Packet Loss on Conferences ............................................................... 3-38
Lost Packet Recovery ................................................................................................... 3-38
Lost Packet Recovery Guidelines ....................................................................... 3-38
Enabling Lost Packet Recovery .......................................................................... 3-38
Monitoring Lost Packet Recovery .............................................................................. 3-39
Lecture Mode (AVC CP Only) ............................................................................................ 3-40
Enabling Lecture Mode ............................................................................................... 3-40
Selecting the Conference Lecturer ...................................................................... 3-41
Enabling the Automatic Switching .................................................................... 3-43
Lecture Mode Monitoring ........................................................................................... 3-43
Restricting Content Broadcast to Lecturer ................................................................ 3-45
Muting Participants Except the Lecturer (AVC CP Only) ...................................... 3-46
Guidelines .............................................................................................................. 3-46
Enabling the Mute Participants Except Lecturer Option ................................ 3-47
Permanent Conference ........................................................................................................ 3-48
Guidelines ...................................................................................................................... 3-48
Enabling a Permanent Conference ............................................................................. 3-48
Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing . . . . . 4-1
Video Resolutions in AVC-based CP Conferencing ......................................................... 4-1
Video Display with CIF, SD and HD Video Connections ................................ 4-1
H.264 High Profile Support in CP Conferences ......................................................... 4-2
Guidelines ................................................................................................................ 4-2
CP Conferencing with H.263 4CIF ............................................................................... 4-3
H.263 4CIF Guidelines ........................................................................................... 4-3
The CP Resolution Decision Matrix ..................................................................................... 4-3
H.264 Base Profile and High Profile Comparison ..................................................... 4-5
Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Resource Usage Summary ............. 4-7
Resolution Configuration for CP Conferences ................................................................... 4-7
Modifying the Resolution Configuration ................................................................... 4-8
Resolution Configuration - Basic .......................................................................... 4-8
Before a selection is made in this pane, the Maximum CP Resolution of
the system is determined by the MAX_CP_RESOLUTION System Flag. ..... 4-9
Resolution Configuration - Detailed .................................................................... 4-9
Base Profile / High Profile Resolution Slider Panes ....................................... 4-10
Flag Settings .................................................................................................................. 4-10
Setting the Maximum CP Resolution for Conferencing ................................ 4-10
Minimum Frame Rate Threshold for SD Resolution ....................................... 4-10
Additional Video Resolutions ............................................................................................ 4-11
Additional Intermediate Video Resolutions ............................................................. 4-11
Microsoft RTV Video Protocol Support in CP Conferences ........................................... 4-11
Guidelines .............................................................................................................. 4-11
Participant Settings ...................................................................................................... 4-13
Polycom, Inc
iii
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring RTV ............................................................................................................4-14
Controlling Resource Allocations for Lync Clients Using RTV Video
Protocol ...........................................................................................................................4-14
Threshold HD Flag Settings using the RTV Video Protocol ..........................4-16
Cascading Conferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
Video Layout in Cascading conferences (CP and mixed CP and SVC) ..................5-1
Guidelines ................................................................................................................5-2
Flags controlling Cascade Layouts .......................................................................5-2
Basic Cascading .......................................................................................................................5-3
Basic Cascading using IP Cascaded Link ....................................................................5-3
Dialing Directly to a Conference ..........................................................................5-3
Automatic Identification of the Cascading Link ................................................5-4
Meeting Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
Meeting Rooms List ................................................................................................................6-2
Meeting Room Toolbar & Right-click Menu ...............................................................6-4
Creating a New Meeting Room ............................................................................................6-4
Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
Entry Queues ...........................................................................................................................7-1
Defining a New Entry Queue ........................................................................................7-2
Listing Entry Queues ......................................................................................................7-5
Modifying the EQ Properties ........................................................................................7-5
Transit Entry Queue .......................................................................................................7-5
Setting a Transit Entry Queue ...............................................................................7-5
IVR Provider Entry Queue (Shared Number Dialing) ..............................................7-6
Call Flow ..................................................................................................................7-6
Guidelines ................................................................................................................7-6
Collaboration Server Configuration .....................................................................7-7
SIP Factories .............................................................................................................................7-8
Creating SIP Factories ....................................................................................................7-8
SIP Registration & Presence for Entry Queues and SIP Factories .................................7-10
Guidelines ..............................................................................................................7-10
Monitoring Registration Status ...................................................................................7-10
Ad Hoc Conferencing ...........................................................................................................7-11
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
Viewing the Address Book ....................................................................................................8-2
Displaying and Hiding the Group Members in the Navigation Pane ....................8-3
Participants List Pane Information ...............................................................................8-3
Displaying and Hiding the Address Book ..................................................................8-4
Adding Participants from the Address Book to Conferences ..........................................8-5
Adding Individual Participants from the Address Book to Conferences ..............8-5
Adding a Group from the Address Book to Conferences .........................................8-5
Participant Groups ..................................................................................................................8-6
Managing Groups in the Address Book ......................................................................8-6
Managing the Address Book .................................................................................................8-7
Guidelines ........................................................................................................................8-7
Adding a Participant to the Address Book .................................................................8-7
iv
Polycom, Inc
Table of Contents
Adding a new participant to the Address Book Directly ......................................... 8-8
Adding a Participant from an Ongoing Conference to the Address Book .......... 8-13
Modifying Participants in the Address Book ........................................................... 8-14
Deleting Participants from the Address Book .......................................................... 8-15
Copying or Moving a Participant .............................................................................. 8-16
Searching the Address Book ....................................................................................... 8-17
Filtering the Address Book ......................................................................................... 8-18
Filtering Address Book Data Using a Predefined Pattern .............................. 8-18
Filtering Address Book Data Using a Custom Pattern ................................... 8-19
Clearing the Filter ................................................................................................. 8-20
Obtaining the Display Name from the Address Book .................................................... 8-21
Importing and Exporting Address Books ......................................................................... 8-22
Exporting an Address Book ........................................................................................ 8-22
Importing an Address Book ........................................................................................ 8-22
Upgrading and Downgrading Considerations ................................................................ 8-23
Integrating the Polycom CMA™ Address Book with the Collaboration Server ........ 8-23
Reservations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Guidelines ........................................................................................................................ 9-1
System ...................................................................................................................... 9-1
Resources ................................................................................................................. 9-1
Reservations ............................................................................................................ 9-2
Using the Reservation Calendar ........................................................................................... 9-3
Toolbar Buttons ....................................................................................................... 9-3
Reservations Views ........................................................................................................ 9-4
Week View ............................................................................................................... 9-4
Day View ................................................................................................................. 9-4
Today View ............................................................................................................. 9-5
List View .................................................................................................................. 9-5
Changing the Calendar View ....................................................................................... 9-6
Scheduling Conferences Using the Reservation Calendar ............................................... 9-8
Creating a New Reservation ......................................................................................... 9-8
Managing Reservations ....................................................................................................... 9-13
Guidelines ...................................................................................................................... 9-13
Viewing and Modifying Reservations ....................................................................... 9-13
Using the Week and Day views of the Reservations Calendar ..................... 9-13
Adjusting the Start Times of all Reservations .......................................................... 9-15
Deleting Reservations .................................................................................................. 9-16
Searching for Reservations using Quick Search ...................................................... 9-17
Operator Assistance & Participant Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Operator Conferences .......................................................................................................... 10-1
Defining the Components Enabling Operator Assistance ..................................... 10-3
Defining a Conference IVR Service with Operator Assistance Options ....... 10-3
Defining an Entry Queue IVR Service with Operator Assistance Options .. 10-5
Defining a Conference Profile for an Operator Conference ........................... 10-6
Defining an Ongoing Operator Conference ................................................... 10-11
Saving an Operator Conference to a Template .............................................. 10-13
Starting an Operator Conference from a Template ....................................... 10-14
Polycom, Inc
v
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants Requiring Assistance .......10-15
Requesting Help ..................................................................................................10-15
Participant Alerts List .........................................................................................10-16
Audible Alarms ...................................................................................................................10-16
Using Audible Alarms .......................................................................................10-16
Moving Participants Between Conferences ....................................................................10-17
Moving Participants ...................................................................................................10-18
Conference Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1
Guidelines ..............................................................................................................11-1
Using Conference Templates ..............................................................................................11-2
Toolbar Buttons .....................................................................................................11-2
Creating a New Conference Template ...............................................................................11-4
Creating a new Conference Template from Scratch ................................................11-4
Saving an Ongoing or CP-based Operator Conference as a Template .................11-8
Starting an Ongoing Conference From a Template .........................................................11-9
Starting an Operator Conference from a Template (AVC Conferencing) ..11-10
Scheduling a Reservation From a Conference Template .............................................11-11
Deleting a Conference Template ......................................................................................11-12
Exporting and Importing Conference Templates ..........................................................11-13
Exporting Conference Templates .............................................................................11-13
Exporting All Conference Templates from an MCU .....................................11-14
Exporting Selected Conference Templates ......................................................11-15
Importing Conference Templates .............................................................................11-17
Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Setting up the Calendaring Solution ..................................................................................12-2
Calendaring Guidelines ...............................................................................................12-7
Creating and Connecting to a Conference ........................................................................12-9
Creating a Conference ..................................................................................................12-9
Connecting to a Conference ......................................................................................12-10
Collaboration Server Standalone Deployment ...............................................12-10
Collaboration Server and Polycom DMA System Deployment ...................12-11
Polycom Solution Support .........................................................................................12-11
Conference and Participant Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1
General Monitoring ..............................................................................................................13-2
Conference Level Monitoring .............................................................................................13-2
Viewing the Properties of an Ongoing CP and CP and SVC Conference ............13-2
Viewing the Properties of an Ongoing SVC-based Conference ...........................13-10
Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants Requiring Assistance .......13-14
Requesting Help ..................................................................................................13-14
Request to Speak .................................................................................................13-15
Participant Alerts List .........................................................................................13-16
Participant Level Monitoring ............................................................................................13-17
Displaying Participants Properties ...........................................................................13-17
IP Participant Properties ............................................................................................13-18
Recording Conferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1
Creating Multiple Virtual Recording Rooms on the RSS ................................................14-2
vi
Polycom, Inc
Table of Contents
Configuring the Collaboration Server to Enable Recording .......................................... 14-2
Defining the Recording Link ...................................................................................... 14-2
Enabling the Recording Features in a Conference IVR Service ............................. 14-4
Enabling the Recording in the Conference Profile .................................................. 14-5
Recording Link Encryption ......................................................................................... 14-7
Recording Link Encryption Flag Setting ........................................................... 14-7
Recording Link Settings ....................................................................................... 14-8
Managing the Recording Process ....................................................................................... 14-8
Recording Link Layout ................................................................................................ 14-9
Using the Collaboration Server Web Client to Manage the Recording
Process .......................................................................................................................... 14-10
Using DTMF Codes to Manage the Recording Process ........................................ 14-11
Conference Recording with Codian IP VCR .................................................................. 14-11
Users, Connections and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Users ....................................................................................................................................... 15-1
User Types ..................................................................................................................... 15-1
Administrator ........................................................................................................ 15-1
Administrator Read-only .................................................................................... 15-1
Operator ................................................................................................................. 15-1
Chairperson ........................................................................................................... 15-2
Auditor ................................................................................................................... 15-2
Machine Account .................................................................................................. 15-2
Guidelines ...................................................................................................................... 15-2
Monitoring ............................................................................................................. 15-3
Active Directory .................................................................................................... 15-3
Listing Users .................................................................................................................. 15-3
Adding a New User ..................................................................................................... 15-4
Deleting a User .............................................................................................................. 15-5
Changing a User’s Password ...................................................................................... 15-5
Disabling a User ............................................................................................................ 15-6
Enabling a User ............................................................................................................. 15-6
Renaming a User .......................................................................................................... 15-7
Connections ........................................................................................................................... 15-8
Viewing the Connections List ..................................................................................... 15-8
User and Connection Management ................................................................................... 15-8
Managing the System Users ........................................................................................ 15-9
Disabling/Enabling Users ................................................................................... 15-9
Renaming Users .................................................................................................... 15-9
Disabling Inactive Users ...................................................................................... 15-9
Managing the User Login Process ............................................................................. 15-9
Implementing Strong Passwords ....................................................................... 15-9
Implementing Password Re-Use / History Rules ......................................... 15-10
Defining Password Aging ................................................................................. 15-10
Maximum Repeating Characters ...................................................................... 15-11
Defining Password Change Frequency ........................................................... 15-11
User Lockout ....................................................................................................... 15-11
User Login Record .............................................................................................. 15-12
Controlling User Sessions ......................................................................................... 15-12
Polycom, Inc
vii
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Management Sessions per System ....................................................................15-12
Sessions per User ................................................................................................15-13
Connection Timeout ...........................................................................................15-13
Session Timeout ..................................................................................................15-13
Notes .....................................................................................................................................15-13
Using Notes .................................................................................................................15-13
IP Network Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-1
IP Network Services .............................................................................................................16-1
Management Network (Primary) ...............................................................................16-2
Default IP Service (Conferencing Service - Media and signaling) .........................16-2
Modifying the Management Network .......................................................................16-2
Modifying the Default IP Network Service ..............................................................16-9
IP Network Monitoring .............................................................................................16-20
LAN Redundancy ...............................................................................................................16-24
Configuration Requirements .....................................................................................16-24
Signaling and Media Redundancy ...........................................................................16-24
Hardware Monitor Indications .................................................................................16-25
SIP Proxy Failover With Polycom® Distributed Media Application™
(DMA™) 7000 ......................................................................................................................16-26
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Network Port Usage ....................16-26
Multiple Network Services ................................................................................................16-28
Guidelines ....................................................................................................................16-28
Resource Allocation and Capacity ...................................................................16-29
First Time Installation and Configuration ...............................................................16-29
Connecting the Cables to the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s ....................16-30
Collaboration Server Configuration .........................................................................16-31
System Flags and License Settings ...................................................................16-31
IP Network Service Definition ..........................................................................16-31
Setting a Network Service as Default ...............................................................16-36
Signaling Host IP Address and MCU Prefix in GK Indications ..................16-37
Resolution Configuration ..................................................................................16-37
Conference Profile ...............................................................................................16-37
Signaling Monitor .......................................................................................................16-38
Conferencing ...............................................................................................................16-38
Defining AVC Dial Out Participants ................................................................16-38
Monitoring Conferences ....................................................................................16-38
Resource Report ..........................................................................................................16-38
Port Gauge Indications .......................................................................................16-39
NAT (Network Address Translation) Traversal ............................................................16-40
Deployment Architectures ................................................................................................16-40
Remote Connection Using the Internet ...................................................................16-40
Business to Business Connections ............................................................................16-41
FW (Firewall) NAT Keep Alive ................................................................................16-42
System Configuration in SBC environments ..................................................16-42
IVR Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-1
IVR Services List ...................................................................................................................17-1
IVR Services Toolbar ....................................................................................................17-2
viii
Polycom, Inc
Table of Contents
Adding Languages ............................................................................................................... 17-3
Uploading a Message File to the Collaboration Server ........................................... 17-4
Defining a New Conference IVR Service .......................................................................... 17-6
Defining a New Conference IVR Service .................................................................. 17-6
Entry Queue IVR Service ................................................................................................... 17-18
Defining a New Entry Queue IVR Service .............................................................. 17-18
Setting a Conference IVR Service or Entry Queue IVR Service as the Default
Service .......................................................................................................................... 17-22
Modifying the Conference or Entry Queue IVR Service Properties ................... 17-23
Replacing the Music File ................................................................................................... 17-24
Adding a Music File ........................................................................................... 17-24
Creating Audio Prompts and Video Slides .................................................................... 17-25
Recording an Audio Message ................................................................................... 17-25
Creating a Welcome Video Slide .............................................................................. 17-28
Default IVR Prompts and Messages ................................................................................ 17-29
Volume Control of IVR Messages and Music ................................................................ 17-32
The Call Detail Record (CDR) Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
The CDR File ......................................................................................................................... 18-1
CDR File Formats ......................................................................................................... 18-1
Multi-Part CDR Files .................................................................................................... 18-3
Guidelines .............................................................................................................. 18-3
CDR File Contents ........................................................................................................ 18-3
Viewing, Retrieving and Archiving Conference Information ....................................... 18-4
Viewing the Conference Records ............................................................................... 18-4
Multi-part CDR File display ............................................................................... 18-5
Refreshing the CDR List .............................................................................................. 18-6
Retrieving and Archiving Conference CDR Records .............................................. 18-6
RMX Manager Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Accessing the RMX Manager Directly .............................................................................. 19-1
Installing the RMX Manager ............................................................................................... 19-2
Starting the RMX Manager Application ........................................................................... 19-4
Connecting to the MCU ............................................................................................... 19-5
RMX Manager Main Screen ........................................................................................ 19-7
MCUs Pane ............................................................................................................ 19-8
Conferences Pane .................................................................................................. 19-9
Collaboration Server Management .................................................................. 19-10
List Pane ............................................................................................................... 19-10
Status Bar ............................................................................................................. 19-10
Address Book ...................................................................................................... 19-11
Conference Templates ........................................................................................ 19-11
Adding MCUs to the MCUs List ...................................................................................... 19-12
Starting a Conference ......................................................................................................... 19-13
Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane ................................................ 19-14
Starting a Reservation ................................................................................................ 19-15
Starting an Ongoing Conference or Reservation From a Template .................... 19-15
Monitoring Conferences .................................................................................................... 19-16
Grouping the Participants by MCU ......................................................................... 19-17
Polycom, Inc
ix
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Start Monitoring/Stop Monitoring ..........................................................................19-18
Modifying the MCU Properties ........................................................................................19-19
Disconnecting an MCU ......................................................................................................19-19
Removing an MCU from the MCUs Pane .......................................................................19-20
Changing the RMX Manager Language ..........................................................................19-20
Import/Export RMX Manager Configuration ................................................................19-21
Installing RMX Manager for Secure Communication Mode ........................................19-23
RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities . . . . . . . .20-1
System and Participant Alerts .............................................................................................20-1
System Alerts .................................................................................................................20-2
Participant Alerts ..........................................................................................................20-3
RMX Time ..............................................................................................................................20-4
Guidelines ..............................................................................................................20-4
Altering the clock ..........................................................................................................20-4
Resource Management .........................................................................................................20-6
Resource Capacity ........................................................................................................20-6
Resource Usage .............................................................................................................20-7
SVC Conferencing .................................................................................................20-7
CP Conferencing - Continuous Presence ...........................................................20-7
Forcing Video Resource Allocation to CIF Resolution ....................................20-8
Resource Report ............................................................................................................20-9
Displaying the Resource Report .........................................................................20-9
MCU Resource Management by CMA and DMA .................................................20-10
Guidelines ............................................................................................................20-10
Port Usage Threshold .................................................................................................20-11
Setting the Port Usage Threshold .....................................................................20-11
SIP Dial-in Busy Notification ............................................................................20-11
Port Usage Gauge .......................................................................................................20-12
System Information ............................................................................................................20-13
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) ...........................................................20-15
MIBs (Management Information Base) ....................................................................20-15
Traps .............................................................................................................................20-15
Guidelines ............................................................................................................20-15
Private MIBs .........................................................................................................20-15
Support for MIB-II Sections ...............................................................................20-16
The Alarm-MIB ...................................................................................................20-16
H.341-MIB (H.341 – H.323) ................................................................................20-16
Standard MIBs .....................................................................................................20-16
Unified MIB .........................................................................................................20-17
Traps .............................................................................................................................20-19
Status Trap ...........................................................................................................20-20
Defining the SNMP Parameters in the Collaboration Server ...............................20-20
Hot Backup ..........................................................................................................................20-26
Guidelines ....................................................................................................................20-27
Enabling Hot Backup .................................................................................................20-28
Using Hot Backup Triggers .......................................................................................20-29
Configuring the Hot Backup Triggers .....................................................................20-29
x
Polycom, Inc
Table of Contents
Modifications to the Master MCU Requiring System Reset ................................ 20-30
Audible Alarms .................................................................................................................. 20-31
Using Audible Alarms ............................................................................................... 20-31
Audible Alarm Permissions .............................................................................. 20-31
Stop Repeating Message .................................................................................... 20-31
Configuring the Audible Alarms ............................................................................. 20-32
User Customization ............................................................................................ 20-32
Replacing the Audible Alarm File .................................................................... 20-33
Multilingual Setting ........................................................................................................... 20-34
Customizing the Multilingual Setting ..................................................................... 20-34
Banner Display and Customization ................................................................................. 20-35
Guidelines ............................................................................................................ 20-35
Non-Modifiable Banner Text .................................................................................... 20-36
Sample 1 Banner ................................................................................................. 20-36
Sample 2 Banner ................................................................................................. 20-36
Sample 3 Banner ................................................................................................. 20-36
Sample 4 Banner ................................................................................................. 20-36
Customizing Banners ................................................................................................. 20-37
Banner Display ............................................................................................................ 20-38
Login Screen Banner .......................................................................................... 20-38
Main Screen Banner ............................................................................................ 20-39
Software Management ....................................................................................................... 20-39
Backup and Restore Guidelines ............................................................................... 20-39
Using Software Management ........................................................................... 20-40
Ping Collaboration Server ................................................................................................. 20-41
Guidelines .................................................................................................................... 20-41
Using Ping ................................................................................................................... 20-41
Notification Settings ........................................................................................................... 20-42
Logger Diagnostic Files ..................................................................................................... 20-43
Information Collector ......................................................................................................... 20-45
Standard Security Mode ............................................................................................ 20-45
Using the Information Collector .............................................................................. 20-46
Step 1: Creating the Information Collector Compressed File .............................. 20-46
Step 2: Saving the Compressed File ......................................................................... 20-47
Step 3: Viewing the Compressed File ...................................................................... 20-47
Auditor ................................................................................................................................. 20-47
Auditor Files ................................................................................................................ 20-48
Auditor Event History File Storage ................................................................. 20-48
Retrieving Auditor Files .................................................................................... 20-48
Auditor File Viewer ................................................................................................... 20-49
Audit Events ................................................................................................................ 20-52
Alerts and Faults ................................................................................................. 20-52
Transactions ......................................................................................................... 20-53
ActiveX Bypass ................................................................................................................... 20-55
Installing ActiveX ....................................................................................................... 20-55
Resetting the Collaboration Server .................................................................................. 20-56
Upgrading and Downgrading .......................................................................................... 20-57
Polycom, Inc
xi
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
System Configuration Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-1
Modifying System Flags ......................................................................................................21-1
Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags ........................................................21-13
Manually Adding Flags to the CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS Tab ...........21-30
Deleting a Flag .....................................................................................................21-32
Auto Layout Configuration .......................................................................................21-32
Customizing the Default Auto Layout ............................................................21-32
LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag Values ............................21-34
CS_ENABLE_EPC Flag ..............................................................................................21-36
Automatic Password Generation Flags ...................................................................21-36
Guidelines ............................................................................................................21-36
Enabling the Automatic Generation of Passwords ........................................21-37
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Hardware Monitoring . . . . . . . . .22-1
Viewing the Status of the Hardware Components ..........................................................22-1
Hardware Monitor Toolbar .................................................................................22-2
Viewing the Properties of RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Hardware
Components ...........................................................................................................................22-2
Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................22-7
Appendix A - Disconnection Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
IP Disconnection Causes .......................................................................................................A-1
Appendix B - Alarms and Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Alarms ............................................................................................................................. B-1
Appendix C - CDR Fields - Unformatted File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
The Conference Summary Record .......................................................................................C-2
Event Records .........................................................................................................................C-3
Standard Event Record Fields ......................................................................................C-3
Event Types ....................................................................................................................C-4
Event Specific Fields ....................................................................................................C-10
Disconnection Cause Values ..............................................................................................C-33
MGC Manager Events that are not Supported by the Collaboration Server ..............C-36
Appendix D - Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database
Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Ad Hoc Conferencing without Authentication .................................................................D-1
Ad Hoc Conferencing with Authentication .......................................................................D-2
Entry Queue Level - Conference Initiation Validation with an External
Database Application ....................................................................................................D-3
Conference Access with External Database Authentication ...........................................D-4
Conference Access Validation - All Participants (Always) ......................................D-5
Conference Access Validation - Chairperson Only (Upon Request) ......................D-6
System Settings for Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication ....D-7
Ad Hoc Settings .............................................................................................................D-7
Authentication Settings .................................................................................................D-8
MCU Configuration to Communicate with an External Database
Application .............................................................................................................D-9
Enabling External Database Validation for Starting New Ongoing
Conferences ...........................................................................................................D-10
xii
Polycom, Inc
Table of Contents
Enabling External Database Validation for Conferences Access .................. D-10
Appendix E - Participant Properties Advanced Channel Information . . . . . E-1
Appendix F - Configuring Direct Connections to RealPresence
Collaboration Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Management Network (Primary) .........................................................................................F-1
Configuring the Workstation ........................................................................................F-1
Connecting to the Management Network ..................................................................F-4
Connecting to the Collaboration Server via Modem .................................................F-6
Procedure 1: Install the RMX Manager ...............................................................F-6
Procedure 2: Configure the Modem ....................................................................F-6
Procedure 3: Create a Dial-up Connection .........................................................F-7
Procedure 4: Connect to the Collaboration Server ..........................................F-11
Appendix G - Secure Communication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Certificate Configuration and Management ..................................................................... G-1
Certificate Template Requirements ............................................................................ G-1
Certificate Requirements for Polycom Devices ......................................................... G-2
Configure Certificate Management ............................................................................ G-2
Switching to Secure Mode .................................................................................................... G-2
Purchasing a Certificate ................................................................................................ G-2
Installing the Certificate ............................................................................................... G-4
Creating/Modifying System Flags ............................................................................. G-5
Enabling Secure Communication Mode .................................................................... G-6
Securing an External Database ............................................................................................ G-7
MS Active Directory Integration ......................................................................................... G-7
Directory and Database Options ................................................................................. G-7
Standard Security Mode ....................................................................................... G-7
Guidelines ....................................................................................................................... G-8
Enabling Active Directory Integration ....................................................................... G-9
Appendix H - Restoring Defaults and System Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Restore to Factory Security Defaults ..................................................................................H-1
Comprehensive Restore to Factory Defaults .....................................................................H-4
Comprehensive Restore to Factory Defaults Procedure ..........................................H-5
Procedure A: Backup Configuration Files .........................................................H-5
Procedure B: Restore to Factory Defaults ..........................................................H-5
Procedure C: Restore the System Configuration From the Backup ...............H-8
System Recovery Using the Recovery DVD ......................................................................H-9
Preparation for System Recovery ................................................................................H-9
Performing the Recovery Process ...............................................................................H-9
Completing the System Configuration .....................................................................H-10
Appendix I - Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into
Microsoft Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
Overview ..................................................................................................................................I-1
Conferencing Entities Presence .....................................................................................I-2
Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE) .............................................................I-2
ICE Guidelines .........................................................................................................I-2
Connecting to the Collaboration Server in ICE Environment ..........................I-3
Dialing Methods ......................................................................................................I-3
Polycom, Inc
xiii
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Collaboration Server Integration into the Microsoft Lync Server 2010 .......................... I-5
Configuring the Polycom-Microsoft Solution ............................................................ I-5
Call Admission Control (CAC) ..................................................................................... I-5
Guidelines ................................................................................................................ I-5
Media Over TCP ............................................................................................................. I-6
Network Error Recovery ................................................................................................ I-6
SIP Dialog Recovery ....................................................................................................... I-6
Configuring the RealPresence Collaboration Server for Microsoft Integration ............ I-7
Modify the Collaboration Server Management Network Service to Include the
DNS Server ...................................................................................................................... I-7
Defining a SIP Network Service in the Collaboration Server and Installing the
Security Certificate .......................................................................................................... I-9
The Security Certificate .......................................................................................... I-9
Configuring the Collaboration Server IP Network Service ............................ I-10
Polycom Collaboration Server System Flag Configuration .................................... I-17
Enabling the Microsoft Environment ................................................................. I-17
Setting the audio protocol for the Microsoft Client running on a single
core PC .................................................................................................................... I-18
Controlling Resource Allocations for Lync Clients Using the RTV Video
Protocol ................................................................................................................... I-19
HD Frame Rate Flag Settings using the RTV Video Protocol ........................ I-21
Adding Presence to Conferencing Entities in the Buddy List ........................................ I-22
Guidelines ...................................................................................................................... I-22
Enabling the Registration of the Conferencing Entities .......................................... I-23
Creating an Active Directory Account for the Conferencing Entity ............. I-23
Enabling the Conferencing Entity User Account for Lync Server ................. I-25
Defining the Microsoft SIP Server in the IP Network Service ........................ I-26
Enabling Registration in the Conference Profile .............................................. I-26
Verifying the Collaboration Server Conferencing Entity Routing Name
and Profile .............................................................................................................. I-27
Monitoring the Registration Status of a Conferencing Entity in the
Collaboration Server Web Client or RMX Manager Application .......................... I-28
Conferencing Entity List ...................................................................................... I-28
Conferencing Entity Properties ........................................................................... I-30
Collaboration Server Configuration for CAC Implementation ............................. I-31
Enabling CAC Implementation .......................................................................... I-31
Conferencing Behavior ......................................................................................... I-31
Connecting a Collaboration Server Meeting Room to a Microsoft AV-MCU
Conference ..................................................................................................................... I-33
Configuring the Collaboration Server for Federated (ICE) Dialing .............................. I-34
Monitoring the Connection to the STUN and Relay Servers in the ICE
Environment .................................................................................................................. I-36
Monitoring the Participant Connection in ICE Environment ................................ I-36
Active Alarms and Troubleshooting .................................................................................. I-39
Active Alarms ................................................................................................................ I-39
ICE Active Alarms ........................................................................................................ I-40
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ I-41
Known Issues ................................................................................................................. I-42
xiv
Polycom, Inc
Table of Contents
Polycom Solution Support ...........................................................................................I-42
Appendix J - SIP RFC Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
Polycom, Inc
xv
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
xvi
Polycom, Inc
1
Overview
About the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Administrator’s Guide
The Polycom® RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide provides
instructions for configuring, deploying, and administering Polycom Multipoint Control
Units (MCUs) for video conferencing. This guide will help you understand the Polycom
video conferencing components, and provides descriptions of all available conferencing
features. This guide will help you perform the following tasks:
•
Customize the Collaboration Server conferencing entities such as conference Profiles,
IVR Services, Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues, etc., to your organization’s needs.
•
Define Collaboration Server Users.
•
Advanced conference Management
•
Define Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing
•
Configure Templates, the Address Book and schedule Reservations
•
Record Conferences
•
Configure the Collaboration Server to support special call flows and conferencing
requirements, such as Cascading Conferences.
•
Configure the Collaboration Server for special applications and needs by setting
various system flags.
•
Manage and troubleshoot the Collaboration Server’s performance.
The RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide provides description of basic
conferencing operations. It will help you perform the following tasks:
Polycom, Inc.
•
Unpack the Collaboration Server system and install it on a a rack.
•
Connect the required cables to the Collaboration Server.
•
Perform basic configuration procedures.
•
Start a new conference and connect participants/endpoints to it.
•
Monitor ongoing conferences
•
Perform basic operations and monitoring tasks
1-1
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Who Should Read This Guide?
System administrators and network engineers should read this guide to learn how to
properly set up Polycom Collaboration Server systems. This guide describes administrationlevel tasks.
For detailed description of first time installation and configuration, description of the
Collaboration Server Web Client, and basic operation of your Collaboration Server system, see
the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide.
Prerequisites
This guide assumes the user has the following knowledge:
•
Familiarity with Windows® XP or Vista® operating systems and interface.
•
Familiarity with Microsoft® Internet Explorer® Version 7 or higher.
•
Basic knowledge of video conferencing concepts and terminology.
How This Guide is Organized
The following typographic conventions are used in this guide to distinguish types of in-text
information.
Table 1-1
1-2
Typographic Conventions
Convention
Description
Bold
Highlights interface items such as menus, soft keys, flag names, and
directories. Also used to represent menu selections and text entry to the
phone.
Italics
Used to emphasize text, to show example values or inputs, file names and to
show titles of reference documents available from the Polycom Support Web
site and other reference sites.
Underlined Blue
Used for URL links to external Web pages or documents. If you click on text in
this style, you will be linked to an external document or Web page.
Blue Text
Used for cross referenced page numbers in the same or other chapters or
documents. If you click on blue text, you will be taken to the referenced
section.
Also used for cross references. If you click the italic cross reference text, you
will be taken to the referenced section.
<variable name>
Indicates a variable for which you must enter information specific to your
installation, endpoint, or network. For example, when you see <IP address>,
enter the IP address of the described device.
>
Indicates that you need to select an item from a menu. For example,
Administration > System Information indicates that you need to select
System Information from the Administration menu.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 1-Overview
About the Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server
800s System
The Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) is a
high performance, scalable, IP-network (H.323 and SIP) solution that provides the user with
feature-rich and easy-to-use multipoint voice and video conferencing.
The RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s unit can be controlled via the LAN by the
Collaboration Server Web Client application using Internet Explorer R installed on the user’s
workstation, or the RMX Manager application. The RMX Manager can control several
Collaboration Server units. For more information about the Collaboration Server Manager,
see "RMX Manager Application” on page 20-1.
RealPresence Collaboration
Server 800s
RealPresence
Collaboration
Server Web Client
LAN
Endpoints
IP Phone
PC
Figure 1-1 Multipoint Video Conferencing using a RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
IP Network Guidelines
IP Networks
In the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s, system management and IP conferencing are
performed via two different LAN ports. The networks can be separated in Maximum
Security Environments.
Polycom, Inc.
1-3
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Workstation Requirements
The Collaboration Server Web Client and RMX Manager applications can be installed in an
environment that meets the following requirements:
•
Minimum Hardware – Intel® Pentium® III, 1 GHz or higher,
1024 MB RAM, 500 MB free disk space.
•
Workstation Operating System – Microsoft® Windows® XP, Vista®, Windows® 7.
•
Network Card – 10/100 Mbps.
•
Web Browser - Microsoft® Internet Explorer® Version 7 or higher.
•
Collaboration Server Web client and Collaboration Server Manager are optimized for
display at a resolution of
1280 x 800 pixels and a magnification of 100%.
.Net Framework 2.0 SP1 or above is required and installed automatically.
Internet Explorer must be enabled to allow running Signed ActiveX.
If ActiveX installation is blocked please see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Administrator’s Guide, "ActiveX Bypass” on page 21-66.
Collaboration Server Web Client does not support larger Windows text or font sizes. It is
recommended to set the text size to 100% (default) or Normal in the Display settings in Windows
Control Panel on all workstations. Otherwise, some dialog boxes might not appear properly aligned.
To change the text size, select Control Panel>Display. For Windows XP, click the Appearance tab,
select Normal for the Font size and click OK. For Windows 7, click the Smaller - 100% option and
click OK.
When installing the Collaboration Server Web Client, Windows Explorer >Internet Options>
Security Settings must be set to Medium or less.
It is not recommended to run Collaboration Server Web Client and Polycom CMAD applications
simultaneously on the same workstation.
For Windows 7™ Security Settings, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting
Started Guide, "Microsoft Windows 7™ Security Settings” on page 1-11.
For Internet Explorer 8 configuration, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting
Started Guide, "Internet Explorer 8 Configuration” on page 1-12.
1-4
Polycom, Inc.
2
Conference Profiles
Profiles stored on the MCU enable you to define all types of conferences. Profiles include
conference parameters such as Conferencing Mode, Conference Session Type, Conference
Line Rate, People and Content resolution and settings, Video Layout, Encryption, Lost
Packet Recovery etc.
The maximum number of Conference Profiles that can be defined is 40.
Conference Profiles are assigned to Conferences, Meeting Rooms, Reservations and Entry
Queues. The same Profile can be assigned to different conferencing entities. When modifying
the Profile parameters, the changes will be applied to all the conferencing entities to which
the profile is assigned.
Conference Profile options differ according to the selected Conferencing Mode and Conference
Type. Profiles can be defined for AVC (Advanced Video Codec) conferencing Mode or SVC
(Scalable Video Codec) conferencing Mode. AVC Conferencing Mode, offers two Video
session types: Continuous Presence (CP) conferences and Video Switching (VSW)
Conferences, and a special functional conference - Operator Conferences.
Conference Profiles can be saved to Conference Templates along with all participant parameters,
including their Personal Layout and Video Forcing settings, enabling administrators and
operators to create, save, schedule and activate identical conferences. For more information
see Chapter 11, “Conference Templates” .
Conferencing Modes
The MCU system offers two Conferencing Modes:
•
Transcoding - AVC Conferencing
•
Media Relay - SVC Conferencing
•
Mixed Mode - Mixed AVC (CP) and SVC Conferencing
CP Transcoding - AVC-based Conferencing
A transcoded CP (Continuous Presence) conference is also described as an AVC (Advanced
Video Coding) conference. It supports the standard video protocols. In this mode, video is
received from all the endpoints using different line rates, different protocols (SIP, H.323)
and video parameters:
•
Video protocols: H.263, H.264 Base and High profile and RTV
•
Video Resolutions: from QCIF, CIF and up to 720p
•
Frame rates up to 30 fps
All endpoints that do not support the H.264 SVC protocol such as H.263, H.264, or RTV, are
considered AVC endpoints.
Polycom, Inc.
2-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The MCU process the received video, transcodes it and send the resulting video streams to
the endpoints. The video processing that is required differs according to the video session
set for the conference, with all the processing performed by the MCU. For more details, see ,
"AVC Conferencing - Video Session Types” on page 2-3.
Media Relay - SVC Conferencing
Media Relay SVC Conferencing is based on the SVC (Scalable Video Codec) video protocol
and SAC audio protocol. It offers high resolution video conferencing with low end-to-end
latency, improved Error Resiliency and higher system capacities.
The Polycom multipoint media server, serves as an integrated media relay engine that
provides media streams for displaying conferences at low latency video experience in video
conferences. For more details, see , "SVC-based Conferencing” on page 2-9.
Mixed CP and SVC Conferencing
This type of conference enables participants with SVC-enabled endpoints and AVC
endpoints to participate in the same conference.
Each endpoint connects according to its capabilities. The MCU processes the AVC video
streams and converts them into SVC video Streams and relays them to the SVC participants
that constructs the video layout on the endpoint.
In the same way, the MCU processes the video streams received from the SVC participants,
converts them into AVC video and then transcodes all the video streams to compose the
video layout that is sent to the AVC endpoints.
Conferencing Capabilities in the Various Conferencing Modes
The following table summarizes the conferencing capabilities and options available in the
different Conferencing Modes.
Table 2-1
Conferencing Capabilities in the Different Conferencing Modes
Feature
CP Only
Mixed CP & SVC
SVC Only
Reservations



Operator
Conferences



Entry Queues
*
*
*


Dial Out

(AVC Only)
**
**




Reduced IVR set for
SVC endpoints
Permanent
Conference



LPR

***
***
Cascading
IVR
2-2
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
Table 2-1
Conferencing Capabilities in the Different Conferencing Modes (Continued)
Feature
Auto Redial
Content
CP Only
Mixed CP & SVC
SVC Only



PAll Content
Settings, All Content
Protocols


Graphics Only,
H.264 Cascade &
SVC Optimized
Graphics Only, H.264
Cascade & SVC
Optimized
Presentation Mode



Lecture Mode



Same Layout





AVC endpoints only
Layout set to Auto
Layout and defined on
the endpoint


Layout Selection
Skins
Encryption
Recording
Site Names

AVC endpoints only





AVC recording only


Managed by the
endpoint (not via MCU)

AVC endpoints only
* Entry Queue & Destination Conference must have the same profile (i.e. SVC only to SVC only, Mixed
CP and SVC to Mixed CP and SVC)
** Only Basic Cascading is available
*** For AVC, the LPR error resiliency is used, however for SVC endpoints, new error resiliency
methods are used.
AVC Conferencing - Video Session Types
All endpoints have AVC capabilities and can connect to AVC conferences running on the
MCU. AVC-based Endpoints can connect using different signaling protocols and different
video protocols.
Continuous Presence (CP) Conferencing
The dynamic Continuous Presence (CP) capability of the Collaboration Server system
enables viewing flexibility by offering multiple viewing options and window layouts for
video conferencing.
Polycom, Inc.
2-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Endpoints can connect to the conference using any signaling protocol (H.323, SIP and RTV),
line rate (up to a maximum line rate defined for the conference), Video Protocol (H.263,
H.264 Base and High Profile) and at any resolution and frame rate (provided they meet the
minimum requirements set for the conference).
In Continuous Presence conferences, the MCU receives the video stream from each
endpoint at the video rate, video resolution and frame rate that it is capable of sending, and
it superimposes all the received streams into one video stream that includes the input from
the other endpoints arranges in the selected video layout.
Participants do not see themselves in the video layout. By Default, the speaker is shown in
the top left layout cell in symmetric layouts, in the larger cell in asymmetric layouts, or in
full screen. The speaker sees the previous speakers (their number depends on the number of
cells on the speaker’s layout.
The Continuous Presence video session offers layouts to accommodate different numbers of
participants and conference settings including support of the VUI annex to the H.264
protocol for endpoints that transmit wide video instead of 4CIF resolution. Each participant
can select his/her layout for viewing during the conference, as can be seen in Figure 2-1.
For conferences with more participants than display squares, the Collaboration Server
dynamic video mix capability allows the viewed sites to be modified throughout the
conference. The displayed layout can be changed during an ongoing conference, allowing a
participant to view different screen layouts of the other conference participants. These
layout options allow conferences to have greater flexibility when displaying a large number
of participants and maximizes the screen’s effectiveness.
Figure 2-1 AVC Continuous Presence (CP) video streams and built layouts
2-4
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
Video quality in Continuous Presence conferences is affected by the conference line rate
(that determines the maximum line rate to be used by the connecting endpoints), and the
video capabilities of the endpoints such as the video protocol, video resolution and frame
rate. Content sharing is available in all CP conferences.
This requires extensive processing of the video sent to each participant in the conference.
The higher the video rate and resolution, the more processing power is required.
By default every conference, Entry Queue and Meeting Room has the ability to declare the
maximum CP resolution as defined for the system. This includes conferences launched by
the Collaboration Server Web Client and conferences started via the API.
CP conferencing is defined in the Conference profile by settings the following main features:
• Setting the Conferencing Mode to AVC only
•
Conference Line Rate
•
Video Layout
Video Protocol Support in CP Conferences
The video protocol selected by the system determines the video compression standard used
by the endpoints. In Continuous Presence conferences, the system selects the best video
protocol for each of the endpoint according to he endpoint’s capabilities.
The following Video protocols are supported in CP conferences:
•
H.263 - a video compression algorithm that provides a better video quality than H.261.
This standard is not supported by all endpoints.
•
H.264 Base Profile - a video compression standard that offers improved video quality,
especially at line rates lower than 384 Kbps.
H.264 High Profile allows higher quality video to be transmitted at lower line rates.
•
RTV - a video protocol that provides high quality video conferencing capability to
Microsoft OCS (Office Communicator Server) endpoints at resolutions up to HD720p30.
(SIP only).
AVC Conferencing Parameters
Basic Conferencing Parameters
When defining a new video Profile, you select the parameters that determine the video
display on the participant’s endpoint and the quality of the video. When defining a new
conference Profile, the system uses default values for Continuous Presence (CP) standard
conferencing. Continuous Presence conferencing enables several participants to be viewed
simultaneously and each connected endpoint uses its highest video, audio and data
capabilities up to the maximum line rate set for the conference.
The main parameters that define the quality of a video conference are:
Polycom, Inc.
•
Line (Bit) Rate - The transfer rate of video and audio streams. The higher the line (bit)
rate, the better the video quality.
•
Audio Algorithm - The audio compression algorithm determines the quality of the
conference audio.
•
Video protocol, video format, frame rate, annexes, and interlaced video mode - These
parameters define the quality of the video images. The Collaboration Server will send
video at the best possible resolution supported by endpoints regardless of the
resolution received from the endpoints.
2-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
— When Sharpness is selected as the Video Quality setting in the Conference Profile, the
Collaboration Server will send 4CIF (H.263) at 15fps instead of CIF (H.264) at 30fps.
— H.264 High Profile protocol provides better compression of video images in line
rates lower than 384 Kbps and it will be automatically selected for the endpoint if it
supports H.264 High Profile. If the endpoint does not support H.264 High Profile,
the Collaboration Server will try H.264 Base Profile which provides good
compression of video images in line rates lower than 384 Kbps (better than H.263
and not as good as H.264 High Profile).
— When working with Collaboration Servers at low bit rates (128, 256, or 384Kbps),
HDX endpoints will transmit SD15 resolution instead of 2CIF resolution.
When using a full screen (1x1) conference layout, the Collaboration Server transmits the
same resolution it receives from the endpoint.
•
Lost Packet Recovery (LPR) - LPR creates additional packets that contain recovery
information used to reconstruct packets that are lost during transmission.
•
Supported resolutions:
— H.261 CIF/QCIF – Is supported in Continuous Presence (CP) conferences at
resolutions of 288 x 352 pixels (CIF) and 144 x 176 pixels (QCIF). Both resolutions
are supported at frame rates of up to 30 frames per second.
— H.263 4CIF - A high video resolution available to H.263 endpoints that do not
support H.264. It is only supported for conferences in which the video quality is set
to sharpness and for lines rates of 384kbps to 1920kbps.
— Standard Definition (SD) - A high quality video protocol which uses the H.264
and H.264 High Profile video algorithms. It enables compliant endpoints to
connect to Continuous Presence conferences at resolutions of 720X576 pixels for
PAL systems and 720X480 pixels for NTSC systems. For more information, see
"Video Resolutions in AVC-based CP Conferencing” on page 2-1.
— High Definition (HD) – HD is an ultra-high quality video resolution that uses he
H.264 and H.264 High Profile video algorithms. Depending on the Collaboration
Server’s Card Configuration mode compliant endpoints are able to connect to
conferences at the following resolutions:
• 720p (1280 x 720 pixels)
For more information, see "Video Resolutions in AVC-based CP Conferencing” on
page 2-1.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
Supplemental Conferencing Features
In addition to Standard Conferencing the following features can be enabled:
2-6
•
H.239 – Allows compliant endpoints to transmit and receive two simultaneous streams
of conference data to enable Content sharing. H.239 is also supported in cascading
conferences. Both H.263 and H.264 Content sharing protocols are supported. If all
endpoints connected to the conference have H.264 capability, Content is shared using
H.264, otherwise Content is shared using H.263.
For more information, see "H.239” on page 3-1.
•
Lecture Mode – The lecturer is seen by all participants in full screen while the lecturer
views all conference participants in the selected video layout.
For more information, see "Lecture Mode (AVC CP Only)” on page 3-40.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
•
•
•
Presentation Mode (CP Conferences only) – When the current speaker’s speech
exceeds a predefined time (30 seconds), the conference layout automatically changes to
full screen, displaying the current speaker as the conference lecturer on all the
participants’ endpoints. During this time the speaker’s endpoint displays the previous
conference layout. When another participant starts talking, the Presentation Mode is
cancelled and the conference returns to its predefined video layout. Presentation mode
is available with Auto Layout and Same Layout.
— If the speaker in a video conference is an Audio Only participant, the Presentation
Mode is disabled for that participant.
— Video forcing works in the same way as in Lecture Mode when Presentation Mode
is activated, that is, forcing is only enabled at the conference level, and it only
applies to the video layout viewed by the lecturer.
Encryption – Used to enhance media security at conference and participant levels. For
more information, see "Audio Algorithm Support” on page 3-25.
Conference Recording - The Collaboration Server enables audio and video recording of
conferences using Polycom RSS 2000 recording system.
Operator Conferences (CP only Conferences)
Offers additional conference management capabilities to the Collaboration Server users,
enabling them to attend to participants with special requirements and acquire participant
details for billing and statistics. This service is designed usually for large conferences that
require the personal touch. For more information, see Chapter 10, “Operator Assistance &
Participant Move” on page 10-1
Default Profile Settings in CP Conferencing Mode
The Collaboration Server is shipped with a default Conference Profile for CP conferences
which allows users to immediately start standard ongoing CP conferences. These are also
the default settings when creating a new Profile. The default settings are as follows:
Table 2-2
Polycom, Inc.
Default CP Only Conference Profile Settings
Setting
Value
Profile Name
Factory_Video_Profile
Line Rate
384Kbps
Operator Conference
Disabled
Encryption
Disabled
Packet Loss Compensation (LPR
and DBA)
Enabled
Auto Terminate
•
•
After last participant quits - Enabled
When last participant remains - Disabled
Auto Redialing
Disabled
Exclusive Content Mode
Disabled
Enable FECC
Enabled
2-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 2-2
2-8
Default CP Only Conference Profile Settings (Continued)
Setting
Value
Video Quality
Sharpness
Maximum Resolution
Auto
Content Settings
Graphics
Content Protocol
H.263 & H.264 Auto Selection
Presentation Mode
Disabled
Same Layout
Disabled
Lecturer View Switching
Disabled
Auto Scan Interval
Disabled (10)
Auto Layout
Enabled
Mute participants except the lecturer
Disabled
Skin
Polycom
IVR Name
Conference IVR Service
Recording
Disabled
Site Names display
Disabled
Network Services - SIP Registration
Disabled
Network Services - Accept Calls
Enabled
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
SVC-based Conferencing
The SVC-Based conferencing mode provides video without transcoding by the MCU, hence
requiring less video resources while providing better error resiliency and lower latency.
Using the SVC video protocol, SVC conferences provide video bit streams at different
resolutions, frame rates and line rates to SVC-enabled endpoints with various display
capabilities and layout configurations.
In the SVC-based conference, each SVC-enabled endpoint transmits multiple bit streams,
called simulcasting, to the Polycom® RealPresence® Collaboration Server. Simulcasting
enables each endpoint to transmit at different resolutions and frame rates such as 720p at
30fps, 15fps, and 7.5fps, 360p at 15fps and 7.5fps, and 180p at 7.5fps.
The Polycom SVC-enabled endpoints (such as Polycom® RealPresence® Desktop and
Polycom® RealPresence® Mobile) compose the layout according to their layout settings and
video capabilities. This enables the MCU to send or relay the selected video streams to each
endpoint without processing the video streams and sending the composite video layout to
the endpoints.
Figure 2-2 SVC video streams and Layouts
The video streams displayed in the conference layout on each endpoint is obtained from the
different streams received from each of the endpoints displayed in the layout. Depending on
the size of the video cell in the configured layout, the endpoint requests the video stream in
the required resolution from the RealPresence Collaboration Server. The higher the display
quality and size, the higher the requested resolution will be sent to the endpoint. The
endpoint creates the displayed layout from the different video streams it receives.
Polycom, Inc.
2-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
For instance, an SVC endpoint might want to receive three video streams at different frame
rates and resolutions, and create a conference layout with the received video streams. Each
SVC-enabled endpoint sends encoded SVC bit streams to the MCU to relay to the other
SVC-enabled endpoints in the conference.
The endpoints encode the video in multiple resolutions and decodes the multiple video
input streams.
For example:
RealPresence mobile client (2) will transmit two resolutions; one that is suited for
RealPresence Desktop client (3) and a second that is suited for two other endpoints:
RealPresence Desktop client (4) and (1).
RealPresence Desktop client (1) transmits two resolutions; one that is suited for
RealPresence Mobile client (2) and a second that is suited for RealPresence Desktop
client (4).
The MCU determines which of the incoming resolutions to send to each endpoint. It does
not perform any SVC encoding and decoding, or any transcoding of the video streams. The
RealPresence Collaboration Server functions as the multipoint media relay to the endpoints.
For voice activated selection of the video streams, the RealPresence Collaboration Server
determines which of the incoming bit streams to send to each endpoint.
Advantages of SVC Conferencing
SVC increases the scalability of video networks and enables mass desktop video
deployments. Some of the advantages of SVC conferencing are:
•
Offers high-resolution video conferencing with low end-to-end latency, improved error
resiliency and higher system capacities.
•
Allows the SVC-enabled video endpoints to manage display layouts, supporting
multiple line rates, resolutions and frame rates.
•
The RealPresence Collaboration Server functions as a media relay server providing low
cost production benefits. The RealPresence Collaboration Server reduces bandwidth
usage by only selecting the necessary video stream to be sent to the endpoints.
•
SVC conferences are supported only with the following:
Guidelines
SVC Licensing
SIP over UDP signaling
SIP over TLS Signaling
Polycom SVC-enabled endpoints (Polycom® RealPresence® Desktop, Polycom®
RealPresence® Mobile)
SVC Only conferences can run on the same MCU as AVC Only conferences.
—
—
—
—
•
•
End-to-end latency on a local network (same site), is around 200mSec to ensure AV
sync (also known as Lip-sync).
•
Dial-out is not available in SVC Only conference.
•
Dial-in is available as follows:
— AVC endpoints (participants) can only connect to an AVC conference or Mixed CO
and SVC conference. When dialing into SVC Only conferences they will be
disconnected and the calls fail.
2-10
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
•
— SVC endpoints support both AVC and SVC video protocols.
When dialing into SVC Only conferences, they connect as SVC endpoints.
When dialing into AVC Only conferences, they connect as AVC endpoints. They
cannot connect to an AVC conference using the SVC capabilities.
SVC endpoints cannot be moved between conferences.
•
Content is supported in H.264 (AVC).
•
— Only the H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized option is supported.
— LPR and DBA are not supported for SVC content sharing.
In SVC Only conferences and Mixed CP and SVC conferences, Auto Layout is the
default and the layout display for SVC endpoints is controlled from the endpoint
application.
•
Site names display on SVC endpoints is controlled from the SVC endpoints.
•
When DMA is part of the solution, the DMA is used as the SIP proxy and the SVC
endpoint subscribes to DMA for call control. If a DMA is not part of the solution, the
SVC endpoint dial directly to the Collaboration Server using IP addresses is the SIP
dialing strings.
•
When Hot backup is enabled, all the conferences are created on the Slave MCU.
•
When Hot Backup is activated and the Slave MCU becomes the Master MCU:
All AVC endpoints will be reconnected to the AVC conferences. SVC endpoints
connected to AVC conferences using their AVC capabilities will be reconnected to
their AVC conferences.
— SVC endpoints cannot be reconnected to their SVC Only conferences as dial-out is
not supported for SVC endpoints. These endpoints will have to manually
reconnect to their SVC conferences.
Cascading between SVC Only conferences or between AVC and SVC Only conferences
is not supported.
—
•
•
The following functionality and features are not supported during SVC Only
conferences:
FECC
Skins. The video cells are displayed on the endpoint’s default background.
Conference Gathering phase
Password protected conferences as DTMF input for passwords cannot be
processed
— Manual selection of video layout
— Recording of SVC Only conferences
— Text messaging using Message Overlay
—
—
—
—
Polycom, Inc.
2-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
MCU Supported Resolutions for SVC Conferencing
The MCU automatically selects the resolution and frame rate according to the conference
line rate. Table 2-3 details the maximum resolution and frame rates supported by the MCU
for each conference line rate. The actual video rate, resolution and frame rates displayed on
each endpoints is determined by the endpoint’s capabilities.:
Table 2-3
SVC Conferencing - Maximum Supported Resolutions per Simulcast Stream
Conference Line Rate
(kbps)
Profile
Maximum
Resolution
Max. Frame
Rate (fps)
Audio Rate
(kbps)
1472 - 2048
High Profile
720p
30fps
48
1024 - 1472
High Profile
720p
15fps
48
768 - 1024
High Profile
360p
30fps
48
512 - 768
High Profile
360p
15fps
48
256 - 512
Base Profile
180p
30fps
48
192 - 256
Base Profile
180p
15fps
48
128 - 192
Base Profile
180p
7.5fps
48
Default Profile Settings in SVC Only Conferencing Mode
The Collaboration Server is shipped with a default Conference Profile for SVC Only
conferences which allows users to immediately start standard ongoing SVC Only
conferences. These are also the default settings when creating a new Profile. The default
settings are as follows:
Table 2-4
2-12
Default SVC Only Conference Profile Settings
Setting
Value
Profile Name
Factory_SVC_Video_Profile
Line Rate
1920Kbps
Operator Conference
Not supported
Encryption
Disabled
Packet Loss Compensation (LPR and
DBA)
Not supported
Auto Terminate
•
•
After last participant quits - Enabled
When last participant remains - Disabled
Auto Redialing
Not supported
Exclusive Content Mode
Disabled
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
Table 2-4
Default SVC Only Conference Profile Settings (Continued)
Setting
Value
Enable FECC
Disabled
Video Quality
Sharpness
Maximum Resolution
Auto
Content Settings
Graphics
Content Protocol
H.264 Cascading and SVC Optimized
Presentation Mode
Not applicable
Same Layout
Not applicable
Lecturer View Switching
Not applicable
Auto Scan Interval
Not applicable
Auto Layout
Enabled (Only available option)
Mute participants except the lecturer
Not applicable
IVR Name
Conference IVR Service
Network Services - SIP Registration
Disabled
Network Services - Accept Calls
Enabled
Mixed CP and SVC Conferencing
In a Mixed CP and SVC conference, SVC endpoints transmit multiple resolutions and
temporal layers to the Collaboration Server like the SVC-based conferences, while AVC
endpoints send only one H.264 AVC video stream to the Collaboration Server. The
Collaboration Server relays SVC-decoded video bit streams to the SVC-enabled endpoints in
the conference according to their display capabilities. This enables the video conference
layouts to be automatically assembled by the endpoint. AVC endpoints connected to the
conference send a single H.264 AVC video bit stream to the Collaboration Server, which is
then transcoded to SVC video streams. SVC-enabled endpoints receive the AVC converted
video bit streams through the Collaboration Server from the AVC endpoints as a single SVC
video bit stream. Alternatively, AVC endpoints receive a single video bit stream with the
defined video conference layout from the Collaboration Server. In this mixed mode
conferencing, both SVC and AVC endpoints in the conference receive the same CP layout.
Polycom, Inc.
2-13
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The following diagram illustrates an example of a mixed AVC/SVC conferencing mode:
In this example, an SVC endpoint (1) receives three video streams at different frame rates
and resolutions, and creates the conference layout with the received video streams. The
video bit stream that the SVC endpoint receives from the AVC endpoint (3) is transcoded in
the Collaboration Server and then encoded into an SVC bit stream in the required
resolution.
Alternatively, an AVC endpoint (4) sends a single resolution video stream to the
Collaboration Server. The Collaboration Server first converts the SVC bit stream into AVC,
then transcodes the video received from the other endpoints to the required resolution. The
Collaboration Server composes the video layout for the AVC endpoint and sends a single
resolution video stream with the video layout to the participant. In the displayed example,
the Collaboration Server creates different video layouts for each AVC endpoint.
Default Profile Settings in Mixed CP and SVC Conferencing Mode
The Collaboration Server is shipped with a default Conference Profile for Mixed CP and SVC
conferences which allows users to immediately start a standard ongoing Mixed CP and SVC
conference. These are also the default settings when creating a new Profile. The default
settings are as follows:
Table 2-5
2-14
Default Mixed CP and SVC Conference Profile Settings
Setting
Value
Profile Name
Factory_Mix_SVC_CP_Video_Profile
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
Table 2-5
Polycom, Inc.
Default Mixed CP and SVC Conference Profile Settings (Continued)
Setting
Value
Line Rate
1920Kbps
Operator Conference
Not supported
Encryption
Disabled
Packet Loss Compensation (LPR
and DBA)
Enabled for AVC participants
Auto Terminate
•
•
After last participant quits - Enabled
When last participant remains - Disabled
Auto Redialing
Not supported
Exclusive Content Mode
Disabled
Enable FECC
Enabled
Video Quality
Sharpness
Maximum Resolution
Auto
Content Settings
Graphics
Content Protocol
H.263 & H.264 Auto Selection
Presentation Mode
Not supported
Same Layout
Disabled
Lecturer View Switching
Not supported
Auto Scan Interval
Not supported
Auto Layout
Enabled
Mute participants except the lecturer
Not supported
Skin
Classic (for AVC participants)
IVR Name
Conference IVR Service
Recording
Disabled
Site Names display
Disabled
Network Services - SIP Registration
Disabled
Network Services - Accept Calls
Enabled
2-15
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
This Profile is automatically assigned to the following conferencing entities:
Name
ID
Meeting Rooms
Maple_Room
1001
Oak_Room
1002
Juniper_Room
1003
Fig_Room
1004
Entry Queue
Default EQ
1000
Viewing Profiles
Conference Profiles are listed in the Conference Profiles list pane.
To list Conference Profiles:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list.
2
Click the Conference Profiles button.
The Conference Profiles are displayed in the List pane.
Profile Toolbar
Profile List
The number of the currently defined Conference Profiles appears in the title of the list
pane.
2-16
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
The following Conference Profile properties are displayed in the List pane:
Table 2-6
Conference Profiles Pane Columns
Field
Description
Name
The name of the Conference Profile.
Layout
Displays either “Auto Layout” or an icon of the layout selected for the
profile.
For information about video layouts, see Table 2-13 "Video Layout
Options” on page 2-28.
Line Rate
The maximum bit rate in kbps at which endpoints can connect to the
conference.
Routing Name
Displays the Routing Name defined by the user or automatically
generated by the system.
Encryption
Displays if media encryption is enabled for the Profile. For more
information see "Media Encryption” on page 3-29.
Profile Toolbar
The Profile toolbar provides quick access to the Profile functions:
Table 2-7
Button
Polycom, Inc.
Profile Tool bar buttons
Button Name
Description
New Profile
To create a new Profile.
Delete Profile
To delete a Profile, click the Profile name and then click this
button.
Import Profile
To import Conference Profiles from another MCU in your
environment.
Export Profile
To export Conference Profiles to a single XML file that can be
used to import the Conference Profiles on multiple MCUs.
2-17
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Modifying an Existing Profile
You can modify any of the Profile’s parameters but you cannot rename the Profile.
To modify the Profile Properties:
1 In the Conference Profiles list, double -click the Profile icon or right-click the Profile icon,
and then click Profile Properties.
The Profile Properties - General dialog box opens.
Deleting a Conference Profile
To delete a Conference Profile:
1 In the Conference Profiles list, select the Conference Profile you want to delete.
2
Click the Delete Profile ( ) button.
or
Right-click the Conference Profile to be deleted and select
Delete Profile from the drop-down menu.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
3
Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
4
The Conference Profile is deleted.
A Conference Profile cannot be deleted if it is being used by Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues, SIP
Factories and Reservations.
A Profile that is assigned to only one ongoing conference and no other conferencing entity can be
deleted.
Defining New Profiles
Conference Profile options differ according to the selected Conferencing Mode and Conference
Type. Profiles can be defined for CP, Mixed CP and SVC and SVC Only conferences and a
special functional conference - Operator Conferences in CP mode.
Profiles are the basis for the definition of all ongoing conferences, Reservations, Meeting
Rooms, Entry Queues, and Conference Templates and they contain only conference properties.
2-18
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
Defining CP Conferencing Profiles
To define a new Profile:
1 In the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Management pane, click Conference
Profiles.
2
In the Conference Profiles pane, click the New Profile button.
The New Profile – General dialog box opens.
3
Define the Profile name and, if required, the Profile - General parameters:
Table 2-8
New AVC CP Profile - General Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Display Name
Enter a unique Profile name, as follows:
• English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain the most
characters (length varies according to the field).
•
European and Latin text length is approximately half the length of
the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the length of the
maximum.
It is recommended to use a name that indicates the Profile type, such
as Operator conference or Video Switching conference.
Note: This is the only parameter that must be defined when creating
a new profile.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Polycom, Inc.
2-19
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 2-8
New AVC CP Profile - General Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Line Rate
Select the conference bit rate. The line rate represents the combined
video, audio and Content rate.
The default setting is 384 Kbps.
Notes:
• This field is displayed in all tabs.
Conferencing Mode
For CP conferencing, make sure that CP (Continuous Presence) is
selected to define a CP conference Profile.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Routing Name
Enter the Profile name using ASCII characters set.
The Routing Name can be defined by the user or automatically
generated by the system if no Routing Name is entered as follows:
• If an all ASCII text is entered in Display Name, it is used also as
the Routing Name.
•
Operator Conference
4
2-20
If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text (or full Unicode text)
is entered in Display Name, the ID (such as Conference ID) is
used as the Routing Name.
Select this option to define the profile of an Operator conference.
For more information, see Chapter 10, “Operator Assistance &
Participant Move” on page 10-1.
Click the Advanced tab.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
The New Profile – Advanced dialog box opens.
5
Define the following parameters:
Table 2-9
New AVC CP Profile - Advanced Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Encryption
Select the Encryption option for the conference:
• Encrypt All - Encryption is enabled for the conference and all
conference participants must be encrypted.
•
•
No Encryption - Encryption is disabled for the conference.
Encrypt when Possible - enables the negotiation between the
MCU and the endpoints and let the MCU connect the participants
according to their capabilities, where encryption is the preferred
setting. For connection guidelines see "Mixing Encrypted and
Non-encrypted Endpoints in one Conference” on page 3-30.
For more information, see "Media Encryption” on page 3-29.
LPR
Polycom, Inc.
When selected (default for CP conferences), Lost Packet Recovery
creates additional packets that contain recovery information used to
reconstruct packets that are lost during transmission.
For more information, see "Packet Loss Compensation (LPR and
DBA) AVC CP Conferences” on page 3-37.
2-21
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 2-9
2-22
New AVC CP Profile - Advanced Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Auto Terminate
When selected (default), the conference automatically ends when the
termination conditions are met:
Before First Joins — No participant has connected to a conference
during the n minutes after it started. Default idle time is 10 minutes.
At the End - After Last Quits — All the participants have
disconnected from the conference and the conference is idle (empty)
for the predefined time period. Default idle time is 1 minute.
At the End - When Last Participant Remains — Only one
participant is still connected to the conference for the predefined time
period (excluding the recording link which is not considered a
participant when this option is selected).
Note: The selection of this option is automatically cleared and
disabled when the Operator Conference option is selected. The
Operator conference cannot automatically end unless it is terminated
by the Collaboration Server User.
Auto Redialing
The Auto Redialing option instructs the Collaboration Server to
automatically redial H.323 and SIP participants that have been
abnormally disconnected from the conference.
• Auto Redialing is disabled by default.
•
Auto Redialing can be enabled or disabled during an ongoing
conference using the Conference Properties – Advanced dialog
box.
•
The Collaboration Server will not redial an endpoint that has been
disconnected from the conference by the participant.
•
The Collaboration Server will not redial an endpoint that has been
disconnected or deleted from the conference by an operator or
administrator.
Exclusive Content
Mode
Select the Exclusive Content Mode check box to limit the Content
broadcasting to one participant, preventing other participants from
interrupting the Content broadcasting while it is active. For more
details, see "Exclusive Content Mode” on page 3-15.
Enable FECC
This option is enabled by default, allowing participants in the
conference to control the zoom and PAN of other endpoints in the
conference via the FECC channel. Clear this check box to disable
this option for all conference participants.
FW NAT Keep Alive
The MCU can be configured to send a FW NAT Keep Alive message
at specific Intervals for the RTP, UDP and BFCP channels.
For more information see "FW (Firewall) NAT Keep Alive” on
page 16-74.
Interval
If needed modify the NAT Keep Alive Interval field within the range of
5 - 86400 seconds.For more information see "FW (Firewall) NAT
Keep Alive” on page 16-74.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
6
Click the Video Quality tab.
The New Profile – Video Quality dialog box opens.
7
Define the following parameters:
Table 2-10 New AVC Profile - Video Quality Parameters
Field/Option
Description
People Video Definition
Video Quality
Polycom, Inc.
Sharpness is the only supported content format that supports higher
video resolutions.
Note: When Sharpness is selected as the Video Quality setting in the
conference Profile, the Collaboration Server will send 4CIF (H.263) at
15fps instead of CIF (H.264) at 30fps. For more information, see
"Video Resolutions in AVC-based CP Conferencing” on page 2-1.
2-23
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 2-10 New AVC Profile - Video Quality Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Maximum Resolution
This setting overrides the Maximum Resolution setting of the
Resolution Configuration dialog box.
The administrator can select one of the following Maximum
Resolution options:
• Auto (default) - The Maximum Resolution remains as selected in
the Resolution Configuration dialog box.
•
•
•
CIF
•
The Maximum Resolution settings for conferences and
participants cannot be changed during an ongoing conference.
SD
HD720
Maximum Resolution settings can be monitored in the Profile
Properties - Video Quality and Participant Properties - Advanced
dialog boxes.
Notes:
• The Resolution field in the New Participant - Advanced dialog box
allows Maximum Resolution to be further limited per participant
endpoint.
Content Video Definition
Content Settings
Select the transmission mode for the Content channel:
Graphics — basic mode, intended for normal graphics
•
•
•
•
Hi-res Graphics — a higher bit rate intended for high resolution
graphic display
Live Video — Content channel displays live video
Customized Content Rate — manual definition of the
Conference Content Rate, mainly for cascading conferences.
Selection of a higher bit rate for the Content results in a lower bit rate
for the people channel.
For a detailed description of each of these options, see "Content
Settings” on page 3-6.
2-24
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
Table 2-10 New AVC Profile - Video Quality Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Content Protocol
•
H.263
•
•
•
•
Use this option when most of the endpoints support H.263 and
some endpoints support H.264.
H.263 & H.264 Auto Selection
•
Content is shared using H.263 if a mix of H.263-supporting
and H.264-supporting endpoints are connected.
•
Content is shared using H.264 if all connected endpoints have
H.264 capability.
H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized
•
•
Content is shared using the H.263 protocol.
All Content is shared using the H.264 content protocol and is
optimized for use in Cascaded Conferences.
H.264 HD
•
Ensures high quality Content when most endpoints support
H.264 and HD Resolutions.
For more information, see "Content Protocols” on page 3-7 and
"Defining Content Sharing Parameters for a Conference” on
page 4-13.
8
Polycom, Inc.
Click the Video Settings tab.
The New Profile - Video Settings dialog box opens.
2-25
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
9
Define the video display mode and layout using the following parameters:
Table 2-11 New AVC CP Profile - Video Settings Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Presentation Mode
Select this option to activate the Presentation Mode. In this mode,
when the current speaker speaks for a predefined time (30 seconds),
the conference changes to Lecture Mode. When another participant
starts talking, the Presentation Mode is cancelled and the conference
returns to the previous video layout.
(CP only)
Same Layout
(CP only)
Lecture View
Switching
Select this option to enable automatic switching of participants on the
Lecturer’s screen when Lecture Mode is enabled for the conference.
The automatic switching is enabled when the number of participants
exceeds the number of video windows displayed on the Lecturer’s
screen.
Note: Lecture Mode is enabled in the Conference Properties –
Participants tab. For more information, see "Lecture Mode (AVC CP
Only)” on page 3-40.
Auto Scan Interval(s)
Select the time interval, 10 - 300 seconds, that Auto Scan uses to
cycle the display of participants that are not in the conference layout in
the selected cell.
Auto Scan is often used in conjunction with Customized Polling which
allows the cyclic display to be set to a predefined order for a
predefined time period.
(CP only)
Auto Layout
(CP only)
2-26
Select this option to force the selected layout on all participants in a
conference. Displays the same video stream to all participants and
personal selection of the video layout is disabled. In addition, if
participants are forced to a video layout window, they can see
themselves.
When selected (default), the system automatically selects the
conference layout based on the number of participants currently
connected to the conference. When a new video participant connects
or disconnects, the conference layout automatically changes to reflect
the new number of video participants.
For more information, see Table 2-12 "Auto Layout – Default Layouts
in CP Conferences” on page 2-27.
Clear this selection to manually select a layout for the conference.
The default Auto Layout settings can be customized by modifying
default Auto Layout system flags in the System Configuration file. For
more information see, "Auto Layout Configuration” on page 21-32.
Note: In some cases, the default layout automatically selected for the
conference contains more cells than the number of connected
participants, resulting in an empty cell. For example, if the number of
connected participants is 4, the default layout is 2x2, but as only 3
participants are displayed in the layout (the participants do not see
themselves), one cell is empty.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
Table 2-12 Auto Layout – Default Layouts in CP Conferences
Number of Video Participants
Auto Layout Default Settings
0–2
3
4–5
6–7
8-10
11
12+
In layout 2+8, the two central windows display the last two speakers in the conference:
the current speaker and the “previous” speaker. To minimize the changes in the layout,
when a new speaker is identified the “previous” speaker is replaced by the new speaker
while the current speaker remains in his/her window.
The Collaboration Server supports the VUI addition to the H.264 protocol for endpoints that transmit
wide video (16:9) in standard 4SIF resolution.
Polycom, Inc.
2-27
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
10 To select the Video Layout for the conference, click the required number of windows
from the layouts bar and then select the windows array. The selected layout is
displayed in the Video Layout pane.
Table 2-13 Video Layout Options
Number of Video Windows
Available Video Layouts
1
2
3
4
5+
9
10+
When there is a change of speaker in a Continuous Presence conference, the transition is set by
default to fade in the current speaker while fading out the previous speaker.
To make this transition visually pleasant, fading in the current speaker while fading out the previous
speaker is done over a period of 500 milliseconds.
The Fade In / Fade Out feature can be disabled by adding a new flag to the System Configuration.
The Value of the new flag must be: FADE_IN_FADE_OUT=NO.
Fade In / Fade Out is not supported with MPMx cards.
For more information about System Flags, see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
2-28
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
11 Click the Audio Settings tab.
The New Profile - Audio Settings dialog box opens.
Polycom, Inc.
2-29
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
12 Define the following parameters:
Table 2-14 New AVC Profile - Audio Settings Parameters
2-30
Field/Option
Description
Mute participant
except lecturer
When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled, the
audio of all participants in the conference except for the lecturer can
be automatically muted upon connection to the conference. This
prevents other conference participants from accidentally interrupting
the lecture, or from a noisy participant affecting the audio quality of the
entire conference. Muted participants cannot unmute themselves
unless they are unmuted from the Collaboration Server Web Client/
RMX Manager.
You can enable or disable this option during the ongoing conference.
Notes:
• When enabled, the mute indicator on the participant endpoints are
not visible because the mute participants was initiated by the
MCU. Therefore, it is recommended to inform the participants that
their audio is muted by using the Closed Caption or Message
Overlay functions.
In the Collaboration Server Web Client/RMX Manager the mute by
MCU indicator is listed for each muted participant in the Audio
column in the Participants pane.
•
The Mute Participants Except Lecturer option can be disabled
during an ongoing conference, thereby unmuting all the
participants in the conference.
•
If the endpoint of the designated lecturer is muted when the
lecturer connects to the conference, the lecturer remains muted
until the endpoint has been unmuted.
•
When you replace a lecturer, the MCU automatically mutes the
previous lecturer and unmutes the new lecturer.
•
When you disconnect a lecturer from the conference or the
lecturer leaves the conference, all participants remain muted but
are able to view participants in regular video layout until the you
disable the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option.
•
A participant can override the Mute Participants Except Lecturer
option by activating the Mute All Except Me option using the
appropriate DTMF code, provided the participant has authorization
for this operation in the IVR Services. The lecturer audio is muted
and the participant audio is unmuted. You can reactivate the Mute
Participants Except Lecturer option after a participant has
previously activated the Mute All Except Me option. The
participant is muted and the lecturer, if designated, is unmuted.
•
In cascaded conferences, all participants (including the link
participants) are muted. Only the lecturer is not muted.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
Table 2-14 New AVC Profile - Audio Settings Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Speaker Change
Threshold
The Speaker Change Threshold is the amount of time a participant
must speak continuously before becoming the speaker. When
defining or editing a conference profile, you can define the Speaker
Change Threshold.
Select the desired threshold:
• Auto (Default, 3 seconds)
•
•
•
1.5 seconds
3 seconds
5 seconds
13 Click the Skins tab to modify the background and frames.
The New Profile - Skins dialog box opens.
14 Select one of the Skin options.
15 Click IVR tab.
Polycom, Inc.
2-31
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The New Profile - IVR dialog box opens.
16 If required, set the following parameters:
Table 2-15 New AVC CP Profile - IVR Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Conference IVR
Service
The default conference IVR Service is selected. You can select
another conference IVR Service if required.
Conference Requires
Chairperson
Select this option to allow the conference to start only when the
chairperson connects to the conference and to automatically
terminate the conference when the chairperson exits. Participants
who connect to the conference before the chairperson are placed on
Hold and hear background music (and see the Welcome video slide).
Once the conference is activated, the participants are automatically
connected to the conference.
When the check box is cleared, the conference starts when the first
participant connects to it and ends at the predefined time or according
to the Auto Terminate rules when enabled.
Note: This feature is implemented only if the System Flag
TERMINATE_CONF_AFTER_CHAIR_DROPPED is set to YES.
17 Optional. Click the Recording tab to enable conference recording with Polycom
RSS 2000/4000.
2-32
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
The New Profile - Recording tab opens.
18 Define the following parameters:
Table 2-16 New AVC Profile - Recording Parameters
Parameter
Description
Enable Recording
Select this check box to enable the Recording settings. If no
Recording Links are found an error message is displayed.
Recording Link
Select the Recording Link to be used for conference recording.
Recording Links defined on the Collaboration Server can be given a
descriptive name and can be associated with a Virtual Recording
Room (VRR) saved on the Polycom® RSS™ 4000 Version 6.0
Recording and Streaming Server (RSS). For more information see
"Recording Conferences” on page 14-1.
Start Recording
Select one of the following:
• Immediately – conference recording is automatically started upon
connection of the first participant.
•
Audio Only
Polycom, Inc.
Upon Request – the operator or chairperson must initiate the
recording (manual).
Select this option to record only the audio channel of the conference.
Note: This option can be used only if there are Voice ports configured
in the Video/Voice Port Configuration. For more information, see
"Forcing Video Resource Allocation to CIF Resolution” on page 20-8.
2-33
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 2-16 New AVC Profile - Recording Parameters (Continued)
Parameter
Description
Display Recording
Icon
This option is automatically selected to display a Recording Indication
to all conference participants informing them that the conference is
being recorded.
The Recording participant does not support H.264 High Profile. If recording a conference that is set
to H.264 High Profile, the Recording participant connects as Audio Only and records the conference
Audio.
19 Click the Site Names tab to display the Site Names dialog box.
Using the Site Name dialog box, you can control the display of the site names by
defining the font, size, color, background color and transparency and position within
the Video Window. For a detailed description of the site names options see "Site Names
Definition” on page 2-50.
2-34
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
20 Define the following parameters:
Table 2-17 New AVC CP Profile - Site Names Parameters
Field
Description
Display Mode
Select the display mode for the site names:
• Auto - Display the Site Names for 10 seconds whenever the Video
Layout changes.
•
•
On - Display the Site Names for the duration of the conference.
Off (default) - Do not display the Site Names.
Note:
The Display Mode field is grayed and disabled if Video Switching mode is
selected in the Profile - General tab.
If Display Mode is Off, all other fields in this tab are grayed and disabled.
Selecting Off enables Video Switching for selection in the Profile General tab (if the conference is not already ongoing).
Font Size
Click the arrows to adjust the font size (in points) for the Site Names
display.
Range: 9 - 32 points
Default: 12
Note: Choose a Font Size that is suitable for viewing at the conference’s
video resolution. For example, if the resolution is CIF, a larger Font Size
should be selected for easier viewing.
Background Color
Select the color of the Site Names display text.
The color and background for Site Names display text is dependent on
whether a Plain Skin or a Picture Skin was selected for the conference in
the Profile - Skins tab.
The choices are:
Plain Skin
Picture Skin
Default:
White Text
No Background
Default:
White Text
Red Background
(For contrast, no
background is shown as
black when the text is
white.)
Note: Choose a Background Color combination that is suitable for viewing
at the conference’s video resolution. At low resolutions, it is recommended
to select brighter colors as dark colors may not provide for optimal
viewing.
Polycom, Inc.
2-35
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 2-17 New AVC CP Profile - Site Names Parameters (Continued)
Field
Description
Display Position
Select the pre-set position for the display of the Site Names.
Selection
Site Names Position
LeftTop (Default)
Top
RightTop
LeftMiddle
RightMiddle
2-36
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
Table 2-17 New AVC CP Profile - Site Names Parameters (Continued)
Field
Description
Display Position
(cont.)
LeftBottom
Bottom
RightBottom
Polycom, Inc.
Custom
The current Site Names
display position becomes the
initial position for Site Names
position adjustments using
the Horizontal and Vertical
Position sliders.
Horizontal Position
Move the slider to the left to move the
horizontal position of the Site Names to
the left within the Video Windows.
Move the slider to the right to adjust the
horizontal position of the Site Names to
the right within the Video Windows.
Note: Use of these sliders
will set the Display Position
selection to Custom.
Vertical Position
Move the slider to the left to move the
vertical position of the Site Names
upward within the Video Windows.
Move the slider to the right to move the
vertical position of the Site Names
downward within the Video Windows.
2-37
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 2-17 New AVC CP Profile - Site Names Parameters (Continued)
Field
Description
Background
Transparency
Move the slider to the left to decrease the transparency of the background
of the Site Names text. 0 = No transparency (solid background color).
Move the slider to the right to increase the transparency of the
background of the Site Names text. 100 = Full transparency (no
background color)
Default: 50
Note: This slider is only displayed if a Picture Skin is selected.
21 Click the Network Services tab.
The New Profile - Network Services tab opens.
Registration of conferencing entities such as ongoing conferences, Meeting Rooms,
Entry Queues and SIP Factories with SIP servers is done per conferencing entity. This
allows better control on the number of entities that register with each SIP server.
Selective registration is enabled by assigning a conference Profile in which registration
is configured to the required conferencing entities. Assigning a conference Profile in
which registration is not configure to conferencing entities will prevent them from
registering. By default, Registration is disabled in the Conference Profile, and must be
enabled in Profiles assigned to conferencing entities that require registration.
2-38
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
22 Define the following parameters:
Table 2-18 New AVC Profile - Network Services Parameters
Parameter
Description
IP Network Services:
Service Name
This column lists all the defined Network Services, one or several
depending on the system configuration.
SIP Registration
To register the conferencing entity to which this profile is assigned
with the SIP Server of the selected Network Service, click the check
box of that Network Service in this column.
When SIP registration is not enabled in the conference profile, the
Collaboration Server's registering to SIP Servers will each register
with an URL derived from its own signaling address. This unique URL
replaces the non-unique URL, dummy_tester, used in previous
versions.
Accept Calls
To prevent dial in participants from connecting to a conferencing
entity when connecting via a Network Service, clear the check box of
the Network Service from which calls cannot connect to the
conference.
23 Click OK to complete the Profile definition.
A new Profile is created and added to the Conference Profiles list.
Polycom, Inc.
2-39
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Defining SVC Conferencing Profiles
To define SVC Only Profile:
1 In the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Management pane, click Conference
Profiles.
2
In the Conference Profiles pane, click the New Profile button.
The New Profile – General dialog box opens.
By default, the Profile is set to CP and SVC Conferencing Mode.
3
2-40
In the Conferencing Mode list, select SVC Only to define an SVC Profile.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
The profile tabs and options change accordingly and only supported options are
available for selection. Unsupported options are disabled (grayed out).
4
Define the Profile name and, if required, the Profile - General parameters:
Table 2-19 New SVC Profile - General Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Display Name
Enter a unique Profile name, as follows:
• English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain the most
characters (length varies according to the field).
•
European and Latin text length is approximately half the length of
the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the length of the
maximum.
It is recommended to use a name that indicates the Profile type, such
as Operator conference or Video Switching conference.
Note: This is the only parameter that must be defined when creating
a new profile.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Line Rate
Polycom, Inc.
Select the conference bit rate. The line rate represents the combined
video, audio and Content rate.
The default setting for SVC Only conference is 1920kbps.
Notes:
• This field is displayed in all tabs.
2-41
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 2-19 New SVC Profile - General Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Routing Name
Enter the Profile name using ASCII characters set.
The Routing Name can be defined by the user or automatically
generated by the system if no Routing Name is entered as follows:
• If an all ASCII text is entered in Display Name, it is used also as
the Routing Name.
•
5
If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text (or full Unicode text)
is entered in Display Name, the ID (such as Conference ID) is
used as the Routing Name.
Click the Advanced tab.
The New Profile – Advanced dialog box opens.
2-42
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
6
Define the following supported parameters:
Table 2-20 New SVC Profile - Advanced Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Encryption
Select the Encryption option for the conference:
• Encrypt All - Encryption is enabled for the conference and all
conference participants must be encrypted.
•
•
No Encryption - Encryption is disabled for the conference.
Encrypt when Possible - enables the negotiation between the
MCU and the endpoints and let the MCU connect the participants
according to their capabilities, where encryption is the preferred
setting. For connection guidelines see "Mixing Encrypted and
Non-encrypted Endpoints in one Conference” on page 3-30.
For more information, see "Media Encryption” on page 3-29.
Polycom, Inc.
Auto Terminate
When selected (default), the conference automatically ends when the
termination conditions are met:
Before First Joins — No participant has connected to a conference
during the n minutes after it started. Default idle time is 10 minutes.
At the End - After Last participant Quits — All the participants
have disconnected from the conference and the conference is idle
(empty) for the predefined time period. Default idle time is 1 minute.
At the End - When Last Participant Remains — Only one
participant is still connected to the conference for the predefined time
period (excluding the recording link which is not considered a
participant when this option is selected).
It is not recommended to select this option for SVC Conferences.
Default idle time is 1 minute.
Exclusive Content
Mode
When selected, Content broadcasting is limited to one participant
preventing other participants from interrupting the Content
broadcasting while it is active. For more details, see
Enable FECC
This option is enabled by default, allowing participants in the
conference to control the zoom and PAN of other endpoints in the
conference via the FECC channel. Clear this check box to disable
this option for all conference participants.
FW NAT Keep Alive
When selected, an FW NAT Keep Alive message is sent at an interval
defined in the field below the check box.
Interval
The time in seconds between FW NAT Keep Alive messages.
2-43
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
7
Click the Video Quality tab.
The New Profile – Video Quality dialog box opens.
8
Define the following parameters:
Table 2-21 New SVC Profile - Video Quality Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Content Video Definition
2-44
Content Settings
Only Graphics is available in SVC Conferencing Mode for
transmission of Content. It offers the
basic mode, intended for normal graphics
For more information, see "H.239” on page 3-1.
Content Protocol
H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized is the only available Content
Protocol for content sharing during SVC-based conferences.
In this mode, all Content is shared using the H.264 content protocol
and all endpoints must use the set video resolution and frame rate
(720p 5fps). Endpoints that do not support these settings cannot
share content.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
9
Click the Video Settings tab.
The New Profile - Video Settings dialog box opens.
All the options are disabled as the SVC endpoint controls the video layout and Lecture
Mode is not supported in SVC conferences.
Polycom, Inc.
2-45
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
10 Click the Audio Settings tab.
The New Profile - Audio Settings dialog box opens.
11 Define the following parameters:
Table 2-22 New SVC Profile - Audio Settings Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Mute participant
except lecturer
This option is not supported in SVC conferences.
Speaker Change
Threshold
The Speaker Change Threshold is the amount of time a participant
must speak continuously before becoming the speaker. When
defining or editing a conference profile, you can define the Speaker
Change Threshold.
Select the desired threshold:
• Auto (Default, 3 seconds)
•
•
•
1.5 seconds
3 seconds
5 seconds
12 Click IVR tab.
2-46
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
The New Profile - IVR dialog box opens.
13 If required, set the following parameters:
Table 2-23 New SVC Profile - IVR Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Conference IVR
Service
The default Conference IVR Service is selected. You can select
another conference IVR Service if required.
Conference Requires
Chairperson
Select this option to allow the conference to start only when the
chairperson connects to the conference and to automatically
terminate the conference when the chairperson exits. Participants
who connect to the conference before the chairperson are placed on
Hold and hear background music (and see the Welcome video slide).
Once the conference is activated, the participants are automatically
connected to the conference.
When the check box is cleared, the conference starts when the first
participant connects to it and ends at the predefined time or according
to the Auto Terminate rules when enabled.
Note: This feature is implemented only if the System Flag
TERMINATE_CONF_AFTER_CHAIR_DROPPED is set to YES.
14 Click the Network Services tab.
Polycom, Inc.
2-47
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The New Profile - Network Services tab opens.
Registration of conferencing entities such as ongoing conferences, Meeting Rooms, and
SIP Factories with SIP servers is done per conferencing entity. This allows better control
of the number of entities that register with each SIP server. Selective registration is
enabled by assigning a conference Profile in which registration is configured for the
required conferencing entities. Assigning a conference Profile in which registration is
not configure for conferencing entities will prevent them from registering. By default,
Registration is disabled in the Conference Profile, and must be enabled in Profiles
assigned to conferencing entities that require registration.
15 Define the following parameters:
Table 2-24 New SVC Profile - Network Services Parameters
Parameter
Description
IP Network Services:
2-48
Service Name
This column lists all the defined Network Services, one or several
depending on the system configuration.
SIP Registration
To register the conferencing entity to which this profile is assigned
with the SIP Server of the selected Network Service, click the check
box of that Network Service in this column.
When SIP registration is not enabled in the conference profile, the
Collaboration Server's registering to SIP Servers will each register
with an URL derived from its own signaling address. This unique URL
replaces the non-unique URL, dummy_tester, used in previous
versions.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
Table 2-24 New SVC Profile - Network Services Parameters (Continued)
Parameter
Description
Accept Calls
To prevent dial in participants from connecting to a conferencing
entity when connecting via a Network Service, clear the check box of
the Network Service from which calls cannot connect to the
conference.
16 Click OK to complete the Profile definition.
A new Profile is created and added to the Conference Profiles list.
Defining Mixed CP and SVC Conferencing Profiles
The CP and SVC Profile is based on the CP Profile with a few of the CP options disabled for
compatibility between AVC and SVC and to enable the media conversion between these
two modes.
To configure a mixed AVC and SVC conference:
1 In the RealPresence Collaboration Server Management pane, click Conference Profiles.
2
In the Conference Profiles pane, click the New Profile button.
The New Profile - General dialog box is displayed.
3
In the Conferencing Mode list, select CP and SVC to define a mixed AVC and SVC
conference.
For a detailed description of the CP and SVC Profile options refer to "Defining CP
Conferencing Profiles” on page 2-19.
Polycom, Inc.
2-49
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
CP Conferencing Additional Information
Site Names Definition
Using the Site Name dialog box, you can control the display of the site names by defining the
font, size, color, background color and transparency and position within the Video Window.
Site Names without Background
(Plain Skin)
Site Names with Background
(Picture Skin)
Guidelines
•
Site Names display is Off by default in a new profile.
•
Site Names can be enabled to function in one of two modes:
•
— Auto – Site names are displayed for 10 seconds whenever the conference layout
changes.
— On – Site names are displayed for the duration of the conference.
During the display of the site names, the video frame rate is slightly reduced
•
Site Names display characteristics (position, size, color) can by modified during an
ongoing conference using the Conference Properties - Site Names dialog box. Changes are
immediately visible to all participants.
•
Site Names display text and background color is dependent on the Skin selected for the
conference:
— Plain Skins - Site Names text is displayed without a background.
2-50
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
— Picture Skins - Site Names text is displayed with a background.
Plain Skins
Picture Skins
Site Names Display Position
The Site Names display position is controlled using three fields in the Site Names tab:
•
Display Position drop-down menu
•
Horizontal Position slider
•
Vertical Position slider
Using these three fields, the position at which the Site Names are displayed in the Video
Windows can be set by:
Polycom, Inc.
•
Selecting a preset position from the drop-down menu in the Display Position field.
•
Moving the Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders.
•
Selecting Custom and moving the Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders.
2-51
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Selecting a preset position from the drop-down menu in the Display Position field
>> In the Display Position drop-down menu select a preset position for Site Names display.
Preset positions include:
LeftTop
Top
LeftMiddle
LeftBottom
RightTop
RightMiddle
Bottom
RightBottom
Custom
When Custom is selected, the current position becomes the initial position for Site Names
position adjustments using the Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders.
Preset
Position
LeftTop
The Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders are automatically adjusted to match the
Display Position drop-down menu preset selection.
Moving the Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders
>> Drag the Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders to adjust the position of the Site Names
display.
The Site Names display moves from its current position according to the slider
movement.
Dragging the sliders causes the Display Position drop-down menu field to be set
Custom.
Selecting Custom and moving the Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders
1
In the Display Position drop-down menu select Custom.
The current Site Names position becomes the initial position for Site Names position.
Dragging the Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders moves the Site Names from this
position.
2
Drag the Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders to adjust the position of the Site Names
display.
For a detailed description of the Site Names dialog box options, see Table 2-17 on page 2-35.
2-52
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
Exporting and Importing Conference Profiles
Conference Profiles can be exported from one MCU and imported to multiple MCUs in your
environment, enabling you to copy the Conference Profiles definitions to other systems. This
can save configuration time and ensures that identical settings are used for conferences
running on different MCUs. This is especially important in environments using cascading
conferences that are running on different MCUs.
Guidelines
•
Administrators can export and import Conference Profiles. Operators are only allowed to
export Conference Profiles.
•
You can select a single, multiple, or all Conference Profiles to be exported.
•
Conference Templates and their related Conference Profiles can be exported and imported
simultaneously using the Conference Templates export and import function. For more
information, see the Exporting and Importing Conference Templates section.
Exporting Conference Profiles
Conference Profiles are exported to a single XML file that can be used to import the Conference
Profiles on multiple MCUs.
Using the Export Conference Profile feature, you can:
•
Export all Conference Profiles from an MCU
•
Export selected Conference Profiles
Exporting All Conference Profiles from an MCU
To export all Conference Profiles from an MCU:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list.
2
Click the Conference Profiles button.
The Conference Profiles are displayed in the List pane.
3
Polycom, Inc.
Click the Export Conference Profiles
button or right-click the Conference Profiles
pane, and then click Export Conference Profiles.
2-53
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Conference Profile - Export dialog box is displayed.
4
In the Export Path field, click Browse to navigate to the location of the desired path
where you want to save the exported file.
5
In the Profiles file name field, type the file name prefix. The file name suffix
(_confProfiles.xml) is predefined by the system. For example, if you type Profiles01, the
exported file name is defined as Profiles01_confProfiles.xml.
6
Click OK to export the Conference Profiles to a file.
If the export file with the same file name already exists, a prompt is displayed.
7
Click Yes to replace the exported file or click No to cancel the export operation and
return to the Conference Profiles list. You can modify the export file name and restart the
export operation.
Exporting Selected Conference Profiles
You can select a single Conference Profile or multiple Conference Profiles and export them
to a file to be imported to other MCUs in your environment.
To export selected Conference Profiles:
1 In the Conference Profiles pane, select the profiles you want to export.
2
Right-click the selected Conference Profiles, and then click Export Selected Conference
Profiles.
The Conference Profile - Export dialog box is displayed.
2-54
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 2-Conference Profiles
3
In the Export Path field, click Browse to navigate to the location of the desired path
where you want to save the exported file.
4
In the Profiles file name field, type the file name prefix. The file name suffix
(_confProfiles.xml) is predefined by the system. For example, if you type Profiles01, the
exported file name is defined as Profiles01_confProfiles.xml.
5
Click OK to export the Conference Profiles to a file.
If the export file with the same file name already exists, a prompt is displayed.
6
Click Yes to replace the exported file or click No to cancel the export operation and
return to the Conference Profiles list. You can modify the export file name and restart the
export operation.
Importing Conference Profiles
You can import Conference Profiles from another MCU in your environment.
To import Conference Profiles:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list.
2
Click the Conference Profiles button.
The Conference Profiles are displayed in the List pane.
3
Polycom, Inc.
Click the Import Conference Profiles
button or right-click the Conference Profiles
pane, and then click Import Conference Profiles.
2-55
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Conference Profile - Import dialog box is displayed.
4
In the Import Path field, click Browse to navigate to the path and file name of the
exported Conference Profiles you want to import.
5
Click OK to import the Conference Profiles.
Conference Profiles are not imported when:
— A Conference Profile already exists
— An IVR Service does not exist for the related Conference Profile
When Conference Profiles are not imported into the Conference Profiles list, a Message
Alert window is displayed with the profiles that were not imported.
Conference Profiles that are not problematic are imported.
6
Click Cancel to exit the Message Alerts window.
The imported Conference Profiles appear in the Conference Profiles list.
2-56
Polycom, Inc.
3
Additional Conferencing Information
Various conferencing modes and video features require additional settings, such as system
flag settings, conference parameters and other settings. In depth explanations of these
additional settings are described in the following sections:
•
"H.239” on page 3-1
•
"Video Preview (AVC Only Participants)” on page 3-20
•
"Auto Scan and Customized Polling in Video Layout (CP Only)” on page 3-23
•
"Audio Algorithm Support” on page 3-25
•
"Media Encryption” on page 3-29
•
"Packet Loss Compensation (LPR and DBA) AVC CP Conferences” on page 3-37
•
"Lecture Mode (AVC CP Only)” on page 3-40
•
"Permanent Conference” on page 3-48
•
"Audio Algorithm Support” on page 3-25
H.239
The H.239 protocol allows compliant endpoints to transmit and receive two simultaneous
video streams:
•
People video stream – video is displayed in Continuous Presence or Video Switching
conferencing mode or in Media Relay (SVC) conferencing Mode
•
Content video stream – Video Switching mode for content sharing
By default, all conferences, Entry Queues, and Meeting Rooms launched on the Collaboration
Server have H.239 capabilities.
To view Content, endpoints must use the same Bit Rate, Protocol, and Resolution. Endpoints
may not send Content while connecting to an Entry Queue.
Endpoints without H.239 capability can connect to the video conference without Content.
SIP BFCP Content Capabilities
SIP Clients supporting BFCP over UDP, when connected to conferences on the
Collaboration Server, can share Content with endpoints supporting the following Content
sharing protocols:
Polycom, Inc.
•
BFCP/TCP
•
BFCP/UDP
3-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
H.323/ H.239
•
H.323 /Polycom People+Content
For SIP Clients that support both BFCP/TCP and BFCP/UDP:
•
The preferred protocol is BFCP/UDP.
•
When used in Cascading conferences, the Cascade Link must be H.323.
•
BFCP/UDP is supported in both IPv4 and IPv6 addressing modes.
•
BFCP utilizes an unsecured channel (port 60002/TCP) even when SIP TLS is enabled. If
security is of higher priority than SIP content sharing, SIP People+Content can be
disabled. To do this manually add the ENABLE_SIP_PEOPLE_ PLUS_CONTENT
System Flag to the System Configuration and set its value to NO.
•
SIP People+Content and BFCP capabilities are by default declared to all endpoints. If,
however, the endpoint identity is hidden by a proxy server, these capabilities will not
be declared by the Collaboration Server. Capabilities declaration is controlled by the
ENABLE_SIP_PPC_FOR_ALL_USER_AGENT System Flag.
The default value of the ENABLE_SIP_PPC_FOR_ALL_USER_AGENT System Flag is
YES resulting in BFCP capability being declared with all vendors’ endpoints unless it is
set to NO. When set to NO, the Collaboration Server will declare SIP People+Content
and BFCP capabilities to Polycom and Avaya endpoints.
•
The CFG_KEY_ENABLE_FLOW_CONTROL_REINVITE System Flag should be set to
NO when SIP BFCP is enabled.
•
If these System Flags don’t exist in the system, they must be manually added. For more
information see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
•
BFCP capabilities are not supported in Microsoft ICE environment.
•
For dial-out connections to SIP Clients, BFCP/UDP protocol can be given priority by
adding the adding the SIP_BFCP_DIAL_OUT_MODE System Flag to system.cfg and
setting its value to UDP.
The Collaboration Server’ s Content sharing determined by the System Flag’s settings and
SIP Client capabilities are summarized in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1
System Flag - SIP_BFCP_DIAL_OUT_MODE
SIP Client: BFCP Support
Flag Value
UDP
AUTO
(Default)
UDP
TCP
BFCP/UDP selected as
Content sharing
protocol.
Cannot share Content.
TCP
BFCP/TCP selected as
Content sharing
protocol.
Cannot share Content.
UDP and TCP
BFCP/UDP selected as
Content sharing
protocol.
BFCP/TCP selected as
Content sharing protocol.
For more information see "Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags” on page 21-13.
•
3-2
The Collaboration Server will share content with Dial-in SIP Clients according to their
preferred BFCP protocol.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
•
SIP Clients connected as Audio Only cannot share Content.
Defining Content Sharing Parameters for a Conference
Content parameters are defined in the Conference Profiles - Video Quality dialog box.
The parameters change according to the Conferencing Mode.
CP
Conferencing
Mode
Polycom, Inc.
3-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
SVC
Conferencing
Mode
CP and SVC
Conferencing
Mode
3-4
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
1
In the Content Video Definition section, select the Content Settings and Protocol as follows:
Table 3-2
H.239 Content Options
Field
Description
Content Settings
Select the transmission mode for the Content channel:
• Graphics — basic mode, intended for normal graphics
•
Hi-res Graphics (CP Only) — a higher bit rate intended for high
resolution graphic display
•
•
Live Video (CP Only) — Content channel displays live video
•
H.263 (CP Only)
Customized Content Rate (CP Only) - manual definition of the
Conference Content Rate, mainly for cascading conferences.
Selection of a higher bit rate for the Content results in a lower bit rate
for the people channel.
For a detailed description of each of these options, see "Content
Settings” on page 3-6.
Content Protocol
•
•
•
•
Use this option when most of the endpoints support H.263 and
some endpoints support H.264.
H.263 & H.264 Auto Selection (CP Only)
•
Content is shared using H.263 if a mix of H.263-supporting
and H.264-supporting endpoints are connected.
•
Content is shared using H.264 if all connected endpoints have
H.264 capability.
H.264 HD (CP Only)
•
•
Content is shared using the H.263 protocol.
Ensures high quality Content when most endpoints support
H.264 and HD Resolutions.
H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized
•
All Content is shared using the H.264 content protocol and is
optimized for use in SVC only and Cascaded Conferences.
For a detailed description of each of these settings, see "Content
Protocols” on page 3-7..
Cascade Resolution
2
Polycom, Inc.
Select a Cascade Resolution from the drop-down menu.
The Cascade Resolutions that are available for selection are
dependent on the Line Rate and Content Settings that have been
selected for the conference.
For a full list of Cascade Resolutions see "Bit Rate Allocation to
Content Channel by Line Rate, Content Settings & Cascade
Resolution in AVC Conferencing” on page 3-11.
Note: This field is only displayed when H.264 Cascade and SVC
Optimized is selected as the Content Protocol and is enabled for
selection in CP conferences. This option is disabled in SVC
conferences.
Click OK.
3-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Content Settings
The Content channel can transmit one of the following modes:
•
Graphics – for standard graphics. This is the default mode in AVC conferences and the
only supported mode for SVC conferences.
•
Hi-res Graphics (CP Only) – requiring a higher bit rate, for high quality display or
highly detailed graphics.
•
Live Video (CP Only) – highest bit rate, for video clips or live video display.
•
Customized Content Rate (CP Only) - that allows manual definition of the Conference
Content Rate.
CP Content Setting
For Graphics, Hi-res Graphics and Live Video, the highest common Content bit rate is
calculated for the conference each time an endpoint connects. Therefore, if an endpoint
connects to an ongoing conference at a lower bit rate than the current bit rate, the Content
bit rate for the current conference is re-calculated and decreased.
Bit rate allocation by the MCU is dynamic during the conference and when the Content
channel closes, the video bit rate of the People conference is restored to its maximum.
During a conference the MCU will not permit an endpoint to increase its bit rate, it can
however change its Content resolution. The Collaboration Server can decrease the allocated
Content bit rate during a conference.
Table 3-3 summarizes the bit rate allocated to the Content channel from the video channel in
each of the Content Settings according to the conference line rate:
:
Table 3-3
Decision Matrix - Bit Rate Allocation to Content Channel per Conference Line Rate
Content Bit Rate Allocation per Conference Line Rate (kbps)
Content
Settings
384
1024
1152
1472
1728
1920
256
256
256
256
256
384
384
512
768
384
512
768
768
1152
128
256
Graphics
64
64
128
128
Hi Resolution
Graphics
64
128
192
Live Video
64
128
256
Customized
Content Rate
3-6
64
96
512
768
832
The Content Bit Rate is selected from a menu in the Content Video
Definition pane. See "Selecting a Customized Content Rate in AVC CP
Conferences” on page 3-12.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Table 3-4 summarizes the Maximum Resolution of Content and Frames per Second (fps) for Bit
Rate Allocations to the Content Channel as set out in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4
Content - Maximum Resolution, Frames/Second per Bit Rate Allocation
Bit Rate Allocated to Content
Channel (Kbps)
Content
Maximum Resolution
Frames/Second
From 64 and less than 512
H.264 HD720p
5
From 512 and up to 1536
H.264 HD720p
30
SVC Only and Mixed CP and SVC Content Setting
The Content channel is transmitted in Graphics mode only.
Content Protocols
Two Content Protocols can be used for sharing content:
•
H.263 (CP and mixed CP and SVC)
•
H.264 (all conferencing modes)
H.264 offers higher quality content, but is not supported by legacy endpoints. Depending on
the endpoints capabilities, you can determine the content sharing experience by selecting
the appropriate protocol and system behavior from the Content Protocol list:
•
H.263 & H.264 Auto Selection (CP Only)
•
H.263 (CP Only)
•
H.264 HD (CP Only)
•
H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized (all conferences)
H.263 & H.264 Auto Selection (CP Only)
The H.263 & H.264 Auto Selection option should be selected when Content is to be shared
using a mix of H.263-supporting and H.264-supporting endpoints.
Bit rate allocation to the Content channel by the Collaboration Server is dynamic according
to the conference line rate and Content Setting selected for the conference.
If an endpoint that supports only H.263 for Content Sharing connects to a conference with
Content Protocol set to H.263 & H.264 Auto Selection:
Polycom, Inc.
•
Content is shared using H.263 even if H.264-supporting endpoints are connected.
•
Content is shared using H.264 if all connected endpoints have H.264 capability.
•
If the first endpoint to connect to the conference only supports H.263, the H.263 protocol
is used for Content for all conference participants.
•
If Content is already being shared using the H.264 protocol when a H.263 endpoint
connects, Content sharing is stopped and must be manually restarted using H.263 (i.e.
the endpoint using H.263 Content Protocol must connect first), for all participants to
receive content. If the H.263 endpoint disconnects, Content sharing must be manually
stopped and restarted and will automatically upgrade to the H.264 protocol.
•
Endpoints that do not have at least H.263 capability can connect to the conference but
cannot share Content.
3-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
This option is not available in SVC Conferencing Mode and CP and SVC Conferencing
Mode.
H.263 (CP Only)
Select this option when most of the endpoints support H.263 and some endpoints support
H.264. In such a case, all endpoints will share content using the H.263 protocol, and this
protocol will not change throughout the conference (fixed mode).
Bit rate allocation to the Content channel by the Collaboration Server is dynamic according
to the conference line rate and Content Settings selected for the conference. For more
information see "Content Settings” on page 3-6.
This option is not available in SVC Conferencing Mode and CP and SVC Conferencing Mode.
H.264 HD (CP Only)
The H.264 HD option should be selected only if most endpoints in the conference support
H.264 to ensure high quality Content.
When this protocol option is selected, endpoints must connect at Content bit rates above a
minimum as specified by specific System Flags to ensure high quality Content for all
participants. For more information about System Flags see "Setting the Minimum Content Rate
for Each Content Quality Setting for H.264 HD” on page 3-8.
Bit rate allocation to the Content channel by the Collaboration Server is dynamic according
to the conference line rate and Content Setting selected for the conference. For more
information see "Content Settings” on page 3-6.
Endpoints that do not support H.264, or these that do not meet the minimum line rate
threshold for the Content Setting, are connected as Legacy Endpoints and receive content
through their video channel.
Guidelines
•
Only endpoints that support H.264 capability at a resolutions of HD720p5 or higher will
be able to receive and send Content.
•
This option is not available in SVC Conferencing Mode and CP and SVC Conferencing
Mode.
•
Maximum supported content resolution is HD 720p.
•
Once an endpoint is categorized as a Legacy Endpoint and receives the content over the
video channel, it remains in this mode without the ability to upgrade to H.264 HD
content and receive content over the Content channel.
•
The minimum Content Rate required for allowing a participant to share Content is the
lower valued parameter when comparing the System Flag setting (Table 3-5) and the
content bit rate allocation derived from the conference line rate (Table 3-3).
When the flag settings enable an endpoint to share Content at a content rate that is
lower than the conference content rate (Table 3-3), the content rate of the entire
conference is reduced to the content rate supported by that endpoint.
Setting the Minimum Content Rate for Each Content Quality Setting for H.264 HD
The following System Flags determine the minimum content rate required for endpoints to
share H.264 high quality content via the Content channel.
A System Flag determines the minimum line rate for each Content Setting:
3-8
•
Graphics
•
Hi Resolution Graphics
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
•
Live Video
In order to change the System Flag values, the flags must be manually added to the System
Configuration. For more information see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
Table 3-5
H.264 HD System Flags
Content Settings
Flag Name
Range
Graphics
H264_HD_GRAPHICS_MIN_CONTENT_RATE
Hi Resolution
Graphics
H264_HD_HIGHRES_MIN_CONTENT_RATE
Live Video
H264_HD_LIVEVIDEO_MIN_CONTENT_RATE
Default
0-1536
128
0-1536
256
0-1536
384
Example
Table 3-6 summarizes an example of two participants trying to connect to a conference
running at a Line Rate of 1024Kbps. The Content Setting for the conference is Hi Resolution
Graphics and the H264_HD_HIGHRES_MIN_CONTENT_RATE System Flag setting are
used to determine if Content will be shared with the participant.
Table 3-6
Participant Content Sharing Based on cOnnection Line Rate and System Flag Setting
Participant
Line Rate
Bit Rate
Allocation
to
Content
Channel
(Table 3-3)
Conference
Line Rate
Bit Rate
Allocation
to
Content
Channel
(Table 3-3)
Flag
Value
Result
128
Participant and
entire conference
share content at
192Kbps
512
Participant
receives content
in the video
channel (Legacy)
128
Participant and
entire conference
share content at
384Kbps
512
Participant and
entire conference
share content at
384Kbps
Participant 1
384
192
1024
Participant 2
1024
Polycom, Inc.
384
384
3-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized
The H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized option maintains content quality and minimizes
the amount of content refreshes that occur in large cascading conferences when participants
connect or disconnect from the conference.
This option is the only available option automatically selected in SVC Only conferencing
Mode and CP and SVC Conferencing Mode.
The H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized option uses fixed resolution and frame rate for SVC
Only and mixed CP and SVC conferences. In AVC CP conferences, each content Line Rate
and Content Setting has its own resolution and frame rate as summarized in Table 3-7.
Endpoints that do not support the required content parameters (Content line rate and
Content Resolution) cannot share content.
Guidelines
3-10
•
In Cascading conferences, the cascade link must be H.323.
•
This is the only available Content sharing mode in SVC Conferencing Mode and CP and
SVC Conferencing Mode.
•
H.264 High Profile is not supported.
•
Endpoints that cannot connect at a line rate required to support the conference Content
Rate will receive Content in the video channel.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Enabling H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized Content Sharing in AVC CP Conferences
When H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized is selected as the Content Protocol, an additional
field, Cascade Resolution is displayed in the Content Video Definition pane.
In SVC Conferencing Mode and CP and SVC Conferencing Mode, the Cascade Resolution option
is disabled.
The Cascade Resolution is a fixed resolution and frame rate for Content sharing in a Cascaded
Conference. The Cascade Resolutions that are available for selection are dependent on the Line
Rate and Content Settings that have been selected for the conference.
AVC CP
Conferencing
Mode
Table 3-7 summarizes the interaction of these parameters.
Table 3-7
Bit Rate Allocation to Content Channel by Line Rate, Content Settings & Cascade
Resolution in AVC Conferencing
Content
Settings
Cascade
Resolution/
fps
HD720/5
Content Bit Rate Allocation per Conference Line Rate
(kbps)
64
96
128
256
64
384
128
512
128
768
823
256
1024
1152
256
1472
1728
1920
256
Graphics
HD720/30
Hi Resolution
Graphics
Polycom, Inc.
HD720/5
HD720/30
512
192
256
384
384
512
512
3-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 3-7
Bit Rate Allocation to Content Channel by Line Rate, Content Settings & Cascade
Resolution in AVC Conferencing (Continued)
Content
Settings
Cascade
Resolution/
fps
HD720/5
Content Bit Rate Allocation per Conference Line Rate
(kbps)
64
96
128
256
384
256
512
384
768
823
1024
1152
1472
1728
1920
512
768
768
512
768
768
Live Video
HD720/30
The selection of the appropriate Content Resolution option, when several options are
available, should be based on the line rate and capabilities that can be used by most or all
endpoints connecting to the conference.
Selecting a Customized Content Rate in AVC CP Conferences
Customized Content Rate functionality can be implemented when a Conference Content Rate,
that is automatically calculated by the Collaboration Server, may not be suitable in a
Cascaded Environment, where conference line rates may vary widely between the cascaded
conferences. For example, one conference may have a line rate of 2 Mbps, and the other a
line rate of is 512kbps.
Guidelines:
• Cascaded conferences may have different Conference Line Rates.
•
3-12
The Customized Content Rate must be the same for all cascaded conferences.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
To Select the Customized Content Rate:
Customized Content Rate is enabled in the Profile - Video Quality dialog box.
1
In the Content Settings list, select Customized Content Rate.
When selected, a drop-down menu of the available Conference Content Rates is
displayed. These Content Line Rates are based on and will vary according to the selected
Conference Line Rate.
The largest selectable Content Line Rate is 66% of the Conference Line Rate.
If the Conference Line Rate is 64kbps or 96kbps, the only available Conference Content Rate
is 0, indicating that Content is not supported at these rates.
2
Select the required content rate.
When selecting a Conference Line Rate (after selecting Customized Content Rate) that is too
low to support the selected Customized Content Rate, the following error message is
displayed:
“The selected content line rate should be modified. To update content line rate press Cancel. To
return to automatic mode (Graphics) press OK.”
You can then modify either the Content Line Rate or the Conference Line Rate or select
another Content Setting option.
3
Polycom, Inc.
If H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized is the selected Content Protocol, a Cascade
Resolution must be selected.
3-13
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 3-8 lists the Cascade Resolutions available for the various Conference Content Rates.
.
Table 3-8
H.264 Cascade and SVC Optimized - Cascade Resolutions
H.264 Cascade Optimized
Conference
Content Rate
(Kbps)
64
Available Resolutions*
HD720p5
Content Not Supported
128
HD720p5
192
HD720p5
256
HD720p5
384
HD720p5
512
HD720p5
HD720p30
768
HD720p5
HD720p30
1152
HD720p5
HD720p30
1536
HD720p5
HD720p30
*
The default resolution for all Content Rates is HD720p5.
3-14
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Exclusive Content Mode
Exclusive Content Mode allows you to limit Content broadcasting to one participant, preventing
other participants from interrupting the Content broadcasting while it is active.
Guidelines
•
Exclusive Content Mode is available in all Conferencing Modes.
•
The Exclusive Content Mode is enabled or disabled by a check box in the in the Advanced
tabs of the Conference Profile. The check box is cleared (feature is disabled) by default.
AVC CP and CP and
SVC Conference
Profile - Advanced
SVC Conference Profile Advanced
Polycom, Inc.
3-15
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
Exclusive Content Mode can be enabled or disabled during an ongoing conference using
the Conference Properties - Advanced dialog box.
•
In Exclusive Content Mode, if the RESTRICT_CONTENT_BROADCAST _
TO_LECTURER System Flag is set to:
•
•
3-16
— NO - the first participant to send content becomes the Content Token holder and has
to release the Content Token before any other participant can acquire the token and
begin transmitting Content.
— YES - only the designated Lecturer can be the Content Token holder.
The Exclusive Content Mode check box replaces the EXCLUSIVE_CONTENT_ MODE
System Flag which was used to control Exclusive Content Mode for the system in previous
versions.
In Exclusive Content Mode, if an endpoint attempts to send Content a few seconds after
another endpoint sent Content, the Content stream it is receiving is momentarily
interrupted by a slide which is displayed for a few seconds before the normal Content
stream is resumed.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Stopping a Content Session
In some cases, when one participant ends the Content session from his/her endpoint, the
Content token is not released and other participants cannot send Content.
The Collaboration Server User can withdraw the Content token from the current holder and
to return it to the MCU for assignment to other endpoints.
To end the current Content session:
>> In the Conferences list pane, right-click the conference icon and then click Abort H.239
Session.
Content Broadcast Control
Content Broadcast Control prevents the accidental interruption or termination of H.239
Content that is being shared in a conference.
Content Broadcast Control achieves this by giving Content Token ownership to a specific
endpoint via the Collaboration Server Web Client. Other endpoints are not able to send content
until Content Token ownership has been transferred to another endpoint via the Collaboration
Server Web Client.
Guidelines
• Content Broadcast Control is supported in CP conferences.
•
Content Broadcast Control is supported in H.323 environments.
•
Only the selected Content Token owner may send content and Content Token requests
from other endpoints are rejected.
•
Content Token ownership is valid until:
•
— It is canceled by the Collaboration Server User via the Collaboration Server Web
Client.
— The owner releases it.
— The endpoint of the Content Token owner disconnects from the conference.
The Collaboration Server User can cancel Content Token ownership.
•
Polycom, Inc.
In cascaded conferences, a participant functioning as the cascade link cannot be given
token ownership.
3-17
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Giving and Cancelling Token Ownership (AVC Participants)
To give token ownership:
1 In the Participants list, right click the AVC endpoint that is to receive Content Token
ownership.
2
Select Change To Content Token Owner in the drop-down menu.
The endpoint receives ownership of the Content Token and an indication icon is
displayed in the Role column of the participant’s entry in the Participants list.
To cancel token ownership:
1 In the Participants list, right click the endpoint that currently has Content Token
ownership.
3-18
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
2
Select Cancel Content Token Owner in the drop-down menu.
Content Token ownership is cancelled for the endpoint.
Managing Noisy Content Connections
The system can identify participants who send frequent requests to refresh their Content
display usually as a result of a problematic network connection. The frequent refresh
requests cause frequent refresh of the Content display and degrade the viewing quality.
When the system identifies the noisy participants, the system will automatically suspend
the requests to refresh the sent Content to avoid affecting the quality of the Content viewed
by other conference participants. This process is controlled by System flags.
Content Display Flags
•
MAX_INTRA_REQUESTS_PER_INTERVAL_CONTENT
Enter the maximum number of refresh (intra) requests for the Content channel sent by
the participant’s endpoint in a 10 seconds interval that will be dealt by the
Collaboration Server system. When this number is exceeded, the Content sent by this
participant will be identified as noisy and his/her requests to refresh the Content
display will be suspended.
Default setting: 3
•
MAX_INTRA_SUPPRESSION_DURATION_IN_SECONDS_CONTENT
Enter the duration in seconds to ignore the participant’s requests to refresh the Content
display.
Default setting: 10
•
CONTENT_SPEAKER_INTRA_SUPPRESSION_IN_SECONDS
This flag controls the requests to refresh (intra) the Content sent from the Collaboration
Server system to the Content sender as a result of refresh requests initiated by other
conference participants.
Enter the interval in seconds between the Intra requests sent from the Collaboration
Server to the endpoint sending the Content to refresh the Content display. Refresh
requests that will be received from endpoints within the defined interval will be
postponed to the next interval.
Default setting: 5
Forcing Other Content Capabilities
•
The H239_FORCE_CAPABILITIES System Flag in system.cfg gives additional control
over Content sharing:
— When the flag is set to NO (default), the Collaboration Server only verifies that the
endpoint supports the content protocols: H.263 or H.264.
— When set to YES, the Collaboration Server checks frame rate, bit rate, resolution,
annexes and all other parameters of the Content mode as declared by an endpoint
during the capabilities negotiation phase. If the endpoint does not support the
Content capabilities of the MCU, the participant will not be able to send or receive
content over a dedicated content channel.
Polycom, Inc.
3-19
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Video Preview (AVC Only Participants)
Collaboration Server users can preview the video sent from the participant to the conference
(MCU) and the video sent from the conference to the participant. It enables the
Collaboration Server users to monitor the quality of the video sent and received by the
participant and identify possible quality degradation.
The video preview is displayed in a separate window independent to the Collaboration Server
Web Client. All Web Client functionality is enabled and conference and participant
monitoring as well as all other user actions can be performed while the video preview
window is open and active. Live video is shown in the preview window as long as the
window is open. The preview window closes automatically when the conference ends or
when participant disconnects from the conference. It can also be closed manually by the
Collaboration Server user.
Video Preview Guidelines
•
Video preview is available for AVC participants. It is not available for SVC participants.
•
Video preview window size and resolution are adjusted to the resolution of the PC that
displays the preview.
•
Video Preview of the video sent from the conference to the participant is shown
according to the line rate and video parameters of the level threshold to which the
participant is connected.
•
All users can view a video preview.
•
Only one preview window can be displayed for each Collaboration Server Web Client
connection (workstation).
•
Only one preview window can be displayed for a single conference and up to four
preview windows can be displayed for each system on different workstations (one per
workstation and one per conference).
•
Live video that is shown in the preview window does not include the Content when it
is sent by the participant.
•
Video Preview is supported in cascaded conferences.
•
If the video preview window is opened when the IVR slide is displayed to the
participant, it will also be displayed in the video preview window.
•
Video Preview is not supported in RMX Manager application.
•
Video Preview is supported with H.264 High Profile.
•
Video Preview is not supported for endpoints using the RTV protocol.
•
Video Preview is disabled in encrypted conferences.
•
Video preview cannot be displayed when the participant’s video is suspended.
•
Participant’s video preview and the CMAD window cannot be open and running
simultaneously on the same PC as both require the same DirectDraw resource.
Workstation Requirements
To be able to display the video preview window, the following minimum requirements
must be met:
•
3-20
Windows XP and later
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
•
Internet Explorer 7
•
DirectX is installed
•
DirectDraw Acceleration must be enabled and no other application is using the video
resource
•
Hardware acceleration must be enabled
Testing your Workstation
To ensure that your workstation can display the video preview window:
1 In Windows, click Start > Run.
The Run dialog box opens.
2
In the Open field, type dxdiag and press the Enter key or click OK.
A confirmation message is displayed.
3
Click Yes to run the diagnostics.
The DirectX Diagnostic Tool dialog box opens.
4
Click the Display tab.
To be able to display the video preview window, the DirectDraw Acceleration and
Direct3D Acceleration options must be Enabled.
If the video card installed in the PC does not support DirectDraw Acceleration, a black
window may be viewed in the Video Preview window.
5
Polycom, Inc.
Click the Exit button.
3-21
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Previewing the Participant Video
To preview the participant video:
1 List the conference participants in the Participants pane.
2
Right-click the participant whose video you want to preview and then click one of the
following options:
— View Participant Sent Video - to display the video sent from the participant to the
conference.
— View Participant Received Video - to display the video sent from the conference
to the participant.
The Video Preview window opens.
If the video card installed in the PC does not support DirectDraw Acceleration, a black window may
be viewed.
3-22
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Auto Scan and Customized Polling in Video Layout (CP Only)
Auto Scan enables a user to define a single cell in the conference layout to cycle the display of
participants that are not in the conference layout.
Customized Polling allows the cyclic display to be set to a predefined order for a predefined
time period. The cyclic display only occurs when the number of participants is larger than
the number of cells in the layout.
Guidelines
•
Auto Scan and Customized Polling are supported in AVC - CP conferences only.
•
Participants that are in the conference layout will not appear in the Auto Scan enabled
cell.
•
If Customized Polling is not used to define the order of the Auto Scan it will proceed
according to order in which the participants connected to the conference.
•
If the user changes the conference layout, the Auto Scan settings are not exported to the
new layout. If the user changes the conference layout back to the layout in which Auto
Scan was enabled, Auto Scan with the previous settings will be resumed.
Enabling Auto Scan and Customized Polling (CP Only)
Auto Scan
To enable Auto Scan:
1 In the Collaboration Server Web Client Main Screen - Conference list pane, double-click the
conference or right-click the conference and then click Conference Properties.
2
In the Conference Properties - General dialog box, click Video Settings.
The Video Settings tab is displayed.
Auto Scan
Interval(s)
Drop Down
Menu Button
Auto Scan
Option
Selected
Video Layout
Polycom, Inc.
Selected
Video Layout
Cell
3-23
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
3
In the video layout cell to be designated for Auto Scan, click the drop-down menu
button and select Auto Scan.
4
Select from the Auto Scan Interval(s) drop-down list the scanning interval in seconds.
5
Click the Apply button to confirm and keep the Conference Properties dialog box open.
-orClick OK to confirm and close the Conference Properties dialog box.
Customized Polling
The order in which the Auto Scanned participants are displayed in the Auto Scan enabled
cell of the video layout can be customized.
1
Open the Customized Polling tab:
a
If the Video Settings tab is open click the Customized Polling tab.
or
b
In the Conference list pane, double-click the conference or right-click the conference
and then click Conference Properties.
c
In the Conference Properties - General dialog box, click Customized Polling.
The Customized Polling tab is displayed.
All Conference Participants
Scanning Order
Move participant up in
Scanning
Order
Move participant down in
Scanning Order
Add /
Delete
Add All /
Delete All
All conference participants are listed in the left pane (All Participants) while the
participants that are to be displayed in the Auto Scan enabled cell of the video layout
are listed in the right pane (Scanning Order).
3-24
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
The dialog box buttons are summarized in Table 3-9.
Table 3-9
Customized Polling - Buttons
Button
Description
Add
Select a participant and click this button to Add a the participant to the
list of participants to be Auto Scanned.
The participants name is removed from the All Participants pane.
Delete
Select a participant and click this button to Delete the participant from
the list of participants to be Auto Scanned.
The participants name is moved back to the All Participants pane.
Add All
Add all participants to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned.
All participants’ names are removed from the All Participants pane.
Delete All
Delete all participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned.
All participants’ names are moved back to the All Participants pane.
Up
Select a participant and click this button to move the participant Up in
the Scanning Order.
Down
Select a participant and click this button to move the participant Down
in the Scanning Order.
2
Optional. Add a participant to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned:
3
— Click on the participant’s name in the All Participants list and then click the Add
button to move the participant to the Scanning Order pane.
Optional. Delete a participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned:
4
— Click on a participant’s name in the Scanning Order list and then click the Delete
button to move the participant back to the All Participants pane.
Optional. Add all participants to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned by clicking
the Add All button.
5
Optional. Delete all participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned by
clicking the Delete All button.
6
Optional. Move the participant up in the Scanning Order by clicking the Up button.
7
Optional. Move the participant down in the Scanning Order by clicking the Down
button.
8
Click the Apply button to confirm and keep the Conference Properties dialog box open, or
click the OK the button to confirm and return to the Collaboration Server Web Client Main
Screen.
Audio Algorithm Support
The Collaboration Server supports the following audio algorithms in AVC conferences:
G.711, G. 719, G.722, G.722.1, G.722.1C, G.729A, G.723.1, Siren14, Siren 22 and SirenLPR.
Polycom’s proprietary Siren 22 and industry standard G.719 audio algorithms are supported
for participants connecting with Polycom endpoints.
Polycom, Inc.
3-25
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Siren 22 audio algorithm provides CD-quality audio for better clarity and less listener
fatigue with audio and visual communication applications. Siren 22 requires less computing
power and has much lower latency than alternative wideband audio technologies.
The SirenLPR audio algorithm provides CD-quality audio for better clarity and less listener
fatigue with audio and visual communication applications.
In SVC conferences, the system supports SAC (Scalable Audio Coding) audio algorithm.
Guidelines
•
Siren 22 and G.719 are supported in both mono and stereo.
•
Stereo is supported in H.323 calls only.
•
Siren 22 is supported by Polycom HDX endpoints, version 2.0 and later.
•
G.728 is supported in H.323 and SIP environments.
•
SirenLPR is enabled by default and can be disabled by setting the system flag,
ENABLE_SIRENLPR, to NO.
•
SirenLPR is supported:
—
—
—
—
—
In IP (H.323, SIP) calls only.
In CP and VSW conferences.
With Polycom CMAD and HDX “Canyon 3.0.1”endpoints.
For mono audio at audio line rates of 32Kbps, 48Kbps and 64Kbps.
For stereo audio at audio line rates of 64Kbps, 96Kbps and 128Kbps.
SIP Encryption
The ENABLE_SIRENLPR_SIP_ENCRYPTION System Flag enables the SirenLPR audio
algorithm when using encryption with the SIP protocol.
The default value of this flag is NO meaning SirenLPR is disabled by default for SIP
participants in an encrypted conference. To enable SirenLPR the System Flag must be added
to system.cfg and its value set to YES.
Mono
The Siren 22, G.719 and SirenLPR mono audio algorithms are supported at the following bit
rates:
Table 3-10 Siren22, G.719 and SirenLPR Mono vs Bitrate
Audio Algorithm
Minimum Bitrate (kbps)
Siren22 64k
Siren22 48K
Siren22_32k
G.719_64k
384
G.719_48k
G.719_32k
G.728 16K
3-26
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Table 3-10 Siren22, G.719 and SirenLPR Mono vs Bitrate (Continued)
Audio Algorithm
Minimum Bitrate (kbps)
Siren22_48K
Siren22_32k
G.719_48k
256
G.719_32k
G.728 16
Siren22_32k
G.719_32k
128
G.728 16K
SirenLPR
64
SirenLPR
48
SirenLPR
32
Stereo
The Siren 22Stereo, G.719Stereo and SirenLPR audio algorithms are supported at the
following bit rates.
Table 3-11 Siren22Stereo, G.719Stereo and SirenLPR vs Bitrate
Audio Algorithm
Minimum Bitrate (kbps)
Siren22Stereo_128k
Siren22Stereo_96k
Siren22Stereo_64k
G.719Stereo_128k
1024
G.719Stereo_96k
G.719Stereo_64k
Siren22Stereo_96k
Siren22Stereo_64k
G.719Stereo_96k
512
G.719Stereo_64k
Siren22Stereo_64k
G.719Stereo_64k
Polycom, Inc.
384
SirenLPR
128
SirenLPR
96
SirenLPR
64
3-27
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Participant Audio Properties
The audio algorithm used by the participant’s endpoint can be verified in the Participant
Properties - Channel Status dialog box.
To view the participant’s properties during a conference:
1 In the Participants list, right click the desired participant and select Participant
Properties.
3-28
2
Click the Channel Status - Advanced tab.
The Participant Properties - Channel Status - Advanced dialog box is displayed.
3
In the Channel Info field, select Audio In or Audio Out to display the audio parameters.
4
Click the OK button.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Media Encryption
Encryption is available at the conference and participant levels, based on AES 128
(Advanced Encryption Standard) and is fully H.233/H.234 compliant and the Encryption
Key exchange DH 1024-bit (Diffie-Hellman) standards.
Media Encryption Guidelines
•
Encryption is not available in all countries and it is enabled in the MCU license. Contact
Polycom Support to enable it.
•
Endpoints must support both AES 128 encryption and DH 1024 key exchange
standards which are compliant with H.235 (H.323) to encrypt and to join an encrypted
conference.
•
The encryption mode of the endpoints is not automatically recognized, therefore the
encryption mode must be set for the conference or the participants (when defined).
•
Conference level encryption must be set in the Profile, and cannot be changed once the
conference is running.
•
If an endpoint connected to an encrypted conference stops encrypting its media, it is
disconnected from the conference.
•
In Cascaded conferences, the link between the cascaded conferences must be encrypted
in order to encrypt the conferences.
•
The recording link can be encrypted when recording from an encrypted conference to
the RSS that is set to encryption. For more information, see "Recording Link Encryption”
on page 14-7.
•
Encryption of SIP Media is supported using SRTP (Secured Real-time Transport Protocol)
and the AES key exchange method.
•
Encryption of SIP Media requires the encryption of SIP signaling - TLS Transport Layer
must be used.
•
Encryption of SIP Media is supported in conferences as follows:
— All media channels are encrypted: video, audio and FECC.
— Collaboration Server SRTP implementation complies with Microsoft SRTP
implementation.
— LPR is not supported with SRTP.
— The ENABLE_SIRENLPR_SIP_ENCRYPTION System Flag enables the SirenLPR
audio algorithm when using encryption with the SIP protocol. The default value of
this flag is NO meaning SirenLPR is disabled by default for SIP participants in an
encrypted conference. To enable SirenLPR the System Flag must be added to
system.cfg and its value set to YES.
— The SEND_SRTP_MKI System Flag enables or disables the inclusion of the MKI
field in SRTP packets sent by the Collaboration Server. The default value of the flag
is YES. Add the flag to system.cfg and set its value set to NO to disable the inclusion
of the MKI field in SRTP packets sent by the Collaboration Server when using
endpoints that cannot decrypt SRTP-based audio and video streams if the MKI
(Master Key Identifier) field is included in SRTP packets sent by the Collaboration
Server. This System Flag should not be set to NO when HDX endpoints, Microsoft
Office Communicator and Lync Clients. For more information, see "Modifying System
Flags” on page 21-1.
Polycom, Inc.
3-29
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Mixing Encrypted and Non-encrypted Endpoints in one Conference
Mixing encrypted and non-encrypted endpoints in one conference is possible, based on the
Encryption option “Encrypt When Possible” in the Conference Profile - Advance dialog box.
The option “Encrypt When Possible” enables the negotiation between the MCU and the
endpoints and let the MCU connect the participants according to their capabilities, where
encryption is the preferred setting. Defined participants that cannot connect encrypted are
connected non-encrypted, with the exception of dial-out SIP participants.
When the conference encryption is set to "Encrypt when possible", SIP dial out participants whose
encryption is set to AUTO can only connect with encryption, otherwise they are disconnected from
the conference.
The same system behavior can be applied to undefined participants, depending on the
setting of the System Flag
FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FOR_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPANT_IN_WHEN_AVAILABLE_MODE:
•
When set to NO and the conference encryption in the Profile is set to “Encrypt When
Possible”, both Encrypted and Non-encrypted undefined participants can connect to the
same conferences, where encryption is the preferred setting.
•
When set to YES (default), Undefined participants must connect encrypted, otherwise
they are disconnected.
For defined participants, connection to the conference is decided according to the encryption
settings in the conference Profile, the Defined Participant’s encryption settings.
For undefined participants, connection to the conference is decided according to the
encryption settings in the conference Profile, the System Flag setting and the connecting
endpoint’s Media Encryption capabilities.
3-30
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Direct Connection to the Conference
Table 3-12, summarizes the connection status of participants, based on the encryption
settings in the conference Profile, the Defined Participant’s encryption settings or the System
Flag setting for undefined participants and the connecting endpoint’s Media Encryption
capabilities.
Table 3-12 Connection of Defined and Undefined H.323, SIPParticipants to the Conference Based on
the Encryption Settings
Defined Participant
Conference
Encryption
Setting
No
Encryption
Encrypt All
Encrypt
When
Possible
Encryption
Setting
Connection status
Auto
Connected,
non-encrypted
No
Connected,
non-encrypted
Yes
Connected only if
encrypted.
Non-encrypted endpoints
are disconnected as
encryption is forced for the
participant.
Auto
Connected, encrypted.
Non-encrypted endpoints
are disconnected
No
Disconnected (cannot be
added to the conference)
Yes
Connected, encrypted
Auto
All defined participants
except dial-out SIP
participants: Connect
encrypted - Endpoints with
encryption capabilities.
Connect non-encrypted endpoints without
encryption capabilities.
Defined dial-out SIP
participant: Connect only if
encrypted.
Non-encrypted endpoints
are disconnected.
No
Connected, non-encrypted
Yes
Connected, encrypted
Undefined Participant
Connection
Status
*Flag = No
Connection
Status
*Flag = YES
Connected
non-encrypted
(Encryption is not
declared by the
Collaboration
Server, therefore
the endpoint does
not use
encryption)
Connected
non-encrypted
(Encryption is not
declared by the
Collaboration
Server, therefore
the endpoint does
not use
encryption)
Connect only if
encrypted.
Non-encrypted
endpoints are
disconnected
Connect only if
encrypted.
Non-encrypted
endpoints are
disconnected
Connect
encrypted Endpoints with
encryption
capabilities.
Connect nonencrypted endpoints without
encryption
capabilities
Connect only if
encrypted.
Non-encrypted
endpoints are
disconnected.
* System Flag = FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FOR_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPANT_IN_WHEN_AVAILABLE_MODE
Polycom, Inc.
3-31
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Connection to the Entry Queue
An undefined participant connecting to an Entry Queue inherits the encryption
characteristics of the Entry Queue as defined in the Entry Queue’s profile.
Participants can be moved from the Entry Queue and the destination conference if both
conferencing entities have the same Profile settings, i.e. from SVC Only Entry Queue to SVC
Only conference and from mixed CP and SVC Entry Queue to a mixed CP and SVC
conference, etc.
Table 3-13 summarizes the connection possibilities for a participant that is to be moved from
an Entry Queue to a destination conference for each of the conference Profile and Entry
Queue encryption options.
Table 3-13 Connection of Undefined Participants to the Entry Queue Based on the Encryption
Settings
Entry Queue
Encryption Setting
Undefined Participant Connection to the Entry Queue
*Flag = No
*Flag = YES
No Encryption
Connected, non-encrypted
(Encryption is not declared by the
Collaboration Server, therefore
endpoint does not use encryption)
Connected, non-encrypted
(Encryption is not declared by the
Collaboration Server, therefore
endpoint does not use encryption)
Encrypt All
Connected only if encrypted.
Non-encrypted endpoints are
disconnected
Connected only if encrypted.
Non-encrypted endpoints are
disconnected
Encrypt When
Possible
Connected encrypted - Endpoints
with encryption capabilities.
Connected non-encrypted endpoints without encryption
capabilities
Connected only if encrypted.
Non-encrypted endpoints are
disconnected.
* System Flag = FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FOR_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPANT_IN_WHEN_AVAILABLE_MODE
Moving from the Entry Queue to Conferences or Between Conferences
Participants can be moved from the Entry Queue and the destination conference if both
conferencing entities have the same Profile settings, i.e. from SVC Only Entry Queue to SVC
Only conference and from mixed CP and SVC Entry Queue to a mixed CP and SVC
conference, etc.
3-32
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
When moving from the Entry Queue to the destination conference, or when the
Collaboration Server user moves AVC participants from one conference to another (SVC
participants cannot be moved between conferences), the connection rules are similar and
they are summarized in Table 3-14:
Table 3-14 Moving Participants from the Entry Queue to the Destination conference or between
conferences Based on the Encryption Settings
Current Participant Encryption Status
Destination
Conference
Encryption Setting
Encrypted
*Flag = NO
*Flag = YES
Non-Encrypted
*Flag = NO
*Flag = YES
No Encryption
Move succeeds, connected
encrypted
Move succeeds, connected nonencrypted
Encrypt All
Move succeeds, connected
encrypted.
Move fails, disconnected.
Encrypt When
Possible
Move succeeds,
connected
encrypted
Move succeeds,
connected nonencrypted
Move succeeds,
connected
encrypted
Connected only
if endpoint was a
defined
participant in the
source
conference.
Otherwise, move
fails.
* System Flag = FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FOR_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPANT_IN_WHEN_AVAILABLE_MODE
Recording Link Encryption
Recording Links are treated as regular participants, however the
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF System Flag must
be set to YES if a non-encrypted Recording Link is to be allowed to connect to an encrypted
conference.
Table 3-15 summarizes the connection possibilities for a Recording Link that is to be
connected to a conference for each of the conference profile and Entry Queue encryption
options.
Table 3-15 Connections by Recording Link and Conference Encryption Settings
Conference
Profile Setting
Recording Link Connection Status according to flag:
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_
LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
YES
Polycom, Inc.
NO
Encrypt All
Connected encrypted if possible,
otherwise connected nonencrypted.
Connected only if encrypted,
otherwise disconnected
No Encryption
Connected non-encrypted
Connected non-encrypted
3-33
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 3-15 Connections by Recording Link and Conference Encryption Settings (Continued)
Conference
Profile Setting
Encrypt when possible
Recording Link Connection Status according to flag:
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_
LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
YES
NO
Connected encrypted if possible,
otherwise connected nonencrypted.
Connected encrypted if possible,
otherwise connected nonencrypted.
Encryption Flag Settings
To modify the Encryption flags:
1 Click Setup>System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
Set the
FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FOR_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPANT_IN_WHEN_AVAILA
BLE_MODE flag to YES or NO.
3
If recording will be used in encrypted conferences, set the
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF flag to YES
or NO.
4
Click OK.
For more information, see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
>> Reset the MCU for flag changes to take effect.
3-34
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Enabling Encryption in the Profile
Encryption for the conference is in the Profile and cannot be changed once the conference is
running.
To enable encryption at the conference level:
>> In the Conference Profile Properties – Advanced dialog box, select one of the following
Encryption options:
— Encrypt All - Encryption is enabled for the conference and all conference
participants must be encrypted.
— No Encryption - Encryption is disabled for the conference.
— Encrypt when possible - enables the negotiation between the MCU and the
endpoints and let the MCU connect the participants according to their capabilities,
where encryption is the preferred setting. For connection guidelines see "Mixing
Encrypted and Non-encrypted Endpoints in one Conference” on page 3-30.
For more information about recording encrypted conferences, see "Recording Link
Encryption” on page 14-7.
Enabling Encryption at the Participant Level
You can select the encryption mode for each of the defined participants. Encryption options
are affected by the settings of the flag in the system configuration. Undefined participants
are connected with the Participant Encryption option set to Auto, inheriting the conference/
Entry Queue encryption setting.
Polycom, Inc.
3-35
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
To enable encryption at the participant level:
>> In the Participant Properties – Advanced dialog box, in the Encryption list, select one of the
following options: Auto, On, or Off.
— Auto - The participant inherits the conference/Entry Queue encryption setting.
The participant connects as encrypted only if the conference is defined as
encrypted.
— Yes - The participant joins the conference/Entry Queue as encrypted.
— No - The participant joins the conference/Entry Queue as non-encrypted.
Monitoring the Encryption Status
The conference encryption status is indicated in the Conference Properties - General dialog
box.
The participant encryption status is indicated by a check mark in the Encryption column in
the Participants list pane.
3-36
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
The participant encryption status is also indicated in the Participant Properties – SDP tab,
where SRTP indication is listed for each encrypted channel (for example, audio and video).
An encrypted participant who is unable to join a conference is disconnected from the
conference. The disconnection cause is displayed in the Participant Properties – Connection
Status tab, Security Failure indication, and the Cause box identifies the encryption related
situation.
For more information about monitoring, see "Conference and Participant Monitoring” on
page 13-1.
Packet Loss Compensation (LPR and DBA) AVC CP
Conferences
Lost Packet Recovery (LPR) and Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation (DBA) help minimize media
quality degradation that can result from packet loss in the network. Packet loss Compensation
is available in AVC CP Conferencing Mode only and is not supported in SVC Conferencing
Mode or CP and SVC Conferencing Mode.
Packet Loss
Packet Loss refers to the failure of data packets, transmitted over an IP network, to arrive at
their destination. Packet Loss is described as a percentage of the total packets transmitted.
Polycom, Inc.
3-37
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Causes of Packet Loss
Network congestion within a LAN or WAN, faulty or incorrectly configured network
equipment or faulty cabling are among the many causes of Packet Loss.
Effects of Packet Loss on Conferences
Packet Loss affects the quality of:
•
Video – frozen images, decreased frame rate, flickering, tiling, distortion, smearing,
loss of lip sync
•
Audio – drop-outs, chirping, audio distortion
•
Content – frozen images, blurring, distortion, slow screen refresh rate
Lost Packet Recovery
The Lost Packet Recovery (LPR) algorithm uses Forward Error Correction (FEC) to create
additional packets that contain recovery information. These additional packets are used to
reconstruct packets that are lost, for whatever reason, during transmission. Dynamic
Bandwidth Allocation (DBA) is used to allocate the bandwidth needed to transmit the
additional packets.
Lost Packet Recovery Guidelines
•
If packet loss is detected in the packet transmissions of either the video or Content
streams:
•
— LPR is applied to both the video and Content streams.
— DBA allocates bandwidth from the video stream for the insertion of additional
packets containing recovery information.
LPR is supported in H.323 and SIP networking environments only.
•
In LPR-enabled Continuous Presence conferences:
•
— Both LPR-enabled and non-LPR-enabled endpoints are supported.
— The LPR process is not applied to packet transmissions from non-LPR-enabled
H.323 and SIP endpoints.
— Non-LPR-enabled endpoints can be moved to LPR-enabled conferences and LPRenabled participants can be moved to conferences without LPR-enabled (where
they remain LPR-enabled).
When connecting via an Entry Queue:
— A participant using an LPR-enabled endpoint can be moved to a non-LPR-enabled
conference. The participant is connected with LPR enabled.
Enabling Lost Packet Recovery
LPR is enabled or disabled in the Conference Profile dialog box.
•
CP Conferences – LPR is enabled by default in the New Profile – Advanced dialog box.
For more information, see "Defining New Profiles” on page 2-18.
3-38
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Monitoring Lost Packet Recovery
In the Participant Properties – H.245 tab, LPR activity is displayed in all three panes.
Polycom, Inc.
3-39
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
In the Participant Properties – Channel Status tab, check box indicators show LPR activation in
the local and remote (transmit and receive) channels.
Lecture Mode (AVC CP Only)
Lecture Mode enables all participants to view the lecturer in full screen while the conference
lecturer sees all the other conference participants in the selected layout while he/she is
speaking. When the number of sites/endpoints exceeds the number of video windows in
the layout, switching between participants occurs every 15 seconds. Conference participants
cannot change their Personal Layouts while Lecture Mode is enabled.
Automatic switching is suspended when one of the participants begins talking, and it is
resumed automatically when the lecturer resumes talking.
Lecture Mode is available only in AVC CP Conferencing Mode.
Enabling Lecture Mode
Lecture Mode is enabled at the conference level by selecting the lecturer. Conference
participants cannot change their Personal Layouts while Lecture Mode is enabled.
Automatic switching between participants viewed on the lecturer’s screen is enabled in the
conference Profile.
3-40
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Selecting the Conference Lecturer
Selecting a lecturer for the ongoing conference, enables the Lecture Mode. You can select the
lecturer:
•
during the definition of the ongoing conference
•
after the conference has started and the participants have connected to the conference.
To select the lecturer and enable the Lecture Mode while starting the conference:
>> In the Conference Properties - Participant dialog box, enable the Lecture Mode in one of
the following methods:
Selecting a defined participant:
a
Add participants to the conference either from the Address book or by defining
new participants.
b
In the Lecturer field, select the lecturer from the list of the defined participants.
Automatic selection of the lecturer:
— In the Lecturer field, select [Auto].
In this mode, the conference speaker becomes the lecturer.
To select the lecturer and enable the Lecture Mode during the ongoing conference:
1 Make sure that the participant you want to designate as the lecturer has connected to
the conference.
Polycom, Inc.
3-41
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
2
In the Conference Properties - Video Settings dialog box, in the Lecturer field, select the
lecturer from the list of the connected participants.
Defined dial out participants and dial in participants are considered to be two separate participants
even if they have the same IP address/number. Therefore, if a defined dial-out participant is added to
the conference and the same participant then dials in (before the system dialed out to that
participant) the system creates a second participant in the Participants list and tries to call the dialout participant. If the dial-out participant was designated as the conference lecturer, the system will
not be able to replace that participant with the dial-in participant that is connected to the conference.
3-42
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Enabling the Automatic Switching
Automatic switching between participants viewed on the lecturer’s screen is enabled in the
conference Profile, or during the ongoing conference, in the Conference Properties.
>> In the Profile Properties - Video Settings dialog box, select the Lecturer View Switching
check box.
This option is activated when the conference includes more sites than windows in the
selected layout. If this option is disabled, the participants will be displayed in the
selected video layout without switching.
For more information about Profile definition, see "Defining a CP Conference Profile” on
page 2-11.
>> Once the conference is running, in the Conference Properties - Video Settings dialog box,
select the Lecturer View Switching check box.
Lecture Mode Monitoring
A conference in which the Lecture Mode is enabled is started as any other conference. The
conference runs as an audio activated Continuous Presence conference until the lecturer
connects to the conference. The selected video layout is the one that is activated when the
conference starts. Once the lecturer is connected, the conference switches to the Lecture
Mode.
When Lecturer View Switching is activated, it enables automatic switching between the
conference participants in the lecturer’s video window. The switching in this mode is not
determined by voice activation and is initiated when the number of participants exceeds the
number of windows in the selected video layout. In this case, when the switching is
performed, the system refreshes the display and replaces the last active speaker with the
current speaker.
Polycom, Inc.
3-43
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
When one of the participants is talking, the automatic switching is suspended, showing the
current speaker, and it is resumed when the lecturer resumes talking.
If the lecturer is disconnected during an Ongoing Conference, the conference resumes
standard conferencing.
Forcing is enabled at the Conference level only. It applies only to the video layout viewed by
the lecturer as all the other conference participants see only the lecturer in full screen.
If an asymmetrical video layout is selected for the lecturer (i.e. 3+1, 4+1, 8+1), each video
window contains a different participant (i.e. one cannot be forced to a large frame and to a
small frame simultaneously).
When Lecture Mode is enabled for the conference, the lecturer is indicated by an icon ( ) in
the Role column of the Participants list.
Participant designated as the
Lecturer
To control the Lecture Mode during an Ongoing Conference:
During the Ongoing Conference, in the Conference Properties - Video Settings dialog box you
can:
3-44
•
Enable or disable the Lecture Mode and designate the conference lecturer in the Lecturer
list; select None to disable the Lecture Mode or select a participant to become the
lecturer to enable it.
•
Designate a new lecturer.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
•
Enable or disable the Lecturer View Switching between participants displayed on the
lecturer monitor by selecting or clearing the Lecturer View Switching check box.
•
Change the video layout for the lecturer by selecting another video layout.
Restricting Content Broadcast to Lecturer
Content broadcasting can be restricted to the conference lecturer only, when one of the
conference participants is set as the lecturer (and not automatically selected by the system).
Restricting the Content Broadcast prevents the accidental interruption or termination of
H.239 Content that is being shared in a conference.
Content Broadcast restriction is enabled by setting the
RESTRICT_CONTENT_BROADCAST_TO_LECTURER system flag to ON. When set to
OFF (default) it enables all users to send Content.
When enabled, the following rules apply:
• Content can only be sent by the designated lecturer. When any other participant tries to
send Content, the request is rejected.
Polycom, Inc.
•
If the Collaboration Server user changes the designated lecturer (in the Conference
Properties - Video Settings dialog box), the Content of the current lecturer is stopped
immediately and cannot be renewed.
•
The Collaboration Server User can abort the H.239 Session of the lecturer.
•
Content Broadcasting is not implemented in conferences that do not include a
designated lecturer and the lecturer is automatically selected by the system (for
example, in Presentation Mode).
3-45
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Muting Participants Except the Lecturer (AVC CP Only)
When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option in the Conference Profile is enabled, the
audio of all participants in the conference except for the lecturer can be automatically muted
upon connection to the conference. This prevents other conference participants from
accidentally interrupting the lecture, or from a noisy participant affecting the audio quality
of the entire conference. Muted participants cannot unmute themselves unless they are
unmuted from the Collaboration Server Web Client/RMX Manager.
Guidelines
3-46
•
Both Administrators and Operators (users) are allowed to set the Mute Participants
Except Lecturer option.
•
When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled, the mute indicator on the
participant endpoints are not visible because the mute participants was initiated by the
MCU.
•
When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled in the Conference Profile
settings, all conferences to which this profile is assigned will start with this option
enabled. All participants, except for the designated lecturer, are muted.
•
The Mute Participants Except Lecturer option can be enabled at any time after the start of
the conference. It allows all the conference participants to converse before the lecturer
joins the conference or before they are muted.
•
The Mute Participants Except Lecturer option can be disabled during an ongoing
conference, thereby unmuting all the participants in the conference.
•
If the endpoint of the designated lecturer is muted when the lecturer connects to the
conference, the lecturer remains muted until the endpoint has been unmuted.
•
When you replace a lecturer, the MCU automatically mutes the previous lecturer and
unmutes the new lecturer.
•
When you disconnect a lecturer from the conference or the lecturer leaves the
conference, all participants remain muted but are able to view participants in regular
video layout until the you disable the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option.
•
A participant can override the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option by activating the
Mute All Except Me option using the appropriate DTMF code, provided the participant
has authorization for this operation in the IVR Services properties. The lecturer audio is
muted and the participant audio is unmuted. You can reactivate the Mute Participants
Except Lecturer option after a participant has previously activated the Mute All Except
Me option. The participant is muted and the lecturer, if designated, is unmuted.
•
In cascaded conferences, all participants (including the link participants) except the
lecturer are muted. Only the lecturer is not muted.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 3-Additional Conferencing Information
Enabling the Mute Participants Except Lecturer Option
The Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled or disabled (default) in the Conference
Profile or in an ongoing conference in the Profile Properties - Audio Settings tab.
When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled and a conference has started,
the Mute by MCU icon is displayed in the Audio column in the Participants pane of each
participant that is muted.
Polycom, Inc.
3-47
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Permanent Conference
A Permanent Conference is any ongoing conference with no pre-determined End Time
continuing until it is terminated by an administrator, operator or chairperson.
Guidelines
•
Auto Terminate is disabled in Permanent Conferences.
•
If participants disconnect from the Permanent Conference, resources are released.
•
Entry Queues, Conference Reservations and SIP Factories cannot be defined as Permanent
Conferences.
•
Additional participants can connect to the conference, or be added by the operator, if
sufficient resources are available.
•
The maximum size of the Call Detail Record (CDR) for a Permanent Conference is 1MB.
Enabling a Permanent Conference
The Permanent Conference option is selected in the New Conference, New Meeting Room or New
Conference Templates dialog boxes.
Permanent Conference
New Conference
3-48
New Meeting Room
New Conference Template
Polycom, Inc.
4
Video Protocols and Resolution
Configuration for CP Conferencing
Video Resolutions in AVC-based CP Conferencing
The following video resolution information applies to AVC Conferencing Mode.
For a description of resolutions for SVC Conferencing Mode see "The MCU automatically selects the
resolution and frame rate according to the conference line rate. Table 2-3 details the maximum
resolution and frame rates supported by the MCU for each conference line rate. The actual video
rate, resolution and frame rates displayed on each endpoints is determined by the endpoint’s
capabilities.:” on page 2-12.
The Polycom® RealPresence® Collaboration Server always attempts to connect to endpoints
at the highest line rate defined for the conference. If the connection cannot be established
using the conference line rate, the Collaboration Server attempts to connect at the next
highest line rate at its highest supported resolution.
Depending on the line rate, the Collaboration Server sends video at the best possible
resolution supported by the endpoint regardless of the resolution received from the
endpoint.
The video resolution is also defined by the Video Quality settings in the Profile.
The combination of frame rate and resolution affects the number of video resources
required on the MCU to support the call.
The following resolutions are supported:
•
CIF
352 x 288 pixels.
•
SD
720 x 576 pixels.
•
HD 720p 1280 x 720 pixels.
Video Display with CIF, SD and HD Video Connections
Although any combination of CIF, SD and HD connections is supported in all CP
conferences, the following rules apply:
•
In a 1X1 Video Layout:
— SD: If the speaker transmits CIF, the MCU will send CIF to all participants,
including the SD participants. In any other layout the MCU will transmit to each
participant at the participant’s sending resolution.
— HD: The MCU transmits speaker resolution (including input from HD
participants) at up to SD resolution. If 1x1 is the requested layout for the entire
duration of the conference, set the conference to HD Video Switching mode.
Polycom, Inc.
4-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
In asymmetrical Video Layouts:
— SD: A participant in the large frame that sends CIF is displayed in CIF.
•
— HD: Where participants’ video windows are different sizes, the Collaboration Server
transmits HD and receives SD or lower resolutions.
In panoramic Video Layouts:
— SD: Participants that send CIF also receive CIF.
— HD: the Collaboration Server transmits HD and receives SD or lower resolutions,
the Collaboration Server scales images from SD to HD resolution.
H.264 High Profile Support in CP Conferences
The H.264 High Profile is a new addition to the H.264 video protocol suite. It uses the most
efficient video data compression algorithms to even further reduce bandwidth requirements
for video data streams.
Video quality is maintained at bit rates that are up to 50% lower than previously required.
For example, a 512Kbps call will have the video quality of a 1Mbps HD call while a 1Mbps
HD call has higher video quality at the same (1Mbps) bit rate.
H.264 High-Profile should be used when all or most endpoints support it.
Guidelines
•
H.264 High Profile is supported in H.323 and SIP networking environments.
•
H.264 High Profile is supported in Continuous Presence conferences at all bit rates, video
resolutions and layouts.
•
H.264 High Profile is the first protocol declared by the Collaboration Server, to ensure
that endpoints that support the protocol will connect using it.
Setting minimum bit rate thresholds that are lower than the default may affect the video
quality of endpoints that do not support the H.264 High Profile.
•
For monitoring purposes, the Collaboration Server and endpoint H.264 High Profile
capability is listed in the Participant Properties - H.245 and SDP tabs for H.323
participants and SIP participants respectively.
For more information see "IP Participant Properties” on page 13-18.
•
H.264 High Profile is not supported:
— For Content Sharing
— As an RSS Recording link
— With Video Preview
4-2
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 4-Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing
CP Conferencing with H.263 4CIF
The video resolution of 4CIF in H.263 endpoints is only supported for line rates of 384 Kbps
to 1920 Kbps as shown in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1
Video Quality vs. Line Rate
Video Quality
Endpoint Line Rate Kbps
Resolution
Frame Rate
128
CIF
30
256
CIF
30
384 - 1920+
4CIF
15
The Collaboration Server Web Client supports monitoring of H.263 4CIF information. The
H.245 or SDP tab includes the additional information.
The creation of a new H.263 4CIF slide is supported in the IVR Service in addition to the
current H.263 IVR slide. If users utilize the default Polycom slides that are delivered with
the RealPresence Collaboration Server, the slide’s resolution will be as defined in the profile,
i.e. SD, HD, CIF, etc.
For more information see “High Resolution Slides” on page 17-14.
H.263 4CIF Guidelines
•
H.263 4CIF is supported with H.323 and SIP connection endpoints.
•
H.263 4CIF is supported in CP mode only.
•
Click & View is supported in H.263 4CIF.
•
AES encryption is supported with H.263 4CIF.
•
H.263 4CIF is supported in recording by the RSS2000 and other recording devices.
•
All video layouts are supported in H.263 4CIF, except 1x1 layout. In a 1x1 layout, the
resolution will be CIF.
•
For information about Resource Usage see Table 20-6 on page 20-7.
•
H.239 is supported in H.263 4CIF and is based on the same bandwidth decision matrix
as for HD.
The CP Resolution Decision Matrix
All the CP resolution options and settings are based on a decision matrix which matches
video resolutions to connection line rates, with the aim of providing the best balance
between resource usage and video quality at any given line rate.
The following factors affect the decision matrices:
Polycom, Inc.
•
The Media cards installed in the system affect the number of video resources used for
each video resolution and frame rate, the supported video protocols and the maximum
resolution that can be used by the Collaboration Server.
•
The used video protocol: H.264 base Profile or H.264 High Profile. The H.264 High Profile
maintains the Video quality at bit rates that are up to 50% lower than previously
4-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
required. For example, a 512 kbps call will have the video quality of a 1Mbps HD call
while a 1Mbps HD call has higher video quality at the same (1Mbps) bit rate.
By default, the system shipped with three pre-defined settings of the decision matrix for
H.264 Base Profile and three pre-defined settings of the decision matrix for H.264 High Profile:
•
Resource-Quality Balanced (default)
A balance between video quality and resource usage.
•
Resource Optimized
System resource usage is optimized by allowing high resolution connections only at
high line rates and may result in lower video resolutions (in comparison to other
resolution configurations) for some line rates. This option allows to save MCU
resources and increase the number of participant connections.
•
Video Quality Optimized
Video is optimized through higher resolution connections at lower line rates increasing
the resource usage at lower line rates. This may decrease the number of participant
connections.
Video Resource Usage
Video resource usage is dependent on the participant’s line rate, resolution and Video
Quality settings.
4-4
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 4-Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing
H.264 Base Profile and High Profile Comparison
The following illustrations show a comparison between the resolutions used at various line
rates for H.264 Baseline and the H.264 High Profile Video Quality setting.
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Polycom, Inc.
Resolution usage for H.264 High Profile and H.264 Base Profile at various line rates
when Resolution Configuration is set to Resource-Quality Balanced
Resolution usage for H.264 High Profile and H.264 Base Profile at various line rates
when Resolution Configuration is set to Video Quality Optimized
4-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Figure 4-3
4-6
Resolution usage for H.264 High Profile and H.264 Base Profile at various line rates
when Resolution Configuration is set to Resource Optimized
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 4-Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing
Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Resource Usage Summary
The following Table summarizes the Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Video Resource usage for each of
the pre-defined optimization settings for each Resolution, H.264 Profile, Video Quality setting.
Table 4-2
Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Video Resource Usage
Optimization Mode
Resolution
HD720p30
Default
kbps
Profile
Balanced
Resource
Video Quality
High
832
1920
512
Base
1024
1920
832
2
2
2
High
256
384
256
Base
256
384
256
1
1
1
High
64
64
64
Base
64
64
64
1
1
1
Resources
SD 30
Default
kbps
Resources
CIF 30
Default
kbps
Resources
The table above lists resource consumption for H.264:
• CIF resolution consumes 1 resources.
•
•
4CIF resolution consumes 1 resources.
HD720p resolution consumes 2 resources.
Resolution Configuration for CP Conferences
The Resolution Configuration dialog box enables Collaboration Server administrators to
override the default video resolution decision matrix, effectively creating their own decision
matrix. The minimum threshold line rates at which endpoints are connected at the various
video resolutions can be optimized by adjusting the resolution sliders.
System resource usage is also affected by the Resolution Configuration settings. For more
information see "Video Resource Usage” on page 4-4 and "Default Minimum Threshold Line
Rates and Resource Usage Summary” on page 4-7.
Guidelines
• Resolution Slider settings affect all Continuous Presence (CP) conferences running on the
Collaboration Server. Video Switched conferences are not affected.
Polycom, Inc.
•
A system restart is not needed after changing the Resolution Slider settings.
•
Resolution Slider settings cannot be changed if there are ongoing conferences running on
the Collaboration Server.
4-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Modifying the Resolution Configuration
The Resolution Configuration dialog box is accessed by clicking Setup > Resolution
Configuration in the Collaboration Server Setup menu.
Clicking the Detailed Configuration button toggles the display of the Detailed Configuration
pane, which displays sliders for modifying minimum connection threshold line rates for
endpoints that support H.264 Base Profile or High Profile.
The Detailed Configuration pane can also be opened by clicking the Manual radio button in
the Resolution Configuration pane.
Basic Configuration
Detailed Configuration
Minimum
Connection
Threshold
Line Rate
Sliders
Resolution Configuration - Basic
The Resolution Configuration -Basic dialog box contains the following panes:
4-8
•
Max CP Resolution Pane
•
Resolution Configuration Pane
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 4-Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing
Maximum CP Resolution Pane
The Collaboration Server can be set to one of the following Maximum CP Resolutions:
•
HD 720p30
•
SD 30
•
CIF 30
Limiting Maximum Resolution
Before a selection is made in this pane, the Maximum CP Resolution of the system is
determined by the MAX_CP_RESOLUTION System Flag.
Resolution Configuration - Detailed
H.264 High Profile allows higher quality video to be transmitted at lower bit rates.
However, setting minimum bit rate thresholds that are lower than the default may affect the
video quality of endpoints that do not support the H.264 High Profile. The Collaboration
Server uses two decision matrices (Base Profile, High Profile) to enable endpoints to connect
according to their capabilities.
Resolution Configuration Sliders
The Detailed Configuration dialog box allows the administrator to configure minimum
connection threshold bit rates for endpoints that support H.264 High Profile and those that
do not support H.264 High Profile by using the following slider panes:
•
Base Profile - Endpoints that do not support H.264 High Profile connect at these
minimum threshold bit rates.
•
High Profile - Endpoints that support H.264 High Profile connect at these minimum
threshold bit rates.
Although the default minimum threshold bit rates provide acceptable video quality, the
use of higher bit rates usually results in better video quality.
Polycom, Inc.
4-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Base Profile / High Profile Resolution Slider Panes
These Video Quality settings are selected per conference and are defined in the conference
Profile and they determine the resolution matrix that will be applied globally to all
conferences. The resolution matrix is determined by the resolution configuration and can be
viewed in the Resolution Configuration sliders.
System Resource usage is affected by the Resolution Configuration settings.
Example
As shown in following diagram:
•
Moving the HD720p30 resolution slider from 1024kbps to 1920kbps increases the
minimum connection threshold line rate for that resolution. Endpoints connecting at
line rates between 1024kbps and 1920kbps that would have connected at
HD 720p30 resolution will instead connect at SD 30 resolution. Each of the affected
endpoints will connect at lower resolution but will use 1 system resource instead of 2
system resources.
Flag Settings
Setting the Maximum CP Resolution for Conferencing
The MAX_CP_RESOLUTION flag value is applied to the system during First-time Power-up
and after a system upgrade. The default value is HD720p30.
All subsequent changes to the Maximum CP Resolution of the system are made by selections
in the Max Resolution pane of the Resolution Configuration dialog box.
The Collaboration Server can be set to one of the following resolutions:
•
HD720p30
•
SD 30
•
CIF 30
Minimum Frame Rate Threshold for SD Resolution
The MINIMUM_FRAME_RATE_THRESHOLD_FOR_SD System Flag can be added and
set to prevent low quality, low frame rate video from being sent to endpoints by ensuring
that an SD channel is not opened at frame rates below the specified value. For more
information see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
4-10
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 4-Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing
Additional Video Resolutions
The following higher video quality resolutions are available:
•
CIF
352 x 288 pixels at 50 fps.
•
WCIF
512 x 288 pixels at 50 fps.
•
WSD
848 x 480 pixels at 50 fps.
•
W4CIF
1024 x 576 pixels at 30 fps.
•
HD 720p 1280 x 720 pixels at 30fps
Additional Intermediate Video Resolutions
Two higher quality, intermediate video resolutions replace the transmission of CIF (352 x
288 pixels) or SIF (352 x 240 pixels) resolutions to endpoints that have capabilities between:
•
CIF (352 x 288 pixels) and 4CIF (704 x 576 pixels) – the resolution transmitted to these
endpoints is 432 x 336 pixels.
•
SIF (352 x 240 pixels) and 4SIF (704 x 480 pixels) – the resolution transmitted to these
endpoints is 480 x 352 pixels.
•
The frame rates (depending on the endpoint’s capability) for both intermediate
resolutions are 25 or 30 fps.
Microsoft RTV Video Protocol Support in CP Conferences
Microsoft RTV (Real Time Video) protocol provides high quality video conferencing capability
to Microsoft OC (Office Communicator) Client endpoints at resolutions up to HD720p30.
Interoperability between Polycom HDX and OCS endpoints is improved.
Guidelines
Polycom, Inc.
•
The RTV protocol is supported:
•
— In SIP networking environments only
— In CP mode only
OCS (Wave 13) and Lync Server (Wave 14) clients are supported.
•
RTV is supported in Basic Cascade mode.
•
RTV is the default protocol for OCS endpoints and Lync Server clients connecting to a
conference.
•
RTV participants are supported in recorded conferences.
•
RTV participant encryption is supported using the SRTP protocol.
•
Video Preview is not supported for RTV endpoints.
•
Custom Slides in IVR Services are not supported for RTV endpoints.
4-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
HD720p30 resolution is supported at bit rates greater than 600 kbps. The following table
summarizes the resolutions supported at the various bit rates.
Table 4-3
RTV - Resolution by Bit Rate
Resolution
QCIF
Bitrate
Bitrate <180kbps
CIF30
180kbps < Bitrate < 250kbps
VGA (SD30)
250kbps < Bitrate < 600kbps *
600kbps < Bitrate *
HD720p30
* Dependant on the PC’s capability
•
System Resource usage is the same as for the H.264 protocol. Table 4-4 summarizes
System Resource usage for each of the supported resolutions.
Table 4-4
RTV - Resources by Resolution
Resolution
QCIF / CIF30
VGA (SD30) / W4CIF
HD720p30
4-12
Video Resources Used
1
1.5
3
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 4-Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing
Participant Settings
When defining a new participant or modifying an existing participant, select SIP as the
participant’s networking environment Type in the New Participant or Participant Properties General tab.
SIP
The participants Video Protocol in the New Participant or Participant Properties - Advanced tab
should be left at (or set to) its default value: Auto.
The Auto setting allows the video protocol to be negotiated according to the endpoint’s
capabilities:
•
OCS endpoints and Lync Server clients connect to the conference using the RTV
protocol.
•
Other endpoints negotiate the video protocol in the following sequence: H.264,
followed by RTV, followed by H.263 and finally H.261.
Protocol Forcing
Selecting H.264, RTV, H.263 or H.261 as the Video Protocol results in endpoints that do not
support the selected Video Protocol connecting as Secondary (audio only).
Polycom, Inc.
4-13
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring RTV
RTV information appears in all three panes of the Participant Properties - SDP tab.
Controlling Resource Allocations for Lync Clients Using RTV Video
Protocol
The number of resources used by the system to connect a Lync client with RTV is
determined according to the conference line rate and the Maximum video resolution set in
the Conference Profile.
The system flag MAX_RTV_RESOLUTION enables you to override the Collaboration
Server resolution selection and limit it to a lower resolution. Resource usage can then be
minimized the 1 or 1.5 video resources per call instead of 3 resources, depending on the
selected resolution.
Possible flag values are: AUTO (default), QCIF, CIF, VGA or HD720.
For example, if the flag is set to VGA, conference line rate is 1024Kbps, and the Profile
Maximum Resolution is set to Auto, the system will limit the Lync RTV client to a resolution
of VGA instead of HD720p and will consume only 1.5 video resources instead of 3
resources.
When set to AUTO (default), the system uses the default resolution matrix based on the
conference line rate.
To change the default flag setting, add the MAX_RTV_RESOLUTION flag to the System
Configuration flags and set its value. For information, see .
4-14
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 4-Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing
The following table summarizes the Collaboration Server resources allocated to a Lync
Client based on the MAX_RTV_RESOLUTION flag setting, the connection line rate and the
video resolution.
Table 4-5
Selected video resolution based on flag setting and conference line rate and core
processor
Selected Video Resolution Per Core Processor
Maximum
Resolution
Value
Line Rate
AUTO
HD720p
VGA
CIF
QCIF
Quad
Dual
Single
> 600 kbps
HD720p 30fps
VGA 30fps
VGA 15fps
250 kbps - 600 kbps
VGA 30fps
VGA 30fps
VGA 15fps
180 kbps - 249 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
64 kbps - 179 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
> 600 kbps
HD720p 30fps
HD720p 13fps
VGA 15fps
250 kbps - 600 kbps
VGA 30fps
VGA 30fps
VGA 15fps
180 kbps - 249 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
64 kbps - 179 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
> 600 kbps
VGA 30fps
VGA 30fps
VGA 15fps
250 kbps - 600 kbps
VGA 30fps
VGA 30fps
VGA 15fps
180 kbps - 249 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
64 kbps - 179 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
> 600 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
250 kbps - 600 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
180 kbps - 249 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
64 kbps - 179 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
> 600 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
250 kbps - 600 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
180 kbps - 249 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
64 kbps - 179 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
When the MAX_ALLOWED_RTV_HD_FRAME_RATE flag equals 0 (default value), Table 1-1 for the
MAX_RTV_RESOLUTION flag applies. When the MAX_ALLOWED_RTV_HD_FRAME_RATE flag
does not equal 0, see "Threshold HD Flag Settings using the RTV Video Protocol” on page 3-30 for
more information.
Polycom, Inc.
4-15
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The following table describes the number of allocated video resources for each video
resolution when using the RTV protocol.
Table 4-6
Allocated video resolutions per video resolution
Selected Video Resolution
Number of Allocated Video Resources
HD720p
3
VGA
1.5
CIF
1
QCIF
1
Threshold HD Flag Settings using the RTV Video Protocol
The system flag MAX_ALLOWED_RTV_HD_FRAME_RATE defines the threshold Frame
Rate (fps) in which RTV Video Protocol initiates HD resolutions.
Flag values are as follows:
•
Default: 0 (fps) - Implements any Frame Rate based on Lync RTV Client capabilities
If the MAX_RTV_RESOLUTION flag is set to AUTO dual core systems always view VGA. For more
information on Lync RTV Client capabilities, see , "Controlling Resource Allocations for Lync Clients
Using RTV Video Protocol” on page 4-14 for more information.
•
Range: 0-30 (fps)
For example, when the flag is set to 15 and the Lync RTV Client declares HD 720P at 10fps,
because the endpoint’s frame rate (fps) of 10 is less than flag setting of 15, then the
endpoint’s video will open VGA and not HD.
In another example, when the flag is set to a frame rate of 10 and the Lync RTV Client
declares HD 720P at 13fps, because the endpoint’s frame rate (fps) of 13 is greater than flag
setting of 10, then the endpoint’s video will open HD and not VGA.
4-16
•
•
Single core PC’s cannot view HD and always connect in VGA.
•
•
Quad Core PC systems always view HD, even when flag settings are set anywhere from to 0-30.
Dual Core Processor - The threshold for flag settings on Dual Core systems is 13 (fps) and less
for viewing HD. When system flag is set to 14 (fps) or higher, the RTV Video Protocol shall
connect in VGA.
The number of resources used by the system to connect a Lync client with RTV is determined
according to the conference line rate and the maximum video resolution set in the Conference
Profile. For more information, see "Microsoft RTV Video Protocol Support in CP Conferences”
on page 4-11.
Polycom, Inc.
5
Cascading Conferences
Cascading information applies to AVC Conferencing Mode (CP and mixed CP and SVC) only.
Cascading is not supported with SVC Conferencing Mode.
Cascading enables administrators to connect one conference directly to one or several
conferences, depending on the topology, creating one large conference. The conferences can
run on the same MCU or different MCUs.
There are many reasons for cascading conferences, the most common are:
•
Connecting two conferences on different MCUs at different sites.
•
Utilizing the connection abilities of different MCUs, for example, different
communication protocols.
The following cascading topologies are available for cascading:
•
Basic Cascading - only two conferences are connected (usually running on two
different Collaboration Servers). The cascaded MCUs reside on the same network.
•
Star Cascading - one or several conferences are connected to one master conference.
Conferences are usually running on separate MCUs. The cascaded MCUs reside on the
same network.
System configuration and feature availability change according to the selected cascading
topology.
Video Layout in Cascading conferences (CP and mixed CP and SVC)
Cascade links are treated as endpoints in CP conferences and are allocated resources
according to "Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Resource Usage Summary” on
page 2-12. Cascaded links in 1x1 video layout are in SD resolution.
When cascading two conferences, the video layout displayed in the cascaded conference is
determined by the selected layout in each of the two conferences. Each of the two
conferences will inherit the video layout of the other conference in one of their windows.
In order to avoid cluttering in the cascaded window, it is advised to select appropriate video
layouts in each conference before cascading them.
Conference A
Conference B
Without
Cascade
Polycom, Inc.
5-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
During
Cascading
Video layout of Conf. B in
window of Conf. A
Video layout of Conf. A in
window of Conf. B
Figure 5-1 Video Layouts in Cascaded Conferences
Guidelines
To ensure that conferences can be cascaded and video can be viewed in all conferences the
following guidelines are recommended:
•
The same version installed on all MCUs participating the cascading topology
•
The same license installed on all MCUs participating the cascading topology
•
Same Conference Parameters are defined in the Profile of the conferences participating
in the cascading topology
•
— Conference line rates should be identical
— Content rate should be identical
— Same encryption settings
DTMF codes should be defined with the same numeric codes in the IVR services
assigned to the cascading conferences
•
DTMF forwarding is suppressed
•
The video layout of the link is set to 1x1 by the appropriate system flag.
•
When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled in the Conference
Profile, all participants (including the link participants) except the lecturer are muted.
Only the lecturer is not muted.
Flags controlling Cascade Layouts
•
Setting the FORCE_1X1_LAYOUT_ON_CASCADED_LINK
_CONNECTION System Flag to YES (default) automatically forces the cascading link to
Full Screen (1x1) in CP conferences, hence displaying the speaker of one conference to a
full window in the video layout of the other conference.
Set this flag to NO when cascading between an Collaboration Server and an MGC that
is functioning as a Gateway, if the participant layouts on the MGC are not to be forced
to 1X1.
•
Setting the AVOID_VIDEO_LOOP_BACK_IN_CASCADE System Flag to YES
(default) prevents the speaker’s image from being sent back through the participant
link from the cascaded conference. This can occur in cascaded conferences with
conference layouts other than 1x1. It results in the speaker’s own video image being
displayed in the speaker’s video layout.
This option is supported with asic Cascading. If a Master MCU has two slave MCUs,
participants connected to the slave MCUs will not receive video from each other.
5-2
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 5-Cascading Conferences
For more details on defining system flags, see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
Basic Cascading
In this topology, a link is created between two conferences, usually running on two different
MCUs. The MCUs are usually installed at different locations (states/countries) to save long
distance charges by connecting each participant to their local MCU, while only the link
between the two conferences is billed as long distance call.
•
This is the only topology that enables IP cascading links:
•
— When linking two conferences using an IP connection, the destination MCU can be
indicated by:
• IP address
• H.323 Alias
— If IP cascading link is used to connect the two conferences, both MCUs must be
located in the same network.
One MCU can be used as a gateway.
•
The configuration can include two Collaboration Servers.
Basic Cascading using IP Cascaded Link
In this topology, both MCUs can be registered with the same gatekeeper or the IP addresses
of both MCUs can be used for the cascading link. Content can be sent across the Cascading
Link.
Figure 5-2 Basic Cascading Topology - IP Cascading Link
For example, MCU B is registered with the gatekeeper using 76 as the MCU prefix.
The connection between the two conferences is created when a dial out IP participant is
defined (added) to conference A whose dial out number is the dial-in number of the
conference or Entry Queue running on MCU B.
Dialing Directly to a Conference
Dial out IP participant in conference A dials out to the conference running on MCU B
entering the number in the format:
[MCU B Prefix/IP address][conference B ID].
Polycom, Inc.
5-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
For example, if MCU B prefix is 76 and the conference ID is 12345, the dial number is
7612345.
Automatic Identification of the Cascading Link
The system automatically identifies that the dial in participant is an MCU and creates a
Cascading Link and displays the link icon for the participant (
). The master-slave
relationship is randomly defined by the MCUs during the negotiation process of the
connection phase.
.
5-4
Polycom, Inc.
6
Meeting Rooms
A Meeting Room is a conference saved on the MCU in passive mode, without using any of
the system resources. A Meeting Room is automatically activated when the first participant
dials into it. Meeting Rooms can be activated as many times as required. Once activated, a
Meeting Room functions as any ongoing conference.
The Meeting Room conferencing Mode is determined by the Profile assigned to it.
In SVC Conferencing Mode, dial-in is available as follows:
•
AVC-capable endpoints (participants) can only connect to an AVC CP Meeting Room.
When dialing into SVC Only Meeting Room the calls fail.
•
SVC endpoints support both AVC and SVC video protocols. When dialing into SVC
Only conferences, they connect as SVC endpoints. When dialing into AVC CP Only
conferences, they connect as AVC endpoints.
•
Both AVC and SVC endpoints can connect to a mixed CP and SVC conference.
In AVC CP Conferencing Mode, dial-out participants can be connected to the conference
automatically, or manually. In the automatic mode the system calls all the participants one
after the other. In the manual mode, the Collaboration Server user or meeting organizer
instructs the conferencing system to call the participant. Dial-out participants must be
defined (mainly their name) and added to the conference. This mode can only be selected at
the conference/Meeting Room definition stage and cannot be changed once the conference
is ongoing.
A Meeting Room can be designated as a Permanent Conference. For more information see
"Permanent Conference” on page 3-48.
The maximum of number of Meeting Rooms that can be defined is 1000.
The system is shipped with four default Meeting Rooms as shown in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1
Polycom, Inc.
Default Meeting Rooms List
Meeting Room Name
ID
Default Line Rate
Maple_Room
1001
1920 Kbps
Oak_Room
1002
1920 Kbps
Juniper_Room
1003
1920 Kbps
Fig_Room
1004
1920 Kbps
6-1
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Meeting Rooms List
Meeting Rooms are listed in the Meeting Room list pane.
To list Meeting Rooms:
>> In the Collaboration Server Management pane, in the Frequently Used list, click the
Meeting Rooms button
.
The Meeting Rooms List is displayed.
Meeting Room List
Meeting Room Toolbar
Access to Meeting Rooms
An active Meeting Room becomes an ongoing conference and is monitored in the same way
as any other conference.
The Meeting Room List columns include:
Table 6-2
Meeting Rooms List Columns
Field
Display Name
Description
Displays the name and the icon of the Meeting Room in the Collaboration
Server Web Client.
Display Name
(cont.)
(green)
(gray)
Routing Name
A passive video Meeting Room that is waiting to be
activated.
The ASCII name that registers conferences, Meeting Rooms, Entry
Queues and SIP Factories in the various gatekeepers and SIP Servers. In
addition, the Routing Name is also:
• The name that endpoints use to connect to conferences.
•
6-2
An active video Meeting Room that was activated when
the first participant connected to it.
The name used by all conferencing devices to connect to conferences
that must be registered with the gatekeeper and SIP Servers.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 6-Meeting Rooms
Table 6-2
Meeting Rooms List Columns (Continued)
Field
Description
ID
Displays the Meeting Room ID. This number must be communicated to
H.323 conference participants to enable them to dial in.
Duration
Displays the duration of the Meeting Room in hours using the format
HH:MM (default 01:00).
Conference
Password
The password to be used by participants to
access the Meeting Room. If blank, no password
is assigned to the conference. This password is
valid only in conferences that are configured to
prompt for a conference password in the IVR
Service.
Chairperson
Password
Displays the password to be used by the users to
identify themselves as Chairpersons. They are
granted additional privileges. If left blank, no
chairperson password is assigned to the conference. This password is valid only in conferences
that are configured to prompt for a chairperson
password.
Profile
Displays the name of the Profile assigned to the Meeting Room. For more
information, see "Conference Profiles” on page 2-1.
SIP Registration
The Collaboration
Server can be
configured to
automatically
generate conference
and chairperson
passwords when
these fields are left
blank.
For more information,
see the "Automatic
Password Generation
Flags” on
page 21-36.
The status of registration with the SIP server:
Not configured - Registration with the SIP Server was not enabled in
the Conference Profile assigned to this conferencing Entity. In Multiple
Networks configuration, If one service is not configured while others
are configured and registered, the status reflects the registration with
the configured Network Services. The registration status with each SIP
Server can be viewed in the Properties - Network Services dialog box
of each conferencing entity.
When SIP registration is not enabled in the conference profile, the
Collaboration Server's registering to SIP Servers will each register with
an URL derived from its own signaling address.
•
Polycom, Inc.
•
Failed - Registration with the SIP Server failed. This may be due to
incorrect definition of the SIP server in the IP Network Service, or the
SIP server may be down, or any other reason the affects the
connection between the Collaboration Server or the SIP Server to the
network.
•
•
Registered - the conferencing entity is registered with the SIP Server.
Partially Registered - This status is available only in Multiple
Networks configuration, when the conferencing entity failed to register
to all the required Network Services if more than one Network Service
was selected.
6-3
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Meeting Room Toolbar & Right-click Menu
The Meeting Room toolbar and right-click menus provide the following functionality:
Table 6-3
Toolbar
button
Meeting Room Toolbar and Right-click Menus
Right-click menu
Description
New Meeting Room
Select this button to create a new Meeting Room.
Delete Meeting Room
Select any Meeting Room and then click this button to
delete the Meeting Room.
Dial out to AVC participants assigned to a Meeting Room will only start when the dial in participant
who has activated it has completed the connection process and the Meeting Room has become an
ongoing conference.
Creating a New Meeting Room
To create a new meeting room:
>> In the Meeting Rooms pane, click the New Meeting Room
button or right-click an
empty area in the pane and then click New Meeting Room.
The New Meeting Room dialog box is displayed.
The definition procedure is the same as for the new conference (with the exception of
Reserved Resources for Audio and Video participants).
For more information, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Starting a CP Conference from the Conferences Pane” on page 3-12.
Microsoft Lync users can connect an Collaboration Server Meeting Room to a
conference running on the Microsoft A/V MCU. This allows Collaboration Server Lync
users to connect with a conference in progress on the A/V MCU and be an active
participant in the conference.
For more information, see "Connecting a Collaboration Server Meeting Room to a Microsoft
AV-MCU Conference” on page I-33.
6-4
Polycom, Inc.
7
Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences
and SIP Factories
Entry Queues
An Entry Queue (EQ) is a special routing lobby to access conferences. Participants connect
to a single-dial lobby and are routed to their destination conference according to the
Conference ID they enter. The Entry Queue remains in a passive state when there are no
callers in the queue (in between connections) and is automatically activated once a caller
dials its dial-in number.
Participants can be moved from the Entry Queue and the destination conference if both
conferencing entities are set to the same conferencing parameters: Conferencing Mode, Line
rate and video parameters. For example, participants can be moved from SVC Only Entry
Queue to SVC Only conference, or from a mixed CP and SVC Entry Queue to a mix CP and
SVC conference, from CP only Entry Queue to CP only conference.
The maximum of number of Entry Queues that can be defined is 40.
The parameters (bit rate and video properties) with which the participants connect to the
Entry Queue and later to their destination conference are defined in the Conference Profile
that is assigned to the Entry Queue. For example, if the Profile Bit Rate is set to 384 Kbps, all
endpoints connect to the Entry Queue and later to their destination conference using this bit
rate even if they are capable of connecting at higher bit rates.
An Entry Queue IVR Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue to enable the voice
prompts guiding the participants through the connection process. The Entry Queue IVR
Service also includes a video slide that is displayed to the participants while staying in the
Entry Queue (during their connection process).
Different Entry Queues can be created to accommodate different conferencing modes,
conferencing parameters (by assigning different Profiles) and prompts in different
languages (by assigning different Entry Queue IVR Services).
For more information, see "IVR Services” on page 17-1.
The Entry Queue can also be used for Ad Hoc conferencing. If the Ad Hoc option is enabled
for the Entry Queue, when the participant enters the target conference ID the system checks
whether a conference with that ID is already running on the MCU. If not, the system
automatically creates a new ongoing conference with that ID.
For more information about Ad Hoc conferencing, see "Ad Hoc Conferencing” on page 7-11.
An Entry Queue can be designated as Transit Entry Queue to which calls with dial strings
containing incomplete or incorrect conference routing information are transferred.
For more information, see "Transit Entry Queue” on page 7-5.
Polycom, Inc.
7-1
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Default Entry Queue properties
The system is shipped with a default Entry Queue whose properties are:
Table 7-1
Default Entry Queue Properties
Parameter
Value
Display Name
DefaultEQ
The user can change the name if required.
Routing Name
DefaultEQ
The default Routing Name cannot be changed.
ID
1000
Profile name
Factory_Mixd_CP_SVC_Video_Profile. Profile Bit Rate is set to
1920Kbps.
Factory_Video_Profile. Profile Bit Rate is set to 384 Kbps.
Entry Queue Service
Entry Queue IVR Service. This is default Entry Queue IVR Service
shipped with the system and includes default voice messages and
prompts in English.
Ad Hoc
Enabled
Defining a New Entry Queue
You can modify the properties of the default Entry Queue and define additional Entry
Queues to suit different conferencing requirements.
To define a new Entry Queue:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management - Rarely Used pane, click Entry Queues.
.
7-2
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 7-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
2
In the Entry Queues list pane, click the New Entry Queue
The New Entry Queue dialog box opens.
3
Define the following parameters:
button.
Table 7-2: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters
Option
Description
Display Name
The Display Name is the conferencing entity name in native language
character sets to be displayed in the Collaboration Server Web
Client.
In conferences, Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP factories the
system automatically generates an ASCII name for the Display Name
field that can be modified using Unicode encoding.
• English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain the most
characters (length varies according to the field).
•
European and Latin text length is approximately half the length of
the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the length of the
maximum.
The maximum length of text fields also varies according to the
mixture of character sets (Unicode and ASCII).
Maximum field length in ASCII is 80 characters. If the same name is
already used by another conference, Meeting Room or Entry Queue,
the Collaboration Server displays an error message requesting you to
enter a different name.
Polycom, Inc.
7-3
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 7-2: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters (Continued)
Option
Description
Routing Name
Enter a name using ASCII text only. If no Routing Name is entered,
the system automatically assigns a new name as follows:
• If an all ASCII text is entered in Display Name, it is used also as
the Routing Name.
•
4
If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text (or full Unicode text)
is entered in Display Name, the ID (such as Conference ID) is
used as the Routing Name.
Profile
Select the Profile to be used by the Entry Queue. The default Profile
is selected by default. This Profile determines the Bit Rate and the
video properties with which participants connect to the Entry Queue
and destination conference.
In Ad Hoc conferencing it is used to define the new conference
properties.
ID
Enter a unique number identifying this conferencing entity for dial in.
Default string length is 4 digits.
If you do not manually assign the ID, the MCU assigns one after the
completion of the definition. The ID String Length is defined by the
flag NUMERIC_CONF_ID_LEN in the System Configuration.
Entry Queue IVR
Service
The default Entry Queue IVR Service is selected. If required, select
an alternate Entry Queue IVR Service, which includes the required
voice prompts, to guide participants during their connection to the
Entry Queue.
Ad Hoc
Select this check box to enable the Ad Hoc option for this Entry
Queue.
IVR Service Provider
Only
Select this check box to designate this Entry Queue as a special
Entry Queue that provides IVR Services to SIP calls on behalf of the
DMA. The IVR service provider only EntryQueue does not route the
SIP calls to a target conference. Instead the DMA handles the call.
For more details, see "IVR Provider Entry Queue (Shared Number
Dialing)” on page 7-6.
Click OK.
The new Entry Queue is added to the Entry Queues list.
7-4
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 7-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
Listing Entry Queues
To view the list of Entry Queues:
>> In the Collaboration Server Management - Rarely Used pane, click Entry Queues.
The Entry Queues are listed in the Entry Queues pane.
You can double-click an Entry Queue to view its properties.
Modifying the EQ Properties
To modify the EQ:
>> In the Entry Queues pane, either double-click or right-click and select Entry Queue
Properties of the selected Entry Queue in the list.
The Entry Queue Properties dialog box is displayed. All the fields may be modified
except Routing Name.
Transit Entry Queue
A Transit Entry Queue is an Entry Queue to which calls with dial strings containing
incomplete or incorrect conference routing information are transferred.
IP Calls are routed to the Transit Entry Queue when:
•
A gatekeeper is not used, or where calls are made directly to the Collaboration Server’s
Signaling IP Address, with incorrect or without a Conference ID.
•
When a gatekeeper is used and only the prefix of the Collaboration Server is dialed,
with incorrect or without a Conference ID.
•
When the dialed prefix is followed by an incorrect conference ID.
When no Transit Entry Queue is defined, all calls containing incomplete or incorrect
conference routing information are rejected by the Collaboration Server.
In the Transit Entry Queue, the Entry Queue IVR Service prompts the participant for a
destination conference ID. Once the correct information is entered, the participant is
transferred to the destination conference.
Setting a Transit Entry Queue
The Collaboration Server factory default settings define the Default Entry Queue also as the
Transit Entry Queue. You can designate another Entry Queue as the Transit Entry Queue.
Only one Transit Entry Queue may be defined per Collaboration Server and selecting another
Entry Queue as the Transit Entry Queue automatically cancels the previous selection.
To designate an Entry Queue as Transit Entry Queue:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management - Rarely Used pane, click Entry Queues.
Polycom, Inc.
7-5
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
2
In the Entry Queues list, right-click the Entry Queue entry and then click Set Transit
Entry Queue.
The Entry Queue selected as Transit Entry Queue is displayed in bold.
To cancel the Transit Entry Queue setting:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management - Rarely Used pane click Entry Queues.
2
In the Entry Queues list, right-click the Transit Entry Queue entry and then click Cancel
Transit Entry Queue.
IVR Provider Entry Queue (Shared Number Dialing)
In an environment that includes a DMA, the Collaboration Server Entry Queue can be
configured to provide the IVR Services on behalf of the DMA to SIP endpoints. It displays
the Welcome Slide, plays the welcome message and retrieves the destination conference ID
that is entered by the participant using DTMF codes.
To enable this feature, a special Entry Queue that is defined as IVR Service Provider only is
created. This Entry Queue does not forward calls to conferences running on the
Collaboration Server and its main functionality is to provide IVR services.
Call Flow
The SIP participant dials the DMA Virtual Entry Queue number, for example
1000@dma.polycom.com.
The DMA forwards the SIP call to the Collaboration Server, to a special Entry Queue that is
configured as IVR Service Provider Only. The participant is prompted to enter the conference
ID using DTMF codes.
Once the participant enters the conference ID, the conference ID is forwarded to the DMA,
enabling the DMA to connect the SIP endpoint to the destination conference or create a new
conference and connect the participant to that conference.
Guidelines
7-6
•
An Entry Queue defined as IVR service provider only does not route the SIP call to a
target conference and it cannot be used to rout calls on the Collaboration Server. In such
a configuration, the DMA handles the calls. Therefore, normal Entry Queues must be
defined separately.
•
Operator Assistance must be disabled in the IVR Service assigned to this Entry Queue.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 7-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
•
Only the conference ID prompts should be configured. Other prompts are not
supported in IVR Service Provider Only configuration.
•
H.323 calls to this Entry Queue are rejected.
•
The DMA must be configured to locate the IVR Service Provider Only Entry Queue on
the Collaboration Server. To locate the Entry Queue the DMA requires the Entry
Queue’s ID number and the Collaboration Server Signaling IP address (xxx.xx.xxx.xx).
Collaboration Server Configuration
Entry Queue IVR Service
If required, create a special Entry Queue IVR Service in which the Operator Assistance option
is disabled and only the Conference ID prompts are enabled.
Entry Queue
>> In the New Entry Queue dialog box, select IVR Service Provider Only.
— Enter the Entry Queue ID that will be used by the DMA to forward the SIP calls to
this Entry Queue.
— Select the special Entry Queue IVR Service if one was created.
— Ad Hoc should not be selected with this type of Entry Queue.
Polycom, Inc.
7-7
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
SIP Factories
A SIP Factory is a conferencing entity that enables SIP endpoints to create Ad Hoc
conferences. The system is shipped with a default SIP Factory, named DefaultFactory.
When a SIP endpoint calls the SIP Factory URI, a new conference is automatically created
based on the Profile parameters, and the endpoint joins the conference.
The SIP Factory URI must be registered with the SIP server to enable routing of calls to the
SIP Factory. To ensure that the SIP factory is registered, the option to register Factories must
be selected in the Default IP Network Service.
The maximum of number of SIP Factories that can be defined is 40.
Creating SIP Factories
To create a new SIP Factory:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management - Rarely Used pane, click SIP Factories.
2
7-8
In the SIP Factories list pane, click the New SIP Factory
The New Factory dialog box opens.
button.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 7-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
3
Define the following parameters:
Table 7-3: New Factory Properties
Option
Description
Display Name
Enter the SIP Factory name that will be displayed.
The Display Name is the conferencing entity name in native language
character sets to be displayed in the Collaboration Server Web Client.
In conferences, Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP factories the
system automatically generates an ASCII name for the Display Name
field that can be modified using Unicode encoding.
• English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain the most
characters (length varies according to the field).
•
European and Latin text length is approximately half the length of
the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the length of the
maximum.
The maximum length of text fields also varies according to the
mixture of character sets (Unicode
and ASCII).
Maximum field length in ASCII is 80 characters. If the same name is
already used by another conference, Meeting Room or Entry Queue,
the Collaboration Server displays an error message requesting you to
enter a different name.
Routing Name
The Routing Name is defined by the user, however if no Routing
Name is entered, the system will automatically assign a new name
when the Profile is saved as follows:
• If an all ASCII text is entered in Display Name, it is used also as
the Routing Name.
•
4
Polycom, Inc.
If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text (or full Unicode text)
is entered in Display Name, the ID (such as Conference ID) is
used as the Routing Name.
Profile
The default Profile is selected by default. If required, select the
conference Profile from the list of Profiles defined in the MCU.
A new conference is created using the parameters defined in the
Profile.
Automatic
Connection
Select this check box to immediately accept the conference creator
endpoint to the conference. If the check box is cleared, the endpoint
is redirected to the conference and then connected.
Click OK.
The new SIP Factory is added to the list.
7-9
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
SIP Registration & Presence for Entry Queues and SIP
Factories
Entry Queues and SIP Factories can be registered with SIP servers. This enables Office
Communication Server or LYNC server client users to see the availability status (Available,
Offline, or Busy) of these conferencing entities and to connect to them directly from the
Buddy List.
Guidelines
•
The Entry Queue or SIP Factory must be added to the Active Directory as a User.
•
SIP Registration must be enabled in the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue or SIP Factory.
For more information see Step of "Defining New Profiles” on page 2-18.
Monitoring Registration Status
The SIP registration status can be viewed in the Entry Queue or SIP Factory list panes.
The following statuses are displayed:
•
7-10
Not configured - Registration with the SIP Server was not enabled in the Conference
Profile assigned to the Entry Queue or SIP Factory.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 7-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
When SIP registration is not enabled in the conference profile, the Collaboration
Server's registering to SIP Servers will each register with an URL derived from its own
signaling address. This unique URL replaces the non-unique URL, dummy_tester, used
in previous versions.
•
Failed - Registration with the SIP Server failed.
This may be due to incorrect definition of the SIP server in the IP Network Service, or the
SIP Server may be down, or any other reason the affects the connection between the
Collaboration Server or the SIP Server to the network.
•
Registered - the conferencing entity is registered with the SIP Server.
•
Partially Registered - This status is available only in Multiple Networks configuration,
when the conferencing entity failed to register to all the required Network Services if
more than one Network Service was selected for Registration.
Ad Hoc Conferencing
The Entry Queue can also be used for Ad Hoc conferencing. If the Ad Hoc option is enabled
for the Entry Queue, when the participant enters the target conference ID the system checks
whether a conference with that ID is already running on the MCU. If not, the system
automatically creates a new ongoing conference with that ID. The conference parameters are
based on the Profile linked to the Entry Queue. As opposed to Meeting Rooms, that are
predefined conferences saved on the MCU, Ad Hoc conferences are not stored on the MCU.
Once an Ad Hoc conference is started it becomes an ongoing conference, and it is monitored
and controlled as any standard ongoing conference.
An external database application can be used for authentication with Ad Hoc conferences.
The authentication can be done at the Entry Queue level and at the conference level. At the
Entry Queue level, the MCU queries the external database server whether the participant
has the right to create a new conference. At the conference level the MCU verifies whether
the participant can join the conference and if the participant is the conference chairperson.
The external database can populate certain conference parameters.
For more information about Ad Hoc conferencing, see Appendix D, "Ad Hoc Conferencing and
External Database Authentication” on page D-1.
Polycom, Inc.
7-11
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
7-12
Polycom, Inc.
8
Address Book
The Address Book stores information about the people and businesses you communicate
with. The Address Book stores, among many other fields, IP addresses, phone numbers and
network communication protocols used by the participant’s endpoint. By utilizing the
Address Book you can quickly and efficiently assign or designate participants to
conferences. Groups defined in the Address Book help facilitate the creation of conferences.
Participants can be added to the Address Book individually or in Groups.
The maximum of number of Address Book entries that can be defined on the Collaboration
Server is 4000.
When using the Polycom CMA Global Address Book, all entries are listed.
The Address Book can be organized into a multi-level hierarchical structure. It can be used
to mirror the organizational layout of the enterprises and it is especially suitable for largescale enterprises with a considerable number of conference participants and organizational
departments and divisions. Groups in the Address Book can contain sub-groups or subtrees, and individual address book participant entities.
The Address Book provides flexibility in arranging conference participants into groups in
multiple levels and the capabilities to add groups or participants, move or copy participants
to multiple groups within the address book, and use the address book to add groups and
participants to a conference or Conference Template.
Importing and exporting of Address Books enables organizations to seamlessly distribute
up-to-date Address Books to multiple Collaboration Server units. It is not possible to
distribute Address Books to external databases running on applications such as Polycom’s
ReadiManager (SE200) or Polycom CMA. External databases can run in conjunction with
Collaboration Server units, but must be managed from the external application. For
example, new participants cannot be added to the external database from the Collaboration
Server Web Client. To enable the Collaboration Server to run with an external database such
as Polycom CMA, the appropriate system configuration flags must be set.
For more information, see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
Integration with Polycom CMA Global Address Book is supported. For more information, see
"Integrating the Polycom CMA™ Address Book with the Collaboration Server” on page 8-23.
Integration with the SE200 GAB (Global Address Book) is not supported.
Polycom, Inc.
8-1
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Viewing the Address Book
You can view the participants currently defined in the Address Book. The first time the
Collaboration Server Web Client is accessed, the Address Book pane is displayed.
Anchor Pin
Address Book pane
The Address Book contains two panes:
•
Navigation pane - contains the hierarchical tree and All Participants list
•
List pane - displays the list of all the members of the selected group and sub-groups.
The Navigation pane of the Address Book contains the following types of lists:
8-2
•
Hierarchical — displays a multi-level hierarchical tree of groups and participants.
Double-clicking a group on the navigation pane displays the group participants and
sub-groups in the List pane.
•
All Participants — double-clicking this selection displays the single unique entity of all
the participants in a single level. When adding a participant to a group, the system adds
a link to the participant’s unique entity that is stored in the All Participants list. The
same participant may be added to many groups at different levels, and all these
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
participant links are associated with the same definition of the participant in the All
Participants list. If the participant properties are changed in one group, they will be
changed in all the groups accordingly.
Displaying and Hiding the Group Members in the Navigation Pane
The currently selected group, whose group members are displayed in the Address Book List
pane is identified by a special icon
.
To expand the group to view the group members:
>> Double-click the group name or click the Expand
button.
The address book entities and sub-groups of the group is displayed in the right group
list pane. You can drill down the sub-group to view address book entities in the subgroup.
To move up to the next level and view the members in the upper level:
>> Double-click the navigation arrow
button in the group members pane.
To collapse a group:
>> Double-click the group name or click the Collapse
button.
Participants List Pane Information
The Participants List pane displays the following information for each participant:
Table 8-1
Docked Address Book List Columns
Field/Option
Description
Type
Indicates whether the participant is a video (
Name
Displays the name of the participant.
IP Address/Phone
Enter the IP address of the participant’s endpoint.
• For H.323 participant define either the endpoint IP address or alias.
•
Network
Polycom, Inc.
) or voice (
).
For SIP participant define either the endpoint IP address or the SIP
address.
The network communication protocol used by the endpoint to connect to
the conference: H.323 or SIP .
8-3
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 8-1
Docked Address Book List Columns (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Dialing Direction
Dial-in – The participant dials in to the conference.
Dial-out – The Collaboration Server dials out to the participant.
Encryption
Displays whether the endpoint uses encryption for its media.
The default setting is Auto, indicating that the endpoint must connect
according to the conference encryption setting.
For information on adding and modifying participants in the Address Book, see "Managing
the Address Book” on page 8-7.
Displaying and Hiding the Address Book
The Address Book can be hidden it by clicking the anchor pin ( ) button in the pane header.
The Address Book pane closes and a tab is displayed at the right edge of the screen.
>> Click the tab to re-open the Address Book.
Click tab to open Address Book
8-4
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
Adding Participants from the Address Book to
Conferences
You can add individual participants or a group of participants from the Address Book to a
conference.
Adding Individual Participants from the Address Book to Conferences
You can add a participant or multiple participants to a new conference, ongoing
conferences, or to Conference Templates by using the drag-and-drop operation.
Multiple selection of group levels is not available.
To add a participant to a new conference or an ongoing conference:
1 In the Address Book Navigation pane, select the group from which to add participants.
2
In the Address Book List pane, select the participant or participants you want to add to
the conference.
3
Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the selection to the Participants pane of
the conference.
The participants are added to the conference.
Adding a Group from the Address Book to Conferences
You can add a group of participants to a new conference, ongoing conferences, or to
Conference Templates by using the drag-and-drop operation.
To add a group to a new conference or an ongoing conference:
1 In the Address Book Navigation pane, select the group you want to add to the conference.
2
Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the selection to the Participants pane of
the conference.
The participants in the group level and all sub-levels are added to the conference.
Polycom, Inc.
8-5
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Participant Groups
A group is a predefined collection of participants. A group provides an easy way to manage
clusters of participants that are in the same organizational structure and to connect a
combination of endpoints to a conference. For example, if you frequently conduct
conferences with the marketing department, you can create a group called “Marketing
Team” that contains the endpoints of all members of the marketing team.
Groups can contain participants and sub-groups. You can define up to ten levels in the
“Main” group.
Managing Groups in the Address Book
To manage the groups in the Address Book:
1 In the Address Book Navigation pane, right-click the group you want to manage.
The Groups menu is displayed.
2
Select one of the following actions:
Table 8-2
8-6
Groups Drop-down Menu Actions
Action
Description
New Group
Creates a new group within the current group.
New Participant
Adds a new participant within the current group.
Copy Group
Copies the current group to be pasted as an additional group.
Paste Group
Places the copied group into the current group. The group name of
the copied group is defined with “Copy” at the end of the group name.
This action is only available after a Copy Group action has been
implemented.
Paste Participant
Places the copied participant into the current selected group. This
action is available after a Copy or Cut action was activated when
selecting a single participant or multiple participants.
Paste Participant as
New
Pastes as a new participant into the selected group. This paste action
adds “Copy” at the end of the participant name. This action is only
available after a Copy action was activated for a single participant.
Rename Group
Renames the group name.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
Table 8-2
Groups Drop-down Menu Actions (Continued)
Action
Description
Delete Group
Deletes the group and all of its members. This action displays a
message requesting confirmation to delete the group and all
members connected with the group.
Additionally, you can drag a group from one location in the Address Book to another
location, moving the group and all its members, including sub-groups, to its new location
using the drag-and-drop operation. Moving a group to a new location can be done in the
navigation pane or the list pane.
To drag a group from a location in the address book to another location:
1 Select the group you want to move.
2
Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the selection to the new location. The
new location can be either the “Main” root level or another group level.
The group and all its members (participants and groups) are moved to the new address
book location.
Managing the Address Book
Guidelines
•
The multi-level Address Book can only be used in a local configuration on the
Collaboration Server. The hierarchical structure cannot be implemented with the Global
Address Book (GAB).
•
Up to ten levels can be defined in the hierarchical structure of the Address Book.
•
The default name of the root level is “Main”. The “Main” root level cannot be deleted
but the root level name can be modified.
•
Address Book names support multilingual characters.
•
Participants in the Address Book can be copied to multiple groups. However, only one
participant exists in the Address Book. Groups that contain the same participants refer to
the same definition of the participant entity.
Adding a Participant to the Address Book
Adding participants to the Address Book can be performed by the following methods:
•
Directly in the Address Book.
•
Moving or saving a participant from an ongoing conference to the Address Book.
When adding dial-out participants to the ongoing conference, the system automatically
dials out to the participants using the Network Service defined for the connection in the
participant properties.
Polycom, Inc.
8-7
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Adding a new participant to the Address Book Directly
You can add a new participant to the “Main” group or to a group in the Address Book.
Additionally, you can add a participant from a new conference, ongoing conference, or
Conference Template.
To add a new participant to the Address Book:
1 In the Address Book - Navigation pane, select the group to where you want to add the
new participant.
2
Click the New Participant button ( ) or right-click the group to where you want to
add the participant and select the New Participant option.
— Alternatively, click anywhere in the List pane and select the New Participant
option.
The New Participant - General dialog box opens.
8-8
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
3
Define the following fields:
Table 8-3 New Participant – General Properties
Field
Description
Name
Enter the name of the participant or the endpoint as it will be
displayed in the Collaboration Server Web Client.
The Name field can be modified using Unicode encoding.
•
English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain the most
characters (length varies according to the field).
•
European and Latin text length is approximately half the length of
the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the length of the
maximum.
Maximum field length in ASCII is 80 characters.
The maximum length of text fields varies according to the mixture of
character sets used (Unicode and ASCII).
This name can also become the endpoint name that is displayed in
the video layout. For more details about endpoint (site) names, see
the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Text Indication in the Video Layout” on page 3-31”.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Endpoint Website
Dialing Direction
Click the Endpoint Website hyperlink to connect to the internal
website of the participant’s endpoint. It enables you to perform
administrative, configuration and troubleshooting activities on the
endpoint.
The connection is available only if the IP address of the endpoint’s
internal site is defined in the Website IP Address field.
Select the dialing direction:
Dial-in – The participant dials in to the conference. This field
applies to IP participants only.
•
•
Type
IP Address
Dial-out – The MCU dials out to the participant.
The network communication protocol used by the endpoint to connect
to the conference: H.323 or SIP.
The fields in the dialog box change according to the selected network
type.
Enter the IP address of the participant’s endpoint.
For H.323 participant define either the endpoint IP address or
alias.
•
•
For SIP participant define either the endpoint IP address or the
SIP address.
For Collaboration Servers registered to a gatekeeper, the
Collaboration Server can be configured to dial and receive calls to
and from H.323 endpoints using the IP address in the event that the
Gatekeeper is not functioning. For more information, see "Gateway
Calls” on page 19-1.
Polycom, Inc.
8-9
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 8-3 New Participant – General Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
Alias Name/Type
(H.323 Only)
If you are using the endpoint’s alias and not the IP address, first
select the type of alias and then enter the endpoint’s alias:
•
•
•
H.323 ID (alphanumeric ID)
E.164 (digits 0-9, * and #)
Email ID (email address format,
e.g. abc@example.com)
•
Participant Number (digits 0-9, * and #)
Note:
• Although all types are supported, the type of alias is dependent on
the gatekeeper’s capabilities. The most commonly supported alias
types are H.323 ID and E.164.
•
SIP Address/Type
(SIP Only)
This field is used to enter the Entry Queue ID, target Conference
ID and Conference Password when defining a cascaded link.
Select the format in which the SIP address is written:
SIP URI - Uses the format of an E-mail address, typically
containing a user name and a host name: sip:[user]@[host]. For
example, sip:dan@polycom.com.
•
•
TEL URI - Used when the endpoint does not specify the domain
that should interpret a telephone number that has been input by
the user. Rather, each domain through which the request passes
would be given that opportunity.
For example, a user in an airport might log in and send requests
through an outbound proxy in the airport. If the users enters “411”
(this is the phone number for local directory assistance in the United
States), this number needs to be interpreted and processed by the
outbound proxy in the airport, and not by the user's home domain. In
this case, tel: 411 is the correct choice.
8-10
Endpoint Website IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the endpoint’s internal site to enable
connection to it for management and configuration purposes.
This field is automatically completed the first time that the endpoint
connects to the Collaboration Server. If the field is blank it can be
manually completed by the system administrator. The field can be
modified while the endpoint is connected
Audio Only
Select this check box to define the participant as a voice participant,
with no video capabilities.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
Table 8-3 New Participant – General Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
Extension/Identifier
String
Dial-out participants that connect to an external device such as
Cascaded Links or Recording Links may be required to enter a
conference password or an identifying string to connect. Enter the
required string as follows:
[p]…[p][string]
For example: pp4566#
p - optional - indicates a pause of one second before sending the
DTMF string. Enter several concatenated [p]s to increase the delay
before sending the string. The required delay depends on the
configuration of the external device or conference IVR system.
String - enter the required string using the digits 0-9 and the
characters * and #. The maximum number of characters that can be
entered is identical to the H.323 alias length.
If the information required to access the device/conference is
composed of several strings, for example, the conference ID and the
conference password, this information can be entered as one string,
where pauses [p] are added between the strings for the required
delays, as follows:
[p]…[p][string][p]…[p] [string]...
For example: p23pp*34p4566#
Extension/Identifier
String (continued)
4
The Collaboration Server automatically sends this information upon
connection to the destination device/conference. The information is
sent by the Collaboration Server as DTMF code to the destination
device/conference, simulating the standard IVR procedure.
Usually, additional definitions are not required and you can use the system defaults for
the remaining parameters. In such a case, click OK.
To modify the default settings for advanced parameters, click the Advanced tab.
Polycom, Inc.
8-11
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
5
Define the following Advanced parameters:
Table 8-4 New Participant – Advanced Properties
Field
Description
Video Bit Rate / Auto
The Auto check box is automatically selected to use the Line Rate
defined for the conference.
Note: This check box cannot be cleared when defining a new
participant during an ongoing conference.
To specify the video rate for the endpoint, clear this check box and
then select the required video rate.
Video Protocol
Select the video compression standard that will be forced by the MCU
on the endpoint when connecting to the conference: H.261, H.263,
H.264 or RTV.
Select Auto to let the MCU select the video protocol according to the
endpoint’s capabilities.
Resolution
The Auto check box is automatically selected to use the Resolution
defined for the conference.
To specify the Resolution for the participant, select the required
resolution from the drop-down menu.
8-12
Broadcasting Volume
+ Listening Volume
To adjust the volume the participant broadcasts to the conference or
the volume the participant hears the conference, move the slider;
each unit represents an increase or decrease of 3 dB (decibel). The
volume scale is from 1 to 10, where 1 is the weakest and 10 is the
strongest. The default connection value is 5.
Encryption
Select whether the endpoint uses encryption for its connection to the
conference.
Auto (default setting) indicates that the endpoint will connect
according to the conference encryption setting.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
Table 8-4 New Participant – Advanced Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
AGC
AGC (Auto Gain Control) mechanism regulates noise and audio
volume by keeping the received audio signals of all participants
balanced. Select this check box to enable the AGC mechanism for
participants with weaker audio signals.
Notes:
• To be enable AGC, set the value of the ENABLE_AGC System
Flag in system.cfg to be YES. The flag’s default value is NO.
Cascaded Link
(IP Only)
•
If the System Flag does not exist in the system, it must be
manually added to the System Configuration. For more
information see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
•
Enabling AGC may result in amplification of background noise.
If this participant is used as a link between conferences select:
Slave, if the participant is defined in a conference running on a
Slave MCU.
•
•
Master, if the participant is defined in a conference running on the
Master MCU.
It enables the connection of one conference directly to another
conference using an H.323 connection only. The conferences can run
on the same MCU or different MCU’s. For more information, see
"Enabling Cascading” on page 5-20.
6
To add general information about the participant, such as e-mail, company name, and
so on, click the Information tab and type the necessary details in the Info 1-4 fields.
Text in the info fields can be added in Unicode format (length: 31 characters).
7
Click OK.
The new participant is added to the selected group in the address book.
Adding a Participant from an Ongoing Conference to the Address Book
You can add a participant to the Address Book directly from an ongoing conference.
When adding a participant to the address book from a new conference, Participants list of an
ongoing conference or Conference Template, the participant is always added to the “Main” group.
To add a participant from the conference to the Address Book:
1 During an ongoing conference, select the participant in the Participant pane and either
click the Add Participant to Address Book button ( ) or right-click and select Add
Participant to Address Book.
The participant is added to the Address Book.
Alternatively, you could:
a
Polycom, Inc.
Double-click the participant’s icon or right-click the participant icon and click
Participant Properties.
8-13
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Participant Properties window opens.
b
Click the Add to Address Book button.
If the participant name is already listed in the All Participants list, an error message is displayed. In
such a case, change the name of the participant before adding the participant to the address book.
Modifying Participants in the Address Book
When required, you can modify the participant’s properties.
To modify participant properties in the Address Book:
1 In the Address Book - Navigation pane, select the group to where the participant to
modify is listed.
8-14
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
2
In the Address Book - List pane, double-click the participant’s icon.
The Participant’s Properties window is displayed.
3
Modify the necessary properties in the window, such as dialing direction,
communication protocol type, and so on. You can modify any property in any of the
three tabs: General, Advanced and Info.
4
Click OK.
The changes to the participant’s properties are updated.
Deleting Participants from the Address Book
To delete participants from the Address Book:
1 In the Address Book - Navigation pane, select the group where the participant to delete is
listed.
2
In the Address Book - List pane, either select the participant to delete and then click the
Delete Participant ( ) button, or right-click the participant icon and then click the
Delete Participant option.
3
A confirmation message is displayed depending on the participant’s assignment to
groups in the address book:
a
When the participant belongs to only one group: click Yes to permanently delete
the participant from the address book.
b
When the participant belongs to multiple groups, a message is displayed
requesting whether to delete the participant from the Address Book or from the
current selected group. Select:
•
Polycom, Inc.
Current group to delete the participant from the selected group
8-15
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
Address Book to permanently delete the participant from the address book
(all groups).
Click OK to perform the delete operation or Cancel to exit the delete operation.
Copying or Moving a Participant
You can copy or move a participant from one group to another group using the Copy, Cut,
and Paste options. A participant can belong to multiple groups. However, there is only one
entity per participant. Groups that contain the same participants refer to the same definition
of the participant entity. Alternatively, you can drag a participant from one location in the
Address Book to another location, moving the participant to its new location using the dragand-drop operation.
The cut and copy actions are not available when selecting multiple participants.
To copy or move a participant to another group:
1 In the Address Book - Navigation pane, select the group from where to copy the
participant.
2
In the Address Book - List pane, select the participant you want to copy.
3
Right-click the selected participant and select one of the following functions from the
drop-down menu:
Table 8-5
4
8-16
Copy/Cut Functions
Function
Description
Copy Participant
Copies the participant to be pasted into an additional group.
Cut Participant
Moves the participant from the current group to a different group.
Alternatively, you can move a participant to another location by
dragging the participant to the new location.
In the Address Book navigation pane, navigate and select the group in which you want to
paste the participant.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
5
Right-click the selected group and click one of the following Paste functions from the
drop-down menu:
Table 8-6
Paste functions
Function
Description
Paste Participant
Creates a link to the participant entity in the pasted location.
Paste Participant as
New
Pastes as a new participant into the selected group. This paste action
adds “Copy” to the end of the participant name.
The Paste functions are only available after a Copy or Cut action has been implemented.
To drag a participant from an address book group to another group:
1 Select the participant or participants you want to move.
2
Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the selection to the new group.
The participants are moved to the new address book group.
Searching the Address Book
You can search the Address Book for a participant’s name or a group name only on the
currently selected group/level.
To search for participants or groups in the current selected level:
1 In the Address Book Navigation pane, select the group/level within to run the search.
2
In the Address Book toolbar, activate the search option by clicking the Find field.
The field clears and a cursor appears indicating that the field is active.
3
Type all or part of the participant’s name or group name and click the search button.
The closest matching participant entries are displayed and the Active Filter indicator
turns on.
Polycom, Inc.
8-17
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Filtering the Address Book
The entries in an address book group can be filtered to display only the entries (participants
or groups) that meet criteria that you specify and hides entries that you do not want
displayed. It enables you to select and work with a subset of Address Book entries.
You can filter by more than one column, by adding additional filters (columns).
The filter applies to the displayed group. If All Participants option is selected, it applies to all
the listed participants.
Filtering can be done using:
•
A predefined pattern
•
Customized pattern
When you use the Find dialog box to search filtered data, only the data that is displayed is
searched; data that is not displayed is not searched. To search all the data, clear all filters.
Filtering Address Book Data Using a Predefined Pattern
To filter the data in an address book group:
1 In the Address Book - Navigation pane, select the group to filter.
2
In the Address Book - List pane, in the column that you want to use for filtering, click the
filter ( ) button.
A drop-down menu is displayed containing all the matching patterns that can be
applied to the selected field.
Filtering Options
Selected Column
Filter Button
3
Click the matching pattern to be applied.
The filtered list is displayed with a filter indicator ( ) displayed in the selected column
heading.
8-18
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
Example: If the user selects 172.21.41.104 as the matching pattern, the filtered group in
the Address Book is displayed as follows:
Selected Column
Active Filter Indicator
1 Entry matching “172.21.41.104” in filtered group
Filtering Address Book Data Using a Custom Pattern
To filter the data in an address book group:
1 In the Address Book - Navigation pane, select the group to filter.
2
In the Address Book - List pane, in the column that you want to use for filtering, click the
filter ( ) button.
3
Select the (Custom) option from the drop-down list.
Selected Column
Filter Button
The Custom Filtering dialog box opens.
Polycom, Inc.
8-19
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
In the Condition - Column text matches field, enter the filtering pattern.
For example, to list only endpoints that include the numerals 41 in their name, enter 41.
5
Optional. Click the Add Condition button to define additional filtering patterns to
further filter the list and fine tune your search.
To clear a filtering pattern, click the Clear Condition button.
The filtered list is displayed with an active filter (blue) indicator ( ) displayed in the
selected column heading. For example, if the filtering pattern is 41, the participants list
includes all the endpoints that contain the numerals 41 in their name.
Clearing the Filter
To clear the filter and display all entries:
1 In the filtered Address Book column heading, click the Active Filter indicator.
The pattern matching options menu is displayed.
2
Click (All).
The filter is deactivated and all the group/level entries are displayed.
8-20
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
Obtaining the Display Name from the Address Book
The MCU can be configured to replace the name of the dial-in participant as defined in the
endpoint (site name) with the name defined in the Address Book.
In this process, the system retrieves the data (name, alias, number or IP address) of the dialin participant and compares it first with the conference defined dial-in participants and if
the endpoint is not found, it then searches for the endpoint with entries in the address book.
After a match is found, the system displays the participant name as defined in the address
book instead of the site name, in both the video layout and the Collaboration Server Web
Client/Manager.
The system compares the following endpoint data with the address book entries:
•
For H.323 participants, the system compares the IP address, Alias, or H.323 number.
•
For SIP participants, the system compares the IP address or the SIP URI.
•
Only Users with Administrator and Operator Authorization Levels are allowed to enable
and disable the Obtain Display Name from Address Book feature.
•
This feature is supported only for IPv4 participants.
To enable or disable the Obtain Display Name from Address Book option:
1
On the Collaboration Server main menu bar, click Setup > Customize Display Settings
> Ongoing Conferences.
The Ongoing Conferences dialog box is displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
2
Select the Obtain display name from address book check box to enable the feature or
clear the check box to disable the feature.
3
Click OK.
8-21
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Importing and Exporting Address Books
Address Books are proprietary Polycom data files that can only be distributed among
Collaboration Server units. The Address Books are exported in XML format, which are
editable offline. If no name is assigned to the exported Address Book, the default file name
is: EMA.DataObjects.OfflineTemplates.AddressbookContent_.xml
Exporting an Address Book
To Export an Address Book:
1
In the Address Book pane, click the Export Address Book (
empty area in the pane and click Export Address Book.
) button or right-click an
The Export Address Book dialog box is displayed.
2
Enter the desired path or click the Browse button.
3
In the Save Address Book dialog box, select the directory to save the file. You may also
rename the file in the File Name field.
4
Click Save.
You will return to the Export File dialog box.
5
Click OK.
The exported Address Book is saved in the selected folder in XML format.
Importing an Address Book
To Import and Address Book:
1
In the Address Book pane, click the Import Address Book ( ) button or right-click an
empty area in the pane and then click Import Address Book.
The Import Address Book dialog box is displayed.
2
8-22
Enter the path from which to import the Address Book or click the Browse button.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
3
In the Open dialog box navigate to the desired Address Book file (in XML format) to
import.
When importing an Address Book, participants with exact names in the current Address Book will be
overwritten by participants defined in the imported Address Book.
4
Click Open.
You will return to the Import File dialog box.
5
Click OK.
The Address Book is imported and a confirmation message is displayed at the end of the
process.
6
Click Close.
Upgrading and Downgrading Considerations
When upgrading to a multi-level address book version from a single-level address book, the
following factors have to be taken into consideration:
•
The system automatically creates a new address book with a different name and
modifies the new address book to a multi-level hierarchical address book.
•
By default, the address book contains two levels:
•
— The top level (root) named “Main”.
— Second level - All address book groups from the single-level address book are
placed under the “Main” group with their associated participants.
Participants that were not previously associated with any group in the Address Book
are placed in the “Main” group.
•
All participants in the Address Book appear in the “All Participants” group.
•
During the upgrade process, the single-level address book file is save in the system to
enable a future the downgrade of the version to a previous, single-level address book
version (if required).
When downgrading from a multi-level address book version to a single-level address book
version, the multi-level address book is replaced during the downgrade process by the
single-level address book that was saved during the upgrade process.
Integrating the Polycom CMA™ Address Book with the
Collaboration Server
The Polycom CMA™ application includes a Global Address Book with all registered
endpoints. This address book can be used by the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s to add
participants to conferences.
CMA™ Address Book Integration Guidelines
• The Collaboration Server can use only one address book at a time. After you integrate
the Polycom CMA with the Polycom Collaboration Server, the Polycom CMA address
book replaces the Collaboration Server internal address book.
Polycom, Inc.
8-23
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
The Collaboration Server uses the Polycom CMA address book in read-only mode. You
can only add or modify CMA address book entries a from the CMA. Entries are also
added when endpoints register with the CMA as gatekeeper.
The Collaboration Server acts as a proxy to all address book requests between the Collaboration
Server Web Client and the CMA. Ensure that firewall and other network settings allow the
Collaboration Server access to the CMA server.
To Integrate the Polycom CMA™ Address Book with the Collaboration Server:
CMA Side
1 In the CMA application, manually add the Polycom Collaboration Server system to the
Polycom CMA system as directed in the Polycom CMA Operations Guide.
2
In the CMA application, add a user or use an existing user for Collaboration Server
login as directed in the Polycom CMA Operations Guide.
Write down the User Name and Password as they will be used later to define the
Collaboration Server connection to the CMA Global Address Book.
Collaboration Server Side
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
The System Flags - MCMS_PARAMETERS_USER dialog box opens.
2
Modify the values of the following flags:
For more information, see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
Table 8-7
8-24
System Flags for CMA Address Book Integration
Flag
Description
EXTERNAL_CONTE
NT_DIRECTORY
The Web Server folder name. Change this name if you have changed
the default names used by the CMA application.
Default: /PlcmWebServices
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 8-Address Book
Table 8-7
Polycom, Inc.
System Flags for CMA Address Book Integration (Continued)
Flag
Description
EXTERNAL_CONTE
NT_IP
Enter the IP address of the CMA server. For example: 172.22.185.89.
This flag is also the trigger for replacing the internal Collaboration
Server address book with the CMA global Address Book.
Leave this flag blank to disable address book integration with the
CMA server.
EXTERNAL_CONTE
NT_PASSWORD
The password associated with the user name defined for the
Collaboration Server in the CMA server.
EXTERNAL_CONTE
NT_USER
The login name defined for the Collaboration Server in the CMA
server defined in the format:
domain name/user name.
3
Click OK to complete the definitions.
4
When prompted, click Yes to reset the MCU and implement the changes to the system
configuration.
8-25
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
8-26
Polycom, Inc.
9
Reservations
The Reservations option enables users to schedule conferences. These conferences can be
launched immediately or become ongoing, at a specified time on a specified date.
Scheduling a conference reservation requires definition of conference parameters such as
the date and time at which the conference is to start, the participants and the duration of the
conference.
Scheduled conferences (Reservations) can occur once or repeatedly, and the recurrence
pattern can vary.
•
The maximum number of reservations per Collaboration Server is 2000.
Guidelines
System
•
By default, the Scheduler is enabled by a System Flag. The flag prevents potential
scheduling conflicts from occurring as a result of system calls from external scheduling
applications such as ReadiManager®, SE200 CMA™ 4000/5000 and others via the API.
If an external scheduling application is used, the flag INTERNAL_SCHEDULER must
be manually added to the System Configuration and its value must be set to NO.
For more information see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
Resources
Maximum number of participants (voice and video) in a reservation:
•
In SVC Only conference: up to 60 SVC-based participants
•
In CP Only conference: up to 20 AVC-based HD participants or 40 AVC-based SD
participants
•
In a Mixed CP and SVC conference: any combination of SVC and AVC-based
participants depending on the number of AVC and SVC participants.
•
System resources are calculated according to the Collaboration Server’s license. For
more information see "Forcing Video Resource Allocation to CIF Resolution” on page 20-8.
•
System resource availability is partially checked when reservations are created:
•
Polycom, Inc.
— If a conference duration extension request is received from an ongoing conference,
the request is rejected if it would cause a resource conflict.
— If several reservations are scheduled to be activated at the same time and there are
not enough resources for all participants to be connected:
• The conferences are activated.
• Participants are connected to all the ongoing conferences until all system
resources are used up.
If sufficient resources are not available in the system and a scheduled Reservation cannot
be activated, the Reservation is deleted from the schedule.
9-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
Resources for Reservations are calculated using the Reserve Resources for Audio/Video
Participants fields of the New Reservation dialog box. For more information see "New
Reservation – Reserved Resources” on page 9-9.
•
Resources are reserved for participants at the highest video resolution supported by the
Line Rate specified in the conference Profile and up to the maximum system video
resolution specified by the Resolution Configuration dialog box.
•
When a new Reservation is created in the Reservation Calendar, the effect of the new
Reservation (including its recurrences) on available resources is checked. If resource
deficiencies are found an error message is displayed.
Defined dial-in or dial-out participants, Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and new
connections to Ongoing conferences are not included in the resources calculation.
Reservations
•
A Reservation that has been activated and becomes an ongoing conference is deleted
from the Reservation Calendar list.
•
The maximum number of concurrent reservations is 80. Reservations with durations
that overlap (for any amount of time) are considered to be concurrent.
•
System resource availability is partially checked when reservations are created:
•
•
9-2
— If a conference duration extension request is received from an ongoing conference,
the request is rejected if it would cause a resource conflict.
— If several reservations are scheduled to be activated at the same time and there are
not enough resources for all participants to be connected:
• The conferences are activated.
• Participants are connected to all the ongoing conferences until all system
resources are used up.
A scheduled Reservation cannot be activated and is deleted from the schedule if an
Ongoing conference has the same Numeric ID.
— Sufficient resources are not available in the system.
If a problem prevents a Reservation from being activated at its schedule time, the
Reservation will not be activated at all. This applies even if the problem is resolved
during the Reservation’s scheduled time slot.
•
A Profile that is assigned to a Reservation cannot be deleted.
•
Reservations are backed up and restored during Setup > Software Management
>Backup /Restore Configuration operations. For more information see “Banner Display
and Customization” on page 35.
•
All existing reservations are erased by the Standard Restore option of the
Administration > Tools > Restore Factory Defaults procedure.
•
Reservations can also be scheduled from Conference Templates. For more information see
“Scheduling a Reservation From a Conference Template” on page 11.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 9-Reservations
Using the Reservation Calendar
To open the Reservation Calendar:
>> In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Reservation Calendar button (
).
Reservations
Toolbar Buttons
The toolbar buttons functions are described in Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 Reservations – Toolbar
Button
Polycom, Inc.
Description
New Reservation
Create a new reservation. The date and time of the new reservation is
set according to the highlighted blocks on the Reservation Calendar.
Delete Reservation
Click to delete the selected reservation.
Back
Click to show the previous day or week, depending on whether Show
Day or Show Week is the selected.
Next
Click to show the next day or week, depending on whether Show Day
or Show Week is the selected.
Today
Click to show the current date in the Reservation Calendar in either
Show Day or Show Week view.
Show Week
Change the calendar view to weekly display, showing a calendar week:
Sunday through Saturday
Show Day
Click this button to show the day containing the selected time slot.
Reservations List
Click to change to List View and display a list of all reservations.
9-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 9-1 Reservations – Toolbar (Continued)
Button
Description
Used to search for reservations by Display Name. (Available in
Reservations List view only).
Reservations Views
The Reservation Calendar list has the following views available:
•
Week
•
Day
•
Today
•
List
In all views the Main Window List Pane header displays the total number of reservations in
the system.
Total number of reservations
Week View
By default the Reservation Calendar is displayed in Week view with the current date
highlighted in orange.
Day View
A single day is displayed.
9-4
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 9-Reservations
Today View
The current date (Today), highlighted in orange, can be viewed in both Week View and Day
View.
Current Date (Today)
Day View
Week View
List View
List View does not have a calendar based format.
All Reservations are listed by:
•
•
•
•
Display Name
ID
Internal ID
Start Time
•
•
•
•
End Time
Status
Conference Password
Profile
The Reservations can be sorted, searched and browsed by any of the listed fields.
Polycom, Inc.
9-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Changing the Calendar View
To change between Week and Day views:
>> In Week View: In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click Show Day (
Day View.
) to change to
or
In Day View: In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click Show Week (
Week View.
Week View
Back
– View Previous Week
Next
– View Next Week
Today
– View Current Date in Week View
) to change to
Current Date
Show Week
Show Day
Day View
9-6
Back
– View Previous Day
Next
– View Next Day
Today
– View Current Date in Day View
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 9-Reservations
To view Today (the current date):
>> In Week View or Day View, in the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click the Today (
button to have the current date displayed within the selected view.
)
Week View
Day View
Current Date (Today)
To change to List View:
1
In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click, the Reservations List (
) button.
The Reservations List is displayed.
2
Optional. Sort the data by any field (column heading) by clicking on the column
heading.
A
or
symbol is displayed in the column heading indicating that the list is sorted
by this field, as well as the sort order.
3
Optional. Click on the column heading to toggle the column’s sort order.
To return to Calendar View:
>> In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click any of the buttons (Show Week/Show Day/
Today) to return to the required Reservation Calendar view.
Polycom, Inc.
9-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Scheduling Conferences Using the Reservation Calendar
Creating a New Reservation
There are three methods of creating a new reservation:
Each method requires the selection of a starting time slot in the Reservation Calendar. The
default time slot is the current half-hour period of local time.
In all views, if the New Reservation (
) button is clicked without selecting a starting time
slot or if a time slot is selected that is in the past, the Reservation becomes an Ongoing
conference immediately and is not added to the Reservations calendar.
Time Slot
After selecting a starting time slot in the Reservation Calendar you can create a reservation
with a default duration derived from the creation method used or by interactively defining
the duration of the reservation.
Method I – To create a reservation with default duration of 1 hour:
>> In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click the New Reservation (
reservation of 1 hour duration.
) button to create a
Method II – To create a reservation with default duration of ½ hour:
>> Right-click and select New Reservation to create a reservation of ½ hour default
duration.
Method III – To interactively define the duration:
1 In the calendar, click & drag to expand the time slot to select the required Date, Start
Time and Duration for the reservation.
2
In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click the New Reservation (
and select New Reservation.
) button or right-click
Example: The following click & drag sequence would select a reservation for Tuesday,
August 12, 2008, starting at 01:00 with a duration of 4 hours.
Date: Tuesday, August 12, 2008
Start
Time
01:00
Click
Drag
Duration
4 Hours
Release
9-8
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 9-Reservations
The duration of reservations created by any of the above methods can be modified in
the Scheduler tab of the New Reservation dialog box.
To create a new reservation:
1
Open the Reservation Calendar.
2
Select a starting time slot.
3
Create the reservation using one of the three methods described above.
The New Reservation – General tab dialog box opens.
All the fields are the same as for the New Conference – General tab, described in the
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "General Tab” on page 3-13.
Table 9-2
New Reservation – Reserved Resources
Field
Description
Reserve Resources
for Video Participants
Enter the number of video participants for which the system must
reserve resources.
Default: 0 participants.
Reserve Resources
for Audio Participants
Enter the number of audio participants for which the system must
reserve resources.
Default: 0 participants.
When a Conference Profile is assigned to a Meeting Room or a Reservation, the Profile’s
parameters are not embedded in the Reservation, and are taken from the Profile when the
reservation becomes an ongoing conference. Therefore, any changes to the Profile parameters
between the time the Reservation or Meeting Room was created and the time that it is activated
(and becomes an ongoing conference) will be applied to the conference.
If the user wants to save the current parameters, a different Profile with these parameters must
be assigned, or a different Profile with the new parameters must be created.
Polycom, Inc.
9-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
Click the Schedule tab.
Calendar
5
Adjust the new reservation’s schedule by modifying the fields as described in Table 9-3.
Table 9-3
New Reservation – Schedule Tab
Field
Start Time
End Time
Recurring
Meeting
9-10
Description
Select the Start Time
of the Reservation.
Select the End Time of
the Reservation.
•
The Start/End Times of the Reservation are
initially taken from the time slot selected in the
Reservation Calendar.
•
The Start/End Times can be adjusted by typing in
the hours and minutes fields or by clicking the
arrow buttons.
•
The Start/End dates can be adjusted by typing in
the date field or by clicking the arrow buttons or
using the calendar.
•
The start time of all the reservations can be
manually adjusted in one operation. For more
information see "Adjusting the Start Times of all
Reservations” on page 9-15.
•
End Time settings are initially calculated as Start
Time + Duration. End Time settings are
recalculated if Start Time settings are changed.
•
Changes to End Time settings do not affect Start
Time settings. However, the Duration of the
Reservation is recalculated.
Select this option to set up a Recurring Reservation - a series of Reservations
to be repeated on a regular basis.
To create a recurring reservation, you must define a time period and a
recurrence pattern of how often the Reservation should occur: Daily, Weekly or
Monthly.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 9-Reservations
Table 9-3
New Reservation – Schedule Tab (Continued)
Field
Recurrence
Pattern
Description
Daily
If Daily is selected, the system automatically selects all the days of
the week. To de-select days (for example, weekends) clear their
check boxes.
Weekly
If Weekly is selected, the system automatically selects the day of
the week for the Reservation from the day selected in the
Reservation Calendar.
You can also define the recurrence interval in weeks. For example,
if you want the reservation to occur every second week, enter 2 in
the Recur every _ week(s) field.
To define a twice-weekly recurring Reservation, select the check
box of the additional day of the week on which the Reservation is to
be scheduled and set the recurrence interval to 1.
Monthly
If Monthly is selected, the system automatically selects the day of
the month as selected in the Reservation Calendar. You are
required to choose a recurrence pattern:
• Day (1-31) of every (1-12) month(s) - Repeats a conference
on a specified day of the month at a specified monthly interval.
For example, if the first Reservation is scheduled for the 6th day
of the current month and the monthly interval is set to 1, the
monthly Reservation will occur on the 6th day of each of the
following months.
•
The (first, second,...,last) (Sun-Sat) of x month(s) - Repeats
a Reservation in a particular week, on a specified day of the
week at the specified monthly interval. For example, a recurrent
meeting on the third Monday every second month.
A series of Reservations can be set to end after a specified number of occurrences or by a
specific date. Select one of the following methods of terminating the series of Reservations:
Polycom, Inc.
End After
End After: x Occurrences - Ends a recurring series of Reservations after a
specific number (x) of occurrences.
Default: 1
(Leaving the field blank defaults to 1 occurrence.)
End by Date
End By Date: mm/dd/yyyy - Specifies a date for the last occurrence of the
recurring series of Reservations. The End By Date value can be adjusted by
typing in the date field or by clicking the arrow button and using the calendar
utility.
Default: Current date.
9-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
6
Click the Participants tab.
Participants List
The fields are the same as for the New Conference – Participants tab, described in the
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Participants Tab” on
page 3-15.
Participant properties are embedded in the conferencing entity and therefore, if the participant
properties are modified in the Address Book (or Meeting Rooms) after the Reservation has been
created they are not applied to the participant when the Reservation is activated.
7
Optional. Add participants from the Participants Address Book.
For more information see "Meeting Rooms” on page 6-1 and the
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guidee, "To add participants from the
Address Book:” on page 3-18.
8
Optional. Add information to the reservation.
Information entered in the Information tab is written to the Call Detail Record (CDR)
when the reservation is activated. Changes made to this information before it becomes
an ongoing conference will be saved to the CDR.
For more information see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Information Tab” on page 3-18.
9
Click OK.
The New Reservation is created and is displayed in the Reservation Calendar.
If you create a recurring reservation all occurrences have the same ID. The series
number (_0000n) of each reservation is appended to its Display Name.
Example:
Conference Template name: Sales
Display Name for single scheduled occurrence: Sales
9-12
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 9-Reservations
If 3 recurrences of the reservation are created:
Display Name for occurrence 1:
Sales_00001
Display Name for occurrence 2:
Sales_00002
Display Name for occurrence 3:
Sales_00003
Managing Reservations
Reservations can be accessed and managed via all the views of the Reservations List.
Guidelines
•
The Recurrence Pattern fields in the Schedule tab that are used to create multiple
occurrences of a Reservation are only displayed when the Reservation and its multiple
occurrences are initially created.
•
As with single occurrence Reservations, only the Duration, Start Time and End Time
parameters of multiple occurrence reservations can be modified after the Reservation
has been created.
•
A single occurrence Reservation cannot be modified to become a multiple occurrence
reservation.
•
Reservations can only be modified one at a time and not as a group.
•
If Reservations were created as a recurring series, the system gives the option to delete
them individually, or all as series.
Viewing and Modifying Reservations
Reservations can be viewed and modified by using the Week and Day views of the
Reservations Calendar or by using the Reservation Properties dialog box.
Using the Week and Day views of the Reservations Calendar
In the Week and Day views each Reservation is represented by a shaded square on the
Reservation Calendar. Clicking on a Reservation selects the Reservation. A dark blue border is
displayed around the edges of the Reservation indicating that it has been selected.
The Start Time of the Reservation is represented by the top edge of the square while the End
Time is represented by the bottom edge.
Polycom, Inc.
9-13
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The cursor changes to a vertical double arrow (
bottom sides of the square.
) when it is moved over the top and
Click & Drag to Change Start Time
Click & Drag
to Move
Reservation
Click & Drag to Change End Time
To move the Reservation to another time slot:
1 Select the Reservation.
2
Hold the mouse button down and drag the Reservation to the desired time slot.
3
Release the mouse button.
To change the Reservation’s Start time:
1 Select the Reservation.
2
Move the mouse over the top edge of the Reservation’s square.
3
When the cursor changes to a vertical double arrow (
and drag the edge to the desired Start Time.
4
Release the mouse button.
) hold the mouse button down
To change the Reservation’s End time:
1 Select the Reservation.
2
Move the mouse over the bottom edge of the Reservation’s square.
3
When the cursor changes to a vertical double arrow (
and drag the edge to the desired End Time.
4
Release the mouse button.
) hold the mouse button down
To View or Modify Reservations using the Reservation Properties dialog box:
1 In the Reservations List, navigate to the reservation (or its recurrences) you want to view,
using the Show Day, Show Week, Today, Back, Next or List buttons.
2
Double-click, or right-click and select Reservation Properties, to select the reservation
to be viewed or modified.
The Reservation Properties – General dialog box opens.
9-14
3
Select the tab(s) of the properties you want to view or modify.
4
Optional. Modify the Reservation Properties.
5
Click OK.
The dialog box closes and modifications (if any) are saved.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 9-Reservations
Adjusting the Start Times of all Reservations
When utilizing GMT offset (for example, Daylight Saving Time change), the start time of the
reoccurring reservations scheduled before the Collaboration Server time change are not
updated accordingly (although their start times appear correctly in the Reservations list,
when checking the reservation properties the start time is incorrect).
Following the Collaboration Server time change, the start time of all reoccurring
reservations must be manually adjusted in one operation.
Using this option, the start times of all reservations currently scheduled on the
Collaboration Server are adjusted with the same offset.
To adjust the reoccurring reservations start time after the GMT Offset has been changed
for Daylight Saving Time (DST) or a physical move:.
Adjustment of Reservation Time should only be performed after adjustment of Collaboration Server
Time is completed as a separate procedure.
1
On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > RMX Time.
The RMX Time dialog box opens.
2
Click the Adjust Reservations Time button.
The Adjust Reservations Time dialog box opens.
Click the arrows to adjust the start time by hours.
Range is between 12 hours and -12 hours
A positive value indicates adding to the start time
(-) indicates subtracting from the start time
Click the arrows to adjust the start time by minutes.
Range is between 45 minutes and -45 minutes.
A positive value indicates adding to the start time
(-) indicates subtracting from the start time
3
Polycom, Inc.
Click the arrows of the Offset - Hours box to indicate the number of hours to add or
subtract from the current start time; a positive value indicates adding time, while minus
(-) indicates subtracting time.
9-15
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
Click the arrows of the Offset - minutes box to indicate the number of minutes to add or
subtract from the current start time of the reservations. Increments or decrements are by
15 minutes.
For example, to subtract 30 minutes from the start time of all the reservation, enter 0 in
the hours box, and -30 in the minutes box.
To add one hour and 30 minutes to the start time, enter 1 in the hours box and 30 in the
minutes box.
5
Click the Adjust button to apply the change to all the reoccurring reservations currently
scheduled on the Collaboration Server.
When adjusting the start time of 1000 - 2000 reservations, an “Internal communication error”
message may appear. Ignore this message as the process completes successfully.
Deleting Reservations
To delete a single reservation:
1 In the Reservations List, navigate to the reservation you want to delete, using the Show
Day, Show Week, Today, Back, Next or List buttons.
2
Click to select the reservation to be deleted.
3
Click the Delete Reservation ( ) button.
or
Place the mouse pointer within the Reservation block, right-click and select Delete
Reservation.
4
Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
The Reservation is deleted.
To delete all recurrences of a reservation:
1 In the Reservations List, navigate to the Reservation or any of its recurrences, using the
Show Day, Show Week, Today, Back, Next or List buttons.
2
Click the Delete Reservation ( ) button.
or
Place the mouse pointer within the Reservation or any of its recurrences, right-click and
select Delete Reservation.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
3
Select Delete the series.
4
Click OK.
All occurrences of the Reservation are deleted.
9-16
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 9-Reservations
Searching for Reservations using Quick Search
Quick Search is available only in List View. It enables you to search for Reservations by
Display Name.
To search for reservations:
1 In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click in the Quick Search field.
The field clears and a cursor is displayed indicating that the field is active.
2
Type all or part of the reservation’s Display Name into the field and click Search.
The closest matching Reservation entries are displayed.
Closest Matching Reservations
3
Optional. Double- click the Reservation’s entry in the list to open the Reservations
Properties dialog box to view or modify the Reservation.
or
Right -click the Reservation’s entry in the list and select a menu option to view, modify
or delete the Reservation.
To clear the search and display all reservations:
1 Clear the Quick Search field.
2
Click Search.
All Reservations are displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
9-17
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
9-18
Polycom, Inc.
10
Operator Assistance & Participant
Move
Operator conferences and participant move are supported in CPCP Conferencing Mode only.
Users (operators) assistance to participants is available when:
•
Participants have requested individual help (using *0 DTMF code) during the
conference.
•
Participants have requested help for the conference (using 00 DTMF code) during the
conference.
•
Participants have problems connecting to conferences, for example, when they enter the
wrong conference ID or password.
In addition, the user (operator) can join the ongoing conference and assist all conference
participants.
Operator assistance is available only when an Operator conference is running on the MCU.
The Operator conference offers additional conference management capabilities to the
Collaboration Server users, enabling them to attend to participants with special requirements
and acquire participant details for billing and statistics. This service is designed usually for
large conferences that require the personal touch.
Operator Conferences
An Operator conference is a special conference that enables the Collaboration Server user
acting as an operator to assist participants without disturbing the ongoing conferences and
without being heard by other conference participants. The operator can move a participant
from the Entry Queue or ongoing conference to a private, one-on-one conversation in the
Operator conference.
In attended mode, the Collaboration Server user (operator) can perform one of the following
actions:
Polycom, Inc.
•
Participants connected to the Entry Queue who fail to enter the correct destination ID or
conference password can be moved by the user to the Operator conference for
assistance.
•
After a short conversation, the operator can move the participant from the Operator
conference to the appropriate destination conference (Home conference).
•
The operator can connect participants belonging to the same destination conference to
their conference simultaneously by selecting the appropriate participants and moving
them to the Home conference (interactively or using the right-click menu).
10-1
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
The operator can move one or several participants from an ongoing conference to the
Operator conference for a private conversation.
•
The operator can move participants between ongoing Continuous Presence
conferences.
Operator Conference Guidelines
• An Operator conference can only run in Continuous Presence mode.
10-2
•
Operator conference is defined in the Conference Profile. When enabled in Conference
Profile, High Definition Video Switching option is disabled.
•
An Operator conference can only be created by a User with Operator or Administrator
Authorization level.
•
Operator conference name is derived from the User Login Name and it cannot be
modified.
•
Only one Operator conference per User Login Name can be created.
•
When created, the Operator conference must include one and only one participant - the
Operator participant.
•
Only a defined dial-out participant can be added to an Operator conference as an
Operator participant
•
Once running, the Collaboration Server user can add new participants or move
participants from other conferences to this conference. The maximum number of
participants in an Operator conference is the same as in standard conferences.
•
Special icons are used to indicate an Operator conference in the Ongoing Conferences list
and the operator participant in the Participants list.
•
An Operator conference cannot be defined as a Reservation.
•
An Operator conference can be saved to a Conference Template. An ongoing Operator
conference can be started from a Conference Template.
•
The Operator participant cannot be deleted from the Operator conference or from any
other conference to which she/he was moved to, but it can be disconnected from the
conference.
•
When deleting or terminating the Operator conference, the operator participant is
automatically disconnected from the MCU, even if participating in a conference other
than the Operator conference.
•
Participants in Telepresence conferences cannot be moved from their conference, but an
operator can join their conference and help them if assistance is required.
•
Moving participants from/to an Operator conference follows the same guidelines as
moving participants between conferences. For move guidelines, see "Move Guidelines”
on page 10-17.
•
When a participant is moved from the Entry Queue to the Operator conference, the option
to move back to the source (Home) conference is disabled as the Entry Queue is not
considered as a source conference.
•
The conference chairperson cannot be moved to the Operator conference following the
individual help request if the Auto Terminate When Chairperson Exits option is enabled,
to prevent the conference from automatically ending prematurely. In such a case, the
assistance request is treated by the system as a conference assistance request, and the
operator can join the conference.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 10-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
Defining the Components Enabling Operator Assistance
To enable operator assistance for conferences, the following conferencing entities must be
adjusted or created:
•
IVR Service (Entry Queue and Conference) in which Operator Assistance options are
enabled.
•
A Conference Profile with the Operator Conference option enabled.
•
An active Operator conference with a connected Operator participant.
Defining a Conference IVR Service with Operator Assistance Options
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list and click the
IVR Services ( ) entry.
1
On the IVR Services toolbar, click the New Conference IVR Service (
) button.
The New Conference IVR Service - Global dialog box opens.
2
Enter the Conference IVR Service Name.
3
Define the Conference IVR Service - Global parameters. For more information, see
Table 17-3, “Conference IVR Service Properties - Global Parameters,” on page 17-7.
4
Click the Welcome tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Welcome dialog box opens.
5
Define the system behavior when the participant enters the Conference IVR queue. For
more information, see "Defining a New Conference IVR Service” on page 17-6.
6
Click the Conference Chairperson tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Conference Chairperson dialog box opens.
7
If required, enable the chairperson functionality and select the various voice messages
and options for the chairperson connection. For more information, see Table 17-4, “New
Conference IVR Service Properties - Conference Chairperson Options and Messages,” on
page 17-9.
8
Click the Conference Password tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Conference Password dialog box opens.
9
Polycom, Inc.
If required, enable the request for conference password before moving the participant
from the conference IVR queue to the conference and set the MCU behavior for
10-3
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
password request for Dial-in and Dial-out participant connections. For more
information, see Table 17-5, “New Conference IVR Service Properties - Conference Password
Parameters,” on page 17-11.
10 Select the various audio messages that will be played in each case. For more
information, see Table 17-5, “New Conference IVR Service Properties - Conference Password
Parameters,” on page 17-11.
11 Click the General tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - General dialog box opens.
12 Select the messages that will be played during the conference. For more information,
see Table 17-6, “Conference IVR Service Properties - General Voice Messages,” on page 17-12.
13 Click the Video Services tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Video Services dialog box opens.
14 Define the Video Services parameters. For more information, see Table 17-8, “New
Conference IVR Service Properties - Video Services Parameters,” on page 17-15.
15 Click the DTMF Codes tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - DTMF Codes dialog box opens.
The default DTMF codes for the various functions that can be performed during the
conference by all participants or by the chairperson are listed. For the full list of the
available DTMF codes, see Table 17-9, “New Conference IVR Service Properties - DTMF
Codes,” on page 17-16.
16 If required, modify the default DTMF codes and the permissions for various operations
including Operator Assistance options:
— *0 for individual help - the participant requested help for himself or herself. In such
a case, the participant requesting help is moved to the Operator conference for oneon-one conversation. By default, all participants can use this code.
— 00 for conference help - the conference chairperson (default) can request help for
the conference. In such a case, the operator joins the conference.
17 Click the Operator Assistance tab.
10-4
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 10-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
The Operator Assistance dialog box opens.
18 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance when the participant
requires or requests help during the connection process to the conference or during the
conference.
19 In the Operator Assistance Indication Message field, select the audio message to be played
when the participant requests or is waiting for the operator’s assistance.
If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new
audio files, click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the Collaboration Server.
20 Click OK to complete the IVR Service definition.
The new Conference IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list.
Defining an Entry Queue IVR Service with Operator Assistance Options
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click IVR Services (
).
2
In the IVR Services list, click the New Entry Queue IVR Service (
) button.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Global dialog box opens.
Polycom, Inc.
3
Define the Entry Queue Service Name.
4
Define the Entry Queue IVR Service Global parameters. For more information, see
Table 17-10, “Entry Queue IVR Service Properties - Global Parameters,” on page 17-19.
5
Click the Welcome tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Welcome dialog box opens.
6
Define the system behavior when the participant enters the Entry Queue. This dialog
box contains options that are identical to those in the Conference IVR Service - Welcome
Message dialog box. For more information, see “Welcome tab” on page 13-11.
7
Click the Conference ID tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Conference ID dialog box opens.
8
Select the required voice messages. For more information, see Table 17-11, “Entry Queue
IVR Service Properties - Conference ID,” on page 17-20.
10-5
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
9
Click the Video Services tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Video Services dialog box opens.
10 In the Video Welcome Slide list, select the video slide that will be displayed to
participants connecting to the Entry Queue. The slide list includes the video slides that
were previously uploaded to the MCU memory.
11 Click the Operator Assistance tab.
The Operator Assistance dialog box opens.
12 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance when the participant
requires or requests help during the connection process.
13 In the Operator Assistance Indication Message field, select the audio message to be played
when the participant requests or is waiting for operator’s assistance.
If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new
audio files, click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the Collaboration Server.
14 Click OK to complete the Entry Queue IVR Service definition.
The new Entry Queue IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list.
Defining a Conference Profile for an Operator Conference
1
10-6
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click Conference Profiles.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 10-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
2
In the Conference Profiles pane, click the New Profile button.
The New Profile – General dialog box opens.
3
Define the Profile name and, if required, the Profile general parameters:
Table 10-1 New Profile - General Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Display Name
Enter a unique Profile name, as follows:
• English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain the most
characters (length varies according to the field).
•
European and Latin text length is approximately half the length of
the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the length of the
maximum.
It is recommended to use a name that indicates the Profile type, such
as Operator conference or Video Switching conference.
Note: This is the only parameter that must be defined when creating
a new profile.
Routing Name
Enter the Profile name using ASCII characters set.
The Routing Name can be defined by the user or automatically
generated by the system if no Routing Name is entered as follows:
• If an all ASCII text is entered in Display Name, it is used also as
the Routing Name.
•
Polycom, Inc.
If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text (or full Unicode text)
is entered in Display Name, the ID (such as Conference ID) is
used as the Routing Name.
10-7
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 10-1 New Profile - General Parameters (Continued)
4
Field/Option
Description
Line Rate
Select the conference bit rate. The line rate represents the combined
video, audio and Content rate.
The default setting is 384 Kbps.
Operator Conference
Select this option to define the profile of an Operator conference.
An Operator conference can only be a Continuous Presence
conference, therefore when selected, the High Definition Video
Switching option is disabled and cleared.
Click the Advanced tab.
The New Profile – Advanced dialog box opens.
5
Define the following parameters:
Table 10-2 New Profile - Advanced Parameters
10-8
Field/Option
Description
Encryption
Select this check box to activate encryption for the conference. For
more information, see "Media Encryption” on page 3-29.
LPR
When selected (default for CP conferences), Lost Packet Recovery
creates additional packets that contain recovery information used to
reconstruct packets that are lost during transmission.
LPR is automatically disabled if High Definition Video Switching is
selected. For more information, see "Packet Loss Compensation
(LPR and DBA) AVC CP Conferences” on page 3-37.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 10-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
Table 10-2 New Profile - Advanced Parameters (Continued)
6
Field/Option
Description
Auto Terminate
When selected (default), the conference automatically ends when the
termination conditions are met:
Before First Joins — No participant has connected to a conference
during the n minutes after it started. Default idle time is 10 minutes.
At the End - After Last Quits — All the participants have
disconnected from the conference and the conference is idle (empty)
for the predefined time period. Default idle time is 1 minute.
At the End - When Last Participant Remains — Only one
participant is still connected to the conference for the predefined time
period (excluding the recording link which is not considered a
participant when this option is selected). This option should be
selected when defining a Profile that will be used for Gateway Calls
and you want to ensure that the call is automatically terminated when
only one participant is connected. Default idle time is 1 minute.
Note: The selection of this option is automatically cleared and
disabled when the Operator Conference option is selected. The
Operator conference cannot automatically end unless it is terminated
by the Collaboration Server User.
Click the Video Quality tab.
The New Profile – Video Quality dialog box opens.
Polycom, Inc.
10-9
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
7
Define the following parameters:
Table 10-3 New Profile - Video Quality Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Content Video Definition
Content Settings
Select the transmission mode for the Content channel:
• Graphics — basic mode, intended for normal graphics
•
Hi-res Graphics — a higher bit rate intended for high resolution
graphic display
•
Live Video — Content channel displays live video
Selection of a higher bit rate for the Content results in a lower bit rate
for the people channel.
For more information, see "H.239” on page 3-1.
Content Protocol
8
H.263 – Content is shared using H.263 even if some endpoints have
H.264 capability.
Up to H.264 – H.264 is the default Content sharing algorithm.
When selected:
• Content is shared using H.264 if all endpoints have H.264
capability.
•
Content is shared using H.263 if all endpoints do not have H.264
capability.
•
Endpoints that do not have at least H.263 capability can connect
to the conference but cannot share Content.
Click the Video Settings tab.
The New Profile - Video Settings dialog box opens.
9
Define the video display mode and layout. For more details, see Table 2-11, “New AVC
CP Profile - Video Settings Parameters,” on page 2-26.
10 Click the Skins tab to modify the background and frames.
The New Profile - Skins dialog box opens.
11 Select one of the Skin options.
12 Click IVR tab.
The New Profile - IVR dialog box opens.
13 Select the IVR Service and if the conference requires a chairperson.
14 Optional. Click the Recording tab to enable conference recording with Polycom RSS
2000.
15 Define the various recording parameters. for details, see Table 2-16, “New AVC Profile Recording Parameters,” on page 2-33.
16 Click OK to complete the Profile definition.
A new Profile is created and added to the Conference Profiles list.
10-10
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 10-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
Defining an Ongoing Operator Conference
To start a conference from the Conference pane:
1 In the Conferences pane, click the New Conference ( ) button.
The New Conference – General dialog box opens.
2
In the Profile field, select a Profile in which the Operator Conference option is selected.
Upon selection of the Operator Conference Profile, the Display Name is automatically
taken from the Collaboration Server User Login Name. This name cannot be modified.
Only one Operator conference can be created for each User Login name.
3
Define the following parameters:
Table 10-4 New Conference – General Options
Field
Description
Duration
Define the duration of the conference in hours using the format
HH:MM (default 01:00).
Notes:
• The Operator conference is automatically extended up to a
maximum of 168 hours. Therefore, the default duration can be
used.
•
Polycom, Inc.
This field is displayed in all tabs.
10-11
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 10-4 New Conference – General Options (Continued)
Field
Description
Routing Name
Routing Name is the name with which ongoing conferences, Meeting
Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP Factories register with various
devices on the network such as gatekeepers and SIP servers. This
name must be defined using ASCII characters.
Comma, colon and semicolon characters cannot be used in the
Routing Name.
The Routing Name can be defined by the user or automatically
generated by the system if no Routing Name is entered as follows:
• If ASCII characters are entered as the Display Name, it is used
also as the Routing Name
•
If a combination of Unicode and ASCII characters (or full Unicode
text) is entered as the Display Name, the ID (such as Conference
ID) is used as the Routing Name.
If the same name is already used by another conference, Meeting
Room or Entry Queue, the Collaboration Server displays an error
message and requests that you to enter a different name.
4
ID
Enter the unique-per-MCU conference ID. If left blank, the MCU
automatically assigns a number once the conference is launched.
This ID must be communicated to conference participants to enable
them to dial in to the conference.
Conference
Password
Leave this field empty when defining an Operator conference.
Chairperson
Password
Leave this field empty when defining an Operator conference.
Maximum Number of
Participants
Enter the maximum number of participants that can connect to an
Operator conference (you can have more than two), or leave the
default selection (Automatic).
Maximum number of participants that can connect to an Operator
conference:
Click the Participants tab.
The New Conference - Participants dialog box opens.
You must define or add the Operator participant to the Operator conference.
This participant must be defined as a dial-out participant.
Define the parameters of the endpoint that will be used by the Collaboration Server
User to connect to the Operator conference and to other conference to assist
participants.
For more details, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Participants Tab” on page 3-15.
10-12
5
Optional. Click the Information tab.
The Information tab opens.
6
Enter the required information. For more details, see the
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Information Tab” on
page 3-18.
7
Click OK.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 10-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
The new Operator conference is added to the ongoing Conferences list with a special icon
.
The Operator participant is displayed in the Participants list with an Operator
participant icon
, and the system automatically dials out to the Operator
participant.
Saving an Operator Conference to a Template
The Operator conference that is ongoing can be saved as a template.
To save an ongoing Operator conference as a template:
1 In the Conferences List, select the Operator conference you want to save as a Template.
2
Click the Save Conference to Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Save Conference to Template.
The conference is saved to a template whose name is taken from the ongoing conference
Display Name (the Login name of the Collaboration Server User). The Template is
displayed with the Operator Conference icon.
Polycom, Inc.
10-13
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Starting an Operator Conference from a Template
An ongoing Operator conference can be started from an Operator Template saved in the
Conference Templates list.
To start an ongoing Operator conference from an Operator Template:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the Operator Template to start as an ongoing
Operator conference.
•
You can only start an Operator conference from a template whose name is identical to your Login
Name. For example, if your Login name is Polycom, you can only start an Operator conference
from a template whose name is Polycom.
•
If an ongoing Operator conference with the same name or any other conference with the same
ID is already running, you cannot start another Operator conference with the same login name.
2
Click the Start Conference from Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Start Conference from Template.
The conference is started.
The name of the ongoing conference in the Conferences list is taken from the Conference
Template Display Name.
10-14
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 10-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants Requiring Assistance
Operator conferences are monitored in the same way as standard ongoing conferences.
Each Operator conference includes at least one participant - the Operator.
You can view the properties of the Operator conference by double-clicking the conference
entry in the Conferences list or by right-clicking the conference entry and selecting
Conference Properties. For more information, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Getting Started Guide, "Conference Level Monitoring” on page 3-35.
Requesting Help
A participant can request help using the appropriate DTMF code from his/her touch tone
telephone or the endpoint’s DTMF input device. The participant can request Individual
Assistance (default DTMF code *0) or Conference Assistance (default DTMF code 00).
Participants in Entry Queues who failed to enter the correct destination conference ID or the
conference password will wait for operator assistance (provided that an Operator
conference is active).
When requiring or requesting operator assistance, the Collaboration Server management
application displays the following:
Polycom, Inc.
•
The participant’s connection Status changes, reflecting the help request. For more
information, see Table 10-5.
•
The conference status changes and it is displayed with the exclamation point icon and
the status “Awaiting Operator”.
•
The appropriate voice message is played to the relevant participants indicating that
assistance will be provided shortly.
10-15
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The following icons and statuses are displayed in the Participant Status column:
Table 10-5 Participants List Status Column Icons and Indications
Icon
Status Indication
Description
Awaiting Individual
Assistance
The participant has requested the operator’s
assistance for himself/herself.
Awaiting Conference
Assistance
The participant has requested the operator’s
assistance for the conference. Usually this means
that the operator is requested to join the conference.
When the Operator moves the participant to the Operator conference for individual assistance
the participant Status indications are cleared.
Participant Alerts List
The Participant Alerts list contains all the participants who are currently waiting for operator
assistance.
Participants are automatically added to the Participants Alerts list in the following
circumstances:
•
The participant fails to connect to the conference by entering the wrong conference ID
or conference password and waits for the operator’s assistance
•
The participant requests Operator’s Assistance during the ongoing conference
This list is used as reference only. Participants can be assisted and moved to the Operator
conference or the destination conference only from the Participants list of the Entry Queues or
ongoing conference where they are awaiting assistance.
The participants are automatically removed from the Participant Alerts list when moved to
any conference (including the Operator conference).
Audible Alarms
In addition to the visual cues used to detect events occurring on the Collaboration Server, an
audible alarm can be activated and played when participants request Operator Assistance.
Using Audible Alarms
The Audible Alarm functionality for Operator Assistance requests is enabled for each MCU
in either the Collaboration Server Web Client or Collaboration Server Manager.
The Audible Alarm played when Operator Assistance is requested is enabled and selected
in the Setup > Audible Alarm > User Customization. When the Audible Alarm is activated,
the *.wav file selected in the User Customization is played, and it is repeated according to the
number of repetitions defined in the User Customization.
10-16
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 10-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
If more than one Collaboration Server is monitored in the Collaboration Server Manager, the
Audible Alarm must be enabled separately for each Collaboration Server installed in the
site/configuration. A different *.wav file can be selected for each MCU.
When multiple Audible Alarms are activated in different conferences or by multiple MCUs,
the Audible Alarms are synchronized and played one after the other. It is important to note
that when Stop Repeating Alarm is selected from the toolbar from the Collaboration Server
Web Client or Collaboration Server Manager, all activated Audible Alarms are immediately
halted.
For more details on Audible alarms and their configuration, see "Audible Alarms” on
page 20-31.
Moving Participants Between Conferences
The Collaboration Server User can move participants between ongoing conferences,
including the Operator conference, and from the Entry Queue to the destination conference if
help is required.
When moving between conferences or when a participant is moved from an Entry Queue to
a conference by the Collaboration Server user (after failure to enter the correct destination
ID or conference password), the IVR messages and slide display are skipped.
Move Guidelines
• Move is available only between CP conferences. Move is unavailable from/to Video
Switching conferences.
•
Move between conferences can be performed without an active Operator conference.
•
When moving the conference chairperson from his/her conference to another
conference, the source conference will automatically end if the Auto Terminate When
Chairperson Exits option is enabled and that participant is the only conference
chairperson.
•
When moving the Operator to any conference (following assistance request), the IVR
messages and slide display are skipped.
•
Participants cannot be moved from a Telepresence conference.
•
Participants cannot be moved from LPR-enabled conferences to non-LPR conferences.
Move from non-LPR conferences to LPR-enabled conferences is available.
•
Move between encrypted and non-encrypted conferences depends on the
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF flag setting, as described
in Table 10-6:
Table 10-6 Participant Move Capabilities vs. ALLOW_NON_
ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF flag setting
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Setting
Source
Conference/
EQ Encrypted
Destination
Conference
Encrypted
Move Enabled?
NO
Yes
Yes
Yes
NO
Yes
No
Yes
NO
No
Yes
No
10-17
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 10-6 Participant Move Capabilities vs. ALLOW_NON_
ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF flag setting (Continued)
•
Flag
Setting
Source
Conference/
EQ Encrypted
Destination
Conference
Encrypted
Move Enabled?
NO
No
No
Yes
YES
Yes
Yes
Yes
YES
Yes
No
Yes
YES
No
Yes
Yes
YES
No
No
Yes
When moving dial-out participants who are disconnected to another conference, the
system automatically dials out to connect them to the destination conference.
•
Cascaded links cannot be moved between conferences.
•
Participants cannot be moved to a conference if the move will cause the number of
participants to exceed the maximum number of participants allowed for the destination
conference.
Moving Participants
Collaboration Server users can assist participants by performing the following operations:
•
Move a participant to an Operator conference (Attend a participant).
•
Move a participant to the Home (destination) conference.
•
Move participant from one ongoing conference to another
A move can be performed using the following methods:
•
Using the participant right-click menu
•
Using drag and drop
To move a participant from the ongoing conference using the right-click menu options:
10-18
1
In the Conferences list, click the conference where there are participants waiting for
Operator’s Assistance to display the list of participants.
2
In the Participants list, right-click the icon of the participant to move and select one of
the following options:
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 10-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
— Move to Operator Conference - to move the participant to the Operator
conference.
— Move to Conference - to move the participant to any ongoing conference.
When selected, the Move to Conference dialog box opens, letting you select the name
of the destination conference.
— Back to Home Conference - if the participant was moved to another conference or
to the Operator conference, this options moves the participant back to his/her source
conference.
This option is not available if the participant was moved from the Entry Queue to
the Operator conference or the destination conference.
Moving a Participant Interactively
You can drag and drop a participant from the Entry Queue or ongoing conference to the
Operator or destination (Home) conference:
Polycom, Inc.
1
Display the participants list of the Entry Queue or the source conference by clicking its
entry in the Conferences list.
2
In the Participants list, drag the icon of the participant to the Conferences List pane and
drop it on the Operator Conference icon or another ongoing conference.
10-19
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
10-20
Polycom, Inc.
11
Conference Templates
Conference Templates enable administrators and operators to create, save, schedule and
activate identical conferences.
A Conference Template:
•
Saves the conference Profile.
•
Saves all participant parameters including their Personal Layout and Video Forcing
settings.
•
Simplifies the setting up Telepresence conferences where precise participant layout and
video forcing settings are crucial.
Guidelines
•
The maximum number of templates is 100.
Trying to start a Conference Template that exceeds the allowed maximum number of
participants will result in participants being disconnected due to resource deficiency.
Polycom, Inc.
•
If the Profile assigned to a conference is deleted while the conference is ongoing the
conference cannot be saved as a template.
•
A Profile assigned to a Conference Template cannot be deleted. The system does not
permit such a deletion.
•
Profile parameters are not embedded in the Conference Template, and are taken from the
Profile when the Conference Template becomes an ongoing conference. Therefore, any
changes to the Profile parameters between the time the Conference Template was created
and the time that it is activated (and becomes an ongoing conference) will be applied to
the conference.
•
Only defined participants can be saved to the Conference Template. Before saving a
conference to a template ensure that all undefined participants have disconnected.
•
Undefined participants are not saved in Conference Templates.
•
Participant properties are embedded in the Conference Template and therefore, if the
participant properties are modified in the Address Book after the Conference Template
has been created they are not applied to the participant whether the Template becomes
an ongoing conference or not.
•
The Conference Template display name, routing name or ID can be the same as an
Ongoing Conference, reservation, Meeting Room or Entry Queue as it is not active.
However, an ongoing conference cannot be launched from the Conference Template if an
ongoing conference, Meeting Room or Entry Queue already has the same name or ID.
Therefore, it is recommended to modify the template ID, display name, routing name to
be unique.
•
A Reservation that has become an ongoing conference can be saved as Conference
Template.
•
SIP Factories and Entry Queues cannot be saved as Conference Templates.
11-1
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
The conference specified in the Conference Template can be designated as a Permanent
Conference. For more information see "Lecture Mode (AVC CP Only)” on page 3-40.
Using Conference Templates
The Conference Templates list is initially displayed as a closed tab in the Collaboration Server
Web Client main window. The number of saved Conference Templates is indicated on the tab.
Conference Templates Tab
Number of Saved Conference Templates
Clicking the tab opens the Conference Templates list.
Toolbar buttons
Click to hide the
Conference Templates List
List of
Saved
Templates
Number of Saved Conference Templates
The Conference Templates are listed by Conference Template Display Name and ID and can be
sorted by either field. The list can be customized by re-sizing the pane, adjusting the column
widths or changing the order of the column headings.
For more information see RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
“Customizing the Main Screen” on page 9.
Clicking the anchor pin ( ) button hides the Conference Templates list as a closed tab.
Toolbar Buttons
The Conference Template toolbar includes the following buttons:
Table 1 Conference Templates – Toolbar Buttons
Button
New Conference
Template
11-2
Description
Creates a new Conference Template.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 11-Conference Templates
Table 1 Conference Templates – Toolbar Buttons (Continued)
Button
Description
Delete Conference
Template
Deletes the Conference Template(s) that are selected in the list.
Start Conference
from Template
Starts an ongoing conference from the Conference Template that has
an identical name, ID parameters and participants as the template.
Schedule Reservation
from Template
Creates a conference Reservation from the Conference Template
with the same name, ID, parameters and participants as the
Template.
Opens the Scheduler dialog box enabling you to modify the fields
required to create a single or recurring Reservation based on the
template. For more information see "Reservations” on page 9-1.
The Conferences List toolbar includes the following button:
Table 2 Conferences List – Toolbar Button
Button
Save Conference to
Template
Polycom, Inc.
Description
Saves the selected ongoing conference as a Conference Template.
11-3
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Creating a New Conference Template
There are two methods to create a Conference Template:
•
From scratch - defining the conference parameters and participants
•
Saving an ongoing conference as Template
Creating a new Conference Template from Scratch
To create a new Conference Template:
1 In the Collaboration Server Web Client, click the Conference Templates tab.
2
Click the New Conference Template (
) button.
The New Conference Template - General dialog box opens.
3
The fields of the New Template – General dialog box are identical to those of the New
Conference – General dialog box. For a full description of the fields see the RealPresence
Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "General Tab” on page 3-13.
4
Modify the fields of the General tab.
A unique dial-in number must be assigned to each conferencing entity. However, Conference
Templates can be assigned dial-in numbers that are already assigned to other conferencing entities,
but when the template is used to start an ongoing conference or schedule a reservation, it will not
start if another ongoing conference, Meeting Room, or Entry Queue is using this number.
5
11-4
Click the Participants tab.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 11-Conference Templates
The New Template – Participants dialog box opens.
The fields of the New Template – Participants dialog box are the same as those of the New
Conference – Participant dialog box.
For a full description of these fields see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting
Started Guide, "Participants Tab” on page 3-15.
6
Optional. Add participants to the template from the Address Book.
7
Click the New button.
The New Participant – General tab opens.
The New Template – Participant dialog box remains open in the background.
Polycom, Inc.
11-5
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
For a full description of the General tab fields see “Adding a new participant to the Address
Book Directly” on page 8.
8
Modify the fields of the General tab.
9
Click the Advanced tab.
The New Participant – Advanced tab opens.
For a full description of the Advanced tab fields see, “New Participant – Advanced
Properties” on page 12.
10 Modify the fields of the Advanced tab.
11 Click the Media Sources tab.
The Media Sources tab opens.
11-6
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 11-Conference Templates
The Media Sources tab enables you to set up and save Personal Layout and Video Forcing
settings for each participant. This is especially important when setting up Telepresence
conferences.
For a full description of Personal Layout and Video Forcing settings see the RealPresence
Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Changing the Video Layout of a Conference
(CP and Mixed CP and SVC Conferences)” on page 3-49 and "Video Forcing (CP and Mixed
CP and SVC Conferences)” on page 3-51.
12 Modify the Personal Layout and Video Forcing settings for the participant.
13 Optional. Click the Information tab.
The New Participant – Information tab opens.
For a full description of the Information fields see the RealPresence Collaboration Server
800s Getting Started Guide, "Information Tab” on page 3-18.
14 Click the OK button.
The participant you have defined is added to the Participants List.
The New Participant dialog box closes and you are returned to the New Template –
Participant dialog box (which has remained open since Step 7).
15 Optional. In the New Conference Template dialog box, click the Information tab.
Polycom, Inc.
11-7
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The New Conference Template – Information tab opens.
For a full description of the Information fields see the RealPresence Collaboration Server
800s Getting Started Guide, “Information Tab” on page 18.
16 Click the OK button.
The New Conference Template is created and its name is added to the Conference Templates
list.
Saving an Ongoing or CP-based Operator Conference as a Template
Any ongoing or CP-based Operator Conference can be saved as a template.
To save an ongoing or CP-based Operator Conference as a template:
1 In the Conferences List, select the conference or Operator Conference to be saved as a
Template.
2
11-8
Click the Save Conference to Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Save Conference to Template.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 11-Conference Templates
The conference is saved to a template whose name is taken from the ongoing conference
Display Name (the Login name of the Collaboration Server User). The Template is displayed
with the Operator Conference icon.
Starting an Ongoing Conference From a Template
An ongoing conference can be started from any Template saved in the Conference Templates
list. In SVC-based templates, only defined dial-in participants may be part of the conference.
To start an ongoing conference from a Template:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the Template you want to start as an ongoing
conference.
2
Click the Start Conference from Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Start Conference from Template.
The conference is started.
The name of the ongoing conference in the Conferences list is taken from the Conference
Template Display Name.
Participants that are connected to other ongoing conferences when the template
becomes an ongoing conference are not connected.
If an ongoing conference, Meeting Room or Entry Queue with the same Display Name, Routing
Name or ID already exists in the system, the conference will not be started.
Polycom, Inc.
11-9
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Starting an Operator Conference from a Template (AVC Conferencing)
An ongoing Operator conference can be started from an Operator Template saved in the
Conference Templates list.
To start an ongoing Operator conference from an Operator Template:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the Operator Template to start as an ongoing
Operator conference.
•
You can only start an Operator conference from a template whose name is identical to your Login
Name. For example, if your Login name is Polycom, you can only start an Operator conference
from a template whose name is Polycom.
•
If an ongoing Operator conference with the same name or any other conference with the same
ID is already running, you cannot start another Operator conference with the same login name.
2
Click the Start Conference from Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Start Conference from Template.
The conference is started.
The name of the ongoing conference in the Conferences list is taken from the Conference
Template Display Name.
11-10
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 11-Conference Templates
Scheduling a Reservation From a Conference Template
A Conference Template can be used to schedule a single or recurring Reservation.
To schedule a Reservation from a Conference Template:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the Conference Template you want to schedule as
a Reservation.
2
Click the Schedule Reservation from Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Schedule Reservation from Template.
The Reservation Properties dialog box is displayed.
The Display Name of the Reservation is taken from the Conference Template Display
Name.
Conference Template and Reservation Name
For a full description of the Reservation Properties fields see Table 9-3, “New Reservation –
Schedule Tab,” on page 9-10.
3
Polycom, Inc.
Modify the fields of the Reservation Properties.
11-11
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
Click the OK button.
A Reservation is created based on the Conference Template. The Reservation can be viewed
and modified along with all other Reservations using the Reservations - Calendar View and
Reservations List.
If you create a recurring reservation all occurrences have the same ID.
The series number (_0000n) of each reservation is appended to its Display Name.
Example:
Conference Template name: Sales
Display Name for single scheduled occurrence: Sales
If 3 recurrences of the reservation are created:
Display Name for occurrence 1:
Sales_00001
Display Name for occurrence 2:
Sales_00002
Display Name for occurrence 3:
Sales_00003
Deleting a Conference Template
One or several Conference Templates can be deleted at a time.
To delete Conference Templates:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the Template(s) you want to delete.
2
Click the Delete Conference Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Delete Conference Template.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
3
11-12
Click the OK button to delete the Conference Template(s).
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 11-Conference Templates
Exporting and Importing Conference Templates
Conference Templates can be exported from one MCU and imported to multiple MCUs in
your environment. Additionally, you can export Conference Templates and their associated
Conference Profiles simultaneously. Using this option can save configuration time and
ensures that identical settings are used for conferences running on different MCUs. This is
especially important in environments using cascading conferences that are running on
different MCUs.
Guidelines
•
Administrators can export and import Conference Templates. Operators are only allowed
to export Conference Templates.
•
You can select a single, multiple or all Conference Templates to be exported.
•
Both Conference Templates and their associated Conference Profiles can be exported and
imported simultaneously when enabling the Export includes conference profiles or
Import includes conference profiles options.
•
Exporting and importing Conference Templates only can be used when you want to
export and import individual Conference Templates without their associated Conference
Profiles. This option enables you to import Conference Templates when Conference Profiles
already exist on an MCU.
Exporting Conference Templates
Conference Templates are exported to a single XML file that can be used to import the
Conference Templates on multiple MCUs.
Using the Export Conference Templates option, you can:
Polycom, Inc.
•
Export all Conference Templates from an MCU
•
Export selected Conference Templates
11-13
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Exporting All Conference Templates from an MCU
To export all Conference Templates from an MCU:
1 In the Collaboration Server Web Client main window, click the Conference Templates tab.
The Conference Templates list pane is displayed.
2
11-14
Click the Export Conference Templates
button or right-click the Conference
Templates list, and then click Export Conference Templates.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 11-Conference Templates
The Conference Templates - Export dialog box is displayed.
3
In the Export Path field, type the path name to the location where you want to save the
exported file or click Browse to select the desired path.
4
Optional. Clear the Export includes conference profiles check box when you only want
to export Conference Templates.
When this check box is cleared, the Conference Templates - Export dialog box is displayed
without the Profiles file name field.
5
In the Templates file name field, type the file name prefix. The file name suffix
(_confTemplates.xml) is predefined by the system. For example, if you type
Templates01, the exported file name is defined as Templates01_confTemplates.xml.
The system automatically defines the Profiles file name field with the same file name
prefix as the Templates file name field. For example, if you type Templates01 in the
Templates file name field, the exported profiles file name is defined as
Templates01_confProfiles.xml.
6
Click OK to export the Conference Templates and Conference Profiles to a file.
Exporting Selected Conference Templates
You can export a single Conference Template or multiple Conference Templates to other MCUs
in your environment.
To export selected Conference Templates:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the templates you want to export.
Polycom, Inc.
11-15
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
2
Right-click the Conference Templates to be exported, and then click Export Selected
Conference Templates.
.
The Conference Templates - Export dialog box is displayed.
3
In the Export Path field, type the path name to the location where you want to save the
exported file or click Browse to select the desired path.
4
Optional. Clear the Export includes conference profiles check box when you only want
to export Conference Templates.
When this check box is cleared, the Conference Templates - Export dialog box is displayed
without the Profiles file name field.
5
In the Templates file name field, type the file name prefix. The file name suffix
(_confTemplates.xml) is predefined by the system. For example, if you type,
Templates01, the exported file name is defined as Templates01_confTemplates.xml.
The system automatically defines the Profiles file name field with the same file name
prefix as the Templates file name field. For example, if you type Templates01 in the
Templates file name field, the exported profiles file name is defined as
Templates01_confProfiles.xml.
11-16
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 11-Conference Templates
6
Click OK to export the Conference Templates and Conference Profiles to a file.
Importing Conference Templates
You can import Conference Templates and Conference Profiles from one MCU to multiple
MCUs in your environment.
To import Conference Templates:
1 In the Collaboration Server Web Client main window, click the Conference Templates tab.
The Conference Templates are displayed.
2
Click the Import Conference Templates
button or right-click the Conference
Templates pane, and then click Import Conference Templates.
The Conference Templates - Import dialog box is displayed.
3
Optional. Clear the Import includes conference profiles check box when you only
want to import Conference Templates.
When this check box is cleared, the Conference Templates - Import dialog box is displayed
without the Profiles file name field.
Polycom, Inc.
11-17
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
In the Import Path field, click Browse to navigate to the path and file name of the
Conference Templates you want to import.
When clicking the exported templates file you want to import, the system automatically
displays the appropriate files in the Templates file name field and the Profiles file name
field (when the Import includes conference profiles check box is selected).
5
Click OK to import the Conference Templates and their associated Conference Profiles, if
selected.
Conference Templates are not imported when:
— A Conference Template already exists
— An associated Conference Profile is not defined in the Conference Profiles list
When one or more Conference Templates are not imported, a Message Alert window is
displayed with the templates that were not imported.
6
Click Cancel to exit the Message Alerts window.
The imported Conference Templates are added to the Conference Templates list. When the
Import includes conference profiles check box is selected, the imported Conference
Profiles are added to the Conference Profiles list.
11-18
Polycom, Inc.
12
Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft
Outlook®
Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook is supported in CP Conferencing Mode only.
Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook is an add-in that enables users to easily organize
and invite attendees to Video Enabled meetings via Microsoft Outlook®.
Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook is implemented by installing the Polycom
Conferencing Add-in for Microsoft Outlook on Microsoft Outlook®
e-mail clients. It enables meetings to be scheduled with video endpoints from within
Outlook. The add-in also adds a Polycom Conference button in the Meeting tab of the Microsoft
Outlook e-mail client ribbon.
The meeting organizer clicks the Polycom Conference button to add Conference Information
to the meeting invitation.
Attendees call the meeting at the scheduled Start Time using the link or the dial-in number
provided in the meeting invitation.
Polycom Conference Button
Conference
Information
Added
Polycom, Inc.
12-1
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
A Gathering Slide is displayed to connected participants until the conference starts.
Gathering Slide:
Displays Meeting
Information Until
Conference Starts
The Gathering Slide displays live video along with information taken from the meeting
invitation such as the subject, meeting organizer, duration, dial-in numbers etc. At the end
of the Gathering Phase, the conference layout is displayed.
For more information see "Video Preview (AVC Only Participants)” on page 3-20.
Setting up the Calendaring Solution
The following steps are performed to set up the Calendaring solution:
A The administrator installs the Polycom Conferencing Add-in for Microsoft for Microsoft
Outlook e-mail clients. For more information, see the Polycom Unified Communications
Deployment Guide for Microsoft Environments.
12-2
B
The administrator creates an Microsoft Outlook e-mail-account for the Collaboration
Server.
If included in the solution, Polycom DMA system (DMA) and calendaring-enabled
endpoints share this e-mail account. For more information, see the Polycom Unified
Communications Deployment Guide for Microsoft Environments.
C
The administrator configures the Collaboration Server for Calendaring using the
Exchange Integration Configuration dialog box, providing it with the Microsoft Exchange
Server Name, User Name and Password and optional Primary SMTP Mail box
information needed to access the
e-mail account.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 12-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
To configure the Collaboration Server’s Exchange Integration Configuration:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > Exchange Integration Configuration.
The Exchange Integration Configuration dialog box is displayed.
There are three options that can be used to configure the Exchange Integration
Configuration. The option you choose will depend on the configuration of the mailbox in
the Exchange Server and the configuration of the Exchange Server itself.
— Option 1 - Use this option if the Exchange Server settings have been left at their
default values.
— Option 2 - Use this option if the Primary SMTP Mailbox is not the default mailbox.
— Option 3 - Use this option if the Exchange Server settings have been modified by the
administrator.
Option 1 - Using default Exchange Server settings
Mailbox Properties
Default
Mailbox
Name
Required
Fields
Exchange
Management
Console
Default
Domain
Name
Polycom, Inc.
12-3
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
a
Define the following fields:
Table 12-1 Exchange Integration Configuration - Option 1
b
12-4
Field
Description
Enable Calendaring
Service
Select or clear this check box to enable or disable the
Calendaring Service using the Polycom Add-in for Microsoft
Outlook. When this check box is cleared all fields in the dialog
box are disabled.
Exchange Server
Address
Enter the IP address of the Exchange Server.
User Name
Enter the User Name of the Collaboration Server, as registered
in the Microsoft Exchange Server, that the Collaboration Server
uses to login to its e-mail account.
Field length: Up to 80 characters.
Password
Enter the Password the Collaboration Server uses to login to its
e-mail account as registered in the Microsoft Exchange Server.
Field length: Up to 80 characters.
Domain
Enter the name of the network domain where the Collaboration
Server is installed as defined in the Microsoft Exchange Server.
Primary SMTP
Mailbox (Optional)
This field is left empty.
Accept Appointments
Select this check box to enable the Collaboration Server to send
replies to meeting invitations.
Clear this check box when the Collaboration Server is part of a
Unified Conferencing solution that includes a DMA, as the DMA
will send a reply to the meeting invitation.
Click the OK button.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 12-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
Option 2 - Using an alternate Primary SMTP Mailbox
Mailbox Properties
Different
Mailbox
Names
Primary
SMTP
Mailbox
a
Additional
Required
Field
Define the following fields:
Table 12-2 Exchange Integration Configuration - Option 2
Field
Description
Enable Calendaring
Service
Exchange Server
Address
User Name
These fields are defined as for Option 1 above.
Password
Domain
Accept Appointments
Primary SMTP
Mailbox (Optional)
Polycom, Inc.
Enter the name of the SMTP Mailbox in the Microsoft Exchange
Server to be monitored by the Collaboration Server.
Note: Although several mailboxes can be assigned to each user
in the Microsoft Exchange Server, only the Primary SMTP
Mailbox is monitored. The Primary SMTP Mailbox name does
not have to contain either the Collaboration Server’s User Name
or Domain name.
12-5
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
b
Click the OK button.
Option 3 - Using modified Exchange Server settings
IIS Manager
Full path to
Exchange Server
Required
Fields
Exchange Web
Services Folder
Renamed from
EWS to EWD
a
Define the following fields:
Table 12-3 Exchange Integration Configuration - Option 3
12-6
Field
Description
Exchange Server
Address
If Exchange Server settings have been modified, enter the full
path to the Microsoft Exchange Server where the Collaboration
Server’s Microsoft Outlook e-mail account is registered, for
example if the EWS folder has been renamed EWD:
https://labexch01/EWD/Exchange.asmx
Note: If a server name is entered, the Collaboration Server and
the Microsoft Exchange Server must be registered to the same
Domain. (The Domain name entered in this dialog box must
match the Local Domain Name entry in the Management
Network - DNS Properties dialog box.)
For more information see "Modifying the Management Network”
on page 16-3.
Field length: Up to 80 characters.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 12-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
Table 12-3 Exchange Integration Configuration - Option 3 (Continued)
Field
Description
Enable Calendaring
Service
User Name
Password
Domain
These fields are defined as for Option 1 above.
Primary SMTP
Mailbox (Optional)
Accept Appointments
b
Click the OK button.
If applicable, RSS, VMC, DMA and calendaring-enabled endpoints are configured with
the Exchange Server Name, User Names and Passwords needed to access their accounts.
For more information see the Polycom Unified Communications Deployment Guide for
Microsoft Environments.
2
The administrator configures the Collaboration Server to have a default Ad-hoc Entry
Queue service enabled.
For more information see "Defining a New Entry Queue” on page 7-2.
Calendaring Guidelines
•
The Collaboration Server must have its MCU prefix registered in the gatekeeper.
For more information see "Modifying the Default IP Network Service” on page 16-11.
•
The Collaboration Server must be configured as a Static Route.
For more information see "Modifying the Default IP Network Service” on page 16-11.
•
The Collaboration Server’s Default Entry Queue must be configured as an Ad Hoc Entry
Queue and must be designated as the Transit Entry Queue.
For more information see the "Entry Queues” on page 7-1.
•
The meeting organizer can enable recording and/or streaming of the meeting.
•
If meeting is to be recorded, the Ad Hoc Entry Queue must have recording enabled in its
Profile.
For more information see "Defining New Profiles” on page 2-18.
•
Meetings can be single instance or have multiple occurrences.
•
Attendees that do not have video devices may be invited to the meeting.
•
Attendees using e-mail applications that use the iCalendar format may be invited to
meetings via the Calendaring Service.
•
Meeting invitations sent by Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook can be in a
different language to the Collaboration Server Web Client. The following languages are
supported:
—
—
—
—
Polycom, Inc.
English
French
German
International Spanish
12-7
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
•
12-8
— Korean
— Japanese
— Simplified Chinese
Collaboration Server resource management is the responsibility of the system
administrator:
— Conferences initiated by Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook are ad hoc
and therefore resources are not reserved in advance.
— Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook Add-in assumes that sufficient
resources are available and does not check resource availability. Sufficient
resources are therefore not guaranteed.
— A meeting invitation that is automatically accepted by the Collaboration Server is
not guaranteed availability of resources.
— If the Collaboration Server runs out of resources, attendees will not be able to
connect to their conferences.
By using DMA to load-balance resources between several Collaboration Servers,
resource capacity can be increased, alleviating resource availability problems.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 12-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
Creating and Connecting to a Conference
Creating a Conference
Meetings are organized using the Microsoft Outlook client in the normal manner.
If the meeting organizer decides that video participants are to be included in a multipoint
video conference, he/she clicks the Polycom Conference button. Conference Information such
as the Meeting ID and connection information is automatically added to the existing
appointment information.
Polycom Conference Button
Conference
Information
The meeting organizer can add a meeting agenda or personal text to the invitation before it
is sent. The meeting organizer can update or cancel the video enabled meeting in the same
manner as for any other meeting.
When the meeting organizer sends the meeting invitation a meeting record is saved in the
Microsoft Exchange Server, the Collaboration Server, DMA, RSS and calendaring-enabled
endpoints.
Collaboration Servers, DMA and calendaring-enabled endpoints poll the Microsoft Exchange
Server to retrieve new meeting records and updates to existing meeting records.
Polycom, Inc.
12-9
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 12-4 summarizes the Collaboration Server’s usage of Microsoft Outlook data fields
included in the meeting invitation.
Table 12-4
Microsoft Outlook Field Usage
Usage by the Collaboration Server / DMA
Microsoft
Outlook Field
Subject
Conference / Meeting Room
Display Name of Conference / Meeting
Room.
Start/End Time
Gathering Slide
Meeting Name.
Used to calculate the Conference’s Duration.
Record
Enable Recording in the Conference or
Meeting Room Profile.
Display Recording option.
Video Access
Number
Comprised of: <MCU Prefix in
Gatekeeper>
<Conference Numeric ID>.
Note: It is important that MCU Prefix in
Gatekeeper field in the Collaboration
Server’s IP Network Service Gatekeeper tab and the Dial-in prefix
field in the Polycom Conferencing Addin for Microsoft Outlook - Video Network
tab contain the same prefix information.
Displayed as the IP dial in number
in the Access Number section of
the Gathering Slide.
Video Access
Number (Cont.)
If Recording and Streaming are enabled
in the Conference Profile, this number
is used as part of the recording file
name.
Streaming
recording link
Enables the recording of the
conference to the Polycom RSS using
the recording link.
Enables streaming of the recording of
the conference from the Polycom RSS.
If recording is enabled, a REC
indicator is displayed in the top left
corner of the slide.
Connecting to a Conference
Participants can connect to the conference in the following ways:
•
Participants with Polycom CMA Desktop™ or a Microsoft Office Communicator client
running on their PCs can click on a link in the meeting invitation to connect to the
meeting.
•
Participants with a HDX or a room system will receive a prompt from the endpoint’s
calendaring system along with a button that can be clicked in order to connect.
Participants with endpoints that are not calendaring-enabled can connect to the
meeting by dialing the meeting number manually.
Collaboration Server Standalone Deployment
When using a single Collaboration Server in a standalone deployment, connection is via an
Ad Hoc Entry Queue. The meeting is started when the first participant connects to the
Collaboration Server.
12-10
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 12-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
When the first participant connects, a conference is created and named according to the
information contained in the dial string. Subsequent participants connecting with the same
dial string are routed from the Ad Hoc Entry Queue to the conference.
After the conference has been created the Conference Name, Organizer, Time, Duration and
Password (if enabled) are retrieved from the conference parameters for display during the
Gathering Phase.
Collaboration Server and Polycom DMA System Deployment
In a DMA deployment a Virtual Meeting Room is activated when the first participant
connects to the DMA. DMA receives the dial string to activate a Virtual Meeting Room on the
Collaboration Server.
DMA uses the Meeting ID contained in the dial-in string to access meeting information
stored in the Exchange Server database.
When the meeting information is found on the Exchange Server, the Conference Name,
Organizer, Time, Duration and Password (if enabled) are retrieved from the Exchange Server
database for display during the Gathering Phase.
If enabled, automatically generated passwords are ignored.
For more information see "Automatic Password Generation Flags” on page 21-36.
Polycom Solution Support
Polycom Implementation and Maintenance services provide support for Polycom solution
components only. Additional services for supported third-party Unified Communications
(UC) environments integrated with Polycom solutions are available from Polycom Global
Services and its certified Partners. These additional services will help customers successfully
design, deploy, optimize and manage Polycom visual communications within their UC
environments.
Professional Services for Microsoft Integration is mandatory for Polycom Conferencing for
Microsoft Outlook and Microsoft Office Communications Server integrations. For additional
information and details please see http://www.polycom.com/services/
professional_services/index.html or contact your local Polycom representative.
Polycom, Inc.
12-11
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
12-12
Polycom, Inc.
13
Conference and Participant
Monitoring
Skins
IVR
Info
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions
You can monitor ongoing conferences and perform various operations while conferences
are running.
Three levels of monitoring are available with the RealPresence Collaboration Server:
•

•


General Monitoring - You can monitor the general status of all ongoing conferences and
their participants in the main window.
Conference Level Monitoring - You can view additional information regarding a specific
conference and modify its parameters if required, using the Conference Properties option.
•
Participant Level Monitoring - You can view detailed information on the participant's
status, using the Participant Properties option.
•
The maximum number of participants:
— In SVC Only conference: up to 60 SVC-based participants
— In CP Only conference: up to 20 AVC-based HD participants or 40 AVC-based SD
participants
— In a Mixed CP and SVC conference: any combination of SVC and AVC-based
participants depending on the number of AVC and SVC participants.
Polycom, Inc.
13-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
General Monitoring
Users can monitor a conference or keep track of its participants and progress. For more
information, see RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Monitoring
Ongoing Conferences” on page 3-34.
You can click the blinking Participant Alerts indication bar to view participants that require
attention. For more information, see "System and Participant Alerts” on page 20-1.
Conference Level Monitoring
In addition to the general conference information that is displayed in the Conference list
pane, you can view the details of the conference’s current status and setup parameters,
using the Conference Properties dialog box.
Viewing the Properties of an Ongoing CP and CP and SVC Conference
To view the parameters of an ongoing CP conference:
1 In the Conference list pane, double-click the CP conference or right-click the CP
conference and then click Conference Properties.
13-2
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
The Conference Properties - General dialog box with the General tab opens.
General
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

The following information is displayed in the General tab:
Table 13-1 Conference Properties - General
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Display Name
The Display Name is the conference name in native language and
Unicode character sets to be displayed in the RP Collaboration
Server Web Client.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Duration
The expected duration of the conference using the format HH:MM.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Routing Name
The ASCII name of the conference. It can be used by H.323 and SIP
participants for dialing in directly to the conference. It is used to
register the conference in the gatekeeper and the SIP server.
Conferencing Mode
The conferencing mode for the conference.
Start Time
The time the conference started.
End Time
The expected conference end time.
Conference
Password
A numeric password for participants to access the conference.
Chairperson
Password
A numeric password used by participants to identify themselves as
the conference chairperson.
ID
The conference ID.
13-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 13-1 Conference Properties - General (Continued)
2
Field
Description
Profile
The name of the conference Profile from which conference
parameters were taken.
Line Rate
The maximum transfer rate, in kilobytes per second (Kbps) of the call
(video and audio streams).
Max Number of
Participants
Indicates the total number of participants that can be connected to
the conference. The Automatic setting indicates the maximum
number of participants that can be connected to the MCU according
to resource availability.
Click the Advanced tab.
The Conference Properties - Advanced dialog box opens.
3
The following information is displayed in the Advanced tab:
Table 13-2 Conference Properties - Advanced Parameters
13-4
Field/Option
Description
Encryption
Indicates whether the conference is encrypted.
Packet Loss
Compensation (LPR
and DBA)
Indicates wether LPR and DBA are enabled for the conference.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 13-2 Conference Properties - Advanced Parameters (Continued)
4
Field/Option
Description
Auto Terminate
When selected, indicates that the MCU will automatically terminate
the conference when Before First Joins, At the End-After Last Quits
and At the End - When Last Participant Remains parameters apply.
Auto Redialing
Indicates whether dial-out participants are automatically (when
selected) or manually (when cleared) connected to the conference.
This option is disabled in a mixed CP and SVC conference.
Exclusive Content
Mode
When selected, Content is limited to one participant.
Enable FECC
When selected, Far End Camera Control is enabled.
FW NAT Keep Alive
When selected, sends a FW NAT Keep Alive message at specific
Intervals for the RTP, UDP and BFCP channels. The interval specifies
how often a FW NAT Keep Alive message is sent. For more
information, see "NAT (Network Address Translation) Traversal” on
page 16-72
Click the Video Quality tab.
The Conference Properties - Video Quality dialog box opens.
Polycom, Inc.
13-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The following information is displayed:
Table 13-3 Conference Properties - Video Quality Parameters
Field/Option
Description
People Video Definition
Video Quality
Indicates the resolution and frame rate that determine the video
quality set for the conference. This is always Sharpness. For more
information, see "Video Resolutions in AVC-based CP Conferencing”
on page 4-1.
Maximum Resolution
This setting overrides the Maximum Resolution setting of the
Resolution Configuration dialog box.
The administrator can select one of the following Maximum
Resolution options:
• Auto (default) - The Maximum Resolution remains as selected in
the Resolution Configuration dialog box.
•
•
•
CIF
SD
HD720
Maximum Resolution settings can be monitored in the Profile
Properties - Video Quality and Participant Properties - Advanced
dialog boxes.
Notes:
The Resolution field in the New Participant - Advanced dialog box
allows Maximum Resolution to be further limited per participant
endpoint.
The Maximum Resolution settings for conferences and participants
cannot be changed during an ongoing conference.
Content Video Definition
Content Settings
Indicates the Content channel resolution set for the conference.
Possible resolutions are:
• Graphics – default mode
•
•
•
13-6
Hi-res Graphics – requiring a higher bit rate
Live Video – content channel is live video
Customized Content Rate - resolution is manually defined.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 13-3 Conference Properties - Video Quality Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Content Protocol
•
H.263
•
•
•
•
•
Content is shared using H.263 if a mix of H.263-supporting
and H.264-supporting endpoints are connected.
•
Content is shared using H.264 if all connected endpoints have
H.264 capability.
H.264 Cascade Optimized and SVC Optimized
All Content is shared using the H.264 content protocol and is
optimized for use in Cascaded Conferences.
H.264 HD
•
5
Use this option when most of the endpoints support H.263 and
some endpoints support H.264.
H.263 & H.264 Auto Selection (Default)
•
•
Content is shared using the H.263 protocol.
Ensures high quality Content when most endpoints support
H.264 and HD Resolutions.
Click the Video Settings tab to list the video parameters.
Video
Settings
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

Table 13-4 Conference Properties - Video Settings Parameters
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Presentation Mode
When checked, indicates that the Presentations Mode is active. This
option is disabled in a mixed CP and SVC conference.
For more information, see "Presentation Mode” on page 2-26.
13-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 13-4 Conference Properties - Video Settings Parameters (Continued)
Field
Description
Lecturer View
Switching
When checked, the Lecturer View Switching enables automatic
random switching between the conference participants in the lecturer
video window.
This option is disabled in a mixed CP and SVC conference.
Same Layout
When checked, forces the selected layout on all conference
participants, and the Personal Layout option is disabled.
This option is disabled in a mixed CP and SVC conference.
Auto Layout
When enabled, the system automatically selects the conference
layout based on the number of participants in the conference.
Lecturer
Indicates the name of the lecturer (if one is selected). Selecting a
lecturer enables the Lecture Mode.
This option is disabled in a mixed CP and SVC conference.
Auto Scan Interval(s)
The time interval, 10 - 300 seconds, that Auto Scan uses to cycle the
display of participants that are not in the conference layout in the
selected cell.
This option is disabled in a mixed CP and SVC conference.
Video Layouts
(graphic)
Indicates the currently selected video layout.
6
Click the Audio Settings tab to view the audio setting for the conference. You can
modify the Mute participants except lecturer setting.
7
CP Only Conferences: Click the Customized Polling tab to view and modify the
customized polling for the
conference.
All Conference Participants
Scanning Order
Move participant up in
Scanning
Order
Move participant down in
Scanning Order
Add /
Delete
13-8
Add All /
Delete All
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
All conference participants are listed in the left pane (All Participants) while the
participants that are to be displayed in the Auto Scan enabled cell of the video layout
are listed in the right pane (Scanning Order).
The dialog box buttons are summarized in Table 13-5.
Table 13-5 Customized Polling - Buttons
8
9
Button
Description
Add
Select a participant and click this button to Add a the participant to the
list of participants to be Auto Scanned.
The participants name is removed from the All Participants pane.
Delete
Select a participant and click this button to Delete the participant from
the list of participants to be Auto Scanned.
The participants name is moved back to the All Participants pane.
Add All
Add all participants to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned.
All participants’ names are removed from the All Participants pane.
Delete All
Delete all participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned.
All participants’ names are moved back to the All Participants pane.
Up
Select a participant and click this button to move the participant Up in
the Scanning Order.
Down
Select a participant and click this button to move the participant Down
in the Scanning Order.
Optional. Add a participant to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned:
a
Click on the participant’s name in the All Participants list.
b
Click the Add button to move the participant to the Scanning Order pane.
Optional. Delete a participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned:
a
Click on a participant’s name in the Scanning Order list.
b
Click the Delete button to move the participant back to the All Participants pane.
10 Optional. Add all participants to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned:
— Click the Add All button.
11 Optional. Delete all participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned:
— Click the Delete All button.
12 Optional. Move the participant up in the Scanning Order:
— Click the Up button.
13 Optional. Move the participant down in the Scanning Order:
— Click the Down button.
14 Click the Apply button to confirm and keep the Conference Properties dialog box open.
or
Click the OK the button to confirm and return to the RP Collaboration Server Web Client
Main Screen.
15 Click the Skins tab to view the skin selected for the conference.
You cannot select another skin during an ongoing conference.
Polycom, Inc.
13-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
16 Click the IVR tab to view the IVR settings.
17 Click the Information tab to view general information defined for the conference.
Changes made to this information once the conference is running are not saved to the
CDR.
18 Click the Recording tab to review the recording settings for the conference.
19 Click the Network Services tab to verify the SIP registration for the conference.
20 Click OK to close the Conference Properties dialog box.
Viewing the Properties of an Ongoing SVC-based Conference
To view the parameters of an ongoing SVC conference:
1 In the Conference list pane, double-click the SVC conference or right-click the SVC
conference and then click Conference Properties.
The Conference Properties - General dialog box with the General tab opens.
General
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

2
13-10
The following information is displayed in the General tab:
Field
Description
Display Name
The Display Name is the conference name in native language and
Unicode character sets to be displayed in the RP Collaboration
Server Web Client.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
3
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Duration
The expected duration of the conference using the format HH:MM.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Conferencing Mode
The conferencing mode for the conference.
Routing Name
The ASCII name of the conference. It can be used by H.323 and SIP
participants for dialing in directly to the conference. It is used to
register the conference in the gatekeeper and the SIP server.
Start Time
The time the conference started.
End Time
The expected conference end time.
Conference
Password
A numeric password for participants to access the conference.
Chairperson
Password
A numeric password used by participants to identify themselves as
the conference chairperson.
ID
The conference ID.
Profile
The name of the conference Profile from which conference
parameters were taken.
Line Rate
The maximum transfer rate, in kilobytes per second (Kbps) of the call
(video and audio streams).
Max Number of
Participants
Indicates the total number of participants that can be connected to
the conference. The Automatic setting indicates the maximum
number of participants that can be connected to the MCU according
to resource availability.
Click the Advanced tab.
13-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Conference Properties - Advanced dialog box opens.
4
The following information is displayed in the Advanced tab:
Table 13-6 Conference Properties - Advanced Parameters
5
13-12
Field/Option
Description
Encryption
Indicates whether the conference is encrypted.
Packet Loss
Compensation (LPR
and DBA)
Not supported.
Auto Terminate
When selected, indicates that the MCU will automatically terminate
the conference when Before First Joins, At the End-After Last Quits
and At the End - When Last Participant Remains parameters apply.
Auto Redialing
Dial-out is not supported in SVC conferences.
Exclusive Content
Mode
When selected, Content is limited to one participant.
Enable FECC
Far End Camera Control is not supported in SVC conferences.
Click the Video Quality tab.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
The Conference Properties - Video Quality dialog box opens.
The following information is displayed:
Table 13-7 Conference Properties - Video Quality Parameters
Field/Option
Description
People Video Definition
Video Quality
Indicates the resolution and frame rate that determine the video
quality set for the conference. Only Sharpness is supported.
Maximum Resolution
In SVC conferencing, this is always Auto (default) - The Maximum
Resolution remains as selected in the Resolution Configuration dialog
box.
Content Video Definition
Polycom, Inc.
Content Settings
In SVC conferencing, this is always set to Graphics
Content Protocol
In SVC conferencing this is always set to H.264 Cascade and SVC
Optimized.
Cascade Resolution
Resolution is fixed in SVC conferences.
6
Click the Information tab to view general information defined for the conference.
Changes made to this information once the conference is running are not saved to the
CDR.
7
Click OK to close the Conference Properties dialog box.
13-13
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants Requiring Assistance
Operator conferences are monitored in the same way as standard ongoing conferences.
Each Operator conference includes at least one participant - the Operator.
You can view the properties of the Operator conference by double-clicking the conference
entry in the Conferences list or by right-clicking the conference entry and selecting
Conference Properties. For more information, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Getting Started Guide, "Conference Level Monitoring” on page 3-35.
Requesting Help
A participant can request help using the appropriate DTMF code from his/her touch tone
telephone or the endpoint’s DTMF input device. The participant can request Individual
Assistance (default DTMF code *0) or Conference Assistance (default DTMF code 00).
Participants in Entry Queues who failed to enter the correct destination conference ID or the
conference password will wait for operator assistance (provided that an Operator
conference is active).
When requiring or requesting operator assistance, the RP Collaboration Server management
application displays the following:
13-14
•
The participant’s connection Status changes, reflecting the help request. For details, see
Table 13-8.
•
The conference status changes and it is displayed with the exclamation point icon and
the status “Awaiting Operator”.
•
The appropriate voice message is played to the relevant participants indicating that
assistance will be provided shortly.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
The following icons and statuses are displayed in the Participant Status column:
Table 13-8 Participants List Status Column Icons and Indications
Icon
Status indication
Description
Awaiting Individual
Assistance
The participant has requested the operator’s assistance
for himself/herself.
Awaiting Conference
Assistance
The participant has requested the operator’s assistance
for the conference. Usually this means that the operator
is requested to join the conference.
When the Operator moves the participant to the Operator conference for individual assistance
the participant Status indications are cleared.
Request to Speak
Participants that were muted by the conference organizer/system operator can indicate that
they want to be unmuted by entering the appropriate DTMF code.
An icon is displayed in the Role column of the Participants list for 30 seconds.
Request to Speak
Request to Speak is:
•
Activated when the participant enters the appropriate DTMF code (default: 99).
The DTMF code can be modified in the conference IVR Service Properties - DTMF Codes
dialog box.
Polycom, Inc.
•
Available for dial-in and dial-out participants.
•
A participant can request to speak more than once during the conference.
13-15
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
Supported in all conference types.
•
Supported in H.323 and SIP environments.
•
The duration of the icon display cannot be modified.
Participant Alerts List
The Participant Alerts list contains all the participants who are currently waiting for operator
assistance.
Participants are automatically added to the Participants Alerts list in the following
circumstances:
•
The participant fails to connect to the conference by entering the wrong conference ID
or conference password and waits for the operator’s assistance.
•
The participant requests Operator’s Assistance during the ongoing conference.
This list is used as reference only. Participants can be assisted and moved to the Operator
conference or the destination conference only from the Participants list of the Entry Queues or
ongoing conference where they are awaiting assistance.
The participants are automatically removed from the Participant Alerts list when moved to
any conference (including the Operator conference).
13-16
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Participant Level Monitoring
In addition to conference information, you can view detailed information regarding the
status and parameters of each listed participant, using the Participant Properties dialog box.
Participant properties can be displayed for all participants currently connected to a
conference and for defined participants that have been disconnected.
SIP SVC-based participant properties are similar to SIP CP-based participant properties.
Displaying Participants Properties
To display the participant Properties:
1 In the Participant List pane double-click the participant entry. Alternatively, right-click a
participant and then click Participant Properties.
The Participant Properties - Media Sources dialog box opens.
Media Sources properties are not available for SVC participants.
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Media
Sources
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

CP-based
Participant
The Media Sources dialog box enables you to mute participant’s audio, suspend
participant’s video transmission and select a personal Video Layout for the participant.
Polycom, Inc.
13-17
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
IP Participant Properties
Table 13-9 Participant Properties - Media Sources Parameters
Field
Description
Name
Indicates the participant’s name.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Endpoint Website
(link)
Click the Endpoint Website hyperlink to connect to the internal website of
the participant’s endpoint. It enables you to perform administrative,
configuration and troubleshooting activities on the endpoint.
The connection is available only if the IP address of the endpoint’s internal
site is filled in the Website IP Address field in the Participant Properties General dialog box.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Endpoint Type
Indicates whether the participant is using an CP-based or SVC-based
endpoint.
Fields, tabs and options are enabled or disabled according to the endpoint
type.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Layout Type
Indicates whether the video layout currently viewed by the participant is the
Conference or Personal Layout. If Personal Layout is selected, you can
select a Video Layout that will be viewed only by this participant.
Video Layout
Indicates the video layout currently viewed by the participant. When
Personal Layout is selected in the Layout Type you can force participants
to the video windows in a layout that is specific to the participant. For more
information, see RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started
Guide, "Changing the Video Layout of a Conference (CP and Mixed CP
and SVC Conferences)” on page 3-49.
Mute/Suspend
Indicates if the endpoint’s audio and/or video channels have been muted/
suspended. The entity that initiated audio mute or video suspend is also
indicated.
• MCU – Audio or Video channel has been muted/suspended by the
MCU.
•
User – Channels have been muted/suspended by the Collaboration
Server user.
•
Participant – Channels have been muted/suspended by the
participant from the endpoint.
You can also cancel or perform mute and suspend operation using these
check boxes.
Note: If the participant muted his/her audio channel, the system displays
the mute icon only for H.323. This icon is not displayed for SIP participant
due to SIP standard limitation.
Block
13-18
When checked, the audio transmission from the conference to the
participant’s endpoint is blocked, but the participant will still be heard by
other participants.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
2
Click the Connection Status tab to view the connection status, and if disconnected the
cause of the disconnection. This dialog box is the same for CP-based and SVC-based
participants.
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Connection
Status
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

Table 13-10 Participant Properties - Connection Status Parameters
Field
Description
Participant Status
Polycom, Inc.
Status
Indicates the connection status of the participant.
Connection Time
The date and time the participant connected to the conference.
Note: The time format is derived from the MCU’s operating system
time format.
Disconnection Time
The date and time the defined participant disconnected from the
conference.
Connection Retries
Left
Indicates the number of retries left for the system to connect defined
participant to the conference.
Call Disconnection
Cause
Displays the cause for the defined participant’s disconnection from
the conference. See Appendix A: "Disconnection Causes” on
page A-1.
Video Disconnection
Cause
Displays the cause the video channel could not be connected. For
more information, see Appendix A: "Disconnection Causes” on
page A-1.
Possible Solution
In some cases, a possible solution is indicated to the cause of the
video disconnection.
13-19
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
3
Click the H.245 (H.323) or SDP (SIP) tab during or after the participant’s connection
process to view information that can help in resolving connection issues.
Displays the endpoint’s actual
capabilities used for the connection
LPR activity
(Displayed in all three panes)
List’s the endpoint’s capabilities as
retrieved from the remote site
H.323 Participant
(CP-based|)
Displays the MCU’s capabilities used for
connection with the participant
SIP Participant
(CP-based and
SVC-based)
Table 13-11 Participant Properties - H.245/SDP Parameters
13-20
Field
Description
Remote Capabilities
Lists the participant’s capabilities as declared by the endpoint.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 13-11 Participant Properties - H.245/SDP Parameters (Continued)
Channel
Status
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

4
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Remote
Communication Mode
Displays the actual capabilities used by the endpoint when
establishing the connection with the MCU (Endpoint to MCU).
Local Communication
Mode
Displays the actual capabilities used by the MCU when establishing
the connection with the participant’s endpoint (MCU to Endpoint).
Click on the Channel Status tab to view the status of the various channels.
13-21
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 13-12 Participant Properties - Channel Status Parameters
13-22
Field
Description
Channels Used
When checked, indicates the channel type used by the participant to
connect to the conference: Incoming channels are endpoint to MCU,
Outgoing channels are from MCU to endpoint.
Channels:
• H.225/Signaling - The call-signaling channel.
• H.245/SDP - The Control channel.
• Audio in - Incoming audio channel
• Audio out - Outgoing audio channel
• Video in - Incoming video channel
• Video out - Outgoing video channel
• Content in - H.239/People+Content conferences
• Content out - H.239/People+Content conferences
• FECC in - The incoming FECC channel is open.
• FECC out - The outgoing FECC channel is open.
Columns:
• Faulty – A red exclamation point indicates a faulty channel
condition. This is a real-time indication; when resolved the
indication disappears. An exclamation point indicates that further
investigation may be required using additional parameters
displayed in the Advanced Channel Status tab.
•
Bit Rate – The actual transfer rate for the channel. When
channel is inactive, bit rate value is 0. For example, if the
participant is connected without video, the bit rate for the video
channel is 0.
Note: The CTS Audio Auxiliary channel is used only for Content.
In all other cases, the bit rate shown in this column for this
channel is 0.
•
Packet Loss – The accumulated count of all packets that are
missing according to the RTCP report since the channel was
opened. This field is relevant only during the connection stage
and does not display faulty indications.
•
Fraction Loss (Peak) – The ratio between the number of lost
packets and the total number of transmitted packets since the
last RTCP report. Peak (in parentheses) indicates the highest
ratio recorded since the channel was opened.
•
Number of Packets – The number of received or transmitted
packets since the channel has opened. This field does not cause
the display of the faulty indicator.
•
Jitter (Peak) – Displays the network jitter (the deviation in time
between the packets) as reported in the last RTCP report (in
milliseconds). Peak (in parentheses) reflects the maximum
network jitter since the channel was opened.
•
Latency – Indicates the time it takes a packet to travel from one
end to another in milliseconds (derived from the RTCP report).
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 13-12 Participant Properties - Channel Status Parameters (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Sync Status
Channel - The channel type: Video or Content.
Source - The name of the participant currently viewed by this
participant.
Position - The video layout position indicating the place of each
participant as they appear in a conference.
Protocol Sync Loss - Indicates whether the system was able to
synchronize the bits order according to the selected video protocol.
Video Intra Sync - Indicates whether the synchronization on a video
Intra frame was successful.
Video Resolution - The video resolution of the participant.
Rx - Rate
The received line rate.
Tx - Rate
The transmitted line rate.
Tx - Video Sync Loss
When checked, indicates a video synchronization problem in the
outgoing channel from the MCU.
The counter indicates the sync-loss count.
Rx - Video Sync Loss
When checked, indicates a video synchronization problem in the
incoming channel from the endpoint.
The counter indicates the sync-loss count.
Tx - LPR Activation
When checked, indicates LPR activation in the outgoing channel.
Rx - LPR Activation
When checked, indicates LPR activation in the incoming channel.
FECC Token
When checked, indicates that the participant is the holder of the
FECC Token.
Content Token
When checked, indicates that the participant is the holder of the
Content Token.
13-23
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
5
Click the Channel Status Advanced tab to view additional information for selected
audio and video channels.
In the Channel Status - Advanced tab, channels can be selected for viewing additional
information:
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Channel
Status
Advanced
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

Table 13-13 Participant Properties - Channel Status Advanced Parameters
Field
Description
Channel Info
Select a channel to view its information:
• H.225
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Collaboration Server
IP Address
13-24
H.245
Audio in
Audio out
Video in
Video out
Content in
Content Out
SIP BFCP TCP IN
The IP address and the transport protocol (TCP/UDP) of the MCU to
which the participant is connected and the port number allocated to
the participant incoming media stream on the MCU side.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 13-13 Participant Properties - Channel Status Advanced Parameters (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Participant IP
Address
The IP address and the transport protocol (TCP/UDP) of the
participant and the port number allocated to the media stream on the
participant side.
ICE Collaboration
Server IP Address
The IP address, port number, and transport protocol of the MCU used
to pass through the media when ICE is functional. See Appendix I,
“Participant Properties - ICE Connection Parameters”on page I-37.
ICE Participant IP
Address
The IP address, port number, and transport protocol of the endpoint
used to pass through the media when ICE is functional. See
Appendix I, “Participant Properties - ICE Connection Parameters”on
page I-37.
ICE Connection Type
Indicates the type of connection between the Collaboration Server
and the participant in the ICE environment:•
•
Local (or Host) - The endpoint (Remote) is on the same network
as the Collaboration Server and the media connection is direct,
using local addresses.
•
Relay - Media between the Collaboration Server and the
participant passes through a media relay server.
•
Firewall - Media connection between the Collaboration Server
and the participant is done using their external IP addresses (the
IP addresses as seen outside of the local network).
Media Info
This table provides information about the audio and video parameters,
such as video algorithm, resolution, etc. For more information, see
Appendix E: "Participant Properties Advanced Channel Information”
on page E-1.
RTP Statistics
This information may indicate problems with the network which can
affect the audio and video quality. For more information, see Appendix
E: "Participant Properties Advanced Channel Information” on
page E-1.
13-25
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
6
Optional for H.323 CP-based participants. Click the Gatekeeper Status tab to view its
parameters.
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Gatekeeper
Status
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

Table 13-14 Participant Properties - Gatekeeper Status Parameters
13-26
Field
Description
Requested
Bandwidth
The bandwidth requested by the MCU from the gatekeeper.
Allocated Bandwidth
The actual bandwidth allocated by the gatekeeper to the MCU.
Required Info Interval
Indicates the interval, in seconds, between registration messages
that the MCU sends to the gatekeeper to indicate that it is still
connected.
Gatekeeper State
Indicates the status of the participant’s registration with the
gatekeeper and the bandwidth allocated to the participant. The
following statuses may be displayed:
• ARQ – Admission Request - indicates that the participant has
requested the gatekeeper to allocate the required bandwidth on
the LAN.
•
Admitted – indicates that the gatekeeper has allocated the
required bandwidth to the participant.
•
DRQ – Disengage Request – the endpoint informs the gatekeeper
that the connection to the conference is terminated and requests
to disconnect the call and free the resources.
•
None – indicates that there is no connection to the gatekeeper.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 13-Conference and Participant Monitoring
7
Optional for SIP CP-based and SVC-based participants. Click the Call Admission
Control tab to view its parameters.
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Gatekeeper
Status
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

Table 13-15 Participant Properties - Gatekeeper Status Parameters
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Requested
Bandwidth
The bandwidth requested by the MCU from the SIP server.
Allocated Bandwidth
The actual bandwidth allocated by the SIP server to the MCU.
13-27
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
In the SIP Participant Properties dialog box, BFCP status information appears in:
•
All three panes of the SDP tab.
•
The Channel Status tab.
•
The Channel Status -Advanced tab.
SDP
Channel Status
Channel Status - Advanced
For more information see "Participant Level Monitoring” on page 13-17.
13-28
Polycom, Inc.
14
Recording Conferences
Conference recording is not available in SVC Conferencing Mode.
Conferences running on the Collaboration Server can be recorded using a Polycom® RSS™
Recording and Streaming Server (RSS).
The recording system can be installed at the same site as the conferencing MCU or at a
remote site. Several MCU’s can share the same recording system.
Recording conferences is enabled via a Recording Link, which is a dial-out connection from
the conference to the recording system.
Recording can start automatically, when the first participant connects to a conference, or on
request, when the Collaboration Server user or conference chairperson initiates it.
Multiple Recording Links may be defined.
Conference Recording Links can be associated on the Collaboration Server with Virtual
Recording Rooms (VRR), created and saved on the Polycom® RSS™ 4000 Version 6.0 Recording
and Streaming Server (RSS).
Each Recording Link defined on the Collaboration Server can be given a descriptive name
and can be associated with one VRR saved on the Polycom RSS 4000.
The following guidelines apply:
Polycom, Inc.
•
A Recording Link that is being used by an ongoing conference cannot be deleted.
•
A Recording Link that is assigned to a Profile cannot be deleted.
•
The Recording Link does not support H.264 High Profile.
•
While a Profile s being used in an ongoing conference, it cannot have a different
Recording Link assigned to it.
•
Up to 100 Recording Links can be listed for selection in the Conference Profile.
•
Multiple Recording Links are supported in Continuous Presence and Video Switched
conferences.
•
The number of Recording Links available for selection is determined by the value of the
MAXIMUM_RECORDING_LINKS System Flag in system.cfg. Default value is 20
Recording Links.
•
The recording link can be encrypted when recording from an encrypted conference to
the RSS that is set to encryption. For more details, see "Recording Link Encryption” on
page 14-7.
14-1
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Creating Multiple Virtual Recording Rooms on the RSS
If the environment includes a Polycom® RSS™ 4000 Version 6.0 Recording and Streaming
Server (RSS) and you want to associate Recording Links on the Collaboration Server with
Virtual Recording Rooms (VRR), created and saved on the Polycom® RSS™ 4000 Version 6.0
perform the following operations on the RSS:
1
Modify the parameters of a recording Template to meet the recording requirements.
2
Assign the modified recording Template to a VRR. The recording and streaming server
will assign a number to the VRR.
3
Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 for each VRR to create additional VRRs.
For more information see the RSS 4000 Version 6.0 User Guide.
Configuring the Collaboration Server to Enable Recording
To make recording possible the following components you must be configured on the
Collaboration Server:
•
Recording Link – defines the connection between the conference and the recording
system.
•
Recording-enabled Conference IVR Service – recording DTMF codes and messages must be
set in the Conference IVR Service to enable “recording-related” voice messages to be
played and to allow the conference chairperson to control the recording process using
DTMF codes.
•
Recording-enabled Profile – recording must be enabled in the Conference Profile assigned to
the recorded conference.
If Multiple Recording Links are being defined for Virtual Recording Rooms (VRRs), created and
saved on the Polycom® RSS™ 4000 Version 6.0, the MAXIMUM_RECORDING_LINKS
System Flag in system.cfg can be modified to determine the number of Recording Links
available for selection.
•
Range: 20 - 100
•
Default: 20
The flag value can be modified by selecting the System Configuration option from the Setup
menu. For more information, see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
Defining the Recording Link
The Recording Link is defined once and can be updated when the H.323 alias or the IP
address (of the recording system) is changed. Only one Recording Link can be defined in the
Collaboration Server. Its type must be H.323.
In Multiple Networks Configuration, Recording Links use the default Network Service to connect to
conferences, therefore the recording system must be defined on the default IP Network Service to
enable the recording.
To define a Recording Link:
14-2
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click Recording Links (
2
In the Recording Links list, click the New Recording Link (
).
) button.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 14-Recording Conferences
The New Recording Link dialog box is displayed.
3
Define the following parameters:
Table 14-1 Recording Link Parameters
Parameter
Description
Name
Displays the default name that is assigned to the Recording Link.
If multiple Recording Links are defined, it is recommended to use a
descriptive name to be indicate the VRR to which it will be associated.
Default: Recording Link
Type
Select the network environment:
• H.323
IP Address
Alias Name
•
SIP
•
If no gatekeeper is configured, enter the IP Address of the RSS.
Example: If the RSS IP address is 173.26.120.2 enter
173.26.120.2.
•
If a gatekeeper is configured, you can either enter the IP address
or an alias (see the alias description).
If using the endpoint’s alias instead of IP address, first select the alias
type and then enter the endpoint’s alias.
If you are associating this recording link to a VRR on the RSS, define
the alias as follows:
• If you are using the RSS IP address, enter the VRR number in the
Alias field. For example, if the VRR number is 5555, enter 5555.
•
Alias Type
Polycom, Inc.
Alternatively, if the Alias Type is set to H.323 ID, enter the RSS IP
address and the VRR number in the format:
<RSS_IP_Address>##<VRR number>
For example: If the RSS IP is 173.26.120.2 and the VRR number
is 5555, enter 173.26.120.2##5555
Depending on the format used to enter the information in the IP
address and Alias fields, select H.323 ID or E.164 (for multiple
Recording links). E-mail ID and Participant Number are also
available.
14-3
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
Click OK.
The Recording Link is added to the Collaboration Server unit.
Enabling the Recording Features in a Conference IVR Service
To record a conference, a Conference IVR Service in which the recording messages and DTMF
codes are activated must be assigned to the conference. The default Conference IVR Service
shipped with the Collaboration Server includes the recording-related voice messages and
default DTMF codes that enable the conference chairperson to control the recording process
from the endpoint. You can modify these default settings.
To modify the default recording settings for an existing Conference IVR Service:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the IVR Services (
) button.
The IVR Services are listed in the IVR Services list pane.
2
To modify the default recording settings, double-click the Conference IVR Service or
right-click and select Properties.
The Conference IVR Service Properties dialog box is displayed.
14-4
3
To assign voice messages other than the default, click the General tab and scroll down
the list of messages to the recording messages.
4
Select the Recording In Progress message, and then select the appropriate message file
(by default, Recording_in_Progress.wav) from the file list to the right of the field.
5
Select the Recording Failed message, and then select the appropriate message file (by
default, Recording_Failed.wav) from the file list to the right of the field.
6
To modify the default DTMF codes, click the DTMF Codes tab.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 14-Recording Conferences
7
To modify the DTMF code or permission for a recording function:
a
Select the desired DTMF name (Start, Stop or Pause Recording), click the DTMF
code entry and type a new code.
Table 14-2
b
8
Default DTMF Codes assigned to the recording process
Recording Operation
DTMF Code
Permission
Start or Resume Recording
*3
Chairperson
Stop Recording
*2
Chairperson
Pause Recording
*1
Chairperson
In the Permission entry, select whether this function can be used by all conference
participants or only the chairperson.
Click OK.
Enabling the Recording in the Conference Profile
To be able to record a conference, the recording options must be enabled in the Conference
Profile assigned to it. You can add recording to existing Profiles by modifying them.
To enable recording for a conference:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Conference Profiles (
) button.
The Conference Profiles list is displayed.
2
Create a new profile by clicking the New Profile ( ) button or modify an existing
profile by double-clicking or right-clicking an existing profile and then selecting Profile
Properties.
If creating a new profile, complete the conference definition. For more information on creating
Profiles see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide, “Defining New
Profiles” on page 2-18.
3
Polycom, Inc.
In the Profile Properties dialog box, click the Recording tab.
14-5
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
Select the Enable Recording check box.
5
Define the following parameters:
Table 14-3 Conference Profile Recording Parameters
Parameter
Description
Enable Recording
Select to enable Recording Settings in the dialog box.
Recording Link
Select a recording link for the conference from the list.
Start recording
Select one of the following:
• Immediately – conference recording is automatically started
upon connection of the first participant.
•
6
14-6
Upon Request – the operator or chairperson must initiate the
recording (manual).
Audio only
Select this option to record only the audio channel of the conference.
Note:
An Audio Only Recording Link cannot be used to record a conference
if there are no Voice resources allocated in the Video/Voice Port
Configuration.
Display Recording
Icon
Select this option to display Recording Indication to all conference
participants informing them that the conference is being recorded.
The recording icon is replaced by a Paused icon when conference
recording is paused.
Click OK.
Recording is enabled in the Conference Profile.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 14-Recording Conferences
Recording Link Encryption
The Recording Link can be encrypted when recording an encrypted conference. The
encryption of the Recording Link is enabled when Encryption is selected in the Conference
Profile on the Collaboration Server and on the RSS, and the system flag
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF is set to NO.
Recording Link Encryption Guidelines:
• The Recording Link connection type must be H.323.
•
The Recording Link uses the AES encryption format.
•
The RSS 2000/4000 recorder must be set to support encryption. The following RSS
recorders support encryption:
— RSS 4000 version 5.0 with “upgrade package_1647_Release version” installed
— RSS 2000 with version 4.0.0.001 360 installed
For more information see the RSS 2000/4000 User Manual.
•
Encryption must be selected in the Conference Profile.
Recording Link Encryption Flag Setting
Recording Links are treated as regular participants, however if the
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF System Flag is set to
YES a non-encrypted Recording Link is to be allowed to connect to an encrypted conference.
Table 14-4 summarizes the connection possibilities for a Recording Link that is to be
connected to a conference for each of the conference profile and Entry Queue encryption
options.
Table 14-4 Connections by Recording Link and Conference Encryption Settings
Conference
Profile Setting
Recording Link Connection Status according to flag:
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_
LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
YES
Polycom, Inc.
NO
Encrypt All
Connected encrypted if possible,
otherwise connected nonencrypted.
Connected only if encrypted,
otherwise disconnected.
No Encryption
Connected non-encrypted.
Connected non-encrypted.
Encrypt when possible
Connected encrypted if possible,
otherwise connected nonencrypted.
Connected encrypted if possible,
otherwise connected nonencrypted.
14-7
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Recording Link Settings
The recording of encrypted conferences via an encrypted Recording Link is enabled in the
Conference Profile by:
•
Selecting the Encryption option (Encrypt All or Encrypt when Possible) in the Advanced
tab.
For more details, see "Media Encryption” on page 3-29.
•
Setting the Recording options in the Recording tab. For more details, see "Enabling the
Recording in the Conference Profile” on page 14-5.
.
Managing the Recording Process
When a conference is started and recording is enabled in its Profile, the system will
automatically start the recording if the Start Recording parameter is set to immediately. If it is
set to Upon Request, the system waits for the chairperson or Collaboration Server user’s
request. Once the recording is initiated for a conference, the MCU connects to the recording
device (RSS 2000) using the default Recording Link. The connection that is created between
the conference and the recording device is represented as a special participant (Recording)
whose name is the Recording Link. Once the recording has started, the recording process can
be stopped and restarted from the Chairperson’s endpoint (using DTMF codes) or from the
Collaboration Server Web Client. After the recording process has finished, the recording can be
identified in the RSS 2000 by its Collaboration Server conference name.
A conference participant and the Recording Link cannot have identical names, otherwise the
recording process will fail.
14-8
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 14-Recording Conferences
Recording Link Layout
When the video layout of the conference is set to Auto Layout, the recording of the
conference will now include all the conference participants and not n-1 participants as in
previous versions.
In the new Auto Layout algorithm, the Recording Link is counted as a “participant” and
therefore it is excluded from the layout display used for the recording. The layout used for
the other participants will behave as in the “standard” Auto Layout behavior.
The Recording Link Layout can be changed during an ongoing conference in the same manner
as for any other conference participant. For more information see the RealPresence
Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Participant Level Monitoring” on page 13-17.
The default settings for Auto Layout for the conference and the Recording Link are
summarized in the following table:
Table 15
Recording Link Default Layout Settings (Auto Layout Mode)
Participants
0
Conference Auto Layout
Default Settings
Recording Link Auto
Layout Settings
Not applicable
Not applicable
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 or more
The default settings for Auto Layout of the Recording Link cannot be changed, and the Auto
Layout flags do not apply to the Recording Link Auto Layout default settings.
Polycom, Inc.
14-9
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Using the Collaboration Server Web Client to Manage the Recording
Process
To manage the recording process using the right-click menu:
>> Right-click the Recording participant in the conference and select from one of the
following options:
The Recording participant does not support H.264 High Profile. If recording a conference set to
H,264 High Profile, the Recording participant connects as Audio Only and records the conference
Audio while displaying the recording icon for the conference.
Table 14-1 Recording Participant Right-click Options
14-10
Name
Description
Start
Starts recording. When recording has started, this option toggles with
the Pause option.
Pause
Pauses the recording of the conference without disconnecting. When
the Recording is Paused, this option toggles with the Start option.
Resume
Resumes the recording of the conference. The Resume option
toggles with the Pause option when it is used.
Stop
Stops the recording.
Note: The Stop button is only enabled when the Recording is Started
or Paused.
Suspend Video
The Suspend Video option prevents the incoming video of the
recording link participant to be part of the conference layout.
The Recording Link participant is set by default to Suspend Video.
The Suspend Video option toggles with the Resume Video option.
Resume Video
The Resume Video option enables the incoming video of the
recording link participant to be part of the conference layout.
This feature may be used to play back previously recorded video or
audio feeds in the conference layout. For more information, see the
RSS 2000 User Guide.
Participant Properties
The Participant Properties option displays viewing only information for
monitoring, e.g. communication capabilities and channels used to
connect to the conference. Users will not be able to perform any
functional requests from this window, i.e. disconnect, change layout
and mute.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 14-Recording Conferences
To manage the recording process using the Conference toolbar:
>> In the Conferences pane, click one of the following buttons in the Conference tool bar.
The recording buttons will only be displayed in the conference tool bar for a conference that is
recording-enabled.
Table 14-2 Conferences List - Recording Tool bar buttons
Button
Description
Start/Resume recording. This button toggles with the Pause button.
Stop recording.
Pause recording. This button toggles with the Start/Resume button.
Using DTMF Codes to Manage the Recording Process
By entering the appropriate DTMF code on the endpoint, the chairperson can Stop the
recording (*74), Pause it (*75), or Start/Resume the recording (*73). For more information on
managing the recording process via DTMF codes, see the RSS 2000 User’s Guide.
Conference Recording with Codian IP VCR
Conference recording is available with Codian VCR 2210, VCR 2220 and VCR 2240.
Recording between the Collaboration Server and the Codian VCR is enabled by adding an IP
participant to the recorded conference that acts as a link between the conference and the
recording device. This participant is identified as a recording link to the Codian VCR
according to the product ID sent from the VCR during the connection phase, in the call setup
parameters.
The video channel between the conference and the recording device is unidirectional where
the video stream is sent from the conference to the recorder.
If the Codian VCR opens a video channel to the conference - this channel is excluded from
the conference video mix.
To record a conference running on the Collaboration Server using Codian recorder:
>> In the conference, define or add a dial-out participant using the Codian VCR IP address
as the address for dialing.
Polycom, Inc.
14-11
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Once added to the conference, the MCU automatically connects the participant (the link
to Codian VCR) and the recording is automatically started on the Codian VCR.
A connection can also be defined on the Codian VCR, dialing into the recorded conference
using the MCU prefix and the Conference ID as for any other dial-in participant in the
conference.
Monitoring the recording participant:
This connection is monitored as any other participant in the conference. The connection can
also be monitored in the Codian VCR web client.
14-12
Polycom, Inc.
15
Users, Connections and Notes
Users
RealPresence Collaboration Server Web Client Users are defined in the User’s table and can
connect to the MCU to perform various operations.
A maximum of 100 users can be defined per MCU.
User Types
The MCU supports the following user Authorization Levels:
•
Administrator
•
Administrator Read-only
•
Operator
•
Chairperson
•
Auditor
•
Machine Account (Application-user)
•
Users with Auditor authorization level cannot connect to the Collaboration Server via the
Collaboration Server Manager application and must use the Collaboration Server Web Client.
The authorization level determines a user’s capabilities within the system.
Administrator
An administrator can define and delete other users, and perform all configuration and
maintenance tasks.
Administrator Read-only
A user with Administrator permission with the same viewing and monitoring permissions
of a regular Administrator. However, this user is limited to creating system backups and
cannot perform any other configuration or conference related operation.
Operator
An Operator can manage Meeting Rooms, Profiles, Entry Queues, and SIP Factories, and
can also view the Collaboration Server configurations, but cannot change them.
Administrator and Operator users can verify which users are defined in the system. Neither
of them can view the user passwords, but an Administrator can change a password.
Polycom, Inc.
15-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Chairperson
A Chairperson can only manage ongoing conferences and participants. The Chairperson
does not have access to the Collaboration Server configurations and utilities.
Auditor
An Auditor can only view Auditor Files and audit the system.
Machine Account
User names can be associated with servers (machines) to ensure that all users are subject to
the same account and password policies.
For enhanced security reasons it is necessary for the Collaboration Server to process user
connection requests in the same manner, whether they be from regular users accessing the
Collaboration Server via the Collaboration Server Web Browser / Collaboration Server Manager
or from application-users representing applications such as CMA and DMA.
Regular users can connect from any workstation having a valid certificate while applicationusers representing applications can only connect from specific servers. This policy ensures
that a regular user cannot impersonate an application-user to gain access to the Collaboration
Server in order to initiate an attack that would result in a Denial of Service (DoS) to the
impersonated application.
The connection process for an application-user connecting to the Collaboration Server is as
follows:
1
The application-user sends a connection request, including its TLS certificate, to the
Collaboration Server.
2
The Collaboration Server searches its records to find the FQDN that is associated with
the application-user’s name.
3
If the FQDN in the received certificate matches that associated with application-user, and
the password is correct, the connection proceeds.
•
Application-users are only supported when TLS security is enabled and Request peer
certificate is selected. TLS security cannot be disabled until all application-user accounts
have been deleted from the system.
•
For Secure Communications, an administrator must set up on the Collaboration Server
system a machine account for the CMA system with which it interacts. This machine
account must include a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) for the CMA system.
•
Application-user names are the same as regular user names.
Example: the CMA application could have an application-user name of CMA1.
•
The FQDN can be used to associate all user types: Administrator, Operator with the
FQDN of a server.
•
Multiple application-users can be configured the same FQDN name if multiple
applications are hosted on the same server
•
If the system is downgraded the application-user’s FQDN information is not deleted
from the Collaboration Server’s user records.
•
A System Flag, PASS_EXP_DAYS_MACHINE, enables the administrator to change the
password expiration period of application-user’s independently of regular users. The
default flag value is 365 days.
Guidelines
15-2
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 15-Users, Connections and Notes
•
The server hosting an application-user whose password is about to expire will receive a
login response stating the number of days until the application-user’s password expires.
This is determined by the value of the
PASSWORD_EXPIRATION_WARNING_DAYS System Flag. The earliest warning
can be displayed 14 days before the password is due to expire and the latest warning
can be displayed 7 days before passwords are due to expire. An Active Alarm is created
stating the number of days before the password is due to expire.
•
The MIN_PWD_CHANGE_FREQUENCY_IN_DAYS System Flag does not effect
application-user accounts. Applications typically manage their own password change
frequency.
•
If an application-user identifies itself with an incorrect FQDN, its account will not be
locked, however the event is written to the Auditor Event File.
•
If an application-user identifies itself with a correct FQDN and an incorrect password, its
account will be locked and the event written to the Auditor Event File.
•
An application-user cannot be the last administrator in the system. The last administrator
must be regular user.
•
User names are not case sensitive.
Monitoring
•
An application-user and its connection is represented by a specific icon.
Active Directory
•
When working with Active Directory, CMA and DMA cannot be registered within Active
Directory as regular users. CMA and DMA application-users must be manually.
•
The only restriction is that TLS mode is enabled together with client certificate
validation.
•
If the above configuration are set off it will not be possible to add machine accounts.
•
When setting the TLS mode off the system should check the existence of a machine
account and block this operation until all machine accounts are removed.
Listing Users
The Users pane lists the currently defined users in the system and their authorization levels.
The pane also enables the administrators to add and delete users.
The system is shipped with a default Administrator user called POLYCOM, whose
password is POLYCOM. However, once you have defined other authorized Administrator
users, it is recommended to remove the default user.
You can view the list of users that are currently defined in the system.
To view the users currently defined in the system:
1
Polycom, Inc.
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Users (
) button.
15-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Users pane is displayed.
The list includes three columns: User Name, Authorization Level and Disabled.
The User Name is the login name used by the user to connect to the MCU.
The Authorization indicates the Authorization Level assigned to the User: Administrator,
Administrator Read-only, Operator, Chairperson or Auditor.
Disabled indicates whether the user is disabled and cannot access the system unless
enabled by the administrator. For more details, see "Disabling a User” on page 15-6.
Locked indicates whether the user has been locked out and cannot access the system
unless enabled by the administrator.
Adding a New User
Administrators can add new users to the system.
The User Name and Password must be in ASCII.
To add a new user to the system:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Users (
2
The Users pane is displayed.
3
Click the New User (
User.
) button.
) button or right-click anywhere in the pane and then click New
The New User Properties dialog box opens.
15-4
4
In the User Name text box, enter the name of the new user. This is the login name used
by the user when logging into the system.
5
In the Password text box, enter the new user’s password. This will be the user’s
password when logging into the system.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 15-Users, Connections and Notes
6
In the Authorization Level list, select the user type: Administrator, Administrator ReadOnly, Operator, Chairperson or Auditor.
7
Optional. To associate a user with a machine:
8
a
In the User Properties dialog box, select the Associate with a machine check box.
b
Enter the FQDN of the server that hosts the application who’s application-user
name is being added. Example: cma1.polycom.com
Click OK.
The User Properties dialog box closes and the new user is added to the system.
Deleting a User
To delete a user, you must have Administrator authorization. The last remaining Administrator in the
Users list cannot be deleted.
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Users (
2
Select the user and click the Delete (
Delete User.
) button.
) button or right-click the user and then click
The system displays a confirmation message.
3
In the confirmation dialog box, select Yes to confirm or No to cancel the operation.
If you select Yes, the user name and icon are removed from the system.
Changing a User’s Password
Users with Administrator authorization can change their own password and other users’
passwords. Users with Operator authorization can change their own password.
To change a user’s password:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Users (
2
Right-click the user and click Change User Password.
) option.
The Change Password dialog box opens.
3
Enter the Old Password (current), New Password and Confirm the New Password.
The Password must be in ASCII.
Polycom, Inc.
15-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
Click OK.
The user’s password is changed.
Disabling a User
An administrator can disable an enabled user. An indication is displayed in the Users List
when the User is disabled. An administrator can enable a disabled User.
To disable a user:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Users (
) button.
The Users pane is displayed.
2
In the Users pane, right-click the user to be disabled and select Disable User in the
menu.
A confirmation box is displayed.
3
Click YES.
The User status in the Users list - Disabled column changes to Yes.
Enabling a User
An administrator can enable a User who was disabled manually by the administrator.
To enable a user:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Users (
) button.
The Users pane is displayed.
15-6
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 15-Users, Connections and Notes
2
Right-click the user to be enabled and select Enable User.
A confirmation box is displayed.
3
Click YES.
The User status in the Users list - Disabled column changes to NO.
Renaming a User
To rename a user:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Users (
) button.
The Users pane is displayed.
2
Right-click the user to be renamed and select Rename User.
The Rename User dialog box is displayed.
3
Enter the user’s new name in the New User Name field and click OK.
The user is renamed and is forced to change his/her password.
Polycom, Inc.
15-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Connections
The RealPresence Collaboration Server enables you to list all connections that are currently
logged into the MCU, e.g. users, servers or API users. The MCU issues an ID number for
each login. The ID numbers are reset whenever the MCU is reset.
A maximum of 50 users can be concurrently logged in to the MCU.
Viewing the Connections List
To list the users who are currently connected to the MCU:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Connections (
A list of connected users is displayed in the Connections pane.
) button.
The information includes:
—
—
—
—
The user’s login name.
The user’s authorization level (Chairperson, Operator, Administrator or Auditor).
The time the user logged in.
The name/identification of the computer used for the user’s connection.
User and Connection Management
Additional security measures can be implemented in the RealPresence Collaboration Server
by setting the appropriate system flags. These measures control the system users, the user
connections to the MCU and the user login process.
Managing system users includes:
• Disabling and enabling system Users.
•
Renaming Users.
•
Disabling inactive users.
Managing the user login process includes:
• Implementing Strong Passwords.
15-8
•
Implementing password re-use / history rules.
•
Defining password aging rules.
•
Defining password change frequency.
•
Forcing password change.
•
Conference and Chairman Passwords.
•
Locking out User.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 15-Users, Connections and Notes
•
Displaying the User Login record.
Controlling the user sessions includes:
• Limiting the maximum number of concurrent user sessions.
•
User session timeout.
•
Limiting the maximum number of users that can connect to the system.
Managing the System Users
Disabling/Enabling Users
•
An administrator can disable a user or enable a disabled user, including administrators.
•
The last administrator cannot be disabled.
For more information see "Disabling a User” on page 15-6.
Renaming Users
•
An administrator can rename any user, including administrators.
•
A renamed user is considered by the system to be a new user and is forced to change
his/her password.
For more information see "Renaming a User” on page 15-7.
Disabling Inactive Users
Users can be automatically disabled by the system when they do not log into the
Collaboration Server application for a predefined period.
•
To enable this option, the DISABLE_INACTIVE_USER System Flag to a value between
1 to 90. This value determines the number of consecutive days a user can be inactive
before being disabled.
When flag value is set to 0 (default in standard security environment), this option is
disabled.
•
The user is marked as disabled but is not deleted from the system administrator/
operator database.
•
The user remains disabled until re-enabled by an administrator.
•
If a disabled user attempts to Login, an error message, Account is disabled, is displayed.
•
The last remaining administrator cannot be disabled.
For more information see "Disabling a User” on page 15-6.
Managing the User Login Process
Implementing Strong Passwords
Strong Passwords can be implemented for logging into the Collaboration Server management
applications. The FORCE_STRONG_PASSWORD_POLICY System Flag enables or
disables all password related flags.
If an administrator modifies any of the Strong Passwords flag settings, all users are forced to
perform the password change procedure, ensuring that all user passwords conform to the
modified Strong Passwords settings.
Polycom, Inc.
15-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Administrators can change passwords for users and other administrators. When changing
passwords for him/herself, other administrators or other users, the administrator is
required to enter his/her own administrator’s password.
Password Character Composition
• A Strong Password must contain at least two of all of the following character types:
Upper case letters
Lower case letters
Numbers
Special characters: @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ - = + | } { : " \ ] [ ; / ?
> < , . (space) ~
Passwords cannot contain the User ID (User Name) in any form. Example: A user with a
User ID, ben, is not permitted to use “123BeN321” as a password because BeN is similar
to the User ID.
—
—
—
—
•
•
Passwords cannot contain more than four digits in succession.
When the strong password option is enabled and the password does not meet the Strong
Password requirements an error, Password characteristics do not comply with Enhance Security
requirements, is displayed.
Password Length
The length of passwords is determined by the value of the MIN_PASSWORD_LENGTH
System Flag.
•
Possible flag values are between 0 and 20.
•
A System Flag value of 0 means this rule is not enforced.
•
If the MIN_PASSWORD_LENGTH flag is enabled and the password does not meet the
required length an error, Password is too short, is displayed.
If the minimum password length is increased, valid pre-existing passwords remain valid
until users are forced to change their passwords.
Implementing Password Re-Use / History Rules
Users are prevented from re-using previous passwords by keeping a list of previous
passwords. If a password is recorded in the list, it cannot be re-used. The list is cyclic, with
the most recently recorded password causing the deletion of the oldest recorded password.
•
The number of passwords that are recorded is determined by the value of the
PASSWORD_HISTORY_SIZE System Flag. Possible values are between 0 and 16.
•
A flag value of 0 means the rule is not enforced.
•
In Ultra Secure Mode, at least 10 passwords (default) and up to 16 passwords must be
retained.
If the password does not meet this requirement, an error, New password was used recently, is
displayed.
Defining Password Aging
The duration of password validity is determined by the value of the
PASSWORD_EXPIRATION_DAYS System Flag.
15-10
•
Passwords can be set to be valid for durations of between 0 and 90 days.
•
If the System Flag is set to 0, user passwords do not expire.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 15-Users, Connections and Notes
The display of a warning to the user of the number of days until password expiration is
determined by the value of the PASSWORD_EXPIRATION_WARNING_DAYS System
Flag.
•
Possible number of days to display expiry warnings is between 0 and 14.
•
If the System Flag is set to 0, password expiry warnings are not displayed.
•
If a user attempts to log in after his/her password has expired, an error is displayed:
User must change password.
Maximum Repeating Characters
A System Flag MAX_PASSWORD_REPEATED_CHAR allows the administrator to
configure the maximum number of consecutive repeating characters to be allowed in a
password.
Range: 1 - 4
Default: 2
A System Flag MAX_CONF_PASSWORD_REPEATED_CHAR allows the administrator to
configure the maximum number of consecutive repeating characters that are to be allowed
in a conference password.
Range: 1 - 4
Default: 2
Defining Password Change Frequency
The frequency with which a user can change a password is determined by the value of the
MIN_PWD_CHANGE_FREQUENCY_IN_DAYS System Flag. The value of the flag is the
number of days that users must retain a password.
•
Possible retention period is between 0 and 7 days.
•
If the System Flag is set to 0, users do not have to change their passwords.
•
If a user attempts to change a password within the time period specified by this flag, an
error, Password change is not allowed before defined min time has passed, is displayed.
An administrator can assign a new password to a user at any time.
User Lockout
User Lockout can be enabled to lock a user out of the system after three consecutive Login
failures with same User Name. The user is disabled and only the administrator can enable the
user within the system. User Lockout is enabled when the USER_LOCKOUT System Flag is
set to YES.
If the user tries to login while the account is locked, an error message, Account is disabled, is
displayed.
User Lockout is an Audit Event.
A system reset does not reset the Login attempts counter.
The time period during which the three consecutive Login failures occur is determined by
the value of the USER_LOCKOUT_WINDOW_IN_MINUTES System Flag. A flag value of
0 means that three consecutive Login failures in any time period will result in User Lockout.
Value can be between 0 and 45000.
Polycom, Inc.
15-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The duration of the Lockout of the user is determined by the value of the
USER_LOCKOUT_DURATION_IN_MINUTES System Flag. A flag value of 0 means
permanent User Lockout until the administrator re-enables the user within the system. Value
can be between 0 and 480.
User Login Record
The system can display a record of the last Login of the user. It is displayed in the Main
Screen of the Collaboration Server Web Client or Collaboration Server Manager. The user Login
Record display is enabled when the LAST_LOGIN_ATTEMPTS System Flag is set to YES.
Last Successful Login
Unsuccessful Logins
Both lists display the:
•
Date and Time of the Login attempt.
•
IP Address of the workstation initiating the Login attempt.
The list of unsuccessful Logins can contain up to ten records.
Failed Login attempts are written to the system Log Files and are recorded as Audit Events.
The Audit files can be retrieved by the Administrator User.
Controlling User Sessions
Management Sessions per System
It is possible for a several users to simultaneously log in to the Collaboration Server and
initiate management sessions from different instances of the Collaboration Server Web Client
or Collaboration Server Manager that are running on a single or several workstations.
The maximum number of concurrent management sessions (http and https connections) per
system is determined by the value of the
MAX_NUMBER_OF_MANAGEMENT_SESSIONS_PER_SYSTEM System Flag.
Any attempt to exceed the maximum number of management sessions per system results in
the display of an error message: Maximum number of permitted user connections has been
exceeded. New connection is denied.
The log in attempt is recorded as an Audit Event.
15-12
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 15-Users, Connections and Notes
Sessions per User
It is possible for a user to log in to the Collaboration Server and initiate multiple
management sessions from different instances of the Collaboration Server Web Client or
Collaboration Server Manager that are running on a single or several workstations.
The maximum number of concurrent management sessions per user (http and https
connections) is determined by the value of the
MAX_NUMBER_OF_MANAGEMENT_SESSIONS_PER_USER System Flag.
Any attempt to exceed the maximum number of management sessions per user results in
the display of an error message: A user with this name is already logged into the system.
Additional connection is denied.
The log in attempt is recorded as an Audit Event.
Connection Timeout
If the connection is idle for longer than the number of seconds specified by the setting of the
APACHE_KEEP_ALIVE_TIMEOUT System Flag, the connection to the Collaboration
Server is terminated.
Session Timeout
If there is no input from the user or if the connection is idle for longer than the number of
minutes specified by the setting of the SESSION_TIMOUT_IN_MINUTES System Flag, the
connection to the MCU is terminated.
A flag value of 0 means Session Timeout is disabled.
Notes
Notes are the electronic equivalent of paper sticky notes. You can use notes to write down
questions, important phone numbers, names of contact persons, ideas, reminders, and
anything you would write on note paper. Notes can be left open on the screen while you
work.
Notes can be read by all system Users concurrently connected to the MCU. Notes that are
added to the Notes list are updated on all workstations by closing and re-opening the Notes
window. Notes can be written in any Unicode language.
Using Notes
To create a note:
1 On the RealPresence Collaboration Server menu, click Administration > Notes.
Polycom, Inc.
15-13
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Notes window opens.
2
In the Notes toolbar, click the New Note (
Notes window and select New Note.
) button, or right-click anywhere inside the
3
In the Note dialog box, type the required text and click OK.
The new note is saved and closed. The Notes list is updated, listing the new note and its
properties:
— Note – The beginning of the note’s text.
— Last Modified – The date of creation or last modification.
— Modified By – The Login Name of the user who last modified the note.
— Modified From – The Client Application and Workstation from which the note was
created or modified.
Toolbar Handle
User Name
Client
Application
Workstation
To open or edit a note:
4 Double-click the entry to edit, or right-click the entry and select Note Properties.
The note opens for viewing or editing.
To delete a note:
1
In the Notes list, select the entry for the note to delete and click the Delete Note button
(
), or right-click the entry and select Delete Note.
A delete confirmation dialog box is displayed.
2
15-14
Click OK to delete the note, or click Cancel to keep the note.
Polycom, Inc.
16
IP Network Services
To enable the Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s to function within IP
network environments, network parameters must be defined for the IP Network Services.
The configuration dialog boxes for the IP network services are accessed via the Collaboration
Server Management pane of the RP Collaboration Server Web Client.
IP Network Services
Two IP Services are defined for the Collaboration Server:
•
Management Network
•
Default IP Service (Conferencing Service)
Dial in, dial out connections and Collaboration Server management are supported within
IPv4 addressing environments.
Polycom, Inc.
16-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Management Network (Primary)
The Management Network is used to control the Collaboration Server, mainly via the RP
Collaboration Server Web Client application. The Management Network contains the network
parameters, such as the IP address of the Control Unit, needed for connection between the
Collaboration Server unit and the RP Collaboration Server Web Client. This IP address can be
used by the administrator or service personnel to connect to the Control Unit should the
MCU become corrupted or inaccessible.
During First Time Power-up, the Management Network parameters can be set either via a USB
memory stick or by using a cable to create a private network.
For more information, see theRealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Modifying the Factory Default Management Network Settings on the USB Memory Stick” on
page 2-5 and Appendix G of this manual, "Configuring Direct Connections to RealPresence
Collaboration Server” on page F-1.
Default IP Service (Conferencing Service - Media and signaling)
The Default IP Service (media and signaling) is used to configure and manage communications
between the Collaboration Server and conferencing devices such as endpoints, gatekeepers,
SIP servers, etc.
The Default IP Service contains parameters for:
•
Signaling Host IP Address
•
External conferencing devices
Calls from all external IP entities are made to the Signaling Host, which initiates call set-up.
Conferencing related definitions such as environment (H.323 or SIP) are also defined in this
service.
Most of the Default IP Service is configured by the Fast Configuration Wizard, which runs
automatically should the following occur:
•
First time power-up.
•
Deletion of the Default IP Service, followed by a system reset.
For more information, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Procedure 1: First-time Power-up” on page 2-8.
Changes made to any of these parameters only take effect when the Collaboration Server is reset.
An Active Alarm is created when changes made to the system have not yet been implemented and
the MCU must be reset.
Modifying the Management Network
The Management Network parameters need to be modified if you want to:
•
Connect directly to the Collaboration Server from a workstation
•
Modify routes
•
Modify DNS information
To view or modify the Management Network Service:
16-2
1
In the Collaboration ServerManagement pane, click the IP Network Services (
) button.
2
In the IP Network Services list pane, double-click the Management Network (
) entry.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
The Management Network Properties - IP dialog box opens.
3
Modify the following fields:
Table 16-1 Default Management Network Service – IP
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Network Service
Name
Displays the name of the Management Network. This name cannot be
modified.
Note: This field is displayed in all Management Network Properties tabs.
Control Unit IP
Address
IPv4
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the Control Unit.
Note: This field is specific to IPv4 and is not displayed in IPv6 only mode.
The IPv4 address of the Collaboration Server.
This IP address is used by the RP Collaboration
Server Web Client to connect to the Collaboration
Server.
16-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
Click the Routers tab.
5
Modify the following fields:
Table 16-2 Default Management Network Service – Routers
16-4
Field
Description
Default Router
IP Address
IPv4
Enter the IP address of the default router. The
default router is used whenever the defined static
routers are not able to route packets to their
destination. The default router is also used when
host access is restricted to one default router.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Table 16-2 Default Management Network Service – Routers (Continued)
Field
Description
Static Routes
The system uses Static Routes to search other
networks for endpoint addresses that are not found
on the local LAN.
Up to five routers can be defined in addition to the
Default Router. The order in which the routers
appear in the list determines the order in which the
system looks for the endpoints on the various
networks. If the address is in the local subnet, no
router is used.
To define a static route (starting with the first), click
the appropriate column and enter the required
value.
Router IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the router.
Remote IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the entity to be reached
outside the local network. The Remote Type
determines whether this entity is a specific
component (Host) or a network.
• If Host is selected in the Remote Type field,
enter the IP address of the endpoint.
•
Remote
Subnet Mask
Remote Type
If Network is selected in the Remote Type field,
enter of the segment of the other network.
Enter the subnet mask of the remote network.
Select the type of router connection:
Network – defines a connection to a router
segment in another network.
•
•
Polycom, Inc.
Host – defines a direct connection to an
endpoint found on another network.
16-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
6
Click the DNS tab.
7
Modify the following fields:
Table 16-3 Default Management Network Service – DNS
Field
Description
MCU Host Name
Enter the name of the MCU on the network.
Default name is PolycomMCU
DNS
Select:
• Off – if DNS servers are not used in the network.
•
Specify – to enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers.
Note: The IP address fields are enabled only if Specify is selected.
Register Host Names
Automatically to DNS
Servers
Select this option to automatically register the MCU Signaling Host
and Shelf Management with the DNS server.
Local Domain Name
Enter the name of the domain where the MCU is installed.
DNS Servers Addresses:
Primary Server
Secondary Server
The static IP addresses of the DNS servers.
A maximum of three servers can be defined.
Tertiary Server
16-6
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
8
Click the LAN Ports tab.
9
View or modify the following fields:
Table 16-4 Management Network Properties – LAN Ports Parameters
Field
Port Speed
Polycom, Inc.
Description
The RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s has four LAN ports that
their speed can be set by the user.
Port
The LAN port number.
Speed
Select the speed and transmit/receive mode for
each port.
Default: Auto – Negotiation of speed and transmit/
receive mode starts at 1000 Mbits/second Full
Duplex, proceeding downward to 10 Mbits/second
Half Duplex.
Note: To maximize conferencing performance,
especially in high bit rate call environments, a 1Gb
connection is recommended.
16-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
10 Click the Security tab.
11 Modify the following fields:
Table 16-5 Management Network Properties – Security Parameters
Field
Description
Secured
Communication
Select to enable Secured Communication.
The Collaboration Server supports TLS 1.0 and SSL 3.0 (Secure Socket
Layer).
A SSL/TLS Certificate must installed on the Collaboration Server for this
feature to be enabled. For more information see "Secure Communication
Mode” on page F-1.
Skip certificate
validation for user
logging session
Select this check box to prevent peer certificate requests being issued.
For more information see "(PKI) Public Key Infrastructure” on page F-7.
This check box must be cleared when enabling Secured Mode. If it is not
cleared an Active Alarm is created and a message is displayed stating
that Secured Communications Mode must be enabled.
12 Click OK.
13 If you have modified the Management Network Properties, reset the MCU.
16-8
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Modifying the Default IP Network Service
The Default IP Service parameters need to be modified if you want to change the:
•
Network type that the Collaboration Server connects to
•
IP address of the Collaboration Server Signaling Host
•
Subnet mask of the Collaboration Server’s IP cards
•
Gatekeeper parameters or add gatekeepers to the Alternate Gatekeepers list
•
SIP server parameters
Fast Configuration Wizard
The Fast Configuration Wizard enables you to configure the Default IP Service. It starts
automatically if no Default IP Network Service is defined. This happens during First Time
Power-up, before the service has been defined or if the Default IP Service has been deleted,
followed by an Collaboration Server restart.
The IP Management Service tab in the Fast Configuration Wizard is enabled only if the factory
default Management IP addresses were not modified.
If the Fast Configuration Wizard does not start automatically, the Default IP Service must be
modified through the IP Network Properties dialog boxes.
To view or modify the Default IP Service:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click IP Network Services (
).
2
In the Network list pane, double-click the Default IP Service (
) entry.
,
, or
The Default IP Service - Networking IP dialog box opens.
Polycom, Inc.
16-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
3
Modify the following fields:
Table 16-6 Default IP Network Service – IP
Field
Description
Network Service
Name
The name Default IP Service is assigned to the IP Network Service by
the Fast Configuration Wizard. This name can be changed.
Note: This field is displayed in all IP Signaling dialog boxes and can
contain character sets that use Unicode encoding.
IP Network Type
Displays the network type selected during the First Entry
configuration. The Default IP Network icon indicates the selected
environment.
You can select:
• H.323: For an H.323-only Network Service.
•
•
SIP: For a SIP-only Network Service.
H.323 & SIP: For an integrated IP Service. Both H.323 and SIP
participants can connect to the MCU using this service.
Note: This field is displayed in all Default IP Service tabs.
4
16-10
Signaling Host IP
Address
On RP Collaboration Server 800s, this field is disabled as only one IP
address is used for signaling and media transmission.
Media Card 1
IP Address
Enter the address to be used by IP endpoints when dialing in to the
MCU.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the MCU.
Default value: 255.255.255.0.
Click the Routers tab.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
With the exception of IP Network Type, the field definitions of the Routers tab are the
same as for the Default Management Network. For more information see "Click the Routers
tab.” on page 16-4.
5
Optional. Click the DNS tab.
Settings in this dialog box are relevant to Multiple Network Services only.
For more information see "Multiple Network Services” on page 16-28.
6
Click the Gatekeeper tab.
7
Modify the following fields:
Table 16-7 Default IP Service – Conferencing – Gatekeeper Parameters
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Gatekeeper
Select Specify to enable configuration of the gatekeeper IP address.
When Off is selected, all gatekeeper options are disabled.
Primary Gatekeeper
IP Address or Name
Enter either the gatekeeper’s host name as
registered in the DNS or IP address.
Alternate Gatekeeper
IP Address or Name
Enter the DNS host name or IP address of the
gatekeeper used as a fallback gatekeeper used
when the primary gatekeeper is not functioning
properly.
MCU Prefix in
Gatekeeper
Enter the number with which this Network Service registers in the
gatekeeper. This number is used by H.323 endpoints as the first part
of their dial-in string when dialing the MCU.
16-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 16-7 Default IP Service – Conferencing – Gatekeeper Parameters (Continued)
Field
Description
Register as Gateway
Select this check box if the Collaboration Server is to be seen as a
gateway, for example, when using a Cisco gatekeeper.
Refresh Registration
every __ seconds
The frequency with which the system informs the gatekeeper that it is
active by re-sending the IP address and aliases of the system to the
gatekeeper. If the system does not register within the defined time
interval, the gatekeeper will not refer calls to the system until it reregisters. If set to 0, re-registration is disabled.
Note:
• It is recommended to use default settings.
•
This is a re-registration and not a ‘keep alive’ operation – an
alternate gatekeeper address may be returned.
Aliases:
Alias
The alias that identifies the Collaboration Server’s Signaling Host
within the network. Up to five aliases can be defined for each
Collaboration Server.
Note: When a gatekeeper is specified, at least one alias must be
entered in the table.
Additional aliases or prefixes may also be entered.
Type
The type defines the format in which the system alias is sent to the
gatekeeper. Each alias can be of a different type:
•
•
•
H.323 ID (alphanumeric ID)
E.164 (digits 0-9, * and #)
Email ID (email address format,
e.g. abc@example.com)
•
Participant Number (digits 0-9, * and #)
Note: Although all types are supported, the type of alias to be used
depends on the gatekeeper’s capabilities.
8
16-12
Click the Ports tab.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Settings in the Ports tab allow specific ports in the firewall to be allocated to multimedia
conference calls.
The port range recommended by IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) is
49152 to 65535. The Collaboration Server uses this recommendation along with the
number of licensed ports to calculate the port range.
9
Modify the following fields:
Table 16-8 Default IP Service – Conferencing – Ports Parameters
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Fixed Ports
Leave this check box cleared if you are defining a Network Service for
local calls that do not require configuring the firewall to accept calls
from external entities. When cleared, the system uses the default port
range and allocates 4 RTP and 4 RTCP ports for media channels
(Audio, Video, Content and FECC).
Note: When ICE Environment is enabled, 8 additional ports are
allocated to each call.
Click this check box to manually define the port ranges or to limit the
number of ports to be left open.
TCP Port from - to
Displays the default settings for port numbers used for signaling and
control.
To modify the number of TCP ports, enter the first and last port
numbers in the range.
The number of ports is calculated as follows:
Number of simultaneous calls x 2 ports (1 signaling + 1 control).
UDP Port from - to
Displays the default settings for port numbers used for audio and
video.
To modify the number of UDP ports:
Enter the first and last port numbers in the range, and the range
must be 1024 ports.
When ICE environment is enabled, the range must be 2048 ports.
16-13
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
If the network administrator does not specify an adequate port range, the system will accept the
settings and issue a warning. Calls will be rejected when the Collaboration Server’s ports are
exceeded.
10 If required, click the QoS tab.
Quality of Service (QoS) is important when transmitting high bandwidth audio and
video information. QoS can be measured and guaranteed in terms of:
• Average delay between packets
• Variation in delay (jitter)
• Transmission error rate
DiffServ and Precedence are the two QoS methods supported by the Collaboration
Server. These methods differ in the way the packet’s priority is encoded in the packet
header.
The Collaboration Server’s implementation of QoS is defined per Network Service, not
per endpoint.
The routers must support QoS in order for IP packets to get higher priority.
11 View or modify the following fields:
Table 16-9 Default IP Service – Conferencing – QoS Parameters
16-14
Field
Description
Enable
Select to enable the configuration and use of the QoS settings.
When un-checked, the values of the DSCP (Differentiated Services
Code Point) bits in the IP packet headers are zero.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Table 16-9 Default IP Service – Conferencing – QoS Parameters (Continued)
Field
Description
Type
DiffServ and Precedence are two methods for encoding packet
priority. The priority set here for audio video and IP Signaling packets
should match the priority set in the router.
• DiffServ: Select when the network router uses DiffServ for priority
encoding.
The default priorities for both audio and video packets is 0x88.
These values are determined by the QOS_IP_VIDEO and
QOS_IP_AUDIO flags in the system.cfg file.
The default priority for Signaling IP traffic is 0x00 and is
determined by the QOS_IP_SIGNALING flag in the system.cfg
file.
For more information "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
• Precedence: Select when the network router uses Precedence
for priority encoding, or when you are not sure which method is
used by the router. Precedence should be combined with None in
the TOS field.
The default priority is 5 for audio and 4 for video packets.
Note: Precedence is the default mode as it is capable of providing
priority services to all types of routers, as well as being currently
the most common mechanism.
Audio / Video
You can prioritize audio and video IP packets to ensure that all
participants in the conference hear and see each other clearly. Select
the desired priority. The scale is from 0 to 5, where 0 is the lowest
priority and 5 is the highest. The recommended priority is 4 for audio
and 4 for video to ensure that the delay for both packet types is the
same and that audio and video packets are synchronized and to
ensure lip sync.
TOS
Select the type of Service (TOS) that defines optimization tagging for
routing the conferences audio and video packets.
• Delay: The recommended default for video conferencing;
prioritized audio and video packets tagged with this definition are
delivered with minimal delay (the throughput of IP packets
minimizes the queue sequence and the delay between packets).
•
Polycom, Inc.
None: No optimization definition is applied. This is a compatibility
mode in which routing is based on Precedence priority settings
only. Select None if you do not know which standard your router
supports.
16-15
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
12 Click the SIP Servers tab.
13 Modify the following fields:
Table 16-10 Default IP Network Service – SIP Servers
Field
Description
SIP Server
Select:
•
•
SIP Server Type
Off – if SIP servers are not present in the network.
Select:
Generic - for non Microsoft environments.
•
•
16-16
Specify – to manually configure SIP servers.
Microsoft - for Microsoft environments.
Refresh Registration
This defines the time in seconds, in which the Collaboration Server
refreshes it’s registration on the SIP server. For example, if “3600” is
entered the Collaboration Server will refresh it’s registration on the
SIP server every 3600 seconds.
Transport Type
Select the protocol that is used for signaling between the
Collaboration Server and the SIP Server or the endpoints according
to the protocol supported by the SIP Server:
UDP – Select this option to use UDP for signaling.
TCP – Select this option to use TCP for signaling.
TLS – The Signaling Host listens on secured port 5061 only and all
outgoing connections are established on secured connections. Calls
from SIP clients or servers to non secured ports are rejected.
The following protocols are supported: TLS 1.0, SSL 2.0 and SSL
3.0.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Table 16-10 Default IP Network Service – SIP Servers (Continued)
Field
Description
Create Certificate
This button is used to create a Certificate Request to be sent to a
Certification Authority.
Certificate Method
Select the method for sending the Certificate to the Collaboration
Server:
• CSR
•
PEM/PFX
For more information see "The Security Certificate” on page I-9.
Send Certificate
This button is used when Integrating the Collaboration Server into the
Microsoft OCS Environment. For more information, see "Setting the
Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment” on
page I-1.
SIP Servers: Primary / Alternate Server Parameter
Server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the preferred SIP server.
If a DNS is used, you can enter the SIP server name.
Server Domain Name
Enter the name of the domain that you are using for conferences, for
example:
user_name@domain name
The domain name is used for identifying the SIP server in the
appropriate domain according to the host part in the dialed string.
For example, when a call to EQ1@polycom.com reaches its
outbound proxy, this proxy looks for the SIP server in the
polycom.com domain, to which it will forward the call.
When this call arrives at the SIP server in polycom.com, the server
looks for the registered user (EQ1) and forwards the call to this Entry
Queue or conference.
Port
Enter the number of the TCP or UDP port used for listening. The port
number must match the port number configured in the SIP server.
Default port is 5060.
Outbound Proxy Servers: Primary / Alternate Server Parameter
Server IP Address
By default, the Outbound Proxy Server is the same as the SIP Server.
If they differ, modify the IP address of the Outbound Proxy and the
listening port number (if required).
Port
Enter the port number the outbound proxy is listening to.
The default port is 5060.
When updating the parameters of the SIP Server in the IP Network Service - SIP Servers dialog box,
the Collaboration Server must be reset to implement the change.
Polycom, Inc.
16-17
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
14 Click the Security tab.
15
Modify the following fields:
Table 16-11 Default IP Network Service – Security (SIP Digest)
Field
Description
SIP Authentication
Select to enable SIP server authentication.
User Name
Enter the conference, Entry Queue or Meeting
Room name as registered with the proxy.
Password
Enter the conference, Entry Queue or Meeting
Room password as defined with the proxy.
H.323 Authentication
Select to enable H.323 server authentication.
User Name
Enter the conference, Entry Queue or Meeting
Room name as registered with the proxy.
Password
Enter the conference, Entry Queue or Meeting
Room password as defined with the proxy.
These fields can
contain up to 20
ASCII characters.
If the Authentication User Name and Authentication Password fields are left empty, the SIP
Digest authentication request is rejected. For registration without authentication, the
Collaboration Server must be registered as a trusted entity on the SIP server.
16-18
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
16 Optional. To configure the ICE environment, click the SIP Advanced tab.
17
Modify the following fields:
Table 16-12 Default IP Network Service – SIP Advanced
Field
Description
Server User Name
Enter the Collaboration Server User name as defined in the Active
Directory. For example, enter rmx1234.
This field is disabled if the ICE Environment field is set to None.
ICE Environment
Select MS (for Microsoft ICE implementation) to enable the ICE
integration.
18 Click the OK button.
When updating the parameters of the SIP Server in the IP Network Service - SIP Servers dialog box,
the Collaboration Server must be reset to implement the change.
Polycom, Inc.
16-19
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
IP Network Monitoring
The Signaling Monitor is the Collaboration Server entity used for monitoring the status of
external network entities such as the gatekeeper, DNS, SIP proxy and Outbound proxy and
their interaction with the MCU.
To monitor signaling status:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click Signaling Monitor (
2
In the Signaling Monitor pane, double-click Default IP Service.
).
The IP Network Services Properties – RMX CS IP tab opens:
The RMX CS IP tab displays the following fields:
Table 16-13 IP Network Services Properties – RMX CS IP
Field
16-20
Description
Service Name
The name assigned to the IP Network Service by the Fast
Configuration Wizard.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
IPv4
IP Address
Default
Router IP
Address
The IP address of the default router. The default
router is used whenever the defined static routers
are not able to route packets to their destination.
The default router is also used when host access is
restricted to one default router.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask of the MCU.
Default value: 255.255.255.0.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
3
Click the H.323 tab.
The H.323 tab displays the following fields:
Table 16-14 IP Network Services Properties – H.323
Field
Polycom, Inc.
Description
Connection State
The state of the connection between the Signaling Host and the
gatekeeper:
Discovery - The Signaling Host is attempting to locate the
gatekeeper.
Registration - The Signaling Host is in the process of registering with
the gatekeeper.
Registered - The Signaling Host is registered with the gatekeeper.
Not Registered - The registration of the Signaling Host with the
gatekeeper failed.
Registration Interval
The interval in seconds between the Signaling Host’s registration
messages to the gatekeeper. This value is taken from either the IP
Network Service or from the gatekeeper during registration. The
lesser value of the two is chosen.
Role
Active - The active gatekeeper.
Backup - The backup gatekeeper that can be
used if the connection to the preferred
gatekeeper fails.
ID
The gatekeeper ID retrieved from the
gatekeeper during the registration process.
Name
The gatekeeper’s host’s name.
IP Address
The gatekeeper’s IP address.
16-21
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
Click the SIP Servers tab.
The SIP Servers tab displays the following fields:
Table 16-15 IP Network Services Properties – SIP Servers
16-22
Field
Description
Role
Active -The default SIP Server is used for SIP traffic.
Backup -The SIP Server is used for SIP traffic if the preferred proxy
fails.
Name
The name of the SIP Server.
IP Address
The SIP Server's IP address.
Status
The connection state between the SIP Server and the Signaling Host.
Not Available - No SIP server is available.
Auto - Gets information from DHCP, if used.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
5
Click the ICE Servers tab.
The ICE Servers tab displays the following fields:
Table 16-16 IP Network Services Properties – ICE Servers
Field
Description
Role
The ICE Server’s role is displayed:
• STUN password server
•
•
•
•
STUN Server UDP
STUN Server TCP
Relay Server UDP
Relay Server TCP
IP Address
The ICE Server’s IP Address.
Status 1/2/3/4
A status is displayed for each media card installed in the
Collaboration Server:
• Connection O.K.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MS – register fail
MS – subscribe fail
MS – service fail
Connection failed
User/password failed
Channel didn't receive any packets for 5 seconds
Channel exceeded allotted bandwidth
Unknown failure
In systems with multiple media cards, Status 1 refers to the
uppermost media card.
Polycom, Inc.
16-23
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 16-16 IP Network Services Properties – ICE Servers (Continued)
Field
Description
FW Detection
The Firewall Detection status is displayed:
• Unknown
•
•
•
•
•
UDP enabled
TCP enabled
Proxy -TCP is possible only through proxy
Block – both UDP & TCP blocked
None
LAN Redundancy
LAN Redundancy enables the redundant LAN port connection to automatically replace the
failed port by using another physical connection and NIC (Network Interface Card). When a
LAN port fails, IP network traffic failure is averted and network or endpoints
disconnections do not occur. When LAN cables are connected to both LAN 2 and LAN 3
ports, the Collaboration Server automatically selects which port is active and which is
redundant.
Configuration Requirements
LAN Redundancy is available by default and is enabled by connecting the additional LAN
cable to LAN 3, or LAN 4.
Signaling and Media Redundancy
On the Collaboration Server LAN2 is used for media and signaling and LAN 3, and LAN 4
are the redundant media ports:
LAN 1
LAN 3
LAN 2
LAN 4
Figure 16-1 Collaboration Server - Rear View
16-24
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Media Redundancy on the Collaboration Server is dependent on the settings of the
LAN_REDUNDANCY and MULTIPLE_SERVICES System Flags as summarized in
Table 1-1
Table 16-17 Collaboration Server - Media Redundancy - System Flags
System Flag / Value
Collaboration Server
LAN_REDUNDANCY = NO
MULTIPLE_SERVICES = NO
No redundancy
LAN_REDUNDANCY = NO
MULTIPLE_SERVICES = YES
LAN_REDUNDANCY = YES
MULTIPLE_SERVICES = NO
Full signaling and media redundancy
Hardware Monitor Indications
With LAN redundancy, when LAN LEDs are lit they indicate that a physical connection of
the cables is present but does not indicate their activity status.
In the Hardware Monitor pane the Lan List displays the Collaboration Server LAN ports
together with their Status indication.
Table 16-18 LAN Indications
Polycom, Inc.
Status
Description
Active
The LAN port cable is connected.
Inactive
The LAN port cable is not connected.
Standby
The LAN Redundancy option is enabled and this LAN port is the redundant
and in standby mode. In case of failure, this port becomes active.
16-25
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
SIP Proxy Failover With Polycom® Distributed Media
Application™ (DMA™) 7000
Collaboration Server systems that are part of a DMA environment can benefit from DMA’s
SIP Proxy Failover functionality.
SIP Proxy Failover is supported in DMA’s Local Clustering mode with redundancy achieved
by configuring two DMA servers to share a single virtual IP address.
The virtual IP address is used by the Collaboration Server as the IP address of its SIP Proxy.
No additional configuration is needed on the Collaboration Server.
Should a SIP Proxy failure occur in one of the DMA servers:
•
The other DMA server takes over as SIP Proxy.
•
Ongoing calls may be disconnected.
•
Previously ongoing calls will have to be re-connected using the original IP address,
registration and connection parameters.
•
New calls will connect using the original IP address, registration and connection
parameters.
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Network Port Usage
The following table summarizes the port numbers and their usage in the Polycom
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s:
Table 16-19 Collaboration Server Network Port Usage Summary
16-26
Connection
Type
Port
Number
Protocol
Description
Configurable
HTTP
80
TCP
Management between the
Collaboration Server and RP
Collaboration Server Web
Client.
No
HTTPS
443
TCP
Secured Management
between the Collaboration
Server and RP Collaboration
Server Web Client.
No
DNS
53
TCP
Domain name server.
Can be disabled in the
IP Network Service.
DHCP
68
TCP
Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol.
Can be disabled in the
IP Network Service.
SSH
22
TCP
Secured shell. It is the
Collaboration Server terminal.
No
NTP
123
UDP
Network Time Protocol.
Enables access to a time
server on the network.
No
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Table 16-19 Collaboration Server Network Port Usage Summary (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Connection
Type
Port
Number
Protocol
Description
Configurable
H.323 GK
RAS
1719
UDP
Gatekeeper RAS messages
traffic.
No
H.323 Q.931
1720 incoming
;
4915259999 outgoing
TCP
H.323 Q.931 call signaling.
Each outgoing call has a
separate port.
The port for each outgoing call
is allocated dynamically.
Yes - for outgoing
calls only.
It is configured in the
Fixed Ports section of
the IP service.
H.323 H.245
49152 59999
TCP
H.245 control.
Each outgoing call has a
separate port.
The port for each outgoing call
is allocated dynamically. It can
be avoided by tunneling.
Yes - for outgoing
calls only.
It is configured in the
Fixed Ports section of
the IP service.
SIP server
5060
60000
UDP,
TCP
Connection to the SIP Server.
Sometimes port 60000 is used
when the system cannot reuse
the TCP port. This port can be
set in the Central signaling
(CS) configuration file.
Yes - in the IP service.
Alternative
SIP server
5060
60000
UDP,
TCP
Connection to the alternate
SIP Server.
Sometimes port 60000 is used
when the system cannot reuse
the TCP port. This port can be
set in the Central signaling
(CS) configuration file.
Yes - in the IP service.
SIP Outbound
proxy
5060
60000
UDP,
TCP
Connection to the SIP
outbound proxy.
Sometimes port 60000 is used
when the system cannot reuse
the TCP port. This port can be
set in the Central signaling
(CS) configuration file.
Yes - in the IP service.
Alternative
SIP Outbound
proxy
5060
60000
UDP,
TCP
Connection to the alternate
SIP outbound proxy.
Sometimes port 60000 is used
when the system cannot reuse
the TCP port. This port can be
set in the Central signaling
(CS) configuration file.
Yes - in the IP service.
SIP-TLS
60002
TCP
Required for Binary Floor
Control Protocol (BFCP)
functionality for SIP
People+Content content
sharing.
No - ,port is not
opened if SIP
People+Content is
disabled.
16-27
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 16-19 Collaboration Server Network Port Usage Summary (Continued)
Connection
Type
Port
Number
RTP
Protocol
Description
Configurable
49152 59999
UDP
RTP media packets.
The ports are dynamically
allocated.
Yes - It is configured
in the Fixed Ports
section of the IP
service.
RTCP
49152 59999
UDP
RTP control.
The ports are dynamically
allocated.
Yes - It is configured
in the Fixed Ports
section of the IP
service.
SIP -TLS
5061
TCP
SIP -TLS for SIP server,
alternate SIP server,
outbound proxy and alternate
outbound proxy.
No
Multiple Network Services
Media, signaling and management networks can be physically separated on the
Collaboration Server system to provide enhanced security. This addresses the requirement
in an organization that different groups of participants be supported on different networks.
For example, some participants may be internal to the organization while others are
external.
Up to three media and signaling networks can be defined for the RealPresence Collaboration
Server 800s for each media and signaling network connected to the Collaboration Server.
The Management Network is logically and physically separated from the media and signaling
networks. There can be one Management Network defined per Collaboration Server system.
Each conference on the Collaboration Server can host participants from the different IP
Network networks simultaneously.
Guidelines
16-28
•
Multiple Services system mode is a purchasable option and it is enabled in the MCU
license.
•
Multiple Services system mode is enabled when the system configuration flag
MULTIPLE_SERVICES is added and set to YES.
•
On the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s, LAN redundancy cannot be enabled in
parallel to Multiple Networks and the LAN_REDUNDANCY flag must be set to NO
when the Multiple Networks option is enabled.
•
Participants on different networks can connect to the same conference with full audio,
video and content capabilities.
•
Traffic on one network does not influence or affect the traffic on other networks
connected to the same MCU. If one network fails, it will not affect the traffic in the other
connected networks.
•
The Signaling Host IP Address and the Media IP Address cannot be different.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
•
Maximum number of services that can be defined per Collaboration Server platform:
•
A DNS server can be specified for each IP Network Service and for the Collaboration
Server Management Network Service.
•
— In the Network Services that do not include the DNS, use the IP addresses of the
various devices to define them in the Network Services.
Participants are associated with a Network Service and use it resources as follows:
— Dial-in participants - according to the network used to place the call and connect to
the Collaboration Server.
— Dial-out participant - according to the Network Service selected during the
participant properties definition or during conference definition, according to the
Network Service selected as default.
Resource Allocation and Capacity
The Resolution Configuration settings are configured per MCU and affect the resource
capacity of the MCU. They are reflected in the port gauges displayed on the Collaboration
Server management application’s main screen.
In Multiple Networks mode, the port gauges do not reflect the resource availability per
Network Service.
In Multiple Networks mode, the resources of the Network Services are not split between the
network services but are used per their availability by all Network Services equally.
First Time Installation and Configuration
First Time Installation and Configuration of the Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server
800s consists of the following procedures:
Polycom, Inc.
1
Preparations
2
— Gather Network Equipment and Address Information - get the information needed
for integrating the Collaboration Server into the local network for each of the
networks that will be connected to the Collaboration Server unit. For a list of
required address, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Gather Network Equipment and Address Information” on page 2-1.
— Unpack the Collaboration Server. For more details see the RealPresence Collaboration
Server 800s Getting Started Guide, Chapter 2.
— Modify the Management Network parameters on the USB Key. For more details see
the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Modifying the Factory
Default Management Network Settings on the USB Key” on page 2-6.
Hardware Installation and Setup
3
— Mount the Collaboration Server in a rack. For more details see the RealPresence
Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "First Entry Power-up and
Configuration” on page 2-8.
— Connect the necessary cables. For details, see RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Getting Started Guide, "First Entry Power-up and Configuration” on page 2-8.
First Entry Power-up and Configuration
16-29
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
— Power up the Collaboration Server. For more details see the RealPresence
Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Procedure 1: First-time Power-up” on
page 2-8.
— Register the Collaboration Server. For more details see the RealPresence
Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Procedure 2: Product Registration” on
page 2-8.
— Connect to the Collaboration Server. For more details see the RealPresence
Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Procedure 3: Connection to MCU” on
page 2-9.
— Configure the Default IP Network Service using the information for one of the
networks connected to the system . For more details see the RealPresence
Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Procedure 4: Modifying the Default IP
Service Settings” on page 2-10.
Modify the required System Flag to enable Multiple Services and reset the MCU.
4
5
Add the required IP Network Services to accommodate the networks connected to the
Collaboration Server.
6
Select a Network Service to act as default for dial out and gateway calls for which the
Network Service was not selected.
7
Place several calls and run conferences to ensure that the system is configured
correctly..
.
Connecting the Cables to the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
On the Collaboration Server LAN2 is used for media and signaling and LAN 3, and LAN 4
can be used for multiple Networks configuration.
LAN 1
LAN 3
LAN 2
LAN 4
Figure 16-2 Collaboration Server - Rear View
Table 16-21
LAN Port
Description
1
Management Network LAN connection (mandatory)
2
Signaling and media - first IP Network Service (mandatory)
3
Signaling and media - second IP Network Service (optional)
4
Signaling and media - third IP Network Service (optional)
If LAN Redundancy is configured, Multiple Networks on LAN 3 and 4 cannot be defined.
16-30
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Collaboration Server Configuration
Once the network cables are connected to the Collaboration Server, you can modify the
default IP Network Service and add additional Network Services.
System Flags and License Settings
The MULTIPLE_SERVICES System Flag determines whether the Multiple Services option
will be activated once the appropriate license is installed. Possible Values: YES / NO
Default: NO
This flag must be manually added to the system configuration and set to YES to enable this
option. For more information see "Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags” on page 21-13.
IP Network Service Definition
Use this procedure to define Network Services in addition to the Network Service already
defined during first entry installation and configuration. Each of the defined Network
Service can be associated with one or more media cards installed in the system (depending
on the system type).
Once a media card is associated with a Network Service it cannot be associated with
another network service.
To add new/additional Network Services:
1
In the Device Management pane, click IP Network Services (
2
In the Network Services list toolbar, click the
).
Add Network Service button.
The New IP Service - Networking IP dialog box opens.
3
Define the following fields:
Table 16-22 IP Network Service - IP Parameters
Field
Description
Network Service
Name
Enter the IP Network Service name.
Note: This field is displayed in all IP Signaling dialog boxes and can
contain character sets that use Unicode encoding.
IP Network Type
Select the IP Network environment. You can select:
• H.323: For an H.323-only Network Service.
•
•
SIP: For a SIP-only Network Service.
H.323 & SIP: For an integrated IP Service. Both H.323 and SIP
participants can connect to the Collaboration Server using this
service.
Note: This field is displayed in all Default IP Service tabs.
Signaling Host IP
Address
Polycom, Inc.
This field is disabled as only one IP address is used for the signaling
and media and it is defined by the IP address defined for the media.
16-31
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 16-22 IP Network Service - IP Parameters
4
Field
Description
Media Card IP
address
If each of LAN ports designated for signaling and media (LAN2, LAN3
and LAN4) on the system can be used with a different network, each
port is assigned to its own Network Service.
In such a case, enter the IP address of the port to be assigned to this
Network Service.
A LAN port that is already assigned to a different Network Service,
displays the IP Address of the assigned port and it cannot be
assigned to this Network Service (it is disabled).
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the Collaboration Server in that network
service.
Default value: 255.255.255.0.
Optional. Some system flags can be defined per Network Service, depending on the
network environment.
To modify these flags, click the Service Configuration button.
The Service Configuration dialog box opens.
All the flags must be manually added to this dialog box. For a detailed description of
the flags and how to add them, see "Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags” on
page 21-13.
Flags defined per Network Service override their general definition in the System Configuration.
The following flags can be defined per service:
—
—
—
—
—
—
16-32
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
ENABLE_H239
SIP_ENABLE_FECC
ENABLE_CLOSED_CAPTION
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_LEN
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Polycom, Inc.
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_MIN_LEN
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_MAX_LEN
ENABLE_CASCADED_LINK_TO_JOIN_WITHOUT_PASSWORD
MAX_CP_RESOLUTION
QOS_IP_AUDIO
QOS_IP_VIDEO
QOS_IP_SIGNALING
ENABLE_CISCO_GK
SIP_FREE_VIDEO_RESOURCES
FORCE_CIF_PORT_ALLOCATION
MS_ENVIRONMENT
SIP_FAST_UPDATE_INTERVAL_ENV
SIP_FAST_UPDATE_INTERVAL_EP
H263_ANNEX_T
H239_FORCE_CAPABILITIES
MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT
IP_LINK_ENVIRONMENT
FORCE_STATIC_MB_ENCODING
FORCE_RESOLUTION
SEND_WIDE_RES_TO_IP
DISABLE_WIDE_RES_TO_SIP_DIAL_OUT
SEND_SIP_BUSY_UPONRESOURCE_THRESHOLD
5
Click the Routers tab.
6
Define the routers used in this network and that are other than the routers defined in
the Management Network. The field definitions of the Routers tab are the same as for
the Default Management Network. For more information see "Click the Routers tab.” on
page 16-10.
16-33
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
7
Click the DNS tab.
8
Modify the following fields:
Table 16-23 Default Management Network Service – DNS
Field
Description
Service Host Name
Enter the host name of this network Service. Each Network Service
must have a unique Host Name otherwise an error message is
displayed.
DNS
Select:
• Off – if no DNS server is used in this network.
•
Specify – to enter the IP address of the DNS server used by this
network service.
Notes:
• The IP address field is enabled only if Specify is selected.
•
16-34
Only one DNS can be define for the entire topology (that is, only
one Network Service can include the DNS definition).
Register Host Names
Automatically to DNS
Servers
Select this option to automatically register this Network Service
Signaling Host with the DNS server.
Local Domain Name
Enter the name of the domain for this network service.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Table 16-23 Default Management Network Service – DNS (Continued)
9
Field
Description
DNS Server Address
Enter the static IP address of the DNS server that is part of this
network.
Click the Gatekeeper tab.
10 Define the Primary and Alternate Gatekeepers and at least one Alias for this network
Service. The field definitions of the Gatekeeper tab are the same as for the Default IP
Network Service. For more information see "Click the Gatekeeper tab.” on page 16-11.
In Multiple Services mode, an Alias must be defined for the specified gatekeeper.
11 Optional. Click the Ports tab.
Settings in the Ports tab allow specific ports in the firewall to be allocated to multimedia
conference calls. If required, defined the ports to be used multimedia conference calls
handled by this Network Service. The field definitions of the Ports tab are the same as
for the Default IP Network Service.
For more information see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide,
"Click the Ports tab.” on page 16-12.
12 If required, click the QoS tab.
The Collaboration Server’s implementation of QoS is defined per Network Service, not
per endpoint.
The routers must support QoS in order for IP packets to get higher priority.
The field definitions of the QoS tab are the same as for the Default IP Network Service. For
more information see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide, "If
required, click the QoS tab.” on page 16-14.
13 Click the SIP Servers tab.
14 Define the Primary and Alternate SIP Server for this network Service.
•
If Microsoft Office Communications or Lync server are part of this network service, a certificate
must be created for this network service. If each network connected to the Collaboration Server
includes Microsoft Office Communications or Lync server, separate certificates must be created
and sent to the Collaboration Server for each of these networks.
•
If the Network Service does not include a DNS, you must use the IP address of the SIP Server
instead of its name.
The field definitions of the SIP Servers tab are the same as for the Default IP Network
Service. For more information see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Administrator’s Guide, "Click the SIP Servers tab.” on page 16-16.
15 Click the Security tab.
The field definitions of the Security tab are the same as for the Default IP Network Service.
For more information see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide,
"Click the Security tab.” on page 16-18.
Polycom, Inc.
16-35
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
16 Optional. To configure the ICE environment, click the SIP Advanced tab.
17
Modify the following fields:
Table 16-24 Default IP Network Service – SIP Advanced
Field
Description
Server User Name
Enter the User name for this service as defined in the Active
Directory. For example, enter rmxNet2.
This field is disabled if the ICE Environment field is set to None.
ICE Environment
Select MS (for Microsoft ICE implementation) to enable the ICE
integration.
18 Click the OK button.
The new Network Service is added to the IP Network Services list pane.
Setting a Network Service as Default
The default Network Service is used when no Network Service is selected for the following:
•
Dial out participants
In addition, the Signaling Host IP address and the MCU Prefix in GK displayed on the RP
Collaboration Server Web Client main screen are taken from the default H.323 Network
Service.
One IP Network Service can be defined as default for H.323 connections and another
Network Service as default for SIP connections. If the IP Network Service supports both
H.323 and SIP connections, you can set the same Network Service as default for both H.323
and SIP, or for H.323-only or for SIP-only.
To designate an IP Network Service as the default IP Network Service:
1
In the Device Management pane, click IP Network Services (
).
2
In the Network Services list pane right-click the IP Network Service to be set as the
default, and then click Set As H.323 Default, or Set As SIP Default.
The next time you access this menu, a check mark is added next to the network service
type to indicate its selection as default.
To set this IP Network Service for both H.323 and SIP connections, repeat step 2 and
select the option you need.
The following icons are used to indicate the default IP Network Service type:
Table 16-25 Default IP Network Service Icons
Icon
Description
This Network Service supports both SIP and H.323 connections and is
designated as default for both SIP and H.323 connections.
This Network Service supports both SIP and H.323 connections and is
designated as default for H.323 connections.
This Network Service supports both SIP and H.323 connections and is
designated as default for SIP connections.
16-36
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Table 16-25 Default IP Network Service Icons
Icon
Description
This Network Service supports only H.323 connections and is set as
default for H.323 connections.
This Network Service supports only SIP connections and is set as
default for SIP connections.
Signaling Host IP Address and MCU Prefix in GK Indications
The RP Collaboration Server Web Client displays the Signaling Host IP Address and MCU Prefix
in GK parameters as defined in the Default H.323 Network Service.
Resolution Configuration
These configurations are set for the system and are applied to all the Network Services.
Conference Profile
Registration of conferencing entities such as ongoing conferences, Meeting Rooms, Entry
Queues, SIP Factories and Gateway Sessions with SIP servers is done per conferencing
entity. This allows better control on the number of entities that register with each SIP server
by selecting for each of the conferencing entities whether it will register with the SIP server.
The registration is defined in the Conference Profile - Network Services tab.
In the IP Network Services table, the system lists all the defined Network Services (one or
several depending on the system configuration).
Polycom, Inc.
•
To register the conferencing entity to which this profile is assigned to a Network
Service, in the Registration column click the check box of that Network Service.
•
You can also prevent dial in participants from connecting to that conferencing entities
when connecting via a Network Service.
In the Accept Calls column, clear the check box of the Network Service from which calls
cannot connect to the conference.
16-37
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Signaling Monitor
The Signaling Monitor pane includes the list of the signaling and media IP Network Services
defined in the system (up to three in the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s). Doubleclicking a Network Service, displays it properties and status.
Conferencing
Each conference on the Collaboration Server can host participants from the different IP
Network networks simultaneously.
Defining AVC Dial Out Participants
When defining AVC dial out participants, you can select the Network Service to place the
call according to the network to which the endpoint pertains. If the endpoint is located on a
network other than the selected network, the participant will not be able to connect.
If no Network is selected, the system uses the default IP Network Service.
Monitoring Conferences
The Conference Properties - Network Services dialog box shows for each Network Service with
which Network Service’s SIP proxy the conference should be registered and if the dial in call
will be connected to the conference.
Resource Report
The Resource Report displays the resource usage in total and per Network Service in a table
format. The Resources per Service table provides the actual information on resource usage
and availability per network Service and provides an accurate snapshot of resources usage
in the system.
You can select the graph to display: select either Totals (default) or the Network Service.
16-38
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Port Gauge Indications
The port Gauges displays the total resource usage for the Collaboration Server and not per
Network Service. Therefore, it may not be an accurate representation of the availability of
resources for conferencing, as one Network Service may run out of available resources while
another Network Service may have all of it resources available. In such a case, the port
gauges may show that half of the system resources are available for conferencing, while
calls via the Network Service with no available resources will fail to connect.
Polycom, Inc.
16-39
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
NAT (Network Address Translation) Traversal
NAT Traversal is a set of techniques enabling participants behind firewalls to connect to
conferences, hosted on the Collaboration Server, remotely using the internet.
Session Border Controller (SBC)
All signaling and media for both SIP and H.323 will be routed through an SBC.
The following SBC environments are supported:
•
SAM - a Polycom SBC
•
Acme Packet - a 3rd party SBC
•
VBP - Polycom Video Border Proxy
Deployment Architectures
The following NAT Traversal topologies are given as examples. Actual deployments will
depend on user requirements and available infrastructure:
Remote Connection Using the Internet
The following Remote Connection call flow options are supported:
Table 16-26 Remote Connection
Enterprise Client
16-40
CMA Client
Environment
Registered
SBC
SIP / H.323
Yes
SAM / Acme Packet
SIP / H.323
No
SAM / Acme Packet
Registered
Environment

Yes
SIP

No
SIP
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 16-IP Network Services
Table 16-26 Remote Connection (Continued)
Enterprise Client
CMA Client
Environment
Registered
SBC
SIP / H.323
No
SAM Only

Registered
Environment
No
H.323
Business to Business Connections
The following Business to Business connection call flow options are supported:
Table 16-27 Business to Business Connection
Enterprise A Client
Polycom, Inc.
Enterprise B Client
Environment
Registered
SBC
SBC
Registered
Environment
H.323
Yes
RPAD

RPAD
Yes
H.323
H.323
Yes
RPAD

VBP
Yes
H.323
SIP
Yes
RPAD

RPAD
Yes
H.323
SIP
Yes
Acme Packet

Acme Packet
Yes
H.323
16-41
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
FW (Firewall) NAT Keep Alive
The Collaboration Server can be configured to send a FW NAT keep alive message at specific
Intervals for the RTP, UDP and BFCP channels.
This is necessary because port mappings in the firewall are kept open only if there is
network traffic in both directions. The firewall will only allow UDP packets into the
network through ports that have been used to send packets out.
By default the Collaboration Server sends a FW NAT Keep Alive message every 30 seconds.
As there is no traffic on the Content and FECC channels as a call begins, the firewall will not
allow any incoming packets from the Content and FECC channels in until the Collaboration
Server sends out the first of the FW NAT Keep Alive messages 30 seconds after the call starts.
If Content or FECC are required within the first 30 seconds of a call the FW NAT Keep Alive
Interval should be modified to a lower value.
To enable and modify FW NAT Keep Alive:
FW NAT Keep Alive is enabled in the New Profile - Advanced dialog box.
>> Select the FW NAT Keep Alive check box and if required, modify the Interval field within
the range of 5 - 86400 seconds.
System Configuration in SBC environments
In an environment that includes SAM (a Polycom SBC), to ensure that a RealPresence Mobile
endpoint can send content to a conference the value of the system flag
NUM_OF_INITIATE_HELLO_MESSAGE_IN_CALL_ESTABLISHMENT must be set to
at least 3.
For more details on modifying the values of system flags, see "Manually Adding and Deleting
System Flags” on page 21-13.
16-42
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
IVR Services
Interactive Voice Response (IVR) is an application that allows participants to communicate
with the conferencing system via their endpoint’s input device (such as a remote control).
The IVR Service includes a set of voice prompts and a video slide used to automate the
participants connection to a conference or Entry Queue. It allows customization of menu
driven scripts and voice prompts to meet different needs and languages.
The IVR module includes two types of services:
•
Conference IVR Service that is used with conferences
•
Entry Queue IVR Service that is used with Entry Queues
The system is shipped with two default Conference IVR Services (one for the conferences
and the other for gateway calls) and one default Entry Queue IVR Service. The default
services include voice messages and video slides in English.
To customize the IVR messages and video slide perform the following operations:
•
Record the required voice messages and create a new video slide. For more
information, see "Creating a Welcome Video Slide” on page 17-28.
•
Optional. Add the language to the list of languages supported by the system.
•
Upload the voice messages to the MCU (This can be done as part of the language
definition or during the IVR Service definition).
•
Create the Conference IVR Service and upload the video slide, and if required any
additional voice messages.
•
Optional. Create the Entry Queue IVR Service and upload the required video slide and
voice messages.
IVR Services List
You can view the currently defined Conference IVR and Entry Queue IVR Services in the
IVR Services list pane.
To view the IVR Services list:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list.
2
Polycom, Inc.
Click the IVR Services (
) entry.
17-1
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The list pane displays the Conference IVR Services list and the total number of IVR
services currently defined in the system.
IVR Toolbar
IVR Services List Pane
Access to IVR Services
list and customization
IVR Services Toolbar
The IVR Services toolbar provides quick access to the IVR Service definitions as follows:
Table 17-1 IVR Toolbar buttons
Button
17-2
Button Name
Descriptions
New Conference IVR Service
To create a new Conference IVR Service.
New Entry Queue IVR Service
To create a new Entry Queue IVR Service.
Delete Service
Deletes the selected IVR service(s).
Set Default Conference IVR
Service
Sets the selected Conference IVR Service as default.
When creating a new conference Profile the default
IVR Service is automatically selected for the Profile
(but can be modified).
Set Default Entry Queue
Service
Sets the selected Entry Queue IVR Service as
default. When creating a new Entry Queue the default
Entry Queue IVR Service is automatically selected.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
Table 17-1 IVR Toolbar buttons
Button
Button Name
Descriptions
Add Supported
Languages
Adds languages to the IVR module, enabling you to
download voice prompts and messages for various
languages.
Replace/Change Music File
To replace the currently loaded music file that is used
to play background music, the MCU is shipped with a
default music file.
Adding Languages
You can define different sets of audio prompts in different languages, allowing the
participants to hear the messages in their preferred language.
The Collaboration Server is shipped with a default language (English) and all the prompts
and messages required for the default IVR Services, conference and Entry Queues shipped
with the system.
You can add languages to the list of languages for which different messages are
downloaded to the MCU and IVR Services are created. This step is required before the
creation of additional IVR messages using languages that are different from English, or if
you want to download additional voice files to existing files in one operation and not during
the IVR service definition.
To add a language:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list.
Polycom, Inc.
2
Click the IVR Services (
) entry.
3
In the Conference IVR Services list, click the Add Supported Languages (
The Supported Languages dialog box opens.
4
Click the Add Language button.
) button.
17-3
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The New Language dialog box opens.
5
In the New Language box, enter the name of the new language. The language name can
be typed in Unicode and cannot start with a digit. Maximum field length is 31
characters.
6
Click OK.
The new language is added to the list of Supported Languages.
Uploading a Message File to the Collaboration Server
You can upload audio files for the new language or additional files for an existing language
now, or you can do it during the definition of the IVR Service. In the latter case, you can skip
the next steps.
•
•
Voice messages should not exceed 3 minutes.
It is not recommended to upload more than 1000 audio files to the MCU memory.
To upload messages to the MCU:
1 To upload the files to the MCU, in the Supported Languages dialog box, click the Add
Message File button.
2
The Add Message File dialog box opens.
Audio files are uploaded to the MCU one-by-one.
17-4
3
In the IVR Message Language list, select the language for which the audio file will be
uploaded to the MCU.
4
In the IVR Message Category list, select the category for which the audio file is uploaded.
5
In the Message Type list, select the message type for which the uploaded message is to be
played. You can upload several audio files for each Message Type. Each file is
downloaded separately.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
Table 17-2 lists the Message Types for each category:
Table 17-2 IVR Message Types by Message Category
Polycom, Inc.
Message
Category
Message Type
Message
Conference
Password
Request Conference
Password
Requests the participant to enter the conference
password.
Request Conference
Password Retry
A participant who enters an incorrect password is
requested to enter it again.
Request Digit
Requests the participant to enter any digit in order to
connect to the conference. Used for dial-out
participants to avoid answering machines in the
conference.
Welcome
Message
Welcome Message
The first message played when the participant
connects to the conference or Entry Queue.
Conference
Chairperson
Request Chairperson
Identifier
Requests the participants to enter the chairperson
identifier key.
Request Chairperson
Password
Requests the participant to enter the chairperson
password.
Request Chairperson
Password Retry
When the participant enters an incorrect chairperson
password, requests the participant to enter it again.
General
Messages played for system related event notifications, for example,
notification that the conference is locked. Upload the files for the voice
messages that are played when an event occurs during the conference. For
more information, see "Conference IVR Service Properties - General Voice
Messages” on page 17-12.
Billing Code
Requests the chairperson to enter the conference Billing Code.
Roll Call
Not applicable.
Conference
ID
Requests the participant to enter the required Conference ID to be routed to
the destination conference.
6
Click Upload File to upload the appropriate audio file to the MCU.
The Install File dialog box opens.
7
Enter the file name or click the Browse button to select the audio file to upload.
The Select Source File dialog box opens.
17-5
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
8
Select the appropriate *.wav audio file, and then click the Open button.
The name of the selected file is displayed in the Install field in the Install File dialog box.
9
Optional. You can play a .wav file by selecting the Play button (
).
10 Click Yes to upload the file to the MCU.
The system returns to the Add Message File dialog box.
11 Repeat step 6 to 10 for each additional audio file to be uploaded to the MCU.
12 Once all the audio files are uploaded to the MCU, close the Add Message File dialog box
and return to the Add Language dialog box.
13 Click OK.
Defining a New Conference IVR Service
The Collaboration Server is shipped with two default Conference IVR Services and all its
audio messages and video slide. You can define new Conference IVR Services or modify the
default Conference IVR Service. For the definition of Conference IVR Service for gateway
calls, see "Defining the IVR Service for Gateway Calls” on page 19-14.
Up to 40 IVR Services (Conference IVR Services and Entry Queue IVR Services) can be defined for
a single Collaboration Server unit.
Defining a New Conference IVR Service
To define a new Conference IVR Service:
1
17-6
On the IVR Services toolbar, click the New Conference IVR Service (
The New Conference IVR Service - Global dialog box opens.
) button.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
2
Define the following parameters:
Table 17-3 Conference IVR Service Properties - Global Parameters
Polycom, Inc.
Field/Option
Description
Conference IVR
Service Name
Enter the name of the Conference IVR Service. The maximum field
length is 20 characters and may be typed in Unicode.
Language For IVR
Select the language of the audio messages and prompts from the list
of languages defined in the Supported languages. The default
language is English. For more information, see "Adding Languages”
on page 17-3.
External Server
Authentication
You can configure the IVR Service to use an external database
application to verify a participant’s right to join the conference. For
more information, see Appendix D: "Conference Access with External
Database Authentication” on page D-4.
Select one of the following options:
• Never – The participant’s right to join the conference will not be
verified with an external database application (default).
•
Always – Any participant request to join the conference is
validated with the external database application using a
password.
•
Upon Request – Only the participant request to join the
conference as chairperson is validated with the external database
application using a password. The validation process occurs only
when the participant enters the chairperson identifier key.
Number of User Input
Retries
Enter the number of times the participant will be able to respond to
each menu prompt before being disconnected from the conference.
Range is between 1-4, and the default is 3.
Timeout for User
Input (Sec)
Enter the duration in seconds that the system will wait for the
participant’s input before prompting for another input. Range is
between 1-10, and the default value is 5 seconds.
DTMF Delimiter
Enter the key that indicates the last input key. Possible values are the
pound (#) and star (*) keys. The default is #.
17-7
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
3
Click the Welcome tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Welcome dialog box opens.
4
Select the Enable Welcome Messages check box to define the system behavior when
the participant enters the Conference IVR queue. When participants access a conference
through an Entry Queue, they hear messages included in both the Entry Queue Service
and Conference IVR Service. To avoid playing the Welcome Message twice, disable the
Welcome Message in the Conference IVR Service.
5
Select the General Welcome Message, to be played when the participant enters the
conference IVR queue.
6
To upload an audio file for an IVR message, click Add Message File.
The Install File dialog box opens.
The Collaboration Server unit is bundled with default audio IVR message files. To upload a
customized audio file, see "Creating Audio Prompts and Video Slides” on page 17-25.
17-8
a
Click the Browse button to select the audio file (*.wav) to upload.
The Select Source File dialog box opens.
b
Select the appropriate *.wav audio file and then click the Open button.
c
Optional. You can play a .wav file by selecting the Play button (
d
In the Install File dialog box, click Yes to upload the file to the MCU memory.
The Done dialog box opens.
e
Once the upload is complete, click OK and return to the IVR dialog box. The new
audio file can now be selected from the list of audio messages.
).
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
7
Click the Conference Chairperson tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Conference Chairperson dialog box opens.
8
Select the Enable Chairperson Messages check box to enable the chairperson
functionality. If this feature is disabled, participants are not able to connect as the
chairperson.
When both Conference Password and Chairperson Password options are enabled and defined, the
system first plays the prompt "Enter conference password". However, if the participant enters the
chairperson password, the participant becomes the chairperson.
To play the prompt requesting the Chairperson password, "For conference chairperson services...",
do not select the Enable Password Messages option.
9
Select the various voice messages and options for the chairperson connection.
If the files were not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio
files, click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the Collaboration Server.
Table 17-4 New Conference IVR Service Properties - Conference Chairperson Options and
Messages
Polycom, Inc.
Field/Option
Description
Chairperson Identifier
Request
Select the audio file that requests the participants to enter the key
that identifies them as the conference chairperson.
Request Chairperson
Password
Select the audio file that prompts the participant for the chairperson
password.
Retry Chairperson
Password
Select the audio file that prompts participants to re-enter the
chairperson password if they enter it incorrectly.
Chairperson Identifier
Key
Enter the key to be used for identifying the participant as a
chairperson.
Possible keys are: pound key (#) or star (*).
17-9
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 17-4 New Conference IVR Service Properties - Conference Chairperson Options and
Messages (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Billing Code
The prompt requesting the chairperson billing code selected in the
General tab.
10 Click the Conference Password tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Conference Password dialog box opens.
11 Select the Enable Password Messages check box to request the conference password
before moving the participant from the conference IVR queue to the conference.
When both Conference Password and Chairperson Password are enabled and defined, the system
first plays the prompt "Enter conference password". However, if the participant enters the
chairperson password, the participant becomes the chairperson.
To play the prompt requesting the Chairperson password, "For conference chairperson services...",
do not select the Enable Password Messages option.
12 Select the MCU behavior for password request for Dial-in and Dial-out participant
connections.
Select the required system behavior as follows:
— Request password - The system requests the participant to enter the conference
password.
— None - The participant is moved to the conference without any password request.
— Request Digit - The system requests the participant to enter any key. This option is
used mainly for dial-out participants and to prevent an answering machine from
entering the conference.
17-10
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
13 Select the various audio messages that will be played in each case.
Table 17-5 New Conference IVR Service Properties - Conference Password Parameters
Option
Description
Request Password
Select the audio file that prompts the participant for the conference
password.
Retry Password
Select the audio file that requests the participant to enter the
conference password again when failing to enter the correct
password.
Request Digit
Select the audio file that prompts the participant to press any key
when the Request Digit option is selected.
14 Click the General tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - General dialog box opens.
The General dialog box lists messages that are played during the conference. These
messages are played when participants or the conference chairperson perform various
operations or when a change occurs.
15 To assign the appropriate audio file to the message type, click the appropriate table
entry, in the Message File column. A drop-down list is enabled.
16 From the list, select the audio file to be assigned to the event/indication.
Polycom, Inc.
17-11
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
17 Repeat steps 15 and 16 to select the audio files for the required messages.
The following types of messages and prompts can be enabled:
Table 17-6 Conference IVR Service Properties - General Voice Messages
17-12
Message Type
Description
Blip on Cascade Link
Indicates that the link to the cascaded conference connected
successfully.
Chairperson Exit
Informs all the conference participants that the chairperson has left
the conference, causing the conference to automatically terminate
after a short interval.
Note: This message is played only when the Requires Chairperson
option is selected in the Conference Profile - IVR dialog box.
Chairperson Help
Menu
A voice menu is played upon a request from the chairperson, listing
the operations and their respective DTMF codes that can be
performed by the chairperson. The playback can be stopped any
time.
Note: If you modify the default DTMF codes used to perform various
operations, the default voice files for the help menus must be
replaced.
Change Chairperson
Password
Requests the participant to enter a new chairperson password when
the participant is attempting to modify the chairperson password.
Change Conference
Password
Requests the participant to enter a new conference password when
the participant is attempting to modify the conference password.
Change Password
Failure
A message played when the participant enters an invalid password,
for example when a password is already in use.
Change Passwords
Menu
This voice menu is played when the participants requests to change
the conference password. This message details the steps required to
complete the procedure.
Conference is Locked
This message is played to participants attempting to join a Secured
conference.
Conference is
Secured
This message is played when the conference status changes to
Secure as initiated by the conference chairperson or participant
(using DTMF code *71).
Conference is
unsecured
This message is played when the conference status changes to
Unsecured as initiated by the conference chairperson or participant
(using DTMF code #71).
Confirm Password
Change
Requests the participant to re-enter the new password.
Enter Destination ID
Prompts the calling participant for the destination number. Default
message prompts the participant for the conference ID (same
message as in the Entry Queue IVR Service).
First to Join
Informs the participant that he or she is the first person to join the
conference.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
Table 17-6 Conference IVR Service Properties - General Voice Messages (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Message Type
Description
Incorrect Destination
ID
If the participant entered an incorrect conference ID (in gateway calls
it is the destination number), requests the participant to enter the
number again.
Maximum Number of
Participants
Exceeded
Indicates the participant cannot join the destination conference as the
maximum allowed number of participants will be exceeded.
Mute All Off
This message is played to the conference to inform all participants
that they are unmuted (when Mute All is cancelled).
Mute All On
Informs all participants that they are muted, with the exception of the
conference chairperson.
Note: This message is played only when the Mute All Except Me
option is activated.
No Video Resources
Audio Only.
Informs the participant of the lack of Video Resources in the
Collaboration Server and that he/she is being connected as Audio
Only.
Participant Help
Menu
A voice menu that is played upon request from a participant, listing
the operations and their DTMF codes that can be performed by any
participant.
Password Changed
Successfully
A message is played when the password was successfully changed.
Recording Failed
This message is played when the conference recording initiated by
the chairperson or the participant (depending on the configuration)
fails to start.
Recording in
Progress
This message is played to participant joining a conference that is
being recorded indicating the recording status of the conference.
Request Billing Code
Requests the participant to enter a code for billing purposes.
Requires Chairperson
The message is played when the conference is on hold and the
chairperson joins the conference. For this message to be played the
Conference Requires Chairperson option must be selected in the
Conference Profile - IVR dialog box.
Ringing Tone
The tone that will be played to indicate that the system is calling the
destination number.
Self Mute
A confirmation message that is played when participants request to
mute their line.
Self Unmute
A confirmation message that is played when participants request to
unmute their line.
17-13
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
18 Click the Video Services tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Video Services dialog box opens.
In addition to the low and high resolution slides included in the default slide set,
customized low and high resolution slides are supported.
The following guidelines apply:
— Two customized slides can be loaded per IVR Service:
• A low resolution slide, to be used with low resolution endpoints.
• A high resolution slide, to be used with high resolution endpoints.
Table 17-7 summarizes the recommended input slide formats and the resulting
slides that are generated:
Table 17-7 IVR Slide - Input / Output Formats
Format
Slide Resolution
Input Slides
Generated Slides
High
HD720p (16:9)
HD720p
Low
4CIF (4:3)
or
CIF (4:3)
4SIF
SIF
CIF
— The source images for the high resolution slides must be in *.bmp or *.jpg format.
— If the uploaded slides are not of the exact SD or HD resolution, an error message is
displayed and the slides are automatically cropped or enlarged to the right size.
17-14
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
— If a slide that is selected in an IVR Service is deleted, a warning is displayed listing
the IVR Services in which it is selected. If deleted, it will be replaced with a default
Collaboration Server slide.
— The generated slides are not deleted if the system is downgraded to a lower
software version.
— The first custom source file uploaded, whatever its format, is used to generate both
high and low resolution custom slides. High resolution source files uploaded after
the first upload will be used to generate and replace high resolution custom slides.
Likewise, low resolution source files uploaded after the first upload will be used to
generate and replace low resolution custom slides.
— If there are two custom source files in the folder, one high resolution, one low
resolution, and a new high resolution custom source file is uploaded, new high
resolution custom slides are created. The existing low resolution custom slides are
not deleted.
— If there are two custom source files in the folder, one high resolution, one low
resolution, and a new low resolution custom source file is uploaded, new low
resolution custom slides are created. The existing high resolution custom slides are
not deleted.
19 Define the following parameters:
Table 17-8 New Conference IVR Service Properties - Video Services Parameters
Video Services
Description
Video Welcome Slide
Select the Low Resolution and High Resolution video slides to be
displayed when participants connect to the conference.
To view any slide, click the Preview Slide (
) button.
Notes:
• When using one of the default Polycom slides, the slide will be
displayed in the resolution defined in the profile, i.e. CIF, SD,
HD 720p
•
Invite Participant
Customized H.261 slides are not supported.
Not applicable.
20 If the video slide file was not uploaded to the MCU prior to the IVR Service definition,
click the:
— Add Slide - Low Resolution button to upload a Low Resolution Slide.
— Add Slide - High Resolution button to upload a High Resolution Slide.
The Install File dialog box opens. The uploading process is similar to the uploading of
audio files. For more information, see step 6 on page 17-8.
Polycom, Inc.
•
The video slide must be in a .jpg or .bmp file format. For more information, see "Creating a
Welcome Video Slide” on page 17-28.
•
Customized H.261 slides are not supported.
17-15
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
21 Click the DTMF Codes tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - DTMF Codes dialog box opens.
•
This dialog box lists the default DTMF codes for the various functions that can be
performed during the conference by all participants or by the chairperson.
Table 17-9 New Conference IVR Service Properties - DTMF Codes
17-16
Operation
DTMF String
Permission
Mute My Line
*6
Everyone
Unmute My Line
#6
Everyone
Mute All Except Me
*5
Chairperson
Cancel Mute All Except Me
#5
Chairperson
Change Password
*77
Chairperson
Mute Incoming Participants
*86
Chairperson
Unmute Incoming Participants
#86
Chairperson
Play Help Menu
*83
Everyone
Terminate Conference
*87
Chairperson
Change To Chairperson
*78
Everyone
Override Mute All
Configurable
Everyone
Start Recording
*3
Chairperson
Stop Recording
*2
Chairperson
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
Table 17-9 New Conference IVR Service Properties - DTMF Codes
Operation
DTMF String
Permission
Pause Recording
*1
Chairperson
Secure Conference
*71
Chairperson
Unsecured Conference
#71
Chairperson
Request individual assistance
*0
Everyone
Request assistance for conference
00
Chairperson
Request to Speak
99
Everyone
22 To modify the DTMF code or permission:
a
In the DTMF Code column, in the appropriate entry enter the new code.
b
In the Permission column, select from the list who can use this feature (Everyone or
just the Chairperson).
By default, the Secure, Unsecure Conference and Show Number of Participants options are enabled
in the Conference IVR Service. These options can be disabled by removing their codes from the
Conference IVR Service.
• To disable the Secure Conference options, in the DTMF Code column, clear the DTMF codes of
both Secured Conference (*71) and Unsecured Conference (#71) from the table.
23 Click the Operator Assistance tab.
The Operator Assistance dialog box opens.
24 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance when the participant
requires or requests help during the connection process to the conference or during the
conference.
Polycom, Inc.
17-17
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
25 In the Operator Assistance Indication Message field, select the audio message to be played
when the participant requests or is waiting for the operator’s assistance.
If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new
audio files, click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the Collaboration Server.
26 Click OK to complete the IVR Service definition.
The new Conference IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list.
Entry Queue IVR Service
An Entry Queue (EQ) is a routing lobby for conferences. Participants are routed to the
appropriate conference according to the conference ID they enter.
An Entry Queue IVR Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue to enable the voice
prompts and video slide guiding the participants through the connection process.
An Entry Queue IVR Service is a subset of an IVR Service. You can create different Entry
Queue Services for different languages and personalized voice messages.
The Collaboration Server is shipped with a default Entry Queue IVR Service and all its
audio messages and video slide. You can define new Entry Queue IVR Services or modify
the default Entry Queue IVR Service.
Defining a New Entry Queue IVR Service
To set up a new Entry Queue IVR Service:
1
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click IVR Services (
).
2
In the IVR Services list, click the New Entry Queue IVR Service (
) button.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Global dialog box opens.
3
17-18
Fill in the following parameters:
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
Table 17-10 Entry Queue IVR Service Properties - Global Parameters
Option
Description
Entry Queue Service
Name
(Mandatory) Enter the name of the Entry Queue Service. The name
can be typed in Unicode. Maximum field length is 80 ASCII
characters.
Language
Select the language in which the Audio Messages and prompts will
be heard. The languages are defined in the Supported Languages
function.
External Server
Authentication
This option is used for Ad Hoc conferencing, to verify the participant’s
permission to initiate a new conference. For a detailed description
see Appendix D: "Conference Access with External Database
Authentication” on page D-4.
Select one of the following options:
• None to start a new conference without verifying with an external
database the user right to start it.
•
4
Conference ID to verify the user’s right to start a new conference
with an external database application using the conference ID.
Number of User Input
Retries
Enter the number of times the participant is able to respond to each
menu prompt before the participant is disconnected from the MCU.
Timeout for User
Input (Sec.)
Enter the duration in seconds that the system waits for input from the
participant before it is considered as an input error.
DTMF Delimiter
The interaction between the caller and the system is done via touchtone signals (DTMF codes). Enter the key that will be used to indicate
a DTMF command sent by the participant or the conference
chairperson. Possible keys are the pound key (#) or star (*).
Click the Welcome tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Welcome dialog box opens.
If the files were not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio
files, click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the Collaboration Server.
5
Polycom, Inc.
Define the appropriate parameters. This dialog box contains options that are identical
to those in the Conference IVR Service - Welcome Message dialog box. For more
information about these parameters, see Table 17-4 on page 17-9.
17-19
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
6
Click the Conference ID tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Conference ID dialog box opens.
7
Select the voice messages:
Table 17-11 Entry Queue IVR Service Properties - Conference ID
Field/Option
Description
Request Conference
ID
Prompts the participant for the conference ID.
Retry Conference ID
When the participant entered an incorrect conference ID, requests
the participant to enter the ID again.
8
Assign an audio file to each message type, as follows:
9
— In the Message File column, click the table entry, and then select the appropriate
audio message.
Click the General tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - General dialog box opens.
17-20
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
The administrator can enable an audio message that informs the participant of the lack
of Video Resources in the Collaboration Server and that he/she is being connected as
Audio Only. The message states: All video resources are currently in use. Connecting using
audio only.
The following guidelines apply:
— The IVR message applies to video participants only. Audio Only participants will
not receive the message.
— Only H.323 and SIP participants receive the audio message.
— The audio message is the first message after the call is connected, preceding all
other IVR messages.
— The message is called No Video Resources-Audio Only and the message file (.wav) is
called No video resources audio only.wav.
— The audio message must be added to the Conference and Entry Queue IVR Services
separately.
— The IVR message can be enabled/disabled by the administrator using the
ENABLE_ NO_VIDEO_RESOURCES_ AUDIO_ONLY_MESSAGE System Flag
in system.cfg.
Possible values: YES / NO, default: YES
If you wish to modify the flag value, the flag must be added to the System Configuration
file. For more information see the "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
10 Enter the message Name and Message File name for the Audio Only message:
— Message Name: No Video Resources-Audio Only
— Message File name: No_Video_Resources_Audio_Only.wav
11 Click the Video Services tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Video Services dialog box opens.
12 In the Video Welcome Slide list, select the video slide that will be displayed to
participants connecting to the Entry Queue. The slide list includes the video slides that
were previously uploaded to the MCU memory.
13 To view any slide, click the Preview Slide (
) button.
14 If the video slide file was not uploaded to the MCU prior to the IVR Service definition,
click the:
— Add Slide - Low Resolution button to upload a Low Resolution Slide.
Polycom, Inc.
17-21
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
— Add Slide - High Resolution button to upload a High Resolution Slide.
The Install File dialog box opens. The uploading process is similar to the uploading of
audio files. For more information, see step 6 on page 17-8.
The video slide must be in a .jpg or .bmp file format. For more information, see "Creating a Welcome
Video Slide” on page 17-28.
15 Click the Operator Assistance tab.
The Operator Assistance dialog box opens.
16 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance when the participant
requires or requests help during the connection process.
17 In the Operator Assistance Indication Message field, select the audio message to be played
when the participant requests or is waiting for operator’s assistance.
If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new
audio files, click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the Collaboration Server.
18 Click OK to complete the Entry Queue Service definition.
The new Entry Queue IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list. For more
information, see "IVR Services List” on page 17-1.
Setting a Conference IVR Service or Entry Queue IVR Service as the
Default Service
The first Conference IVR Service and Entry Queue IVR Service are automatically selected by
default. The IVR Services (Conference and Entry Queue) shipped with the system are also
set as default. If additional Conference IVR Services and Entry Queue IVR Services are
defined, you can set another service as the default for each service type.
To select the default Conference IVR Service:
>> In the IVR Services list, select the Conference IVR Service to be defined as the default,
) button.
and then click the Set Default Conference IVR Service (
17-22
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
Alternatively, in the IVR Services list, right-click the Conference IVR Service and then
select Set Default Conference IVR Service.
The IVR Service is displayed in bold, indicating that it is the current default service.
To select the Default Entry Queue IVR Service:
>> In the IVR Services list, select the Entry Queue IVR Service to be defined as the default,
) button.
and then click Set Default Entry Queue IVR Service (
Alternatively, in the Conference IVR Services list, right-click the Entry Queue IVR Service
and then select Set Default Entry Queue IVR Service.
The default Entry Queue IVR Service is displayed in bold, indicating that it is the
current default service.
Modifying the Conference or Entry Queue IVR Service Properties
You can modify the properties of an existing IVR Service, except the service name and
language.
To modify the properties of an IVR Service:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click IVR Services.
Polycom, Inc.
17-23
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
2
In the IVR Services list, Click the IVR Service to modify.
For more information about the tabs and options of this dialog box, see "Defining a New
Conference IVR Service” on page 17-6.
3
Modify the required parameters or upload the required audio files.
4
Click OK.
Replacing the Music File
The Collaboration Server is shipped with a default music file that is played when
participants are placed on hold, for example, while waiting for the chairperson to connect to
the conference (if the conference requires a chairperson), or when a single participant is
connected to the conference. You can replace the default music file with your own recorded
music.
Music file guidelines:
•
The file must be in *.wav format.
•
Music length cannot exceed one hour.
•
The music recording must be in the range of (-12dB) to (-9dB).
Adding a Music File
To replace the Music file:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click IVR Services.
2
In the IVR Services list toolbar, click the Replace/Change Music File (
The Install Music File window opens.
3
Click the Browse button to select the audio file (*.wav) to upload.
) button.
The Open dialog box opens.
17-24
4
Select the appropriate audio *.wav file and then click the Open button.
The selected file name is displayed in the Install Music File dialog box.
5
Optional. You can play the selected file by clicking the Play (
) button.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
6
a
Click Play Selected File to play a file on your computer.
b
Click Play Collaboration Server File to play a file already uploaded on the
Collaboration Server.
In the Install Music File dialog box, click OK to upload the file to the MCU.
The new file replaces the previously uploaded file and this file is used for all
background music played by the MCU.
Creating Audio Prompts and Video Slides
The Collaboration Server is shipped with default voice messages (in WAV format) and
video slides that are used for the default IVR services. You can create your own video slides
and record the voice messages for different languages or customize them to your needs.
Recording an Audio Message
To record audio messages, use any sound recording utility available in your computer or
record them professionally in a recording studio. Make sure that recorded message can be
saved as a Wave file (*.wav format) and that the recorded format settings are as defined in
steps 4 and 5 on page 17-26. The files are converted into the Collaboration Server internal
format during the upload process.
This section describes the use of the Sound Recorder utility delivered with Windows 95/98/
2000/XP.
To define the format settings for audio messages:
•
The format settings for audio messages need to be set only once. The settings will then be
applied to any new audio messages recorded.
•
The utility or facility used to record audio messages must be capable of producing audio files
with the formats and attributes as shown in the following procedure, namely, PCM, 16.000kHz,
16Bit, Mono.
Windows® XP® Sound Recorder is one of the utilities that can be used.
1
On your PC, click Start > Programs > Accessories > Entertainment > Sound Recorder.
The Sound–Sound Recorder dialog box opens.
2
To define the recording format, click File > Properties.
The Properties for Sound dialog box opens.
Polycom, Inc.
17-25
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
3
Click the Convert Now button.
The Sound Selection dialog box opens.
4
In the Format field, select PCM.
5
In the Attributes list, select 16.000 kHz, 16Bit, Mono.
6
To save this format, click the Save As button.
The Save As dialog box opens.
7
Select the location where the format will reside, enter a name and then click OK.
The system returns to the Sound Selection dialog box.
17-26
8
Click OK.
The system returns to the Properties for Sound dialog box.
9
Click OK.
The system returns to the Sound–Sound Recorder dialog box. You are now ready to
record your voice message.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
To record a new audio message:
Regardless of the recording utility you are using, verify that any new audio message recorded
adheres to the following format settings: 16.000kHz, 16Bit, Mono.
Make sure that a microphone or a sound input device is connected to
your PC.
1
On your PC, click Start > Programs > Accessories > Entertainment > Sound Recorder.
The Sound–Sound Recorder dialog box opens.
2
Click File > New.
3
Click the Record button.
The system starts recording.
4
Start narrating the desired message.
For all audio IVR messages, stop the recording anytime up to 3 minutes (which is the maximum
duration allowed for an IVR voice message). If the message exceeds 3 minutes it will be rejected by
the Collaboration Server unit.
5
Click the Stop Recording button.
6
Save the recorded message as a wave file, click File > Save As.
The Save As dialog box opens.
7
Verify that the Format reads: PCM 16.000 kHz, 16Bit, Mono. If the format is correct,
continue with step 10. If the format is incorrect, click the Change button.
The Sound Selection dialog box is displayed.
8
Polycom, Inc.
In the Name field, select the name of the format created in step 7 on page 17-26.
17-27
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
9
Click OK.
The system returns to the Save As dialog box.
10 In the Save in field, select the directory where the file will be stored.
11 In the Save as Type field, select the *.wav file format.
12 In the File name box, type a name for the message file, and then click the Save button.
13
To record additional messages, repeat steps 1 to 10.
To upload your recorded *.wav file to the Collaboration Server, see step 6 on page 17-8.
Creating a Welcome Video Slide
The video slide is a still picture that can be created in any graphic application.
To create a welcome video slide:
1 Using any graphic application, save your image in either *.jpg or *.bmp file format.
2
For optimum quality, ensure that the image dimensions adhere to the Collaboration
Server recommended values (width x height in pixels):
— 640 x 480
— 704 x 480
— 848 x 480
— 720 x 576
— 704 x 576
— 1024 x 576
— 960 x 720
— 1280 x 720
— 1440 x 1088
— 1920 x 1088
The Collaboration Server can accommodate small deviations from the recommended
slide resolutions.
3
Save your file.
To upload your video slide to the Collaboration Server, see step 12 on page 17-21.
If using a default Polycom slide, the slide’s resolution will be as defined in the profile, i.e. SD, HD or
CIF.
If the display of the Welcome slide is cut in the upper area of the screen, change the settings of the
endpoint’s monitor to People "Stretch" instead of "Zoom".
17-28
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
Default IVR Prompts and Messages
The system is shipped with the following audio prompts and messages:
Table 17-12 Default IVR Messages
Polycom, Inc.
Message Type
Message Text
File Name
General Welcome
Message
“Welcome to unified conferencing.”
General_Welcome.wav
Chairperson
Identifier Request
“For conference Chairperson Services,
Press the Pound Key. All other
participants please wait...”
Chairperson_ Identifier.wav
Request
Chairperson
Password
“Please enter the Conference
Chairperson Password. Press the
pound key when complete.”
Chairperson_Password.wav
Retry Chairperson
Password
“Invalid chairperson password. Please
try again.”
Chairperson_
Password_Failure.wav
Request
Password
“Please enter the conference password.
Press the pound key when complete.”
Conference_ Password.wav
Retry Password
“Invalid conference password. Please
try again.”
Retry_ Conference_
Password.wav
Request Digit
“Press any key to enter the conference.”
Request_Digit.wav
Request Billing
Code
“Please enter the Billing code. Press the
pound key when complete.”
Billing_Code.wav
Requires
Chairperson
“Please wait for the chairperson to join
the conference.”
Requires Chairperson.wav
Chairperson Exit
“The chairperson has left the
conference.”
Note: The
TERMINATE_CONF_AFTER_CHAIR_
DROPPED flag must be enabled to play
this message.
Chairperson_Exit.wav
First to Join
“You are the first person to join the
conference.”
First to Join.wav
Mute All On
“All conference participants are now
muted.”
Mute_All_On.wav
Mute All Off
“All conference participants are now
unmuted.”
Mute_All_Off.wav
End Time Alert
“The conference is about to end.”
End_Time_Alert.wav
Change Password
Menu
“Press one to change conference
password.
Press two to change chairperson
password.
Press nine to exit the menu.”
Change_Password_ Menu.wav
17-29
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 17-12 Default IVR Messages (Continued)
Message Type
Message Text
File Name
Change
Conference
Password
“Please enter the new conference
password. Press the pound key when
complete.”
Change_ Conference_
Password.wav
Change
Chairperson
Password
“Please enter the new chairperson
password. Press the pound key when
complete.”
Change_ Chairperson_
Password.wav
Confirm Password
Change
“Please re-enter the new password.
Press the pound key when complete.”
Confirm_ Password_ Change.wav
Change Password
Failure
“The new password is invalid.”
Change_ Password_
Failure.wav
Password
Changed
Successfully
“The password has been successfully
changed.”
Password_ Changed_
Successfully.wav
Self Mute
“You are now muted.”
Self_Mute.wav
Self Unmute
“You are no longer muted.”
Self_Unmute.wav
Chairperson Help
Menu
“The available touch-tone keypad
actions are as follows:
• To exit this menu press any key.
Chairperson_ Help_Menu.wav
Participant Help
Menu
Maximum
Participants
Exceeded
17-30
•
To request private assistance, press
star, zero.
•
To request operator’s assistance for
the conference, press zero, zero.
•
•
To mute your line, press star, six.
To unmute your line, press pound,
six.”
“The available touch-tone keypad
actions are as follows:
• To exit this menu press any key.
•
To request private assistance, press
star, zero.
•
•
To mute your line, press star, six.
•
To increase your volume, press star,
nine.
•
To decrease your volume, press
pound, nine.
Participant_Help_Menu.wav
To unmute your line, press pound,
six.
“The conference is full. You cannot join
at this time.”
Maximum_ Participants_
Exceeded.wav
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 17-IVR Services
Table 17-12 Default IVR Messages (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Message Type
Message Text
File Name
Request
Conference
NID
“Please enter your conference NID.
Press the pound key when complete.”
Request_ Conference_NID.wav
Retry Conference
NID
“Invalid conference NID. Please try
again.”
Retry_Conference_NID.wav
Secured
Conference
“The conference is now secured.”
Conference_Secured.wav
Secured
Conference
“The conference is now in an unsecured
mode”
Conference_Unsecured.wav
Secured
Conference
“Conference you are trying to join is
locked”
Conference_Locked.wav
Conference
Recording
“The conference is being recorded”
Recording_ in_Progress.wav
Conference
Recording
“The conference recording has failed”
Recording_Failed.wav
No Video
Resources Audio
Only.
"All video resources are currently in
use. Connecting using audio only"
No_Video_Resources_Audio_
Only.wav
17-31
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Volume Control of IVR Messages and Music
The volume of IVR music and IVR messages is controlled by the following system flags:
•
IVR_MUSIC_VOLUME
•
IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME
To control the volume of IVR music and messages:
>> Modify the values of the System Flags listed in Table 17-13 by clicking the menu Setup >
System Configuration.
If these flags do not appear in the System Flags list, they must be manually added.
For more information see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
Table 17-13 System Flags – IVR Volume Control
Flag
Description
IVR_MUSIC_VOLUME
The volume of the IVR music played when a single participant is
connected to the conference varies according to the value of this
flag.
Possible value range: 0-10 (Default: 5).
0 – disables playing the music
1 – lowest volume
10 – highest volume
IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME
The volume of IVR messages varies according to the value of this
flag.
Possible value range: 0-10 (Default: 6).
0 – disables playing the IVR messages
1 – lowest volume
10 – highest volume
Note: It is not recommended to disable IVR messages by setting the
flag value to 0.
The following System Flags do not require an MCU reset:
• IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME
•
IVR_MUSIC_VOLUME
For all other flag changes, the MCU must be reset for the modified flag settings (including deletion)
to take effect.
17-32
Polycom, Inc.
18
The Call Detail Record (CDR) Utility
The Call Detail Record (CDR) utility enables you to view summary information about
conferences, and retrieve full conference information and archive it to a file. The file can be
used to produce reports or can be exported to external billing programs.
The value of the fields that support Unicode values, such as the info fields, will be stored in the CDR
file in UTF8. The application that reads the CDR must support Unicode.
The Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server can store details of up to 2000 conferences.
When this number is exceeded, the system overwrites conferences, starting with the earliest
conference. To save the conferences’ information, their data must be retrieved and archived.
The frequency with which the archiving should be performed depends on the volume of
conferences run by the MCU.
The Collaboration Server displays Active Alarms before overwriting the older files, enabling
the users to backup the older files before they are deleted.
The display of Active Alarms is controlled by the
ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS System Flag.
If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is set to YES (default setting when
ULTRA_SECURE_MODE System Flag is set to YES) and a Cyclic File reaches a file storage
capacity limit, an Active Alarm is created: “Backup of CDR files is required”.
Each conference is a separate record in the MCU memory. Each conference is archived as a
separate file. Each conference CDR file contains general information about the conference,
such as the conference name, ID, start time and duration, as well as information about
events occurring during the conference, such as adding a new participant, disconnecting a
participant or extending the length of the conference.
The CDR File
CDR File Formats
The conference CDR records can be retrieved and archived in the following two formats:
•
Polycom, Inc.
Unformatted data – Unformatted CDR files contain multiple records in “raw data”
format. The first record in each file contains general conference data. The remaining
records contain event data, one record for each event. Each record contains field values
separated by commas. This data can be transferred to an external program such as
Microsoft Excel for billing purposes.
18-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The following is a sample of an unformatted CDR file:
Conference
summary record
Event code
Event records
Figure 18-1 Unformatted CDR File
•
Formatted text – Formatted CDR files contain multiple sections. The first section in each
file contains general conference data. The remaining sections contain event data, one
section for each event. Each field value is displayed in a separate line, together with its
name. This data can be used to generate a summary report for a conference
The field names and values in the formatted file will appear in the language being used for the RP
Collaboration Server Web Client user interface at the time when the CDR information is retrieved.
The following is an example of a formatted CDR file:
General conference
section
Event heading
Event section
Figure 18-2 Formatted CDR File
18-2
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 18-The Call Detail Record (CDR) Utility
Multi-Part CDR Files
By default, the maximum CDR (Call Data Record) file size is limited to 1MB. When a CDR
file reaches a size of 1MB the file is saved and further call data recording is stopped and the
additional data is lost.
The Collaboration Server can be configured to keep recording the data in multiple CDR file
set of 1MB each. Multi-Part CDR ensures that conference call data from long duration or
permanent conferences is recorded and not lost.
Guidelines
•
Multi-Part CDR is enabled by setting the value of the ENABLE_MULTI_PART_CDR
System Flag to YES.
The flag’s default value is NO.
When the flag value is NO, CDR file size is limited to one file of 1MB and further call
data recording is stopped.
To modify the default setting, the flag must be manually added to the System
Configuration. For more information see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Administrator’s Guide, "Modifying System Flags” on page 22-1.
•
If the flag value is set to YES, when a CDR file reaches 1MB, an additional CDR file is
created and added to the CDR file set for that conference.
•
If the flag value is changed from YES to NO (or visa versa) all existing CDR files are
retained.
CDR File Contents
The general conference section or record contains information such as the Routing Name
and ID, and the conference starting date and time.
The event sections or records contain an event type heading or event type code, followed by
event data. For example, an event type may be that a participant connects to the conference,
and the event data will list the date and time the participant connects to the conference, the
participant name and ID, and the participant capabilities used to connect to the conference.
To enable compatibility for applications that written for the MGC family, the RP
Collaboration Server CDR file structure is based on the MGC CDR file structure.
The unformatted and formatted text files contain basically the same information. The
following differences should be noted between the contents of the unformatted and
formatted text files:
Polycom, Inc.
•
In many cases a formatted text file field contains a textual value, whereas the equivalent
unformatted file field contains a numeric value that represents the textual value.
•
For reading clarity, in a few instances, a single field in the unformatted file is converted
to multiple fields in the formatted text file, and in other cases, multiple fields in the
unformatted file are combined into one field in the formatted file.
•
To enable compatibility between MGC CDR files and RP Collaboration Server CDR
files, the unformatted file contains fields that were applicable to the MGC MCUs, but
are not supported by the RP Collaboration Server MCUs. These fields are omitted from
the formatted text file.
18-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Appendix C: "CDR Fields - Unformatted File” on page C-1, contains a full list of the events, fields
and values that appear in the unformatted file. This appendix can be referred to for information
regarding the contents of fields in the unformatted text file, but does not reflect the exact contents of
the formatted text file.
Viewing, Retrieving and Archiving Conference Information
Viewing the Conference Records
To open the CDR utility:
• On the Collaboration Server Menu, click Administration > CDR.
The CDR List pane opens, displaying a list of the conference CDR records stored in the
MCU memory.
The following fields are displayed:
Table 18-1 Conference Record Fields
Field
Description
Display Name
The Display Name of the conference and an icon indicating whether or
not the CDR record has been retrieved and saved to a formatted text
file.
The following icons are used:
The CDR record has not been saved.
The CDR record has been saved.
18-4
Start Time
The actual time the conference started.
GMT Start Time
The actual time the conference started according to Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
Duration
The actual conference duration.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 18-The Call Detail Record (CDR) Utility
Table 18-1 Conference Record Fields (Continued)
Field
Description
Reserved Start Time
The reserved start time of the conference. If the conference started
immediately this is the same as the Start Time.
Reserved Duration
The time the conference was scheduled to last. Discrepancy between
the scheduled and the actual duration may indicate that the
conference duration was prolonged or shortened.
Status
The conference status. The following values may be displayed:
• Ongoing Conference
•
•
•
Terminated by User
•
•
Conference never became ongoing due to a problem
Terminated when end time passed
Automatically terminated when conference was empty – The
conference ended automatically because no participants joined the
conference for a predefined time period, or all the participants
disconnected from the conference and the conference was empty
for a predefined time period.
Unknown error
Note: If the conference was terminated by an MCU reset, the status
Ongoing Conference will be displayed.
File Retrieved
Indicates if the conference record was downloaded using any of the
file retrieval buttons in the CDR List pane or the API.
• Yes - when the conference record was retrieved to any file or using
the API.
•
No - when the conference record was not retrieved at all.
The File Retrieved field is updated whenever the record is
downloaded.
Multi-part CDR File display
When the Multi-Part CDR is configured on the Collaboration Server, an additional column,
Part Index, is added to the CDR list.
Single FIle CDRs
Multi-Part CDR
The Part Index column displays the CDR file’s sequence in the CDR file set:
•
Polycom, Inc.
CDRs that are up to 1MB consist of a single file. Each file has a unique Display Name and
a Part Index of 1.
18-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
Files included in a Multi-Part CDR file sets have the same Display Name. The first file of
the set is numbered 1 with each additional CDR file numbered in an ascending numeric
sequence.
Refreshing the CDR List
To refresh the CDR list:
•
Click the Refresh
button, or right-click on any record and then select Refresh.
Updated conference CDR records are retrieved from the MCU memory.
Retrieving and Archiving Conference CDR Records
To retrieve and archive CDR records:
1 To retrieve a single CDR record, right-click the record to retrieve and then select the
required format (as detailed in Table 18-2).
Alternatively, select the record to retrieve, and then click the appropriate button on the
toolbar (as detailed in Table 18-2).
To retrieve multiple CDR records simultaneously, use standard Windows multiselection methods.
Table 18-2 Conference Information Retrieval Options
Menu Option
Button
Action
Retrieve
Retrieves the conference information as unformatted data
into a file whose extension is .cdr.
Retrieve Formatted
XML
Retrieves the conference information as formatted text
into a file whose extension is .xml.
Note: Viewed when logged in as a special support user.
Retrieve Formatted
Retrieves the conference information as formatted text
into a file whose extension is .txt.
The Retrieve dialog box opens.
The dialog box displays the names of the destination CDR files.
2
Select the destination folder for the CDR files and then click OK.
If the destination file already exists, you will be asked if you want to overwrite the file
or specify a new name for the destination file.
The files are saved to the selected folder.
CDR files are not included in the backup process and should be backed up manually by saving the
CDR files to a destination device.
18-6
Polycom, Inc.
19
RMX Manager Application
The RMX Manager is the Windows version of the RP Collaboration Server Web Client. It can be
used instead of the RP Collaboration Server Web Client for routine Collaboration Server
management and for Collaboration Server management via a modem connection. For more
information on using the RMX Manager via a modem connection, see "Connecting to the
Collaboration Server via Modem” on page F-6.
Using the RMX Manager application, a single user can control a single or multiple MCU
units as well as conferences from multiple MCUs. The RealPresence Collaboration Server
(RMX) system can be managed and controlled by the RMX Manager application.
The RMX Manager can list and monitor:
•
Up to 20 Collaboration Server systems in the MCUs pane
•
Up to 800 conferences in the Conferences pane
•
Up to 1600 participants in the Participants pane
The RMX Manager is faster than the RP Collaboration Server Web Client and can give added
efficiency to RP Collaboration Server management tasks, especially when deployed on
workstations affected by:
•
Lack of performance due to bandwidth constraints within the LAN/WAN
environment.
•
Slow operation and disconnections that can be caused by the anti-phishing component
of various antivirus applications.
Users with Auditor authorization level cannot connect to the Collaboration Server via the RMX
Manager application and must use the RP Collaboration Server Web Client.
The RMX Manager application can be installed in your local workstation or accessed directly
on the RP Collaboration Server system without installing it in your workstation.
Accessing the RMX Manager Directly
To access the RMX Manager directly:
>> Start Internet Explorer and in your browser enter:
http://<Collaboration Server IP Address>/RMXManager.html.
For example, if the Collaboration Server IP address is 10.226.10.46, enter in the browser
the following address: http://10.226.10.46/RMXManager.html.
Polycom, Inc.
19-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Installing the RMX Manager
Installing the RMX Manager is not supported in secure mode.
The RMX Manager application can be downloaded from one of the RP Collaboration Server
systems installed in your site or from Polycom web site at
http://www.polycom.com/support.
Upgrade Notes
• When upgrading the RMX Manager application, it is recommended to backup the MCU list using
the Export RMX Manager Configuration option. For more details, see "Import/Export RMX
Manager Configuration” on page 19-21.
•
When upgrading the RMX Manager from a major version (for example, version 8.0) to a
maintenance version of that version (for example, 8.0.x), the installation must be performed from
the same MCU (IP address) from which the major version (for example, version 8.0) was
installed.
If you are upgrading from another MCU (different IP address), you must first uninstall the RMX
Manager application using Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
New RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) Installation Note
The RealPresence Collaboration Server Installation and First Entry Configuration must be
completed before installing the RMX Manager application. For more details, see the RealPresence
Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, “First Time Installation and Configuration”.
Once the connection to the RealPresence Collaboration Server unit is established and the Login
window is displayed, the RMX Manager application can be installed.
To install RMX Manager (downloading the application from the RP Collaboration
Server):
1 Start Internet Explorer and connect to one of the Collaboration Server units in your site.
It is recommended to connect to the Collaboration Server installed with the latest
software version.
The Login screen is displayed. There is a link to the RMX Manager Installer at the top of
the right edge of the screen.
Link to
RMX
Manager
Installer
2
19-2
Click the Install RMX Manager link.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 19-RMX Manager Application
The installer verifies the application’s requirements on the workstation.
The Install dialog box is displayed.
3
Click Install.
The installation proceeds.
The installation completes, the application loads and the RMX Manager - MCUs screen
is displayed.
MCUs Toolbar
MCUs Pane
The first time you start the RMX Manager application, the MCUs pane is empty.
Polycom, Inc.
19-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Starting the RMX Manager Application
Once installed, the RMX Manager can be run using the http:// (non-secured) or https://
(secured) command in the browser’s address line or the Windows Start menu.
To use the browser:
1 In the browser’s command line, enter:
http://<MCU Control Unit IP Address>/RMXManager.html
or
https://<MCU Control Unit IP Address>/RMXManager.html
2
Press Enter.
To use the Windows Start menu:
1 Click Start > Programs.
a
If the RMX Manager is displayed in the recently used programs list, click RMX
Manager in the list to start the application.
or
b
Click All Programs > Polycom > RMX Manager.
The MCUs screen is displayed, listing the MCUs currently defined in the RMX Manager.
This screen enables you to add additional MCUs or connect to any of the MCUs listed.
For details on adding MCUs, see “Adding MCUs to the MCUs List” on page 12.
For each listed MCU, the system displays the following information:
— MCU Display Name (as defined in the Add MCU dialog box).
— IP Address of the MCU’s control unit
— Product Type - The MCU type: RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s, RealPresence
Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500, RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 2000,
19-4
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 19-RMX Manager Application
or RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 4000.
Before connecting to the MCU for the first time, the Collaboration Server type is
unknown so “RMX” is displayed instead as a general indication.
To display the RMX Manager main screen you must connect to one of the listed
Collaboration Servers. For more details, see "Connecting to the MCU” on page 19-5.
Connecting to the MCU
Once an MCU is defined, the RMX Manager can be connected to it. This allows you to set up
conferences, make reservations, monitor On Going Conferences and perform other activities
on several MCUs.
The first Collaboration Server unit that is connected to the RMX Manager dictates the Authorization
Level of Users that can connect to the other MCUs on the list. For example, if the Authorization level
of the User POLYCOM is Administrator, all Users connecting to the other MCUs on the list must be
Administrators. Each user can have a different login name and password for each of the listed
MCUs and they must be defined in the Users list of each of the listed MCUs.
To connect the RMX Manager to an MCU:
1 In the MCUs pane or screen, use one of the following methods:
Polycom, Inc.
a
Double-click the MCU icon.
b
Select the Collaboration Server to connect and click the Connect MCU
c
Right-click the MCU icon and then click Connect MCU.
button.
19-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
If you are connecting to the MCU from the MCUs opening screen and have defined the
Username and Password for the connecting MCU, the system connects to the
Collaboration Server, and the RMX Manager Main Screen is displayed.
If you are connecting to any MCU from the MCUs pane in the RMX Manager Main
Screen and have defined the Username and Password for the connecting MCU, the MCU
icon changes to connected and its status, type and number of audio and video resources
are displayed in the MCUs pane.
If the Username and Password are missing from the MCU parameters, or if the Remember
Me check box has been cleared, the Connect dialog box opens.
19-6
2
In the Username field, enter the user name with which you will login to the MCU.
3
In the Password field, enter the password as defined for the user name with which you
will login to the MCU.
4
To add the user name and password to the MCU properties so you will not have to
enter them each time you login to the MCU, make sure that the Remember Login check
box is selected. Otherwise, clear the Remember Login check box.
5
Click OK.
The system connects to the Collaboration Server, and the RMX Manager Main Screen is
displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 19-RMX Manager Application
If a User with the entered Username and Password is not defined in the Collaboration
Server, an error message is displayed and the system lets you re-enter the Username and
Password.
RMX Manager Main Screen
The RMX Manager Main Screen is displayed only when at least one MCU is connected.
This screen is similar to the RP Collaboration Server Web Client Main Screen with the addition
of the MCUs pane. As in the RP Collaboration Server Web Client, the panes are displayed
according to the Authorization Level of the logged in User. The MCUs pane is displayed to all
users.
Ongoing
Conferences
Pane
MCUs Pane
The selected MCU is highlighted
List Pane
Address Book Pane
Device
Management
Pane
Only one MCU can be selected in the MCUs pane. If only one MCU is connected, it is
automatically selected. The selected MCU is highlighted.
The menu items, the Collaboration Server Management features, the Address Book and the
Conference Templates are all properties of the selected MCU and apply to it.
Polycom, Inc.
19-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
MCUs Pane
The MCUs pane includes a list of MCUs and a toolbar.
For each listed MCU, the system displays the following information:
•
MCU Display Name - the name of the MCU and its icon according to its type and
connection status. The following icons are available:
Table 19-1 MCU Icons and Statuses
Icon
Description
RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500, disconnected.
RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500, connected.
RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 2000, disconnected.
RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 2000, connected.
RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 4000, disconnected.
RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 4000, connected.
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800, disconnected
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800, connected
•
IP Address of the MCU’s control unit.
•
Status - The status of the MCU:
•
19-8
— Connected - the MCU is connected to the RMX Manager and can be managed by the
RMX Manager user.
— Disconnected - The MCU is disconnected from the RMX Manager
— Major - The MCU has a major problem. MCU behavior could be affected and
attention is required.
Product Type - The MCU type: RealPresence Collaboration Server 1500/2000/4000.
Before connecting to the MCU for the first time, the Collaboration Server type is
unknown so Collaboration Server is displayed instead as a general indication.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 19-RMX Manager Application
•
Monitored - When checked indicates that the conferences running on this MCU are
automatically added to the Conferences list and monitored. To stop monitoring the
conferences running on this MCU and their participants, clear the Monitored check box.
•
Video Resources - The number of video resources that are available for conferencing.
•
Audio Resources - The number of audio resources that are available for conferencing.
MCUs Toolbar
The MCUs toolbar contains the following buttons:
Add MCU
Connect MCU
Export Configuration
Disconnect MCU
Import Configuration
Delete MCU
MCU Properties
Conferences Pane
The Conferences pane lists all the ongoing conferences from all the MCUs that are connected
and monitored along with their MCU, Status, Conference ID, Start Time and End Time data.
The number of ongoing conferences is displayed in the pane’s title.
The Conferences list toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save Conference
to Template
Delete Conference
New Conference
Toolbar
List Headers
MCU Name
Conference Data
Monitoring conferences
New conferences run on MCUs selected for Monitoring are automatically added to the
Conferences list. You can sort the conferences by MCU by clicking the MCU column heading
in the Conferences table. Conferences run on MCUs that are connected but not monitored are
not listed.
Using Windows multiple selection methods to select conferences, participants from several
conferences running on different MCUs can be listed in the Participants list pane.
Starting a new conference
When starting a new conference, you must first select the MCU to run the conference in the
MCUs pane.
Polycom, Inc.
19-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Collaboration Server Management
The Collaboration Server Management pane lists the entities of the selected MCU that need to
be configured to enable the Collaboration Server to run conferences. Only users with
Administrators permission can modify these parameters.
The Collaboration Server Management pane is divided into two sections:
•
Frequently Used – parameters often configured monitored or modified.
•
Rarely Used – parameters configured during initial system set-up and rarely modified
afterward.
List Pane
The List pane displays details of the participants connected to the conferences selected in the
Conferences pane or the item selected in Collaboration Server Management pane. The title of the
pane changes according to the selected item.
When selecting an item in the Collaboration Server Management pane it applies only to the
MCU selected in the MCUs list. In such a case, the system displays the name of the selected
MCU in the List pane title.
Status Bar
The Status Bar at the bottom of the RP Collaboration Server Web Client contains System and
Participant Alerts tabs as well as Port Usage Gauges and an MCU State indicator.
System Alerts
Lists system problems of all connected MCUs (even if the MCU is not monitored). The alert
indicator flashes red when at least one system alert is active. The flashing continues until a
user with Operator or Administrator permission reviews the list.
The System Alerts can be sorted by MCU by clicking the MCU header in the System Alerts
table.
The System Alerts pane is opened and closed by clicking the System Alerts button in the left
corner of the Status Bar.
Active
Alarms
Faults
List
For more information about Active Alarms and Faults List, see "System and Participant
Alerts” on page 20-1.
Participant Alerts
Lists the participants of all monitored MCUs that are experiencing connection problems.
The list is sorted by MCU and conference.
The Participant Alerts can be sorted by MCU by clicking the MCU header in the Participant
Alerts table.
19-10
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 19-RMX Manager Application
The Participant Alerts pane is opened and closed by clicking the Participant Alerts button in
the left corner of the Status Bar.
Port Usage Gauges
The Port Usage gauges display for the selected MCU:
•
The total number of Video ports in the system according.
•
The number of Video ports in use.
•
The High Port Usage threshold.
For more details, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Port
Usage Gauges” on page 3-6.
MCU State
The MCU State indicator displays the status of the selected MCU.
For more details, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "MCU
State” on page 3-6.
Address Book
Displays the Address Book of the selected MCU (regardless of its Monitored status). The
Address Book is a list of Participants and Groups that have been defined on the selected
Collaboration Server.
The information in the Address Book can be modified only by an administrator. All
Collaboration Server users can, however, view and use the Address Book to assign
participants to conferences.
The name of the selected Collaboration Server is displayed in the title of the Address Book
pane. For more details, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Address Book” on page 3-7.
Conference Templates
Conference Templates enable administrators and operators to create, save, schedule and
activate identical conferences.
The Conference Templates pane lists the Conference Templates that have been defined on the
selected Collaboration Server (regardless of its Monitored status).
The Conference Templates pane is initially displayed as a closed tab. The name of the selected
Collaboration Server and the number of saved Conference Templates is indicated on the tab.
For more details, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Conference Templates” on page 3-8.
Polycom, Inc.
19-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Adding MCUs to the MCUs List
The RMX Manager can connect to one or several Collaboration Servers simultaneously. If the
site’s configuration includes more than one MCU, or when a new MCU is added to your
configuration, and you want to monitor and control all MCUs from within the same
window, you must add the MCU to the MCUs list.
The Collaboration Server must be installed and its IP addresses properly configured in the
Management Network Service before defining its connection parameters in the RMX Manager
application.
To add the MCU to the list of MCUs being managed, define the MCU’s connection
parameters.
To add a Collaboration Server unit:
1
On the MCUs toolbar, click the Add MCU
The Add MCU dialog box opens.
2
Define the following parameters:
Table 20
19-12
button to add an MCU to the MCU list.
MCU Properties
Field
Description
MCU Name
Enter the name of the MCU on the network.
MCU IP
Enter the IP address of the MCU’s Control Unit. The IP address must be
identical to the one configured in the MCU during first entry Configuration.
For more details, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Getting Started Guide, "Modifying the Factory Default Management
Network Settings on the USB Memory Stick” on page 2-5.
Port
Enter the number of the port used for communication and data
transactions between the Collaboration Server unit and the RMX
Manager.
For standard connection, enter 80.
For a Secured connection (using TLS or SSL), enter 443.
Username
Enter the user name with which you will login to the MCU. A User with
this name must be defined in the Collaboration Server Users list. The
system is shipped with a default User whose name is POLYCOM.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 19-RMX Manager Application
Table 20
MCU Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
Password
Enter the password as defined for the user name with which you will login
to the MCU. The system is shipped with a default User whose password
is POLYCOM.
Secure Mode
Optional. Select this check box to connect to the Collaboration Server
with SSL and work in Secure Mode.
Remember Login
This check box is automatically selected, and it enables the usage of the
user name and password entered in this dialog box when connecting to
the Collaboration Server.
If this check box is cleared, the user is prompted for the user name and
password when connecting to this Collaboration Server unit.
Auto
Reconnection
Select this check box to automatically reconnect to the Collaboration
Server if the connection between the RMX Manager and the MCU is
broken.
Interval
Enter time in seconds between reconnect ion attempts to the
Collaboration Server. For example, if you enter 10, the system will wait
10 seconds between the connection attempts.
Max Time
Enter the maximum amount of time in seconds that the Collaboration
Server is allowed to try to reconnect. If the Collaboration Server
reconnects before the allotted time frame the count down timer is halted.
For example, if you enter 100, the system will stop trying to reconnect if it
has failed to do so within 100 seconds.
3
Click OK.
The MCU is added to the MCUs pane.
4
If required, repeat steps 1-3 to define additional Collaboration Server units.
The MCUs pane contains the list of all defined MCUs.
Starting a Conference
There are several ways to start a conference:
•
Clicking the New Conference button in the Conferences pane. For more information, see
“Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane” on page 14.
•
Dialing in to a Meeting Room defined on any of the MCUs.
— A Meeting Room is a conference that is saved on the MCU. It remains in passive
mode until it is activated by the first participant, or the meeting organizer dialing
in. For more information about Meeting Rooms, see "Meeting Rooms” on page 6-1.
Polycom, Inc.
19-13
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
Dialing in to an Ad Hoc Entry Queue defined on one of the MCUs which is used as the
access point to the MCU.
For a detailed description of Ad Hoc Entry Queues, see "Entry Queues” on page 7-1.
•
Start a Reservation:
— If the Start Time of the Reservation is past due the conference becomes ongoing
immediately.
— If the Start Time of the Reservation is in the future the conference becomes ongoing,
at the specified time on the specified date.
For more information, see "Starting a Reservation” on page 19-15.
•
Start any Conference Template saved in the Conference Templates list.
For more information, see "Starting an Ongoing Conference or Reservation From a
Template” on page 19-15.
Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane
To start a conference from the Conference pane:
1 In the MCUs pane, select the MCU to run the conference.
2
In the Conferences pane, click the New Conference ( ) button.
The New Conference – General dialog box opens.
The system displays the conference’s default Name, Duration and the default Profile,
which contains the conference parameters and media settings.
The Collaboration Server automatically allocates the conference ID, when the
conference starts.
In most cases, the default conference ID can be used and you can just click OK to launch
the conference. If required, you can enter a conference ID before clicking OK to launch
the conference.
19-14
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 19-RMX Manager Application
If you are the meeting chairperson or organizer using the RP Collaboration Server Web
Client to start your own meeting, you need to communicate the default conference ID
(or the one you created) to the other conference participants so they can dial in.
You can use the New Conference - General dialog box to modify the conference
parameters. If no defined participants are to be added to the conference, or you do not
want to add additional information, click OK.
For more details, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Starting a CP Conference from the Conferences Pane” on page 3-12.
Starting a Reservation
To start a conference from the Reservation Calendar:
1 In the MCUs pane, select the MCU to run the conference.
2
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Reservation Calendar button (
).
The Reservation Calendar is displayed.
Name of selected MCU
3
Click the New Reservation (
) button.
For more information, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Changes made to this information once the conference is running are not saved to the CDR.” on
page 3-23.
Starting an Ongoing Conference or Reservation From a Template
An ongoing conference or a Reservation can be started from any Conference Template
saved in the Conference Templates list of the selected MCU.
To start an ongoing conference or a reservation from a Template:
1 In the MCUs pane, select the MCU to run the conference.
Polycom, Inc.
19-15
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
1
In the Conference Templates list, select the Template you want to start as an ongoing
conference.
2
Click the Start Conference from Template (
) button to start a conference or
Schedule Reservation from Template ( ) button to schedule a reservation.
or
Right-click and select Start Conference from Template to start an ongoing conference
or Schedule Reservation from Template to schedule a reservation.
Name of selected MCU
Name of selected MCU
The conference is started.
For detailed description of Conference Templates, see "Conference Templates” on page 11-1.
Monitoring Conferences
When MCUs are connected to the RMX Manager they are automatically monitored, that is,
any ongoing conference that is started on that MCU is automatically added to the
Conferences pane and its participants are monitored.
To list participants from several conferences (running on the same or different MCUs):
>> In the Conferences pane, using Windows multiple selection methods, select the
conferences whose participants you want to list.
The participants are displayed in the Participants list pane.
19-16
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 19-RMX Manager Application
By default, the participants are grouped by conferences, and the name of the MCU is
displayed in the first column of the properties table, enabling sorting according to MCU
name.
Conferences selected for
monitoring
MCU Name.
can be used for
sorting by clicking
on the column
heading
Group by Conference
Grouping the Participants by MCU
The Participants can be grouped by MCU and then by conferences.
To change the display mode for the Participants pane:
>> On the Collaboration Server Menu, click View > Group by MCU.
Polycom, Inc.
19-17
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Participants pane display changes accordingly.
Group by MCU
Group by Conference
To toggle between the two display modes, click View > Group by MCU.
Start Monitoring/Stop Monitoring
By default, all conferences running on connected Collaboration Servers are monitored.
You can stop the automatic monitoring of conferences on a specific MCU in one of the
following methods:
•
By clearing the check box in the Monitored column in the MCUs pane.
•
Right-clicking the MCU icon and selecting Stop Monitoring.
The check box is cleared in the Monitored column.
19-18
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 19-RMX Manager Application
To start monitoring again, click the check box in the Monitored column in the MCUs pane, or
right-clicking the MCU icon and selecting Start Monitoring.
Modifying the MCU Properties
You can view the currently defined MCU settings, and modify them when required, for
example, change the MCU name, IP address or Secured mode.
Use this procedure to add the Username and Password to the properties of the MCU that was
automatically added to the MCU list when installing the RMX Manager. This enables
automatic login when connecting the MCU to the RMX Manager.
You can modify the MCU properties when the MCU is connected or disconnected.
To view and/or modify the MCU Properties:
1 Use one of the following methods:
a
Select the MCU to disconnect and click the MCU Properties
b
Right-click the MCU icon and then click MCU Properties.
button.
The MCU Properties dialog box opens.
2
Define/modify the required parameters. For details, see “MCU Properties” on page 12.
3
Click OK.
Disconnecting an MCU
An MCU can be disconnected from the RMX Manager, without removing it from the MCUs
list.
To disconnect an MCU:
1 Use one of the following methods:
a
Polycom, Inc.
Select the MCU to disconnect and click the Disconnect MCU
button.
19-19
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
b
Right-click the MCU icon and then click Disconnect MCU.
The MCU icon changes to disconnected and any ongoing conference running on that
MCU will not be monitored in this RMX Manager; they are removed from the
Conferences pane. This MCU can still be monitored and controlled by other users.
Removing an MCU from the MCUs Pane
An MCU can be removed from the RMX Manager. This function should be used if the MCU
hardware was disconnected and removed from the network.
To Remove an MCU from the list:
1 Use one of the following methods:
a
Select the MCU to disconnect and click the Delete
button.
b
Right-click the MCU icon and then click Remove MCU.
A confirmation message is displayed.
2
Click OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation.
The MCU icon is removed from the MCUs pane.
Changing the RMX Manager Language
You can change the language of the RMX Manager menus and dialog boxes. Only one
language can be selected at a time and the RMX Manager application must be restarted after
changing the display language.
To select a language:
1 On the RMX Manager menu, click Setup > Customize Display Settings > Multilingual
Settings.
19-20
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 19-RMX Manager Application
The Multilingual Settings dialog box opens, displaying the current language selection.
2
Click the check box of the required language. Only one language can be selected.
3
Click OK.
4
Restart the RMX Manager application to implement the language change.
Import/Export RMX Manager Configuration
The RMX Manager configuration that includes the MCU list and the multilingual selection
can be save to any workstation/PC on the network and imported to any Multi-RMX
Manager installed in the network. This enables the creation of the MCUs list once and
distributing it to all RMX Manager installations on the network.
In addition, when upgrading to a previous version, the MCU list is deleted, and can be
imported after upgrade.
The exported file is save in XML format and can be edited in any text editor that can open
XML files.
To Export the RMX Manager Configuration:
1
In the Multi-RMX Manager, click the Export RMX Manager Configuration
button
in the toolbar, or right-click anywhere in the MCUs pane and then click Export RMX
Manager Configuration.
The Export RMX Manager Configuration dialog box opens.
Polycom, Inc.
19-21
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
2
Click the Browse button to select the location of the save file, or enter the required path
in the Export Path box.
The selected file path is displayed in the Export Path box.
3
Click OK to export the RMX Manager configuration.
To Import the RMX Manager Configuration:
1
In the Multi-RMX Manager, click the Import RMX Manager Configuration
button
in the toolbar, or right-click anywhere in the MCUs pane and then click Import RMX
Manager Configuration.
The Import RMX Manager Configuration dialog box opens.
2
Click the Browse button to select the saved file, or enter the required path in the Export
Path box.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
3
Select the XML file previously saved, and click the Open button.
The selected file path is displayed in the Import Path box.
19-22
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 19-RMX Manager Application
4
Click OK to import the file.
Installing RMX Manager for Secure Communication Mode
The RMX Manager cannot be downloaded from a site, operating in Secure Communication
Mode, without a valid TLS certificate.
The following procedure describes how to obtain a TLS certificate and download the RMX
Manager from a site operating in Secure Communication Mode.
To install the RMX Manager:
1 Set the Collaboration Server to Non Secure Communication Mode
a
In the RMX Management pane, click IP Network Services.
b
In the IP Network Services list pane, double click the Management Network entry.
The Management Network Properties dialog box is displayed.
c
Click on the Security tab.
The Security tab is displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
19-23
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
d
2
Clear the Secured Communication check box.
Click the DNS tab.
MCU Host
Name
Local Domain
Name
MCU Host
Name
Local Domain
Name
19-24
Polycom, Inc.
20
RealPresence Collaboration Server
Administration and Utilities
System and Participant Alerts
The MCU alerts users to any faults or errors the MCU encountered during operation. Two
indication bars labeled System Alerts and Participant Alerts signal users of system errors by
blinking red in the event of an alert.
System Alerts
indication bar
Participant Alerts
indication bar
The System Alerts indication bar blinks red prompting the user to view the active alarms.
Once viewed, the System Alerts indication bar becomes statically red until the errors have
been resolved in the MCU.
The Participants Alerts indication bar blinks red indicating participant connection difficulties
in conferences. Once viewed, the Participant Alerts indication bar becomes statically red until
the errors have been resolved in the MCU.
Polycom, Inc.
20-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
System Alerts
System Alerts are activated when the system encounters errors such as a general or card
error. The system errors are recorded by the Collaboration Server and can be generated into
a report that can be saved in *.txt format.
To view the System Alerts list:
1 Click the red blinking System Alerts indication bar.
The Active Alarms pane opens. This screen indicates what events have not been
resolved.
The following columns appear in the Active Alarms pane:
Table 20-1 Active Alarms Pane Columns
Field
Description
ID
An identifying number assigned to the system alert.
Time
Lists the local date and time that the error occurred. This column also
includes the icon indicating the error level (as listed in the level
column).
GMT Time
Lists the date and time according to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
that the error occurred.
Category
Lists the type of error. The following categories may be listed:
• File – indicates a problem in one of the files stored on the MCU’s
hard disk.
Category (cont.)
Level
•
•
•
•
Card – indicates problems with a card.
•
•
Startup – indicates errors that occurred during system startup.
Exception – indicates software errors.
General – indicates a general error.
Assert – indicates internal software errors that are reported by
the software program.
Unit – indicates problems with a unit.
Indicates the severity of the problem, or the type of event. There are
three fault level indicators:
– Major Error
– System Message
– Startup Event
20-2
Code
Indicates the problem, as indicated by the error category.
Process Name
Lists the type of functional process involved.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Table 20-1 Active Alarms Pane Columns (Continued)
Field
Description
Description
When applicable, displays a more detailed explanation of the cause
of the problem.
For more information about the Active Alarms, see Appendix B: "Alarms and Faults” on
page B-1.
2
Click one of the following two buttons to view its report in the System Alerts pane:
Active Alarms (default) – this is the default reports list that is displayed when
clicking the System Alerts indication bar. It displays the current system errors
and is a quick indicator of the MCU status.
Faults Full List - A list of all system faults.
Note: Viewed when logged in as a special support user.
Faults List – a list of faults that occurred previously (whether they were solved
or not) for support or debugging purposes.
3
To save the Active Alarms, Faults Full List or Faults report:
— to a text file, click the Save to Text
— to an XML file, click the Save to XML
button
button
The Save to XML button is only available when logged in as a special support user.
The Save dialog window opens.
4
Select a destination folder and enter the file name.
5
Click Save.
Participant Alerts
Participant Alerts enables users, participants and conferences to be prompted and currently
connected. This includes all participants that are disconnected, idle, on standby or waiting for
dial-in. Alerts are intended for users or administrators to quickly see all participants that need
their attention.
To view the Participants Alerts list:
1 Click the red blinking Participants Alerts indication bar.
The Participant Alerts pane opens.
The Participant Alerts pane displays similar properties to that of the Participant List pane. For more
information, see the RMX 2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, "Participant Level Monitoring” on
page 3-39.
Polycom, Inc.
20-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
2
To resolve participant issues that created the Participant Alerts, the administrator can
either Connect
, Disconnect
or Delete
a participant.
RMX Time
To ensure accurate conference scheduling, the MCU has an internal clock that can function
in standalone mode, or in synchronization with up to three Network Time Protocol (NTP)
servers.
Guidelines
•
NTP Version 4 is the only supported protocol.
•
If applicable, daylight saving adjustments must be implemented by the administrator
whether the MCU is in standalone mode or synchronized with NTP Servers.
Altering the clock
The MCU’s date and time can be set manually or enabled to synchronize with external NTP
servers.
To Alter the MCU Time:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > RMX Time to open the RMX Time
dialog box.
2
View or modify the following fields:
Table 20-2 RMX Time – Fields Properties
20-4
Field
Description
GMT Date
The date at Greenwich, UK.
Local Time
The MCU’s local time settings, are calculated from the GMT Time and
the GMT Offset.
GMT Time
The MCU’s current GMT Time settings.
Select the Up or Down arrows to alter the GMT Time on the MCU.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Table 20-2 RMX Time – Fields Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
GMT Offset
The time zone difference between Greenwich and the MCU’s
physical location in hours and minutes.
Select the Up or Down arrows to alter the GMT Offset time on the
MCU. To enter a negative offset either type a minus in the hour box or
use the down arrow and decrease the offset below zero.
Retrieve Client Time
Click this button to automatically update the MCU’s GMT Date, Time
and Offset to match that of the workstation.
Use NTP Server
Select this check box to synchronize the time with up to three NTP
servers. When selected, the manual GMT Date and GMT Time
setting options are disabled. The GMT Offset fields are still active.
To implement this mode an external connection to an NTP server
must be enabled.
Enter the IP addresses of the required NTP servers in order of
precedence.
The Status field indicates whether registration with the NTP Server
failed or succeeded.
Adjust Reservations
Time
(Button)
Use this button to adjust the start time of all the reservations in one
operation. For more information see "Adjusting the Start Times of all
Reservations” on page 9-15
After resetting the MCU a delay may occur when synchronizing with the external NTP server.
Polycom, Inc.
20-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Resource Management
Resource Capacity
The following table describes the resource capacity allocations for the RealPresence
Collaboration Server 800s per Resource type.
Table 20-4
System Resource Capacity Per Resource Type
Resource Type
Number of Resources
VoIP Ports
120
CIF Ports
40
SD Ports (4CIF)
40
HD 720p30 Ports
20
VGA RTV Ports
20
SVC Only Ports
60
One SVC resource is equivalent to one AVC CIF resource.
In a mixed CP and SVC conference, video resources are used according to the amount of
both AVC and SVC participants in the conference. The ratio of resources in a mixed
conference is one AVC HD (720p30) video resource to three SVC video resources, meaning
for each AVC HD video resource, three SVC video resources can be allocated.
For example, in a mixed AVC/SVC conference, 10 HD AVC ports and 30 SVC ports can be
used, maintaining ratio of one HD port to three SVC ports.
The following diagram illustrates the amount of AVC to SVC port resources that are used in
a mixed AVC/SVC conference:
20-6
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Resource Usage
SVC Conferencing
During a SVC conference, each SVC-endpoint uses one video port. One SVC resource is
equivalent to one CP CIF resource. When sharing content an additional video resource is
used.
CP Conferencing - Continuous Presence
Video resources usage varies according to the video resolution used by the endpoints. The
higher the video resolution (quality), the greater the amount of video resources consumed
by the MCU. Table 20-6 shows the number of video resources used for each resolution.
Table 20-5 CP Video Resource Usage vs. Resolution
Resolution/fps
Video Resources Used
CIF/30
QCIF/30
1
SIF/30
WCIF/25
WSIF/30
432X336/30
1
SD/15
WSD/15
4CIF/15
1
WSD/30
4CIF/30
4SIF/30
WVGA/30
WVGA/25
2
480X352/30
SD/30
WSD/60
HD720p/30
AVC Conferencing - Voice
One CIF video resource equals 3 voice resources. All resources are taken from the same pool
of video resources.
Polycom, Inc.
20-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Forcing Video Resource Allocation to CIF Resolution
You can set the MCU to allocate one CIF video resource to an endpoint, regardless of the
resolution determined by the Conference Profile parameters. This forcing saves resources
and enables more endpoints to connect to conferences.
The forcing is done by modifying the system configuration and it applies to all conferences
running on the MCU.
You can specify the endpoint types for which resource allocation can be forced to CIF
resource, enabling other types of endpoints to use higher resolutions in the same conference.
For example, you can force the system to allocate one CIF video resource to CMAD and VSX
endpoints while HDX endpoints can connect using SD or HD video resources.
Once the endpoint connects to the conference, its type is identified by the Collaboration
Server and, if applicable, the Collaboration Server will connect it using one CIF resource,
even if a higher resolution can be used.
To force CIF resource:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
In the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab, click the New Flag button.
The New Flag dialog box is displayed.
3
In the New Flag field enter the flag name: FORCE_CIF_PORT_ALLOCATION
4
In the Value field enter the product type to which the CIF resource should be allocated.
Possible values are:
— CMA Desktop for CMA desktop client
— VSX nnnn where nnnn represents the model number for example, VSX 8000.
You can define several endpoint types, listing them one after the other separated by
semicolon (;).
For example, CMA Desktop;VSX 8000.
5
Click OK.
The new flag is added to the flags list.
Reset the MCU for changes to take effect. For more details, see the RealPresence Collaboration
Server 800s Administrator’s Guide, "Resetting the Collaboration Server” on page 20-56.
To cancel the forcing of CIF resource:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
20-8
2
In the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab, double-click or select the flag
FORCE_CIF_PORT_ALLOCATION and click the Edit Flag button.
3
In the New Value field, clear the value entries.
4
Click OK.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Reset the MCU for changes to take effect. For more details, see the RealPresence Collaboration
Server 800s Administrator’s Guide, "Resetting the Collaboration Server” on page 20-56
Resource Report
When viewing the Collaboration Server resource report, the resource allocations are
described in AVC SD/CIF units. A port ratio of 1 AVC HD port will equal 2 AVC SD ports,
which equals 3 SVC ports. This signifies that when the Collaboration Server is reporting the
available capacity, it will appropriately round up the remaining capacity to the nearest
whole value of available ports.
The Resource Report displays the real time resource usage. The Resource Report includes a
graphic representation of the resource usage. One resource report is available for all
resource usage including SVC-based endpoints.
Displaying the Resource Report
1
In the main toolbar, click Administration > Resource Report.
The Resource Report dialog box is displayed, showing the resource usage according to
the Resource Capacity Mode.
Video Resources
Free (%)
Video Resources
Occupied (%)
Actual Number of Occupied and Free Audio and Video Resources
Polycom, Inc.
20-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Resource usage is displayed for video resources only. They are displayed as
percentages of the total resources.
The actual number of occupied or free resources can also be displayed by moving the
cursor over the columns of the bar graph. Moving the cursor over the Video bar displays
the following:
8 Occupied Video
Resources
64 Free Video
Resources
For each resource type, the Resource Report includes the following columns:
Table 20-7 Resource Report Fields Parameters
Column
Description
Type
This is always Video. This applies to both AVC and SVC-based
endpoints (and resources).
Total
The Total column displays the total number of resources of that type
as configured in the system (Occupied and Free). This number
reflects the current audio/video port configuration (for CP and SVCbased conferencing). Any changes to the resource allocation will
affect the resource usage displayed in the Resource Report.
Occupied
The number of MCU resources that are used by connected CP and
SVC-based participants or reserved for defined participants.
Free
The number of MCU resources available for connecting CP and
SVC-based endpoints.
MCU Resource Management by CMA and DMA
When both CMA and DMA are part of the solution, following a request by the CMA and
DMA, the MCU will send updates on resource usage to both CMA and DMA, with each
application updating its own resource usage for the MCU. This provides better management
of the Collaboration Server resources by CMA and DMA.
Guidelines
20-10
•
Following requests sent by CMA and DMA, the Collaboration Server will send the
number of occupied resources for a conference or total for the MCU.
•
Occupied resources are resources that are connected to ongoing conferences.
Disconnected endpoints in an ongoing conference are not counted as occupied
resources.
•
The Collaboration Server is unaware of the resource usage split between the CMA and
DMA.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Port Usage Threshold
The Collaboration Server can be set to alert the administrator to potential port capacity
shortages. A capacity usage threshold can be set as a percentage of the total number of
licensed ports in the system.
When the threshold is exceeded, a System Alert is generated.
The default port capacity usage threshold is 80%.
The administrator can monitor the MCU’s port capacity usage via the Port Gauge in the
Status Bar of the Collaboration Server Web Client.
Setting the Port Usage Threshold
To Set the Port Usage Threshold:
1 In the Setup menu, click Port Gauge to open the Port Gauge dialog box.
Usage Threshold
Status Bar
Enter the value for the percentage capacity usage threshold.
The high Port Usage threshold represents a percentage of the total number of video
available. It is set to indicate when resource usage is approaching its maximum,
resulting in no free resources to run additional conferences. When port usage reaches or
exceeds the threshold, the red area of the gauge flashes. The default port usage
threshold is 80%.
2
Click OK.
SIP Dial-in Busy Notification
When the system flag SEND_SIP_BUSY_UPON_RESOURCE_THRESHOLD is set to YES
(NO is the default), it enables the MCU to send a busy notification to a SIP audio endpoint
or a SIP device when dialing in to the MCU whose audio resource usage exceeded the Port
Usage threshold.
The Collaboration Server will send a SIP busy response to SIP audio endpoints when:
•
Polycom, Inc.
The system flag SEND_SIP_BUSY_UPON_RESOURCE_THRESHOLD is set to YES
(NO is the default)
20-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
The port usage threshold for Audio resources is exceeded. The threshold is defined in
the Setup > Port Gauge dialog box.
When the flag is set to YES, the system will allow SIP audio endpoints to connect to the
MCU until the Port Usage threshold is reached. Once this threshold is exceeded, the SIP
audio endpoints will not be able to connect, ensuring that the remaining system resources
can be used by all other connections, including SIP video and H.323 cascaded links. When
the call is rejected by the MCU because of lack of resources, the appropriate indication will
be sent by the MCU to the SIP audio endpoint.
For example, if the Port Gauge threshold is set to 80%, when 80% of the Audio resources are
used, the system will not allow additional SIP audio endpoints to connect and will send a
busy notification to the endpoint.
This does not affect the video resources usage.
Port Usage Gauge
The Port Usage Gauge is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Collaboration Server
Web Client screen.
Status Bar
20-12
Port Usage Gauge
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
The Port Usage gauge indicates:
•
The total number of Video ports in the system
•
The number of Video ports in use.
•
The High Port Usage threshold.
Total Allocated Video Ports In System
Video Ports In Use
Video Port Usage Indicator
Video Port Usage Threshold
System Information
System Information includes License Information and general system information.
To view the System Information properties box:
>> On the Collaboration Server menu, click Administration > System Information.
The System Information properties box is displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
20-13
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The System Information properties box displays the following information:
Table 20-8 System Information
20-14
Field
Description
Total Number of CP
Resources
Displays the number of video participants licensed for the system.
Each CP resource represents one CIF video resource. Each SVC
resource is equivalent to one CIF video resource.
Total Number of Event
Mode Resources
Displays the number of video/voice participants licensed for a
system in Event Mode Licensing. It also determines the
conference type that is available on the system.
0 - indicates that this Licensing mode is disabled for this system.
RealPresence
Collaboration Server
800s Version
Displays the System Software Version of the RealPresence
Collaboration Server.
Encryption
Indicates whether Encryption is included in the MCU license.
Encryption is not available in all countries.
Range: True / False
Serial Number
Displays the Serial Number of the Collaboration Server unit.
Multiple Services
A Multiple Services license is installed.
HD
Indicates if the MCU is licensed to connect endpoints at HD
resolutions in Continuous Presence conferences.
SVC
Indicates if the MCU is licensed to run SVC-based conferences.
Polycom Partners
Indicates that the System Software contains features for the
support of specific Polycom Partner environments.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
SNMP enables managing and monitoring of the MCU status by external managing systems,
such as HP OpenView or through web applications.
The Collaboration Server’s implementation of SNMPv3 is FIPS 140 compliant.
MIBs (Management Information Base)
MIBs are a collection of definitions, which define the properties of the managed object
within the device to be managed. Every managed device keeps a database of values for each
of the definitions written in the MIB.
The SNMP systems poll the MCU according to the MIB definitions.
Traps
The MCU is able to send Traps to different managers. Traps are messages that are sent by
the MCU to the SNMP Manager when an event such as MCU Reset occurs.
Guidelines
•
Version 1, Version 2 and Version 3 traps are supported.
•
When SNMPv3 is selected only SNMPv3 Queries and Traps receive responses.
•
A mixture of Version 1, Version 2 and Version 3 traps is not permitted.
MIB Files
The H.341 standard defines the MIBs that H.320 and H.323 MCUs must comply with. In
addition, other MIBs should also be supported, such as MIB-II and the ENTITY MIB, which
are common to all network entities.
The MIBs are contained in files in the SNMP MIBS sub-directory of the Collaboration Server
root directory. The files should be loaded to the SNMP external system and compiled within
that application. Only then can the SNMP external application perform the required
monitoring tasks.
The MULTI-MEDIA_MIB_TC must be compiled before compiling the other MIBs.
Private MIBs
•
RMX-MIB (RMX-MIB.MIB)
— Contains the statuses of the Collaboration Server: Startup, Normal and Major.
— Contains all the Alarms of the Collaboration Server that are sent to the SNMP
Manager.
Polycom, Inc.
20-15
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Support for MIB-II Sections
The following table details the MIB-II sections that are supported:
Table 20-9 Supported MIB-II Sections
Section
Object Identifier
system
mib-2 1
interfaces
mib-2 2
ip
mib-2 4
The Alarm-MIB
MIB used to send alarms. When a trap is sent, the Alarm-MIB is used to send it.
H.341-MIB (H.341 – H.323)
•
Gives the address of the gatekeeper.
•
Supports H.341-MIB of SNMP events of H.323.
Standard MIBs
This section describes the MIBs that are included with the Collaboration Server. These MIBs
define the various parameters that can be monitored, and their acceptable values.
20-16
MIB Name
Description
MULTI-MEDIA-MIB-TC
(MULTIMTC.MIB)
Defines a set of textual conventions used within the set of Multi Media
MIB modules.
H.320ENTITY-MIB
(H320-ENT.MIB)
This is a collection of common objects, which can be used in an H.320
terminal, an H.320 MCU and an H.320/H.323 gateway. These objects
are arranged in three groups: Capability, Call Status, and H.221
Statistics.
H.320MCU-MIB (H320MCU.MIB)
Used to identify managed objects for an H.320 MCU. It consists of four
groups: System, Conference, Terminal, and Controls. The Conference
group consists of the active conferences. The Terminal group is used to
describe terminals in active MCU conferences. The Controls group
enables remote management of the MCU.
H323MC-MIB (H323MC.MIB)
Used to identify objects defined for an H.323 Multipoint Controller. It
consists of six groups: System, Configuration, Conference, Statistics,
Controls and Notifications. The Conference group is used to identify the
active conferences in the MCU. The Notifications group allows an MCU,
if enabled, to inform a remote management client of its operational
status.
Note: The Collaboration Server supports only one field in H.341H323MC MIB. The Collaboration Server reports the Gatekeeper
address using H.341-H323MC MIB – 323McConfigGatekeeperAddress
(0.0.8.341.1.1.4.2.1.1.4) in response to a query from a manager.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
MIB Name
Description
MP-MIB (H323-MP.MIB)
Used to identify objects defined for an H.323 Multipoint Processor, and
consists of two groups: Configuration and Conference. The
Configuration group is used to identify audio/video mix configuration
counts. The Conference group describes the audio and video multiprocessing operation.
MIB-II/RFC1213-MIB
(RFC1213.MIB)
Holds basic network information and statistics about the following
protocols: TCP, UDP, IP, ICMP and SNMP. In addition, it holds a table of
interfaces that the Agent has. MIB-II also contains basic identification
information for the system, such as, Product Name, Description,
Location and Contact Person.
ENTITY-MIB
(ENTITY.MIB)
Describes the unit physically: Number of slots, type of board in each
slot, and number of ports in each slot.
Unified MIB
The Collaboration Server uses the Polycom Unified MIB, in addition to the RMX specific
MIB. The Polycom Unified MIB is an MIB that is used by many Polycom products. The
following table describes the information provided by the Collaboration Server in the
Unified MIB.
Table 21
Polycom, Inc.
Unified MIB SNMP Fields
Name
Type
Description
Debug
Boolean
Indicates whether the unit is in a debugging state.
IncomingCallsReqrGK
Boolean
Indicates whether a gatekeeper is required to
receive incoming H.323 calls.
OutgoingCallsReqrGK
Boolean
Indicates whether a gatekeeper is required to make
outgoing H.323 calls.
HDBitrateThrshld
Integer
The minimum bit rate required by endpoints in order
to connect to an HD conference.
MaxCPRstln
Integer
Maximum resolution of a CP conference.
MaxCPRstlnCfg
Integer
Configured resolution for a CP conference.
EndpointDispayName
String
The name of the MCU that is displayed on the
screen of endpoints that are connecting to the
conference.
PALNTSC
NTSC/PAL/
AUTO
The video encoding of the RMX.
SeparateMgmtNet
Boolean
Indicates whether management network separation
is enabled.
NumPorts
Integer
Total number of ports.
NumVideoPorts
Integer
Number of ports configured for video.
20-17
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
20-18
Table 21
Unified MIB SNMP Fields (Continued)
Name
Type
Description
ServiceH323
Integer
Indicates the status of H.323 capabilities:
1 - The service is enabled and operational.
2 - The service is enabled but is not operational.
3 - The service is disabled.
ServiceSIP
Integer
Indicates the status of SIP capabilities:
1 - The service is enabled and operational.
2 - The service is enabled but is not operational.
3 - The service is disabled.
ServiceISDN
Integer
Indicates the status of SIP capabilities:
1 - The service is enabled and operational.
2 - The service is enabled but is not operational.
3 - The service is disabled.
RsrcAllocMode
Fixed/
Flexible
The resource allocation method which determines
how the system resources are allocated to the
connecting endpoints.
McuSystemStatus
Integer
System State.
FanStatus
Boolean
Status of the hardware fan.
PowerSupplyStatus
Boolean
Status of the power supply.
IntegratedBoardsStatus
Boolean
Status of the integrated boards.
UltraSecureMode
Boolean
Indicates whether the RMX is operating in Ultra
Secure Mode.
ChassisTemp
Integer
The temperature of the chasis.
NumPortsUsed
Integer
Number of ports currently in use.
NewCallsPerMinute
Integer
New calls in the last minute.
ScsfNewCallsPerMinute
Integer
Successful new calls in the last minute.
FldNewCallsPerMinute
Integer
Failed new calls in the last minute.
PctScsflNewCalls
Integer
Percentage of new calls in the last minute which
were successful.
CallsEndedScsflPerMin
Integer
Number of calls in the last minute which ended with
a success code.
CallsEndedFailedPerMin
Integer
Number of calls in the last minute which ended with
a failure code.
CallsEndedScsfl
Integer
Number of calls in the last minute which ended with
a success code.
CallsEndedFailed
Integer
Number of calls in the last minute which ended with
a failure code.
NumActvCnfrncs
Integer
Number of active conferences.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Traps
Three types of traps are sent as follows:
1
ColdStart trap. This is a standard trap which is sent when the MCU is reset.
coldStart notification received from: 172.22.189.154 at 5/20/
2007 7:03:12 PM
Time stamp: 0 days 00h:00m:00s.00th
Agent address: 172.22.189.154 Port: 32774 Transport: IP/UDP
Protocol: SNMPv2c Notification
Manager address: 172.22.172.34 Port: 162 Transport: IP/UDP
Community: public
Enterprise: enterprises.8072.3.2.10
Bindings (3)
Binding #1: sysUpTime.0 *** (timeticks) 0 days
00h:00m:00s.00th
Binding #2: snmpTrapOID.0 *** (oid) coldStart
Figure 1
2
An Example of a ColdStart Trap
Authentication failure trap. This is a standard trap which is sent when an unauthorized
community tries to enter.
authentication Failure notification received from:
172.22.189.154 at 5/20/2007 7:33:38 PM
Time stamp: 0 days 00h:30m:27s.64th
Agent address: 172.22.189.154 Port: 32777 Transport: IP/UDP
Protocol: SNMPv2c Notification
Manager address: 172.22.172.34 Port: 162 Transport: IP/UDP
Community: public
Enterprise: enterprises.8072.3.2.10
Bindings (3)
Binding #1: sysUpTime.0 *** (timeticks) 0 days
00h:30m:27s.64th
Binding #2: snmpTrapOID.0 *** (oid) authenticationFailure
Figure 2
Polycom, Inc.
An Example of an Authentication Failure Trap
20-19
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
3
Alarm Fault trap. The third trap type is a family of traps defined in the POLYCOMRMX-MIB file, these traps are associated with the Collaboration Server active alarm and
clearance (proprietary SNMP trap).
rmxFailedConfigUserListInLinuxAlarmFault notification received
from: 172.22.189.154 at 5/20/2007 7:04:22 PM
Time stamp: 0 days 00h:01m:11s.71th
Agent address: 172.22.189.154 Port: 32777 Transport: IP/UDP
Protocol: SNMPv2c Notification
Manager address: 172.22.172.34 Port: 162 Transport: IP/UDP
Community: public
Bindings (6)
Binding #1: sysUpTime.0 *** (timeticks) 0 days
00h:01m:11s.71th
Binding #2: snmpTrapOID.0 *** (oid)
rmxFailedConfigUserListInLinuxAlarmFault
Binding #3: rmxAlarmDescription *** (octets) Insufficient
resources
Binding #4: rmxActiveAlarmDateAndTime *** (octets) 2007-619,16:7:15.0,0:0
Binding #5: rmxActiveAlarmIndex *** (gauge32) 2
Binding #6: rmxActiveAlarmListName *** (octets) Active
Alarm Table
* Binding #7: rmxActiveAlarmRmxStatus *** (rmxStatus) major
Figure 3
An Example of an Alarm Fault Trap
Each trap is sent with a time stamp, the agent address, and the manager address.
Status Trap
The MCU sends status traps for the status MAJOR - a trap is sent when the card/MCU
status is MAJOR.
All traps are considered “MAJOR”.
Defining the SNMP Parameters in the Collaboration Server
The SNMP option is enabled via the Collaboration Server Web Client application.
The addresses of the Managers monitoring the MCU and other security information are
defined in the Collaboration Server Web Client application and are saved on the MCU’s hard
disk. Only users defined as Administrator can define or modify the SNMP security
parameters in the Collaboration Server Web Client application.
To enable SNMP option:
1 In the Collaboration Server Web Client menu bar, click Setup > SNMP.
20-20
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
The Collaboration Server-SNMP Properties - Agent dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box is used to define the basic information for this MCU that will be used by
the SNMP system to identify it.
2
In the Agent dialog box, click the SNMP Enabled check box.
3
Click the Retrieve MIB Files button to obtain a file that lists the MIBs that define the
properties of the object being managed.
The Retrieve MIB Files dialog box is displayed.
4
Click the Browse button and navigate to the desired directory to save the MIB files.
5
Click OK.
The path of the selected directory is displayed in the Retrieve MIB Files dialog box.
6
Click the Save button.
The MIB files are saved to the selected directory.
7
Click Close to exit the Retrieve MIB Files dialog box.
8
In the Agent dialog box, define the parameters that allow the SNMP Management
System and its user to easily identify the MCU.
Table 20-1 Collaboration Server-SNMP Properties - Agent Options
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Contact person for this
MCU
Type the name of the person to be contacted in the event of problems
with the MCU.
MCU Location
Type the location of the MCU (address or any description).
MCU System Name
Type the MCU’s system name.
20-21
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
9
Click the Traps tab.
The Collaboration Server-SNMP Properties – Traps dialog box opens.
Version 3
Versions 1 & 2
Traps are messages sent by the MCU to the SNMP Managers when events such as MCU
Startup or Shutdown occur. Traps may be sent to several SNMP Managers whose IP
addresses are specified in the Trap Destinations box.
10 Define the following parameters:
Table 20-2 SNMPv3 - Traps
Field
SNMP Trap Version
20-22
Description
Specifies the version, either Version 1 2 or 3 of the traps being sent to
the IP Host. Polycom software supports the standard SNMP version 1
and 2 traps, which are taken from RFC 1215, convention for defining
traps for use with SNMP.
Note: The SNMP Trap Version parameters must be defined
identically in the external SNMP application.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Table 20-2 SNMPv3 - Traps (Continued)
Field
Trap Destination
Description
This box lists the currently defined IP addresses of the Manager
terminals to which the message (trap) is sent.
IP
Enter the IP address of the SNMP
trap recipient.
All
Versions
Community
Name
Enter the Community Name of the
manager terminal used to monitor
the MCU activity
Version 1
and
Version 2
User Name
Enter the name of the user who is to
have access to the trap.
Authentication
Protocol
Enter the authentication protocol:
MD5 or SHA.
Privacy
Protocol
Enter the privacy protocol: DES or
AES.
Version 3
11 Click the Add button to add a new Manager terminal.
The New Trap Destination dialog box opens.
12 Type the IP Address and the Community name of the manager terminal used to
monitor the MCU activity, and then click OK.
The Community name is a string of characters that will be added to the message that is
sent to the external Manager terminals. This string is used to identify the message
source by the external Manager terminal.
The new IP Address and Community name is added to the Trap Destinations box.
a
To delete the IP Address of a Manager terminal, select the address that you wish to
delete, and then click the Remove button.
The IP address in the Trap Destinations box is removed.
13 Click the Security tab.
Polycom, Inc.
20-23
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Collaboration Server-SNMP Properties – Security dialog box opens.
Version 3
Versions 1 & 2
This dialog box is used to define whether the query sent to the MCU is sent from an
authorized source. When the “Accept SNMP packets from all Hosts” is disabled, a valid
query must contain the appropriate community string and must be sent from one of the
Manager terminals whose IP address is listed in this dialog box.
20-24
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
14 Define the following parameters:
Table 20-3 SNMP - Security
Field
Polycom, Inc.
Description
Send Authentication
Trap
Select this check box to send a message to the SNMP
Manager when an unauthorized query is sent to the MCU.
When cleared, no indication will be sent to the SNMP
Manager.
Accept Host
Community Name
Enter the string added to queries that are sent from the SNMP
Manager to indicate that they were sent from an authorized
source.
Note: Queries sent with different strings will be regarded as a
violation of security, and, if the Send Authentication Trap
check box is selected, an appropriate message will be sent to
the SNMP Manager.
Accept SNMP
Packets from all Host
Select this option if a query sent from any Manager terminal is
valid. When selected, the Accept SNMP Packets from These
Hosts option is disabled.
Accept SNMP
Packets from the
following Hosts
Lists specific Manager terminals whose queries will be
considered as valid. This option is enabled when the Accept
SNMP Packets from any Host option is cleared.
User Name
Enter a User Name of up to 48 characters
Default: Empty
Security Level
Select a Security Level from the drop-down menu.
Range: No Auth, No Priv; Auth, No Priv; Auth, Priv
Default: Auth, Priv
Authentication
Protocol
Select the authentication
protocol
Range: MD5, SHA
Default: MD5
Authentication
Password
Enter an Authentication
Password.
Range: 8 - 48 characters
Default: Empty
Privacy Protocol
Select a Privacy Protocol.
Range: DES, AES
Default: DES
Privacy Password
Enter a Privacy Password.
Range: 8 - 48 characters
Default: Empty
Engine ID
Enter an Engine ID to be used
for both the Agent and the Trap.
Default: Empty
Versions
1&2
These fields are enabled if
Authentication is selected
in the Security Level field.
Version3
These fields are enabled if
Privacy is selected in the
Security Level field.
20-25
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
15 To specifically define one or more valid terminals, ensure that the Accept SNMP Packets
from any Host option is cleared and then click the Add button.
The Accepted Host IP Address dialog box opens.
16 Enter the IP Address of the Manager terminal from which valid queries may be sent to
the MCU, and then click OK.
Click the Add button to define additional IP Addresses.
The IP Address or Addresses are displayed in the Accept SNMP Packets from These Hosts
box.
Queries sent from terminals not listed in the Accept SNMP Packets from These Hosts box are
regarded as a violation of the MCU security, and if the Send Authentication Trap check box is
selected, an appropriate message will be sent to all the terminals listed in the SNMP Properties –
Traps dialog box.
17
In the Collaboration Server - SNMP Properties - Security dialog box, click OK.
Hot Backup
Hot Backup implements a high availability and rapid recovery solution.
Two Collaboration Server’s are configured in a Master/Slave relationship: the Master MCU is
active while the Slave acts as a passive, fully redundant Hot Backup of the Master MCU.
All conferencing activities and configuration changes that do not require a System Reset are
mirrored on the Slave MCU five seconds after they occur on the Master MCU.
In the event of failure of the Master MCU, the Slave MCU transparently becomes active and
assumes the activities and functions with the backed up settings of the failed Master MCU.
In CP-based conferencing, both dial-in and dial-out participants are automatically dialed out
and reconnected to their conferences. However, the Hot Backup solution is optimized for
dial-out participants as all the dial-out numbers are defined in the system and are available
for redialing.
In SVC-based conferencing, since dial-out is unavailable, SVC-enabled endpoints will have
to manually reconnect to the conference.
The following entities are automatically backed up and updated on the Slave MCU:
20-26
•
Ongoing Conferences
•
— Layout
— Video Force
— Participant Status (Muted, Blocked, Suspended)
Reservations
•
Meeting Rooms
•
Entry Queues
•
SIP Factories
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
•
IVR services (excluding .wav files)
•
Recording Link
•
Profiles
•
IP Network Settings:
—
—
—
—
—
H.323 settings
SIP settings
DNS settings
Fix Ports (TCP, UDP) settings
QoS settings
Guidelines
•
Polycom, Inc.
Both Master and Slave MCUs must have the same software version installed.
•
The Users list and Passwords must be the same on both the Master and Slave MCUs.
•
There must be connectivity between the Master and Slave MCUs, either on the same
network or on different networks connected through routers.
•
In the event of failure of the Master MCU the Slave MCU assumes the role of the Master
MCU. The Master/Slave relationship is reversed: the Slave, now active, remains the
Master and the previous Master MCU, when restarted, assumes the role of Slave MCU.
•
No changes to the Slave MCU are permitted while it is functioning as the Hot Backup.
Therefore no ongoing conferences or reservations can be added manually to the Slave
MCU.
•
If Hot Backup is disabled, all ongoing conferences and Reservations backed up on the
Slave MCU are automatically deleted.
•
In Hot Backup configuration, the SIP and H.323 Authentication configuration of the User
Name and Password in the IP Network Service Properties - Security tab of the Master
Collaboration Server are not backed up in the Slave Collaboration Server.
•
Master and Slave initial roles can be reversed only after all ongoing conferences and
Reservations are deleted.
•
Changes to the Master MCU that require a System Reset can only be made after Hot
Backup is disabled.
20-27
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Enabling Hot Backup
To enable Hot Backup:
1
On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > Hot Backup.
The Collaboration Server Hot Backup dialog box is displayed.
2
Complete or modify the following fields:
Table 20-4 Hot Backup
Field
Description
Hot Backup Enabled
Select this check box to enable Hot Backup.
MCU Role:
This setting determines the role of the MCU in the Hot Backup
configuration.
Select either Master MCU or Slave MCU from the drop-down menu.
Paired MCU IP
Address
Enter the Control Unit IP Address of the:
• Slave MCU (if this MCU is the Master)
•
Synchronization
Status
3
20-28
Master MCU (if this MCU is the Slave)
The status of the synchronization between the Master and Slave
MCUs in the Hot Backup configuration is indicated as:
• OK - Hot Backup is functioning normally, and the Master and
Slave MCUs are synchronized.
•
Attempting - Hot Backup is attempting to synchronize the Master
and Slave MCUs.
•
Fail - A failure occurred while trying to synchronize the paired
MCUs.
•
None - Hot Backup has not been enabled.
Click OK.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Using Hot Backup Triggers
Hot Backup is initiated by the slave MCU on detection of no response from the master MCU
on a “Keep Alive” operation. The Hot Backup triggers initiates the Hot Backup swap from
Master to Slave when the selected conditions on the Master MCU occur.
•
Hot Backup triggers should be configured on both the Master and Slave MCUs.
•
Hot Backup triggers are not synchronized between the Master and Slave MCUs.
Configuring the Hot Backup Triggers
The Hot Backup triggers are configured in the Hot Backup dialog box for the Master MCU
when the Hot Backup feature is enabled.
To add the Hot Backup triggers to the Hot Backup configuration:
1 In the Hot Backup dialog box, expand the Trigger Hot Backup Triggers.
Polycom, Inc.
20-29
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
A dialog box opens with a list of event triggers displayed.
2
Select the appropriate Hot Backup Triggers check box:
Table 20-5 Hot Backup Trigger
3
Hot Backup Trigger
Description
Lost connection with
management port
Initiates the Hot Backup switch from the Master to the
Slave MCU when the connection to the management port
is lost on the Master MCU. This trigger is always set.
Alternatively, click the Trigger Failover Manually button when you want to trigger the
Hot Backup manually and activate the Slave MCU.
A confirmation message is displayed.
4
Click Yes to continue the Hot Backup process or click No to cancel the Hot Backup
process.
5
Click OK.
Modifications to the Master MCU Requiring System Reset
Modifications to the configuration of the Master MCU that require a System Reset cannot be
performed while Hot Backup is enabled.
To modify the Master MCU configuration:
1 Disable the Hot Backup on the Master and Slave MCUs.
20-30
2
Modify the Master MCUs configuration.
3
Reset the Master MCU.
4
When the reset is complete, enable Hot Backup on the Master and Slave MCUs.
5
If required, reset the Slave MCU.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Audible Alarms
In addition to the visual cues used to detect events occurring on the Collaboration Server, an
audible alarm can be activated and played when participants request Operator Assistance.
Using Audible Alarms
The Audible Alarm functionality for Operator Assistance requests is enabled for each MCU
in either the Collaboration Server Web Client or Collaboration Server Manager.
The Audible Alarm played when Operator Assistance is requested is enabled and selected
in the Setup > Audible Alarm > User Customization. When the Audible Alarm is activated,
the *.wav file selected in the User Customization is played, and it is repeated according to the
number of repetitions defined in the User Customization.
If more than one Collaboration Server is monitored in the Collaboration Server Manager, the
Audible Alarm must be enabled separately for each Collaboration Server installed in the
site/configuration. A different *.wav file can be selected for each MCU.
When multiple Audible Alarms are activated in different conferences or by multiple MCUs,
the Audible Alarms are synchronized and played one after the other. It is important to note
that when Stop Repeating Alarm is selected from the toolbar from the Collaboration Server Web
Client or Collaboration Server Manager, all activated Audible Alarms are immediately halted.
Audible Alarm Permissions
An operator/administrator can configure the Request Operator Assistance audible alarm,
however Users with different authorization level have different configuration capabilities as
shown in Table 20-6.
Table 20-6 Audible Alarm Permissions
Option
Operator
User Customization
Download Audible Alarm File
Stop Repeating Alarms
Administrator






Stop Repeating Message
The Collaboration Server User can stop playing the audible alarm at any time. If more than
one audible alarm has been activated, all activated alarms are immediately stopped.
If after stopping the Audible Alarms a new Operator Assistance request event occurs, the
audible alarm is re-activated.
To stop the Audible Alarm on the Collaboration Server Client or Collaboration Server
Manager:
>> On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > Audible Alarms >Stop Repeating
Alarm.
When selected all audible alarms are immediately stopped.
Polycom, Inc.
20-31
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Configuring the Audible Alarms
User Customization
The operators and administrators can:
•
Enable/Disable the Audible Alarm.
•
Select whether to repeat the Audible Alarm.
•
Define the number of repetitions and the interval between the repetitions.
To Customize the Audio Alert on the Collaboration Server Client or Collaboration Server
Manager:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > Audible Alarms > User
Customization.
The User Customization window opens.
2
Define the following parameters:
Table 20-7 Audible Alarm - User Customization Options
3
20-32
Option
Description
Enable Audible Alarm
Select this check box to enable the Audible Alarm feature and to
define its properties.
When this check box is cleared, the Audible Alarm functionality is
disabled.
Repeat Audible Alarm
Select this check box to play the Audible Alarm repeatedly. When
selected, it enables the definition of the number of repetitions and the
interval between repetitions.
When cleared, the Audible Alarm will not be repeated and will be
played only once.
Number of
Repetitions
Define the number of times the audible alarm will be played.
Default number of repetitions is 4.
Repetition interval in
seconds
Define the number of seconds that the system will wait before playing
the Audible Alarm again.
Default interval is 20 seconds.
Click OK.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Replacing the Audible Alarm File
Each Collaboration Server is shipped with a default tone file in *.wav format that plays a
specific tone when participants request Operator Assistance. This file can be replaced by a
*.wav file with your own recording. The file must be in *.wav format and its length cannot
exceed one hour.
Only the User with Administrator permission can download the Audible Alarm file.
To replace the Audio file on the Collaboration Server Client or Collaboration Server
Manager:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > Audible Alarms > Download
Audible Alarm File.
The Download Audible Alarm File window opens.
2
Click the Browse button to select the audio file (*.wav) to download.
The Open dialog box opens.
3
4
Select the appropriate *.wav file and then click the Open button.
The selected file name is displayed in the Install Audible Alarm File dialog box.
Optional. You can play the selected file or the currently used file by clicking the Play
) button as follows:
(
5
a
Click Play Selected File to play a file saved on your computer.
b
Click Play Collaboration Server File to play the file currently saved on the
Collaboration Server.
In the Download Audible Alarm File dialog box, click OK to download the file to the
MCU.
The new file replaces the file stored on the MCU. If multiple Collaboration Servers are
configured in the Collaboration Server Manager, the file must be downloaded to each of the
required MCUs separately.
Polycom, Inc.
20-33
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Multilingual Setting
Each supported language is represented by a country flag in the Welcome Screen and can be
selected as the language for the Collaboration Server Web Client.
Customizing the Multilingual Setting
The languages available for selection in the Login screen of the Collaboration Server Web Client
can be modified using the Multilingual Setting option.
To customize the Multilingual Setting:
1
On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > Customize Display Settings >
Multilingual Setting.
The Multilingual Setting dialog box is displayed.
Selected
Languages
20-34
2
Click the check boxes of the languages to be available for selection.
3
Click OK.
4
Log out from the Collaboration Server Web Client and Log in for the customization to take
effect.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Banner Display and Customization
The Login Screen and Main Screen of the Collaboration Server Web Client and the Collaboration
Server Manager can display informative or warning text banners. These banners can include
general information or they can be cautioning users to the terms and conditions under
which they may log into and access the system, as required in many secured environments.
Banner display is enabled in the Setup > Customize Display Settings > Banners Configuration.
The administrator can choose one of four alternative login banners to be displayed. The four
alternative banners cannot be modified. A Custom banner (default) can also be defined.
The Main Page Banner is blank and can be defined.
The Banner Configuration dialog box allows the administrator to select a Login Banner from a
drop-down menu.
Login
Banner
Menu
One of the the following Login Banners can be selected:
•
Non-Modifiable Banners
•
— Sample 1
— Sample 2
— Sample 3
— Sample 4
Modifiable Banner
— Custom (Default)
Guidelines
Polycom, Inc.
•
The Login Banner must be acknowledged before the user is permitted to log in to the
system.
•
If a Custom banner has been created, and the user selects one of the alternative, nonmodifiable banners the Custom banner not deleted.
•
The Custom Login Banner banner may contain up to 1300 characters.
•
An empty Login Banner is not allowed.
20-35
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
Any attempt to modify a non-modifiable banner results in it automatically being copied
to the Custom banner.
Non-Modifiable Banner Text
Sample 1 Banner
You are accessing a U.S. Government (USG) Information System (IS) that is
provided for USG-authorized use only.
By using this IS (which includes any device attached to this IS), you
consent to the following conditions:
− The USG routinely intercepts and monitors communications on this IS for
purposes including, but not limited to, penetration testing, COMSEC
monitoring, network operations and defense, personnel misconduct (PM), law
enforcement (LE), and counterintelligence (CI) investigations.
− At any time, the USG may inspect and seize data stored on this IS.
− Communications using, or data stored on, this IS are not private, are
subject to routine monitoring, interception, and search, and may be
disclosed or used for any USG authorized purpose.
− This IS includes security measures (e.g., authentication and access
controls) to protect USG interests--not for your personal benefit or
privacy.
− Notwithstanding the above, using this IS does not constitute consent to
PM, LE or CI investigative searching or monitoring of the content of
privileged communications, or work product, related to personal
representation or services by attorneys, psychotherapists, or clergy, and
their assistants. Such communications and work product are private and
confidential. See User Agreement for details.
Sample 2 Banner
This system is for the use of authorized users only. Individuals using this
computer system without authority, or in excess of their authority, are
subject to having all of their activities on this system monitored and
recorded by systems personnel. In the course of monitoring individuals
improperly using this system, or in the course of system maintenance, the
activities of authorized users also may be monitored. Anyone using this
system expressly consents to such monitoring and is advised that if such
monitoring reveals possible criminal activity, system personnel may provide
the evidence of such monitoring to law enforcement officials.
Sample 3 Banner
You are about to access a system that is intended for authorized users only.
You should have no expectation of privacy in your use of this system. Use
of this system constitutes consent to monitoring, retrieval, and disclosure
of any information stored within the system for any purpose including
criminal prosecution.
Sample 4 Banner
This computer system including all related equipment, network devices
(specifically including Internet access), is provided only for authorized
use. All computer systems may be monitored for all lawful purposes,
including ensuring that their use is authorized, for management of the
system, to facilitate protection against unauthorized access, and to verify
20-36
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
security procedures, survivability and operational security. Monitoring
includes active attacks by authorized personnel and their entities to test
or verify the security of the system. During monitoring, information may be
examined, recorded, copied and used for authorized purposes. All information
including personal information, placed on or sent over this system may be
monitored. Use of this system, authorized or unauthorized, constitutes
consent to monitoring of this system. Unauthorized use may subject you to
criminal prosecution. Evidence of any such unauthorized use collected during
monitoring may be used for administrative, criminal or other adverse action.
Use of this system constitutes consent to monitoring for these purposes.
Customizing Banners
The Login and Main Screen banners can be customized to display conference information,
assistance information or warning text as required in the Ultra Secure Mode.
To customize the banners:
1 In the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > Customize Display Settings > Banners
Configuration.
The Banners Configuration dialog box opens.
2
Customize the banners by modifying the following fields:
Table 20-8 Banner Configuration
Description
Field
Check Box
Login Page
Banner
Select or clear the
check box to
enable or disable
the display of the
banner.
Main Page
Banner
3
Polycom, Inc.
Text Field
Edit the text in this field to
meet local requirements:
•
Banner content is
multilingual and uses
Unicode, UTF-8 encoding.
All text and special
characters can be used.
•
Maximum banner size is
100KB.
Restore Default
Button
Click the button to
restore the default
text to the banner
Click the OK button.
20-37
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Banner Display
Login Screen Banner
The Login screen banner can display any text. The Collaboration Server User must
acknowledge that the information was read and click the Accept button to proceed to the
Login screen as shown in the following screen:
Terms of Usage
Banner
20-38
Accept
Button
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Main Screen Banner
The Main Screen banner is displayed at the bottom of the screen, as follows:
Banner
Software Management
The Software Management menu is used to backup and restore the Collaboration Server's
configuration files and to download MCU software.
Backup and Restore Guidelines
•
System Backup can only be performed by an administrator.
•
The System Backup procedure creates a single backup file that can be viewed or
modified only by developers.
•
A System Backup file from one system can be restored on another system.
•
To ensure file system consistency, do not perform any configuration changes as the
system does not suspended them during the backup procedure.
•
The following parameters, settings and files are backed up:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Polycom, Inc.
MCMS configuration files (/mcms/Cfg):
Network and service configurations,
Rooms,
Profiles
Reservations
System Flags
Resource Allocation
IVR messages, music
20-39
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
Collaboration Server Web Client user setting - fonts, windows
Collaboration Server Web Client global settings – notes, address book, language
Private keys and certificates (TLS)
Conference participant settings
Operation DB (administrator list)
SNMP settings
Time configuration
CDR files are not included in the backup process and should be backed up manually by
saving the CDR files to a destination device.
Using Software Management
To backup configuration files:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Administration > Software Management >
Backup Configuration.
The Backup Configuration dialog box opens.
2
Click the Browse button.
The Browse To File dialog box opens.
3
Select the Backup Directory Path and then click Backup.
When the Collaboration Server system backs up the current configuration, if any changes occur
immediately or during the request, then additional changes are not registered.
To restore configuration files:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Administration > Software Management >
Restore Configuration.
2
Browse to the Restore Directory Path where the backed up configuration files are stored
and then click Restore.
To download MCU software files:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Administration > Software Management >
Software Download.
2
20-40
Browse to the Install Path and then click Install.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Ping Collaboration Server
The Ping administration tool enables the Collaboration Server Signaling Host to test network
connectivity by Pinging IP addresses.
Guidelines
•
Both explicit IP addresses and Host Names are supported.
•
The Collaboration Server Web Client blocks any attempt to issue another Ping command
before the current Ping command has completed. Multiple Ping commands issued
simultaneously from multiple Collaboration Server Web Clients are also blocked.
Using Ping
To Ping a network entity from the Collaboration Server:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Administration > Tools > Ping.
The Ping dialog box is displayed:
2
Modify or complete the following field:
Table 20-9 Ping
3
Field
Description
Host Name or Address
Enter the Host Name or IP Address of the network entity to be
Pinged.
Click the Ping button.
The Ping request is sent to the Host Name or IP Address of the Collaboration Server
entity.
The Answer is either:
— OK, or
— FAILED
Polycom, Inc.
20-41
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Notification Settings
The Collaboration Server can display notifications when:
• A new Collaboration Server user connects to the MCU.
•
A new conference is started.
•
Not all defined participants are connected to the conference or when a single
participant is connected.
•
A change in the MCU status occurs and an alarm is added to the alarm’s list.
A welcome message is displayed to the Collaboration Server user upon connection.
To configure the notifications:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, select Setup > Notification Settings.
The Notification Settings dialog box is displayed.
The following notification options are displayed.
Table 20-10 Notification Settings Parameters
20-42
Field
Description
New Connection
Notification of a new user/administrator connecting to the
Collaboration Server.
New Conference
Created
New conference has been created.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Table 20-10 Notification Settings Parameters (Continued)
Field
Description
Conference Not Full
The conference is not full and additional participants are defined for
the conference.
Welcome Message
A welcome message after user/administrator logon.
Active Alarms Update
Updates you of any new alarm that occurred.
Fault List Updated
Updates you when the faults list is updated (new faults are added or
existing faults are removed).
2
Enable/Disable All Notifications or Custom to select specific notifications to display.
3
Click OK.
Logger Diagnostic Files
The Logger utility is a troubleshooting tool that continually records MCU system messages
and saves them to files in the MCU hard drive. For each time interval defined in the system,
a different data file is created. The files may be retrieved from the hard drive for off-line
analysis and debugging purposes.
The Logger utility is activated at the MCU startup. The Logger is disabled when the MCU is
reset manually or when there is a problem with the Logger utility, e.g. errors on the hard
drive where files are saved. In such cases, data cannot be retrieved.
When the MCU is reset via the Collaboration Server, the files are saved on the MCU hard
drive.
To access the Logger Diagnostic Files:
>> On the Collaboration Server menu, click Administration > Tools > Logger Diagnostic
Files.
Polycom, Inc.
20-43
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The following tasks can be performed:
Table 20-11 Diagnostic File Button Options
Button
Description
Refresh List
Refreshes the list and adds newly generated logger files.
Select All
Selects all the logger files listed.
Browse
Selects the destination folder for download.
Retrieve Files
Saves files to the destination folder.
When retrieved, the log file name structure is as follows:
•
Sequence number (starting with 1)
•
Date and Time of first message
•
Date and Time of last message
•
File size
•
Special information about the data, such as Startup
File name structure:
Log_SNxxxxxxxxxx_FMDddmmyyy_FMThhmm_LMDddmmyyyy_LMThhmm_SZxxxxxxxxxx_SUY.log
File name format:
• SN = Sequence Number
•
FM = First Message, date and time
•
LM = Last Message, date and time
•
SZ = Size
•
SU = Startup (Y/N) during the log file duration
Example:
Log_SN0000000002_FMD06032007_FMT083933_LMD06032007_LMT084356_SZ184951_SUY.log.
Retrieving the Logger Files:
1 Select the log files to retrieve. Multiple selections of files are enabled using standard
Windows conventions.
2
In the Logger Diagnostic Files dialog box, click the Browse button.
3
In the Browse for Folder window, select the directory location to save the Logger files and
click OK.
You will return to the Logger Diagnostic Files dialog box.
20-44
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
4
Click the Retrieve Files button.
The log files (in *.txt format) are saved to the defined directory and a confirmation
caption box is displayed indicating a successful retrieval of the log files.
Viewing the Logger Files:
To analyze the log files generated by the system, open the retrieved *.txt files in any text
editor application, i.e. Notepad, Textpad or MS Word.
1
Using Windows Explorer, browse to the directory containing the retrieved log files.
2
Use any text editor application to open the log file(s).
Information Collector
Standard Security Mode
The Information Collector comprehensively attains all information from all the MCU
internal entities for data analysis. That data, stored in a central repository, is logged from the
following system components:
•
System Log Files
•
Full faults
•
CDR
•
Apache logs
•
OS (Core dumps, CFG - DNS, DHCP,
NTP, kernal state, event logs
•
CFG directory (without IVR)
•
Signaling Trace files (H.323 & SIP)
•
Cards info: HW version, state and status
•
Central Signaling logs
•
SW version number
•
Processes internal state and statistics
The data collected is saved into a single compressed file containing all the information from
each system component in its relative format (.txt, .xml, etc...). In case the disk is
malfunctioning, the file will be written to the RAM (involves only a small amount of
information where the RAM size is 1/2 a gigabyte). The zipped file (info.tgz) can be opened
with the following applications: WinRAR and WinZip. The entire zipped file is then sent to
Polycom’s Network Systems Division for analysis and troubleshooting.
Polycom, Inc.
20-45
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Using the Information Collector
When the Information Collector is used the following steps are performed:
•
Step 1: Creating the Information Collector file.
•
Step 2: Saving the Information Collector file.
•
Step 3: Viewing the information in the Information Collector file.
Step 1: Creating the Information Collector Compressed File
To create the compressed file:
1 In the Collaboration Server menu, click Administration > Tools > Information
Collector.
The Information Collector dialog box is displayed.
Standard Security Mode
2
In the From Date and Until Date fields, use the arrow keys to define the date range of the
data files to be included in the compressed file.
3
In the From Time and Until Time fields, use the arrow keys to define the time range of
the data files to be included in the compressed file.
4
Select check boxes of the information to be collected.
5
In the Export Path field, click the Browse button and navigate to the directory path
where the compressed file is to be saved.
6
Click the Collect Information button.
A progress indicator is displayed in the Information Collector dialog box while the file is
being created.
20-46
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Step 2: Saving the Compressed File
1
The compressed file is automatically saved in the directory selected in the Information
Collector dialog box. The file is named info.tgz.
A success information box is displayed.
2
Click the OK button.
Step 3: Viewing the Compressed File
The compressed file is saved in .tgz format and can be viewed with any utility that can open
files of that format, for example WinRAR® 3.80.
To view the compressed file:
1 Navigate to the directory on the workstation in which the file was saved.
2
Double click the info.tgz file to view the downloaded information.
Some browsers save the file as info.gz due to a browser bug. If this occurs, the file must be
manually renamed to info.tgz before it can be viewed.
Auditor
An Auditor is a user who can view Auditor and CDR files for system auditing purposes.
The Auditor user must connect to the Collaboration Server using the Collaboration Server Web
Client only.
The Event Auditor enables administrators and auditors to analyze configuration changes and
unusual or malicious activities in the Collaboration Server system.
Auditor operates in real time, recording all administration activities and login attempts from
the following Collaboration Server modules:
•
Control Unit
•
Shelf Manager
For a full list of monitored activities, see Table 20-13 on page 20-52 and Table 20-14 on
page 20-53.
The Auditor must always be active in the system. A System Alert is displayed if it becomes
inactive for any reason.
The Auditor tool is composed of the Auditor Files and the Auditor File Viewer that enables you
to view the Auditor Files.
Time stamps of Audit Events are GMT.
Polycom, Inc.
20-47
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Auditor Files
Auditor Event History File Storage
All audit events are saved to a buffer file on hard disk in real time and then written to a file
on hard disk in XML in an uncompressed format.
A new current auditor event file is created when:
•
the system is started
•
the size of the current auditor event file exceeds 2 MB
•
the current auditor event file’s age exceeds 24 hours
Up to 1000 auditor event files are stored per Collaboration Server. These files are retained
for at least one year and require 1.05 GB of disk space. The files are automatically deleted by
the system (oldest first) when the system reaches the auditor event file limit of 1000.
A System Alert is displayed with Can't store data displayed in its Description field if:
•
the system cannot store 1000 files
•
the Collaboration Server does not have available disk space to retain files for one year
Audit Event Files are retained by the Collaboration Server for at least 1 year. Any attempt to
delete an audit event file that is less than one year old raises a System Alert with File was
removed listed in the Description field.
Using the Restore Factory Defaults of the System Restore procedure erases Audit Files.
Retrieving Auditor Files
You can open the Auditor file directly from the Auditor Files list or you can retrieve the files
and save them to a local workstation.
To access Auditor Files:
>> On the Collaboration Server menu, click Administration > Tools > Auditor Files.
The Auditor Files dialog box is displayed.
File List
Directory
Path
The Auditor Files dialogue box displays a file list containing the following file
information:
20-48
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Name
Size (Bytes)
First Message – date and time of the first audit event in the file
Last Message – date and time of the last audit event in the file
StartUp:
• True – file was created when the system was started
• False – file was created when previous audit event file reached a size of 2 MB
or was more than 24 hours old
— File Retrieved:
• True - file was previously retrieved.
• False - file was never previously retrieved.
The order of the Auditor Files dialog box field header columns can be changed and the
fields can be filtered to enable searching.
—
—
—
—
—
For more information, see "Auditor File Viewer” on page 20-49.
To retrieve files for storage on a workstation:
1 Click Browse and select the folder on the workstation to receive the files and then click
OK.
The folder name is displayed in the directory path field.
2
Select the file(s) to be retrieved by clicking their names in the file list or click Select All
to retrieve all the files. (Windows multiple selection techniques can be used.)
3
Click Retrieve Files.
The selected files are copied to the selected directory on the workstation.
To open the file in the Auditor File Viewer:
>> Double-click the file.
Auditor File Viewer
The Auditor File Viewer enables Auditors and Administrators to view the content of and
perform detailed analysis on auditor event data in a selected Auditor Event File.
You can view an Auditor Event File directly from the Auditor Files list or by opening the file
from the Auditor File Viewer.
To open the Auditor File Viewer from the Administration Menu:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Administration > Tools > Auditor File
Viewer.
The Auditor File Viewer is displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
20-49
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
If you previously double clicked an Auditor Event File in the Auditor Files list, that file is
automatically opened.
Local File
Event
List (ID)
Request Transaction
Tree
Response Transaction
Tree
The following fields are displayed for each event:
Table 20-12 Auditor Event Columns
Field
Description
Event ID
The sequence number of the event generated by the Collaboration
Server.
Date & Time
The date and time of the event taken from the Collaboration Server’s
Local Time setting.
User Name
The Username (Login Name) of the user who triggered the event.
Reporting Module
The Collaboration Server system internal module that reported the
event:
• MCMS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20-50
MPL
Central Signaling
MPL Simulation
Collaboration Server Web Client
CM Switch
ART
Video
MUX
Workstation
The name (alias) of the workstation used to send the request that
triggered the event.
IP Address
(Workstation)
The IP address of the workstation used to send the request that
triggered the event.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Table 20-12 Auditor Event Columns (Continued)
Field
Description
Event Type
Auditor events can be triggered by:
• API
•
•
Event
Collaboration Server Internal Event
The process, action, request or transaction that was performed or
rejected.
• POST:SET transactions (API)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Process Completed
HTTP
Configuration changes via XML (API)
Login/Logout (API)
GET (HTTP)
PUT (HTTP)
MKDIR (HTTP)
RMDIR (HTTP)
Startup (Collaboration Server Internal Event)
Shutdown (Collaboration Server Internal Event)
Reset (Collaboration Server Internal Event)
Enter Diagnostic Mode (Collaboration Server Internal Event)
IP address changes via USB (Collaboration Server Internal Event)
Status of the process, action, request or transaction returned by the
system:
• Yes – performed by the system.
•
No – rejected by the system.
Description
A text string describing the process, action, request or transaction.
Additional Information
An optional text string describing the process, action, request or
transaction in additional detail.
The order of the Auditor File Viewer field header columns can be changed and the fields
can be sorted and filtered to facilitate different analysis methods.
2
In the event list, click the events or use the keyboard’s Up-arrow and Down-arrow keys
to display the Request Transaction and Response Transaction XML trees for each audit
event.
The transaction XML trees can be expanded and collapsed by clicking the expand
( ) and collapse ( ) buttons.
To open an auditor event file stored on the workstation:
1
Click the Local File button (
) to open the Open dialogue box.
2
Navigate to the folder on the workstation that contains the audit event file.
3
Select the audit event file to be opened.
4
Click Open.
The selected file is opened in the Auditor Viewer.
Polycom, Inc.
20-51
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Audit Events
Alerts and Faults
Table 1 lists Alerts and Faults that are recorded by the Auditor.
Table 20-13 Alerts and Faults
Event
Attempt to exceed the maximum number of management session per user
Attempt to exceed the maximum number of management sessions per
system
Central Signaling indicating Recovery status.
Failed login attempt
Failed to open Apache server configuration file.
Failed to save Apache server configuration file.
Fallback version is being used.
File system scan failure.
File system space shortage.
Internal MCU reset.
Internal System configuration during startup.
Invalid date and time.
Invalid MCU Version.
IP addresses of Signaling Host and Control Unit are the same.
IP Network Service configuration modified.
IP Network Service deleted.
Login
Logout
Management Session Time Out
MCU Reset to enable Diagnostics mode.
MCU reset.
Music file error.
New activation key was loaded.
New version was installed.
NTP synchronization failure.
Polycom default User exists.
20-52
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Table 20-13 Alerts and Faults (Continued)
Event
Private version is loaded.
Restoring Factory Defaults.
Secured SIP communication failed.
Session disconnected without logout
SSH is enabled.
System Configuration modified.
System is starting.
System Resets.
TCP disconnection
Terminal initiated MCU reset.
The Log file system is disabled.
The software contains patch(es).
USB key used to change system configuration.
User closed the browser
User initiated MCU reset.
Transactions
Table 2 lists Transactions that are recorded by the Auditor.
Table 20-14 Transactions
Transaction
TRANS_CFG:SET_CFG
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:DEL_IP_SERVICE
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:NEW_IP_SERVICE
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:SET_DEFAULT_H323_SERVICE
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:SET_DEFAULT_SIP_SERVICE
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:UPDATE_IP_SERVICE
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:UPDATE_MANAGEMENT_NETWORK
TRANS_MCU:BEGIN_RECEIVING_VERSION
TRANS_MCU:COLLECT_INFO
TRANS_MCU:CREATE_DIRECTORY
TRANS_MCU:FINISHED_TRANSFER_VERSION
Polycom, Inc.
20-53
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 20-14 Transactions (Continued)
Transaction
TRANS_MCU:LOGIN
TRANS_MCU:LOGOUT
TRANS_MCU:REMOVE_DIRECTORY
TRANS_MCU:REMOVE_DIRECTORY_CONTENT
TRANS_MCU:RENAME
TRANS_MCU:RESET
TRANS_MCU:SET_PORT_CONFIGURATION
TRANS_MCU:SET_RESTORE_TYPE
TRANS_MCU:SET_TIME
TRANS_MCU:TURN_SSH
TRANS_MCU:UPDATE_KEY_CODE
TRANS_OPERATOR:CHANGE_PASSWORD
TRANS_OPERATOR:DELETE_OPERATOR
TRANS_OPERATOR:NEW_OPERATOR
TRANS_SNMP:UPDATE
20-54
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
ActiveX Bypass
At sites that, for security reasons, do not permit Microsoft® ActiveX® to be installed,
the MSI (Windows Installer File) utility can be used to install .NET Framework and
.NET Security Settings components on workstations throughout the network.
All workstation that connect to Collaboration Server systems must have both.NET
Framework and .NET Security Settings running locally. These components are used for
communication with the Collaboration Server and can only be installed on
workstations by users with administrator privileges.
The MSI utility requires the IP addresses of all the Collaboration Server systems (both
control unit and Shelf Management IP addresses) that each workstation is to connect to.
If the IP address of the any of the target Collaboration Servers is changed, the ActiveX
components must be reinstalled.
Installing ActiveX
To install ActiveX components on all workstations in the network:
1 Download the MSI file EMA.ClassLoaderInstaller.msi from the Polycom Resource
Center.
The MSI file contains installation scripts for both .NET Framework and .NET Security
Settings.
2
Create a text file to be used during the installation containing the IP addresses of all the
Collaboration Server systems (both control unit and Shelf Management IP addresses)
that each workstation in the network is to connect to.
The file must be named url_list.txt and must be saved in the same folder as the
downloaded MSI file.
3
Install the ActiveX components on all workstations on the network that connect to
Collaboration Server systems.
The installation is done by the network administrator using a 3rd party network
software installation utility and is transparent to all other users.
Polycom, Inc.
20-55
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Resetting the Collaboration Server
System Reset saves system configuration changes and restarts the system with the latest
settings.
To reset the Collaboration Server:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click the Hardware Monitor button.
The Hardware Monitor pane is displayed.
2
Click the Reset (
) button.
When the Collaboration Server system is reset, during Collaboration Server startup the
Progress Bar appears at the bottom of the Collaboration Server Status pane.
The progress bar displays the amount of time remaining for the reset process to complete:
left to right.
. The Startup progress is also indicated by a green bar moving from
The duration of the Startup depends on the type of activity that preceded the MCU reset. For
example: Fast Configuration Wizard, New Version installation, Version Upgrade, Restore
Last Configuration etc.
When resetting the Collaboration Server from the Hardware Monitor, sometimes SIP endpoints may
remain connected, although the conference ended.
20-56
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
Upgrading and Downgrading
To upgrade or downgrade the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s:
1 Inset the Polycom USB key that came with the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
into your computer.
The Polycom Documentation window is displayed.
In Windows XP:
a
The Polycom Documentation option is automatically selected. Click OK.
In Windows 7:
a
Select Open Folder to view files using Windows Explorer.
b
Double-click the index.hta file.
The Language Menu is displayed, offering a choice of several languages.
2
Click the documentation language of your choice.
An End-User Licence Agreement for Polycom Software is displayed.
3
Polycom, Inc.
Read the agreement and click the Accept Agreement button.
20-57
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
20-58
4
In the Product Type dialog box, select RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s.
5
In the Initial Setup Utility dialog box, click the Upgrade / Downgrade link.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
The RMX Software Version Alignment Application dialog box is displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
6
Click Open.
7
Navigate to the folder where the upgrade or downgrade software you have
downloaded is saved and click Open.
20-59
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The software file is displayed in the Select the path where the downloaded version is located
box.
8
Click Add.
This step may take a few minutes.
The version is added to the Selected Version dropdown box.
9
Make sure the correct version is selected in the Selected Version dropdown box and click
OK.
10 Remove the USB key from the PC workstation.
11 Insert the USB key in any USB port of the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s.
12 Turn off the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s, then turn it On.
This step may take up to ten minutes.
13 Start the RP Collaboration Server Web Client application on the workstation.
a
20-60
In the browser’s address line, enter the IP address of the Control Unit in the
following format: http://<Control Unit IP Address>.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 20-RealPresence Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities
b
Click Enter.
When the RP Collaboration Server Web Client Login window is displayed, the version
change was successful.
Polycom, Inc.
20-61
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
20-62
Polycom, Inc.
21
System Configuration Flags
The system’s overall behavior can be configured by modifying the default values of the
System Flags.
For flag changes (including deletion) to take effect, the MCU must be reset. For more information,
see "Resetting the Collaboration Server” on page 20-56.
The following System Flags do not require an MCU reset:
• IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME
•
•
IVR_MUSIC_VOLUME
IVR_ROLL_CALL_VOLUME
Modifying System Flags
To modify system flags:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
In the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab, the following flags can be modified:
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_P
ARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
If YES, allows non-encrypted participants to connect to
encrypted conferences.
Default: No
21-1
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_R
ECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCR
YPT_CONF
When set to NO (default), the Recording Link inherits the
encryption settings of the conference. If the conference is
encrypted, the recording link will be encrypted.
When set to YES, it disables the encryption of the recording
link, regardless of the Encryption settings of the conference
and RSS recorder.
CHANGE_AD_HOC_CONF_
DURATION
The duration of an ad-hoc conference* can be configured on
a system level by setting the flag to one of the following
values (in minutes): 60 (default), 90, 180 and 270.
* An ad-hoc conference is automatically created when the participant
dials into an Ad-hoc Entry Queue and enters a conference ID that is
not being used by any other conferencing entity. It is based on the
Conference Profile assigned to the EQ.
21-2
CONTENT_SLAVE_LINKS_I
NTRA_SUPPRESSION_IN_S
ECONDS
Defines the interval, in seconds, during which the
Collaboration Server is allowed to forward an Intra Request
received from any of the Slave Cascading Links. The Slave
Cascading Link can be connected to the local Collaboration
Server, to an MCU on a higher cascade level or to the
Content sharer.
The first Intra request that is received from any of the Slave
MCUs connected to the Collaboration Server starts the
interval counter and is forwarded to the next level MCU or to
the Content sharer.
All other Intra requests that are received within this interval
are registered but ignored. After an interval of <flag value>
seconds, the system checks if during the last interval any
additional Intra requests were registered. If there is at least
one Intra request it will be forwarded. If there is no additional
Intra request not no action is taken other than to wait for the
next cycle.
This filtering process is repeated every <flag value> seconds.
Default: 30
CONTENT_SPEAKER_INTR
A_SUPPRESSION_IN_SEC
ONDS
This flag controls the requests to refresh (intra) the content
sent from the Collaboration Server system to the content
sender as a result of refresh requests initiated by other
conference participants.
Enter the interval in seconds between the Intra requests sent
from the Collaboration Server to the endpoint sending the
content to refresh the content display. Refresh requests that
will be received from endpoints within the defined interval will
be postponed to the next interval.
Default setting: 5
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description
CPU_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_TI
ME_SECONDS
This flag indicates when to send the first KeepAlive indication
to check the TCP connection.
Default value: 7200 second (120 minutes)
Range: 600-18000 seconds
When there are NAT problems, this default may be too long
and the TCP connection is lost. In such a case, the default
value should be changed to 3600 seconds (60 minutes) or
less.
CPU_TCP_KEEP_INTERVAL
_SECONDS
This flag indicates the interval in seconds between the
KeepAlive requests.
Default value: 75 second
Range: 10-720 seconds.
DISABLE_INACTIVE_USER
Users can be automatically disabled by the system when they
do not log into the Collaboration Server application for a
predefined period.
Possible Values: 0 - 90 days.
Default: 0 (disables this option).
ENABLE_AGC
Set this flag to YES to enable the AGC option. (Default setting
is NO.) When disabled, selecting the AGC option in the
Participant Properties has not effect on the participant audio.
For more information see "Managing the Address Book” on
page 8-7.
The Auto Gain Control mechanism regulates noise and audio
volume by keeping the received audio signals of all
participants balanced.
Note:
Enabling AGC may result in amplification of background
noise.
ENABLE_AUTO_EXTENSIO
N
When set to YES, allows conferences running on the
Collaboration Server to be automatically extended as long as
there are participants connected and the system has free
resources.
Set this flag to NO prevent conference duration from being
automatically extended. It can also be used to enable the
definition of conference duration that is shorter than is 11
minutes.
Default: YES
ENABLE_CASCADED_LINK
_TO_JOIN_WITHOUT_PASS
WORD
Enables a cascaded link to enter a conference without a
password.
Default: NO, for security reasons.
ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SY
STEM_ALARMS
Enables or disables the display of Active Alarms before
overwriting the older CDR/Auditor/Log files, enabling the
users to backup the older files before they are deleted.
Default: NO
21-3
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
ENFORCE_SAFE_UPGRAD
E
When set to YES this flag enables the Collaboration Server
system to notify users when an incorrect version upgrade/
downgrade or upgrade/downgrade path is selected.
When set to NO, after initiating an upgrade or downgrade
software installation, the Collaboration Server activates a fault
alert in the Faults List: “Warning: Upgrade started and SAFE
Upgrade protection is turned OFF” and the upgrade/
downgrade process continues.
Range: YES / NO
Default: YES
EXT_DB_IVR_PROV_TIME_
SECONDS
When an Entry Queue is set as IVR Service Provider for the
DMA, the value here indicates the time interval in seconds in
which the database is accesses for the ID.
Default: 300
FORCE_CIF_PORT_ALLOC
ATION
Sets the MCU to allocate one CIF video resource to an
endpoint, regardless of the resolution determined by the
Conference Profile parameters. You can specify the endpoint
types for which resource allocation can be forced to CIF
resource, enabling other types of endpoints to use higher
resolutions in the same conference.
Enter the product type to which the CIF resource should be
allocated. Possible values are:
• CMA Desktop - for CMA desktop client
•
21-4
VSX nnnn - where nnnn represents the model number for
example, VSX 8000.
FORCE_STRONG_PASSWO
RD_POLICY
When set to YES, implements the Strong Password rules. For
more details, see “Implementing Strong Passwords” on
page 15-9.
Default: NO
FORCE_SYSTEM_BROADC
AST_VOLUME
If set to YES, the level of broadcasting volume of the
connected participant is value taken from the system flag
SYSTEM_BROADCAST_VOLUME.
If set to NO (default), the broadcasting volume level is 5.
FORCE_SYSTEM_LISTENIN
G_VOLUME
If set to YES, the level of listening volume of the connected
participant is value taken from the system flag
SYSTEM_LISTENING_VOLUME.
If set to NO (default), the listening volume level is 5.
GK_MANDATORY_FOR_CA
LLS_IN
If set to YES, a gatekeeper is required to receive incoming
H.323 calls. If a gatekeeper is not configure in the
Collaboration Server, the calls will fail.
If set to NO (default), gatekeeper is not required to process
H.323 incoming calls and H.323 participants can dial in with
or without a gatekeeper.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description
GK_MANDATORY_FOR_CA
LLS_OUT
If set to YES, a gatekeeper is required to perform H.323
outgoing calls. If a gatekeeper is not configure on the
Collaboration Server, the calls will fail.
If set to NO (default), gatekeeper is not required to dial out to
H.323 participants and calls can be dialed out with or without
a gatekeeper.
H263_ANNEX_T
Set to NO to send the content stream without Annex T and
enable Aethra and Tandberg endpoints, that do not support
Annex T, to process the content.
Default: YES
HD_THRESHOLD_BITRATE
Sets the minimum bit rate required by endpoints to connect to
an HD Conference. Endpoints that cannot support this bit rate
are connected as audio only.
Range: 384kbps - 4Mbs (Default: 768)
INTERNAL_SCHEDULER
When set to NO (default) this flag prevents potential
scheduling conflicts from occurring as a result of system calls
from external scheduling applications such as Polycom
ReadiManager®, CMA™ 4000/5000 and others via the API.
Set to YES to schedule conference reservations using an
external scheduling application.
21-5
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
ITP_CROPPING
If the conference is set to TelePresence mode, cropping of
the image is done according to this flag value:
• ITP (default) - Cropping is done as follows:
•
•
•
•
Left/right sides: no cropping
Top/Bottom: the calculated area to be stripped will be
split and cropped equally from the top and the bottom
of the display area.
CP - Cropping is done as follows:
•
Left/right sides: the calculated area to be stripped will
be split and cropped equally from the top and bottom
of the image
•
Top/Bottom: the calculated area to be stripped will be
split and cropped equally from both sides.
MIXED - Cropping is done as follows:
•
Left/right sides: the calculated area to be stripped will
be split and cropped equally from the top and bottom
of the image
•
Top/Bottom: the calculated area to be stripped will be
cropped 84% of the calculated area to be stripped will
be cropped from the bottom, and 16%will be cropped
from the top.
Note: If the flag was added with no value, and the conference
is set to TelePresence mode, cropping is done as follows:
• Left/right sides: no cropping
•
21-6
Top/Bottom: the calculated area to be stripped will be
cropped 84% of the calculated area to be stripped will be
cropped from the bottom, and 16%will be cropped from
the top.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME
The volume of IVR messages varies according to the value of
this flag.
Possible value range: 0-10 (Default: 6).
0 – disables playing the IVR messages
1 – lowest volume
10 – highest volume
Notes:
• It is not recommended to disable IVR messages by setting
the flag value to 0.
•
IVR_MUSIC_VOLUME
The volume of the IVR music played when a single participant
is connected to the conference varies according to the value
of this flag.
Possible value range: 0-10 (Default: 5).
0 – disables playing the music
1 – lowest volume
10 – highest volume
Note: System reset is not required for flag changes to take
effect.
IVR_ROLL_CALL_VOLUME
The volume of the Roll Call varies according to the value of
this flag.
Possible value range: 0-10 (Default: 6).
0 – disables playing the Roll Call
1 – lowest volume
10 – highest volume
Note:
• It is not recommended to disable the Roll Call by setting
the flag value to 0.
•
Polycom, Inc.
System reset is not required for flag changes to take
effect.
System reset is not required for flag changes to take
effect.
LAST_LOGIN_ATTEMPTS
If YES, the system displays a record of the last Login of the
user.
Default: NO.
For more details, see "User Login Record” on page 15-12.
LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DE
FAULT_LAYOUT
Defines the video layout to be displayed on the screen of the
legacy endpoints when switching to Content mode.
Default value: CP_LAYOUT_1P7 (1+7).
For a detailed list of possible flag values for the various video
layouts, see Table 21-6,
“LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag
Values,” on page 21-34.
21-7
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
MAX_CONF_PASSWORD_R
EPEATED_CHAR
Allows the administrator to configure the maximum number of
consecutive repeating characters that are to be allowed in a
conference password.
Range: 1 - 4
Default: 2
MAX_CP_RESOLUTION
The MAX_CP_RESOLUTION flag value is applied to the
system during First Time Power-on and after a system
upgrade. The default value is HD720.
All subsequent changes to the Maximum CP Resolution of
the system are made using the Resolution Configuration
dialog box.
Possible flag values:
• HD720 – High Definition at 60 fps
•
•
•
•
HD – High Definition at 30 fps
SD30 – Standard Definition at 30 fps
SD15 – Standard Definition at 15 fps
CIF – CIF resolution
Default: HD1080
For more information see "Video Resolutions in AVC-based
CP Conferencing” on page 2-1.
21-8
MAX_INTRA_REQUESTS_P
ER_INTERVAL_
Enter the maximum number of refresh (intra) requests for the
Content channel sent by the participant’s endpoint in a 10
seconds interval that will be dealt by the Collaboration Server
system. When this number is exceeded, the Content sent by
this participant will be identified as noisy and his/her requests
to refresh the Content display will be suspended.
Default setting: 3
MAX_INTRA_SUPPRESSIO
N_DURATION_IN_SECOND
S_
Enter the duration in seconds to ignore the participant’s
requests to refresh the Content display.
Default setting: 10
MAX_NUMBER_OF_MANAG
EMENT_SESSIONS_PER_S
YSTEM
Defines the maximum number of concurrent management
sessions (http and https connections) per system.
Value: 4 - 80
Default: 80
MAX_NUMBER_OF_MANAG
EMENT_SESSIONS_PER_U
SER
Defines the maximum number of concurrent management
sessions (http and https connections) per user.
Value: 4 - 80
Default: 10
MCU_DISPLAY_NAME
The name of the MCU that is displayed on the endpoint’s
screen when connecting to the conference.
Default: POLYCOM RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
MIN_PASSWORD_LENGTH
The length of passwords.
Possible value: between 0 and 20.
0 means this rule is not enforced.
For more details, see "Password Length” on page 15-10.
MIN_PWD_CHANGE_FREQ
UENCY_IN_DAYS
Defines the frequency with which a user can change a
password.
Values: 0 -7.
0 (standard default) - users do not have to change their
passwords.
For details, see "Defining Password Change Frequency” on
page 15-11.
MIN_SYSTEM_DISK_SPACE
_TO_ALERT
Defines a minimum remaining Collaboration Server disk
capacity in megabytes. If the remaining disk capacity falls
below this level an active alarm is raised.
Default: 2048
MS_ENVIRONMENT
If YES, sets the Collaboration Server SIP environment to
integrate with Microsoft OCS solution.
Default: NO
MULTIPLE_SERVICES
Determines whether the Multiple Services option is be
activated once the appropriate license is installed.
Possible Values: YES / NO
Default: NO
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_D
EFAULT_LEN
This flag enables or disables the automatic generation of
chairperson passwords and determines the number of digits
in the chairperson passwords assigned by the MCU.
Possible values are:
• 0 disables the automatic password generation.
Any value other than 0 enables the automatic generation
of chairperson passwords if the flag
HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD is set to NO.
•
1 – 16, default: 6 (Standard Security Mode)
If the default is used, in non-secured mode the system will
automatically generate chairperson passwords that contain 6
characters.
Polycom, Inc.
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_M
AX_LEN
The maximum number of digits that the user can enter when
manually assigning a password to the chairperson.
Range: 0 – 16
Default: 16
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_MI
N_LEN
Defines the minimum length required for the Chairperson
password.
Value: 0-16
Default: 0 - this rule is not enforced.
21-9
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_LEN
Defines the number of digits in the Conference ID that will be
assigned by the MCU. Enter 0 to disable the automatic
assignment of IDs by the MCU and let the Collaboration
Server user manually assign them.
Range: 2-16 (Default: 4).
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_MAX_
LEN
The maximum number of digits that the user can enter when
manually assigning an ID to a conference.
Range: 2-16 (Default: 8)
Note: Selecting 2 limits the number of simultaneous ongoing
conferences to 99.
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_MIN_L
EN
The minimum number of digits that the user must enter when
manually assigning an ID to a conference.
Range: 2-16 (Default: 4)
Note: Selecting 2 limits the number of simultaneous ongoing
conferences to 99.
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DE
FAULT_LEN
This flag enables or disables the automatic generation of
conference passwords and determines the number of digits in
the conference passwords assigned by the MCU.
Possible values are:
• 0 disables the automatic password generation.
Any value other than 0 enables the automatic generation
of conference passwords if the flag
HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD is set to NO.
•
1 – 16, default: 6
If the default is used, in non-secured mode the system will
automatically generate conference passwords that contain 6
characters.
21-10
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_MA
X_LEN
The maximum number of digits that the user can enter when
manually assigning a password to the conference.
Range: 0 – 16
Default (both Modes): 16
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_MI
N_LEN
Defines the minimum length required for the Conference
password.
Value: 0-16
Default: 0 - this rule is not enforced.
PAL_NTSC_VIDEO_OUTPU
T
When set to AUTO (default), the video output sent by the
Collaboration Server is either PAL or NTSC format,
depending on the current speaker in the layout. This ensures
full synchronization between the frame rate of the speaker
and the video encoder, ensuring smoother video.
In environments where the majority of endpoints are
configured to either NTSC or PAL, the flag can be set
accordingly to change the video encoding of the Collaboration
Server to be compatible with the majority of endpoints in the
call.
Possible Values: AUTO, PAL, NTSC
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description
PASSWORD_EXPIRATION_
DAYS
Determines the duration of password validity.
Value: between 0 and 90 days.
0 - user passwords do not expire.
For details, see "Defining Password Aging” on page 15-10.
PASSWORD_EXPIRATION_
DAYS_MACHINE
Enables the administrator to change the password expiration
period of Application-user’s independently of regular users.
Default: 365 (days).
PASSWORD_EXPIRATION
_WARNING_DAYS
Determines the display of a warning to the user of the number
of days until password expiration.
Value: between 0 and 14 days.
0 - password expiry warnings are not displayed.
For details, see "Defining Password Aging” on page 15-10.
PASSWORD_HISTORY_SIZ
E
The number of passwords that are recorded to prevent users
from re-using their previous passwords.
Values are between 0 and 16.
0 (standard default) - the rule is not enforced.
For more details, see "Implementing Password Re-Use /
History Rules” on page 15-10.
RESTRICT_CONTENT_BRO
ADCAST_TO_LECTURER
If set to YES, only the conference lecturer may send content
to the conference.
If set to NO, any conference participant can send content.
Default: YES
RRQ_WITHOUT_GRQ
To enable registration, some gatekeepers require sending
first RRQ and not GRQ.
Set flag to YES, if this behavior is required by the gatekeeper
in your environment.
Default: NO.
GRQ (Gatekeeper Request) - Gatekeeper discovery is the
process an endpoint uses to determine which gatekeeper to
register with.
RRQ - registration request sent to the gatekeeper.
SEPARATE_MANAGEMENT
_NETWORK
Enables/disables the Network Separation
Default: NO.
SESSION_TIMEOUT_IN_MI
NUTES
If there is no input from the user or if the connection is idle for
longer than the number of minutes specified by this flag, the
connection to the Collaboration Server is terminated.
Value: 0-99
0 - Session Timeout is disabled.
Default: 0
21-11
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
21-12
Flag
Description
SIP_AUTO_SUFFIX_EXTEN
SION
Used to automatically add a suffix to a SIP address (To
Address) instead of adding it manually in the Collaboration
Server Web Client (SIP address) when the SIP call is directdial and not through a Proxy.
Example:
Participant Name = john.smith
Company Domain = maincorp.com
SIP_AUTO_SUFFIX_EXTENSION flag value =
@maincorp.com
Entering john.smith will generate a SIP URI =
john.smith@maincorp.com
STAR_DELIMITER_ALLOWE
D
When set to YES, an asterisk “*” can be used as a delimiter in
Conference and Meeting Room dial strings.
The dial string is first searched for “'#' first followed by “*”.
Default: NO
SYSTEM_BROADCAST_VO
LUME
This value is used when the system flag
FORCE_SYSTEM_BROADCAST_VOLUME is set to YES.
Determines the default audio level with which the participants
connects and sends audio to the conference.
The volume scale is from 1 to 10, where 1 is the weakest and
10 is the strongest. The default connection value is 5.
Each unit change represents an increase or decrease of 3 dB
(decibel).
Range: 1-10
Default: 5
SYSTEM_LISTENING_VOLU
ME
This value is used when the system flag
FORCE_SYSTEM_LISTENING_VOLUME is set to YES.
Determines the default audio level with which the participants
connects and receives audio from the conference.
The volume scale is from 1 to 10, where 1 is the weakest and
10 is the strongest. The default value is 5. Each unit change
represents an increase or decrease of 3 dB (decibel).
Range: 1-10
Default: 5
TERMINATE_CONF_AFTER
_CHAIR_DROPPED
If YES, sets conferences to automatically terminate if the
Chairperson disconnects from the conference. This takes
effect only if the Conference Requires Chairperson check box
in the Conference Profile Properties, IVR Tab, is selected.
Default: YES
Note: In order for the "Chairperson Exit" message to be
played this flag must be set to YES.
USER_LOCKOUT
If YES, a user is locked out of the system after three
consecutive Login failures with same User Name. The user is
disabled and only the administrator can enable the user
within the system.
Default: NO
For details, see "User Lockout” on page 15-11.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-1 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
USER_LOCKOUT_DURATIO
N_IN_MINUTES
Defines the duration of the Lockout of the user.
Value: 0 - 480
0 means permanent User Lockout until the administrator reenables the user within the system.
Default: 0
USER_LOCKOUT_WINDOW
_IN_MINUTES
Defines the time period during which the three consecutive
Login failures occur.
Value: 0 - 45000
0 means that three consecutive Login failures in any time
period will result in User Lockout.
Default: 60
3
To modify a flag value, double-click or select the flag and click the Edit Flag button.
4
In the New Value field, enter the flag’s new value.
5
Click OK to close the Update Flag dialog box.
6
Repeat steps 2–4 to modify additional flags.
7
Click OK to close the System Flags dialog box
For flag changes (including deletion) to take effect, reset the MCU. For more information see
"Resetting the Collaboration Server” on page 20-56.
Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags
To add a flag:
1
In the System Flags dialog box, click the New Flag (
) button.
The New Flag dialog box is displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
2
In the New Flag field enter the flag name.
3
In the Value field enter the flag value.
21-13
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The following flags can be manually added to the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab:
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag
Description
ACCEPT_VOIP_DTMF_TYP
E
Defines the type of DTMF tones (inband) or digits (outband)
that the Collaboration Server will accept in VOIP calls.
Range:
• 0 - Auto (default):
Inband or outband DTMF tones/digits are accepted
depending on the endpoint's current setting. If the
endpoint switches from inband to outband or visa versa
the value of the SET_DTMF_SOURCE_DIFF_IN_SEC
flag determines the time interval after which both inband
and outband tones/digits will be accepted.
•
•
21-14
1 - Outband (H.245) only
2 - Inband only
APACHE_KEEP_ALIVE_TIM
EOUT
If the connection is idle for longer than the number of seconds
specified by this flag, the connection to the Collaboration
Server is terminated.
Value: 0 - 999
Default: 120
Note: A value of 0 results in an unlimited keep-alive duration.
AVOID_VIDEO_LOOP_BAC
K_IN_CASCADE
When set to YES the current speaker’s image is not sent back
through the participant link in cascaded conferences with
conference layouts other than 1x1.
Default: YES
Range: YES / NO
BURN_BIOS
Although not recommended, setting this flag’s value to NO will
prevent BIOS upgrade.
Default: YES.
CAC_ENABLE
When set to YES, enables the Call Admission Control
implementation in the Collaboration Server.
Default: NO (CAC is disabled)
CASCADE_LINK_PLAY_TO
NE_ON_CONNECTION
When set to YES, the Collaboration Server plays a tone when
a cascading link between conferences is established. The
tone is played in both conferences.
This tone is not played when the cascading link disconnects
from the conferences.
The tone used to notify that the cascading link connection has
been established cannot be customized.
Default value: NO.
The tone volume is controlled by the same flag as the IVR
messages and tones: IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
CELL_IND_LOCATION
Change the location of the display of Network Quality
Indicators displayed in the cells of the conference Video
Layout.
Default: TOP_RIGHT
Range:
• BOTTOM_LEFT
•
•
•
Polycom, Inc.
BOTTOM_RIGHT
TOP_LEFT
TOP_RIGHT
CFG_KEY_ENABLE_FLOW_
CONTROL_REINVITE
Used to enable or disable sending a re-INVITE to endpoints to
adjust their data rate. When set to YES, re-INVITE is used for
endpoints that do not support flow control in SIP using either
the Information or RTCP Feedback mechanisms.
Default: NO.
CONF_GATHERING_DURAT
ION_SECONDS
The value of this System Flag sets the duration of the
Gathering Phase in seconds. The Gathering Phase duration
of the conference is measured from the scheduled start time
of the conference.
Range: 0 - 3600
Default: 180
For more information see "Video Preview (AVC Only
Participants)” on page 3-20.
CP_REGARD_TO_INCOMIN
G_SETUP_RATE
For use in the Avaya Environment.
If set to YES, the Collaboration Server calculates the line rate
for incoming calls in CP conferences, according to the line
rate which is declared by the endpoint in the H.225 setup
message.
If set to NO, the rate is calculated according to the conference
line rate regardless of the rate in the H.225 setup message.
Default: YES.
CPU_BONDING_LINK_MON
ITORING_FREQUENCY
Used when using the MII Monitor for troubleshooting
networks.This flag sets the MII Polling Interval in milliseconds.
A value of zero disables MII monitoring.
Default: 100
21-15
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
CPU_BONDING_MODE
Sets the Bonding Mode of the Signalling and Management
network interface controllers.
Mode=6, balance-alb,
(Adaptive Load Balancing) includes balance-tlb, (Transmit
Load Balancing) and balance-rlb (Receive Load Balancing)
for IPV4 traffic. No special switch support is required.
Receive Load Balancing is achieved by ARP negotiation.
Outbound ARP Replies are intercepted and their source
hardware address is overwritten with the unique hardware
address of one of the slaves in the bond. In this way different
peers will use different hardware addresses for the server.
Note: balance-alb is the only supported value. All other
possible values are for troubleshooting purposes only.
Default: balance-alb
Possible values:
• balance-alb
•
•
•
•
•
•
21-16
balance-rr
active-backup
balance-xor
broadcast
802.3ad
balance-tlb
DISABLE_CELLS_NETWOR
K_IND
Disable the display of Network Quality Indicators displayed in
the cells of the conference Video Layout.
Default: YES
Range: YES / NO
DISABLE_DUMMY_REGIST
RATION
Enables or disables SIP dummy registration on the domain.
Possible Values:
NO (Default) - Disables SIP dummy registration.
YES - Enables SIP dummy registration.
Note: For homologation and certification testing, the flag must
be set to YES.
DISABLE_GW_OVERLAY_I
NDICATION
When set to NO (default), displays progress indication during
the connection phase of a gateway call.
Set the value to YES to hide the connection indications
displayed on the participant’s screen during the connection
phase of a gateway call.
DISABLE_SELF_NETWORK
_IND
Disable the display of the Network Quality Indicator of the
participant’s own endpoint.
Default: NO
Range: YES / NO
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description
DISABLE_WIDE_RES_TO_S
IP_DIAL_OUT
When set to NO (default), the Collaboration Server sends
wide screen resolution to dial-out SIP endpoints. Endpoint
types that do not support wide screen resolutions are
automatically identified by the Collaboration Server according
to their product type and version and will not receive the wide
resolution even if the flag is set to YES.
When manually added and set to YES, the Collaboration
Server does not send wide screen.
Default: NO.
DTMF_FORWARD_ANY_DI
GIT_TIMER_SECONDS
Used for DTMF code suppression in cascading conferences.
Determines the time period (in seconds) that MCU A will
forward DTMF inputs from conference A participants to MCU
B.
Flag range (in seconds): 0 - 360000
This flag is defined on MCU A (the calling MCU).
For more information, see "Suppression of DTMF Forwarding”
on page 5-12.
ENABLE_CISCO_GK
When set to YES, it enables the use of an identical prefix for
different Collaboration Servers when registering with a Cisco
MCM Gatekeeper.
Default: NO.
ENABLE_CLOSED_CAPTIO
N
Enables or disables the Closed Captions option that allow
endpoints to endpoints to provide real-time text transcriptions
or language translations of the video conference.
When set to NO (default), Closed Captions are disabled.
When set to YES, Closed Captions are enabled.
ENABLE_EPC
When set to YES (default), enables Polycom proprietary
People+.
When set to NO, disables this feature for all conferences and
participants.
ENABLE_EXTERNAL_DB_A
CCESS
If YES, the Collaboration Server connects to an external
database application, to validate the participant’s right to start
a new conference or access a conference.
Default: NO
ENABLE_H239
When set to YES, Content is sent via a separate Content
channel. Endpoints that do not support H.239 Content sharing
will not be able to receive
When set to NO, the Content channel is closed. In such a
case, H.239 Content is sent via the video channel (“people”
video) enabling endpoints that do not support H.239 Content
sharing to receive the Content in their video channel.
Default: YES.
ENABLE_H239_ANNEX_T
In H.239-enabled MIH Cascading, when MGC is on level 1,
enables sending Content using Annex T.
21-17
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
21-18
Flag
Description
ENABLE_LYNC_RTCP_INT
RA
When set to YES, RTCP FIR is used for sending Intra
Requests. When set to NO Intra Requests are sent using SIP
INFO Messages.
Range: YES / NO
Default: NO
ENABLE_MS_FEC
Enables the Microsoft FEC (Forward Error Correction)
support for RTV.
Range: Auto/No
Default: Auto
When set to Auto, FEC support is enabled. FEC uses the
DV00 option (DV=00 - one FEC per frame using XOR). When
set to No, FEC support is disabled.
ENABLE_NO_VIDEO_RESO
URCES_AUDIO_ONLY_MES
SAGE
Enables playing a voice message that Informs the participant
of the lack of Video Resources in the Collaboration Server
and that he/she is being connected as Audio Only.
Default: YES
ENABLE_SIP_PEOPLE_PLU
S_CONTENT
If security is of higher priority than SIP Content sharing, SIP
People+Content can be disabled by setting this System Flag
to NO. (The content management control (BFCP) utilizes an
unsecured channel (60002/TCP) even when SIP TLS is
enabled.)
Default: YES
ENABLE_SIP_PPC_FOR_AL
L_USER_AGENT
When set to YES, SIP People+Content and BFCP capabilities
are declared with all vendors’ endpoints.
Default: YES
Range: YES / NO
ENABLE_SIRENLPR
Enable / disable SirenLPR Audio Algorithm for use in IP
(H.323, SIP) calls in both CP and VSW conferences.
Range: YES / NO
Default: YES
ENABLE_SIRENLPR_SIP_E
NCRYPTION
Enables the SirenLPR audio algorithm when using encryption
with the SIP protocol.
Range: YES / NO
Default: NO
ENABLE_TC_PACKAGE
Enables or disables Network Traffic Control.
Range: YES / NO
Default: NO
ENABLE_TEXTUAL_CONFE
RENCE_STATUS
Set the value of this flag to NO to disable Text Indication. This
setting is recommended for MCUs running Telepresence
conferences.
Default: YES.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description
ENABLE_VIDEO_PREVIEW
Enables the Video Preview feature.
Default: YES.
For more details, see "Video Preview (AVC Only Participants)”
on page 3-20.
EXTERNAL_CONTENT_
DIRECTORY
The Web Server folder name. Change this name if you have
changed the default names used by the CMA application.
Default: /PlcmWebServices
EXTERNAL_CONTENT_IP
Enter the IP address of the CMA server in the format:
http://[IP address of the CMA server].
For example, http://172.22.185.89.
This flag is also the trigger for replacing the internal
Collaboration Server address book with the CMA global
Address Book.
When empty, the integration of the CMA address book with
the Collaboration Server is disabled.
EXTERNAL_CONTENT_PAS
SWORD
The password associated with the user name defined for the
Collaboration Server in the CMA server.
EXTERNAL_CONTENT_PO
RT
The CMA port used by the Collaboration Server to send and
receive XML requests/responses.
Default: 80.
EXTERNAL_CONTENT_US
ER
The login name defined for the Collaboration Server in the
CMA server defined in the format:
domain name/user name.
EXTERNAL_DB_DIRECTOR
Y
The URL of the external database application. For the sample
script application, the URL is:
<virtual directory>/SubmitQuery.asp
EXTERNAL_DB_IP
The IP address of the external database server, if one is used.
Default: 0.0.0.0
EXTERNAL_DB_LOGIN
The login name defined for the Collaboration Server in the
external database server.
Default: POLYCOM
EXTERNAL_DB_PASSWOR
D
The password associated with the user name defined for the
Collaboration Server on the external database server.
Default: POLYCOM
EXTERNAL_DB_PORT
The external database server port used by the Collaboration
Server to send and receive XML requests/responses.
For secure communications set the value to 443.
Default: 5005.
21-19
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
FADE_IN_FADE_OUT
Enables or disables the transition format between speakers in
a Continuous Presence conference.
When set to YES (default), the system fades in the current
speaker while fading out the previous speaker.
When set to NO, the transition is sharp and immediate.
FORCE_1X1_LAYOUT_ON_
CASCADED_LINK_CONNE
CTION
When set to YES, the cascaded link is automatically set to
Full Screen (1x1) in CP conferences forcing the speaker in
one cascaded conference to display in full window in the
video layout of the other conference.
Set this flag to NO when connecting to an MGC using a
cascaded link, if the MGC is functioning as a Gateway and
participant layouts on the other network are not to be forced to
1X1.
Default: YES
FORCE_AUDIO_CODEC_F
OR_MS_SINGLE_CORE
This flag is used to force the use of a specific Audio algorithm
when a Microsoft Office Communicator R2 or Lync Client is
hosted on a workstation with a single core processor. The flag
value overrides the default audio algorithm selection (G.722.1)
that may cause audio quality problems when G.722.1 is used
by Microsoft Clients running on single processor workstations.
This flag can be set to:
• AUTO – No forcing occurs and the Collaboration Server
negotiates a full set of Audio algorithm during capabilities
exchange.
•
G711A/U or G722 – Set this flag value according to the
hosting workstation capabilities. If the Collaboration
Server detects single core host during capabilities
exchange it will assign a G.711 or G.722 Audio algorithm
according to the flag value.
Possible values: AUTO, G711A, G711U, G722
Default: G711A
21-20
FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FO
R_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPA
NT_IN_WHEN_AVAILABLE_
MODE
When set to YES (default), Undefined participants must
connect encrypted, otherwise they are disconnected.
When set to NO and the conference Encryption in the Profile
is set to “Encrypt When Possible”, both Encrypted and Nonencrypted Undefined participants can connect to the same
conferences, where encryption is the preferred setting.
Default: YES
FORCE_G711A
Setting this flag forces the use of the G711A Audio Codec.
Possible values: YES / NO
Default: NO
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description
FORCE_RESOLUTION
Use this flag to specify IP (H.323 and SIP) endpoint types that
cannot receive wide screen resolution and that were not
automatically identified as such by the Collaboration Server.
Possible values are endpoint types, each type followed by a
semicolon. For example, when disabling Wide screen
resolution in an HDX endpoint enter the following string: HDX;
Note: Use this flag when the flag SEND_WIDE_RES_TO_IP
is set to YES.
FORCE_STATIC_MB_ENCO
DING
This flag supports Tandberg MXP mode of sending and
receiving video by IP endpoint in HD 720p resolution and
Video Quality set to Motion.
Default value: Tandberg MXP.
To disable this flag, enter NONE.
G728_IP
Enables or disables declaration of G.728 Audio Algorithm
capabilities in IP calls.
Range: YES / NO
Default: NO
H239_FORCE_CAPABILITIE
S
When the flag is set to NO, the Collaboration Server only
verifies that the endpoint supports the Content protocols: Up
to H.264 or H.263.
When set to YES, the Collaboration Server checks frame rate,
resolution and all other parameters of the Content mode as
declared by an endpoint before receiving or transmitting
Content.
Default: NO.
H264_HD_GRAPHICS_MIN_
CONTENT_RATE
Determines the minimum content rate (in kbps) required for
endpoints to share H.264 high quality content via the Content
channel When Content Setting is Graphics.
Range: 0-1536
Default: 128
H264_HD_HIGHRES_MIN_C
ONTENT_RATE
Determines the minimum content rate (in kbps) required for
endpoints to share H.264 high quality content via the Content
channel When Content Setting is Hi Resolution Graphics.
Range: 0-1536
Default: 256
H264_HD_LIVEVIDEO_MIN_
CONTENT_RATE
Determines the minimum content rate (in kbps) required for
endpoints to share H.264 high quality content via the Content
channel When Content Setting is Live Video.
Range: 0-1536
Default: 384
21-21
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
H323_FREE_VIDEO_RESO
URCES
For use in the Avaya Environment.
In the Avaya Environment there are features that involve
converting undefined dial-in participants’ connections from
video to audio (or vice versa). To ensure that the participants’
video resources remain available for them, and are not
released for use by Audio Only calls, set this flag to NO.
If set to YES, the Collaboration Server will release video
resources for Audio Only calls.
Default: YES.
HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASS
WORD
If set to YES:
Conference and Chairperson Passwords that are
displayed in the Collaboration Server Web Client or
Collaboration Server Manager are hidden when viewing
the properties of the conference.
•
•
Automatic generation of passwords (both conference and
chairperson passwords) is disabled, regardless of the
settings of the flags:
•
•
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT _LEN
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT_LEN.
For more information see "Automatic Password Generation
Flags” on page 21-36
Default: NO.
21-22
IP_LINK_ENVIRONMENT
In H.239-enabled MIH Cascading, when MGC is on level 1,
setting this flag to YES will adjust the line rate of HD Video
Switching conferences run on the RealPresence
Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 from 1920Kbps
to 18432, 100bits/sec to match the actual rate of the IP Only
HD Video Switching conference running on the MGC.
Note: If the flag MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT is set to NO, the
IP_ENVIRONMENT_LINK flag must be set to YES.
IP_RESPONSE_ECHO
When the System Flag value is YES, the Collaboration Server
will respond to ping (IPv4) commands. When set to NO, the
Collaboration Server will not respond to ping commands.
ITP_CERTIFICATION
When set to NO (default), this flag disables the telepresence
features in the Conference Profile.
Set the flag to YES to enable the telepresence features in the
Conference Profile (provided that the appropriate License is
installed).
LAN_REDUNDANCY
Enables Local Area Network port redundancy.
Default: YES
Range: YES / NO
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description
MAX_ALLOWED_RTV_HD_
FRAME_RATE
Defines the threshold Frame Rate (fps) in which RTV Video
Protocol initiates HD resolutions.
Flag values are as follows:
Range: 0-30 (fps)
Default: 0 (fps) - Implements any Frame Rate based on Lync
RTV Client capabilities
MAX_RTV_RESOLUTION
Enables you to override the Collaboration Server resolution
selection and limit it to a lower resolution, hence minimizing
the resource usage to 1 or 1.5 video resources per call
instead of 3 resources. Possible flag values are:
AUTO (default), QCIF, CIF, VGA or HD720.
MAX_TRACE_LEVEL
This flag indicates the debugging level for system support.
Possible values:
TRACE = t, DEBUG = d, INFO_NORMAL = n, INFO_HIGH =
i, WARN = w, ERROR = e, FATAL = f, OFF = o.
Default: n
MAXIMUM_RECORDING_LI
NKS
The maximum number of Recording Links available for
selection in the Recording Links list and the Conference
Profile - Recording dialog box.
Range: 1 - 100
Default: 20
MINIMUM_FRAME_RATE_T
HRESHOLD_FOR_SD
Low quality, low frame rate video is prevented from being sent
to endpoints by ensuring that an SD channel is not opened at
frame rates below the specified value.
Range: 0 -30
Default: 15
MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT
In H.239-enabled MIH Cascading, when MGC is on level 1,
setting this flag to YES will adjust the line rate of HD Video
Switching conferences run on the RealPresence
Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 from 1920Kbps
to 17897, 100bits/sec to match the actual rate of the HD Video
Switching conference running on the MGC.
Note: If the flag MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT is set to YES,
the IP_ENVIRONMENT_LINK flag must be set to NO.
MS_CAC_AUDIO_MIN_BR
The minimum bit rate for audio using the Microsoft CAC (Call
Admission Control) protocol. When the bit rate is lower than
the MS_CAC_AUDIO_MIN_BR, the call is not connected.
Range: 0 - 384
Default: 30
MS_CAC_VTDEO_MIN_BR
The minimum bit rate for video using the Microsoft CAC (Call
Admission Control) protocol. When the bit rate is lower than
the MS_CAC_VIDEO_MIN_BR, the call is not connected as a
video call..
Range: 0 - 384
Default: 40
21-23
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
21-24
Flag
Description
MS_KEEP_ALIVE_ENABLE
Enables the Microsoft keep alive flag.
Set it YES to ensure that endpoints such as HDX remain
connected to the conference for its duration when the
Collaboration Server is configured with FQDN address and
the Lync server is working with load balancing and holds more
than one address.
Range: YES/NO
Default: NO
MS_PROXY_REPLACE
Enables the proxy=replace parameter in the SIP Header.
When set to YES the outbound proxy to replaces the contact
information in the contact header with its own enabling other
clients and servers to reach the client using the proxy's IP
address, even if the client is behind a firewall.
Possible Values: YES / NO
Default: YES
NETWORK_IND_CRITICAL_
PERCENTAGE
The percentage degradation due to packet loss required to
change the indicator from Major to Critical.
Default: 5
NETWORK_IND_MAJOR_P
ERCENTAGE
The percentage degradation due to packet loss required to
change the indicator from Normal to Major.
Default: 1
NUM_OF_INITIATE_HELLO
_MESSAGE_IN_CALL_EST
ABLISHMENT
Indicates how many times the Hello (keep alive) message is
sent from the Collaboration Server to the endpoint in an
environment that includes a Session Border Controller (SBC)
with a 3-second interval between messages.
Range: 1 to 10.
Default:3
NUMBER_OF_REDIAL
Enter the number re dialing attempts required. Dialing may
continue until the conference is terminated.
Default: 3
PARTY_GATHERING_DURA
TION_SECONDS
The value of this System Flag sets the duration, in seconds, of
the display of the Gathering slide for participants that connect
to the conference after the conference start time.
Range: 0 - 3600
Default: 15
For more information see "Video Preview (AVC Only
Participants)” on page 3-20.
PASSWORD_FAILURE_LIMI
T
The number of unsuccessful Logins permitted in Ultra Secure
Mode.
Default: 3
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description
PCM_FECC
Determines whether the DTMF Code, ##, the Far/Arrow Keys
(FECC) or both will activate the PCM interface. This flag can
be also be used in combination with DTMF code definitions to
disable PCM.
Possible Values: YES / NO
Default: YES.
PCM_LANGUAGE
Determines the language of the PCM interface.
Possible Values are: ENGLISH, CHINESE_SIMPLIFIED,
CHINESE_TRADITIONAL, JAPANESE, GERMAN, FRENCH,
SPANISH, KOREAN, PORTUGUESE, ITALIAN, RUSSIAN,
NORWEGIAN
Default: Current Collaboration Server Web Client language.
PORT_GAUGE_ALARM
When set to YES, if system resource usage reaches the High
Port Usage Threshold as defined for the Port Gauges, System
Alerts in the form of an Active Alarm and an SNMP trap are
generated.
PRESERVE_ICE_CHANNEL
_IN_CASE_OF_LOCAL_MO
DE
When set to NO (default), local the ICE channel is closed after
applying CAC bandwidth management when Call Admission
Control is enabled in the local network.
When set to YES, the ICE channel is preserved open
throughout the call.
Default: NO
QOS_IP_AUDIO
Used to select the priority of audio packets when DiffServ is
the is the selected method for packet priority encoding.
Default: 0x88
QOS_IP_VIDEO
Used to select the priority of video packets when DiffServ is
the is the selected method for packet priority encoding.
Default: 0x88
REDIAL_INTERVAL_IN_SEC
ONDS
Enter the number of seconds that the Collaboration Server
should wait before successive re dialing attempts.
Range: 0-30 (Default: 10)
REMOVE_H323_EPC_CAP_
TO_NON_POLYCOM_VEND
OR
Used to disable EPC protocol. Use of Polycom’s proprietary
protocol, High Profile, EPC, may result in interoperability
issues when used with other vendors’ endpoints.
Possible values: YES / NO
Default: NO
REMOVE_H323_HIGH_PRO
FILE_CAP_TO_NON_POLY
COM_VENDOR
Used to disable High Profile protocol. Use of Polycom’s
proprietary protocol, High Profile, may result in interoperability
issues when used with other vendors’ endpoints.
Possible values: YES / NO
Default: NO
21-25
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
REMOVE_H323_HIGH_QUA
LITY_AUDIO_CAP_TO_NON
_POLYCOM_VENDOR
Description
Used to disable the following Audio Codecs:
G231
•
•
•
•
•
•
G7221C
G7221
G719
Siren22
Siren14
Possible values: YES / NO
Default: NO
REMOVE_H323_LPR_CAP_
TO_NON_POLYCOM_VEND
OR
Used to disable H.323 LPR protocol. Use of Polycom’s
proprietary protocol, H.323 LPR, may result in interoperability
issues when used with other vendors’ endpoints.
Possible values: YES / NO
Default: NO
RMX_MANAGEMENT_SEC
URITY_PROTOCOL
Enter the protocol to be used for secure communications.
Default: TLSV1_SSLV3 (both).
RTCP_FIR_ENABLE
When set to YES, the Full Intra Request (FIR) is sent as INFO
(and not RTCP).
Default = YES
RTCP_FLOW_CONTROL_T
MMBR_ENABLE
Enables/disables the SIP RTCP flow control parameter.
Default: YES
RTCP_FLOW_CONTROL_T
MMBR_INTERVAL
Modifies the interval (in seconds) of the TMMBR (Temporary
Maximum Media Stream Bit Rate) parameter for SIP RTCP
flow control.
Range: 5 - 999 (seconds)
Default: 180
RTCP_PLI_ENABLE
When set to YES, the (Picture Loss Indication (PLI) is sent as
INFO (and not RTCP).
Default = YES
SELF_IND_LOCATION
Change the location of the display of the Network Quality
Indicator of the participant’s own endpoint.
Default: BOTTOM_RIGHT
Range:
• TOP_ LEFT
•
•
•
•
•
21-26
TOP
TOP_RIGHT
BOTTOM_ LEFT
BOTTOM
BOTTOM_RIGHT
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
SEND_SIP_BUSY_UPON_R
ESOURCE_THRESHOLD
When set to YES, it enables the Collaboration Server to send
a busy notification to a SIP audio endpoint or a SIP device
when dialing in to the Collaboration Server whose audio
resource usage exceeded the Port Usage threshold.
When set to NO, the system does limit the SIP audio endpoint
connections to a certain capacity and will not send a busy
notification when the resource capacity threshold is
exceeded.
Default: NO
SEND_SRTP_MKI
Enables or disables the inclusion of the MKI field in SRTP
packets sent by the Collaboration Server.
Set the value to NO to disable the inclusion of the MKI field in
SRTP packets sent by the Collaboration Server when using
endpoints (eg. CounterPath Bria 3.2 Softphone) that cannot
decrypt SRTP-based audio and video streams if the MKI
(Master Key Identifier) field is included in SRTP packets sent
by the Collaboration Server.
Notes:
• This System Flag must be set to YES (default) when HDX
endpoints, Microsoft Office Communicator and Lync
Clients are used as they all support SRTP with MKI.
•
The system flag must be added and set to NO when
Siemens phones (Openstage and ODC WE) are used in
the environment as they do not support SRTP with MKI.
Default: YES
Polycom, Inc.
SEND_WIDE_RES_TO_IP
When set to YES (default), the Collaboration Server sends
wide screen resolution to IP endpoints. Endpoint types that do
not support wide screen resolutions are automatically
identified by the Collaboration Server according to their
product type and version and will not receive the wide
resolution even when the flag is set to YES.
When manually added and set to NO, the Collaboration
Server does not send wide screen resolution to all IP
endpoints.
Default: YES.
SET_DTMF_SOURCE_DIFF
_IN_SEC
If the ACCEPT_VOIP_DTMF_TYPE flag is set to 0 (Auto) this
flag determines the interval, in seconds after which the
Collaboration Server will accept both DTMF tones (inband)
and digits (outband).
Default: 120
21-27
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
21-28
Flag
Description
SIP_BFCP_DIAL_OUT_MOD
E
Controls BFCP’s use of UDP and TCP protocols for dial-out
SIP Client connections according to its value:
• AUTO (Default)
If SIP Client supports UDP, TCP or UDP and TCP:
- BFCP/UDP is selected as Content sharing protocol.
•
UDP
If SIP Client supports UDP or UDP and TCP:
- BFCP/UDP selected as Content sharing protocol.
If SIP Client supports TCP
- Cannot share Content.
•
TCP
If SIP Client supports TCP or UDP and TCP
- BFCP/TCP selected as Content sharing protocol.
If SIP Client supports UDP
- Cannot share Content.
SIP_DUAL_DIRECTION_TC
P_CON
In environments set to integration with Microsoft, if set to YES
the system sends a new request on the same TCP connection
(instead of opening a new one).
SIP_ENABLE_FECC
By default, FECC support for SIP endpoints is enabled at the
MCU level. You can disable it by manually adding this flag and
setting it to NO.
SIP_FAST_UPDATE_INTER
VAL_ENV
Default setting is 0 to prevent the Collaboration Server from
automatically sending an Intra request to all SIP endpoints.
Enter n (where n is any number of seconds other than 0) to let
the Collaboration Server automatically send an Intra request
to all SIP endpoints every n seconds.
It is recommended to set the flag to 0 and modify the
frequency in which the request is sent at the endpoint level
(as defined in the next flag).
SIP_FAST_UPDATE_INTER
VAL_EP
Default setting is 6 to let the Collaboration Server
automatically send an Intra request to Microsoft OC endpoints
only, every 6 seconds.
Enter any other number of seconds to change the frequency
in which the Collaboration Server send the Intra request to
Microsoft OC endpoints only.
Enter 0 to disable this behavior at the endpoint level (not
recommended).
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
SIP_FREE_VIDEO_RESOU
RCES
For use in Avaya and Microsoft Environments.
When set to NO (required for Avaya and Microsoft
environments), video resources that were allocated to
participants remain allocated to the participants as long as
they are connected to the conference even if the call was
changed to audio only. The system allocates the resources
according to the participant’s endpoint capabilities, with a
minimum of 1 CIF video resource.
Enter YES to enable the system to free the video resources
for allocation to other conference participants. The call
becomes an audio only call and video resources are not
guaranteed to participants if they want to add video again.
Default value in Microsoft environment: NO.
SIP_TCP_PORT_ADDR_ST
RATEGY
Setting the flag to 1 prevents the use of two sockets for one
SIP call - one for inbound traffic, one for outbound traffic. This
is done by inserting port “5060/5061” into the Route[0] header.
Possible values:
• 0 - Inbound traffic on port 5060/5061 outbound traffic on
port 60000
•
1 - Both inbound and outbound traffic on port 5060/5061
Default: 1
Polycom, Inc.
SOCKET_ACTIVITY_TIMEO
UT
For use in Microsoft environments.
When the MS_KEEP_ALIVE System Flag is set to YES, the
value of this flag is used as the MS Keep-Alive Timer value.
SUPPORT_HIGH _PROFILE
Enables or disables the support of High Profile video protocol
in CP conferences. This flag is specific to CP conferences
and has no effect on VSW conferences.
Range: YES / NO
Default: YES
TC_BURST_SIZE
This flag regulates the Traffic Control buffer or maxburst size
as a percentage of the participant line rate.
Range: 1-30.
TC_LATENCY_SIZE
This flag limits the latency (in milliseconds) or the number of
bytes that can be present in a queue.
Range: 1-1000 (in milliseconds).
TCP_RETRANSMISSION_TI
MEOUT
The number of seconds the server will wait for a TCP client to
answer a call before closing the connection.
Default = 5 (seconds)
VSW_CIF_HP_THRESHOLD
_BITRATE
Controls the Minimum Threshold Line Rate (kbps) for CIF
resolution for High Profile-enabled VSW conferences.
Default: 64
VSW_HD1080p_HP_THRES
HOLD_BITRATE
Controls the Minimum Threshold Line Rate (kbps) for
HD1080p resolution for High Profile-enabled VSW
conferences.
Default: 1024
21-29
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-2 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
VSW_HD720p30_HP_THRE
SHOLD_BITRATE
Controls the Minimum Threshold Line Rate (kbps) for
HD720p30 resolution for High Profile-enabled VSW
conferences.
Default: 512
VSW_HD720p5060_HP_THRESHOLD_BITR
ATE
Controls the Minimum Threshold Line Rate (kbps) for
HD720p50 and HD720p50 resolutions for High Profileenabled VSW conferences.
Default: 832
VSW_RATE_TOLERANCE_
PERECENT
Determines the percentage of bandwidth that can be
deducted from the required bandwidth to allow participants to
connect to the conference.
For example, a value of 20 will allow a participant to connect
to the conference if the allocated line rate is up to 20% lower
than the conference line rate (or between 80% to 100% of the
required bandwidth).
Range: 0 - 75
Default: 0
VSW_SD_HP_THRESHOLD
_BITRATE
Controls the Minimum Threshold Line Rate (kbps) for SD
resolution for High Profile-enabled VSW conferences.
Default: 128
WRONG_NUMBER_DIAL_
RETRIES
The number of re-dial attempts for a wrong destination
number or a wrong destination number time-out.
Range: 0 - 5
Default: 3
A flag value of 0 means that no redials are attempted.
4
Click OK to close the New Flag dialog box.
The new flag is added to the flags list.
5
Click OK to close the System Flags dialog box.
For flag changes (including deletion) to take effect, reset the MCU. For more information see
"Resetting the Collaboration Server” on page 20-56.
Manually Adding Flags to the CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS Tab
Using the procedure to manually add flags to the System Configuration, the following flags
can be manually added to the CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS tab:
Table 21-3 Manually Added Flags - CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS Tab
21-30
Flag
Description
CS_ENABLE_EPC
Add this flag with the value YES (default value is NO) to enable endpoints
that support People+Content and require a different signaling (for example,
FX endpoints) to receive Content.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-3 Manually Added Flags - CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS Tab
Flag
Description
H245_TUNNELING
For use in the Avaya Environment.
In the Avaya Environment, set the flag to YES to ensure that H.245 is
tunneled through H.225. Both H.245 and H.225 will use the same signaling
port.
Default: NO.
H323_TIMERS_SE
T_INDEX
Enables or disables H.323 index timer according to standard or proprietary
H.323 protocol.
Possible values:
0 (Default) - Sets the H.323 index timer to Polycom proprietary.
1 - Sets the H.323 index timer based on the H.323 Standard
recommendation.
Note: For homologation and certification testing, this flag must be set to 1.
MS_UPDATE_CON
TACT_REMOVE
When the flag value is set to:
YES - The Contact Header is removed from the UPDATE message that
is sent periodically to the endpoints.
This is required when the SIP Server Type field of the IP Network
Service is set as Microsoft. Removal of the Contact Header from the
UPDATE message is required specifically by OCS R2.
•
•
Polycom, Inc.
NO - The Contact Header is included in the UPDATE message. This is
the system behavior when the SIP Server Type is set as Generic.
This is required when the Collaboration Server is configured to accept
calls from both Microsoft LYNC and Cisco CUCM as CUCM requires the
Contact Header.
QOS_IP_SIGNALIN
G
Used to select the priority of IP packets when DiffServ is the is the selected
method for packet priority encoding.
Range: 0x##
Default: 0x00
SIP_DUAL_DIRECT
ION_TCP_CON
For use in Microsoft environments.
When set to YES, sends a new request on the same TCP connection
instead of opening a new connection.
Range: YES/NO
Default: NO
SIP_ST_ENFORCE
_VAL
For use in Microsoft environments.
Session timer interval in seconds.
Default = YES
SIP_TIMERS_SET_
INDEX
SIP Timer type timeout settings according to standard or proprietary
protocol.
Possible values are:
0 - Default
1 - SIP Standard recommendation.
Note: For homologation and certification testing, this flag must be set to 1.
SIP_TO_TAG_CON
FLICT
For use in Microsoft environments.
In case of forking, a tag conflict will be resolved when Status 200 OK is
received from an answering UA.
Default: YES
21-31
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Deleting a Flag
To delete a flag:
1 In the System Flags dialog box, select the flag to delete and click the Delete Flag button.
2
In the confirmation message box, click Yes to confirm.
3
Click OK to close the System Flags dialog box.
Auto Layout Configuration
The Auto Layout option lets the Collaboration Server automatically select the conference
video layout based on the number of participants currently connected to the conference.
You can modify the default selection of the conference video layout to customize it to your
conferencing preferences.
Customizing the Default Auto Layout
The default Auto Layout is controlled by 13 flags:
PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_0, ... , PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_12
Each of the 11 Auto Layout flags can be left at its default value, or set to any of the Possible
Values listed in Table 21-4.
The flag that controls the Auto Layout you wish to modify must be added to the System
Configuration file. For more information see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
Table 21-4 Flags: PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_0,...,10
Flag Name: PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_n (n = Number of Participants)
n
21-32
Default Value
Possible Values
0
CP_LAYOUT_1X1
CP_LAYOUT_1X1
1
CP_LAYOUT_1X1
CP_LAYOUT_1X2
2
CP_LAYOUT_1X1
CP_LAYOUT_1X2HOR
3
CP_LAYOUT_1x2VER
CP_LAYOUT_1X2VER
4
CP_LAYOUT_2X2
CP_LAYOUT_2X1
5
CP_LAYOUT_2X2
CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR
6
CP_LAYOUT_1P5
CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR_UP
7
CP_LAYOUT_1P5
CP_LAYOUT_1P2VER
8
CP_LAYOUT_1P7
CP_LAYOUT_2X2
9
CP_LAYOUT_1P7
CP_LAYOUT_1P3HOR_UP
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-4 Flags: PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_0,...,10 (Continued)
Flag Name: PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_n (n = Number of Participants)
n
10
11
12
Default Value
Possible Values
CP_LAYOUT_1P7
CP_LAYOUT_1P3VER
CP_LAYOUT_2P8
CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR
CP_LAYOUT_1P12
CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P4VER
CP_LAYOUT_1P5
CP_LAYOUT_1P7
CP_LAYOUT_1P8UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P8CENT
CP_LAYOUT_1P8HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_3X3
CP_LAYOUT_2P8
CP_LAYOUT_1P12
CP_LAYOUT_4X4
Polycom, Inc.
21-33
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Example:
Table 21-5 illustrates the effect of modifying the PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_5 flag in
conferences with fewer or more participants than the number of windows selected in the
default layout.
Table 21-5 Example: Modifying PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_5 Flag
Flag
Set to
Possible
Value
Number of
Participants
CP_LAYOUT
_1x2VER
Participant’s View
3
7
Voice activated switching displays the
current speaker in the left window of the
video layout and only the two last speakers
are displayed.
PREDEFINED
_AUTO_LAYOUT_5
3
Default =
Voice activated switching displays the
current speaker in the large (top left)
window of the video layout.
CP_LAYOUT
_1P5
7
Voice activated switching displays the
current speaker in the top left window of
the video layout.
LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag Values
Table 21-6 lists the value for each video layout that can be defined for the
LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag. It allows the selection of video layout
that will be displayed on the screen of the legacy endpoint when switching to Content
mode.
Table 21-6 LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag Values
Layout
Flag Value
CP_LAYOUT_1X1
21-34
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
Table 21-6 LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag Values (Continued)
Layout
Flag Value
CP_LAYOUT_1X2
CP_LAYOUT_1X2HOR
CP_LAYOUT_1X2VER
CP_LAYOUT_2X1
CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR
CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P2VER
CP_LAYOUT_2X2
CP_LAYOUT_1P3HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P3VER
CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR
CP_LAYOUT_1P4VER
CP_LAYOUT_1P5
CP_LAYOUT_1P7
CP_LAYOUT_1P8UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P8CENT
CP_LAYOUT_1P8HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_3X3
Polycom, Inc.
21-35
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-6 LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag Values (Continued)
Layout
Flag Value
CP_LAYOUT_2P8
CP_LAYOUT_1P12
CP_LAYOUT_4X4
CS_ENABLE_EPC Flag
Endpoints that support People+ may require a different signaling (for example, FX
endpoints). For these endpoints, manually add the flag CS_ENABLE_EPC with the value
YES (default value is NO) to the CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS tab.
Automatic Password Generation Flags
The Collaboration Server can be configured to automatically generate conference and
chairperson passwords when the Conference Password and Chairperson Password fields are left
blank.
Guidelines
21-36
•
If the flag HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD is set to YES, the automatic generation
of passwords (both conference and chairperson passwords) is disabled, regardless of
the settings of the flags NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_LEN and
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT _LEN.
•
The automatic generation of conference passwords is enabled/disabled by the flag
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_LEN.
•
The automatic generation of chairperson passwords is enabled/disabled by the flag
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT _LEN.
•
The automatically generated passwords will be numeric and random.
•
The passwords are automatically assigned to ongoing conferences, Meeting Rooms and
Reservations at the end of the creation process (once they are added to the
Collaboration Server).
•
Automatically assigned passwords can be manually changed through the Conference/
Meeting Room/Reservation Properties dialog boxes.
•
Deleting an automatically created password will not cause the system to generate a new
password and the new password must be added manually or the field can be left blank.
•
If a password was assigned to the conference via Microsoft Outlook using the PCO addin, the system does not change these passwords and additional passwords will not be
generated (for example, if only the conference password was assigned a chairperson
password will not be assigned).
•
If the flag values (i.e. the password lengths) are changed, passwords that were already
assigned to conferences, Meeting Rooms and Reservations will not change and they can
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 21-System Configuration Flags
be activated using the existing passwords. Only new conferencing entities will be
affected by the change.
Do not enable this option in an environment that includes a Polycom DMA system.
Enabling the Automatic Generation of Passwords
To enable the automatic generation of passwords, the following flags have to be defined:
Table 21-7 Automatic Password Generation Flags
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description
HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD
NO (default) - Conference and chairperson passwords
are displayed when viewing the Conference/Meeting
Room/ Reservation properties. It also enables the
automatic generation of passwords in general.
Yes - Conference and Chairperson Passwords are
hidden (they are replaced by asterisks). It also disables
the automatic generation of passwords.
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_MIN_LEN
Enter the minimum number of characters required for
conference passwords.
Possible values: 0 – 16.
0 (default) means no minimum length.
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_MIN_LEN
Enter the minimum number of characters required for
chairperson passwords.
Possible values: 0 – 16.
0 (default) means no minimum length. However this
setting cannot be applied when the Collaboration Server
is in Ultra Secure Mode.
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_MAX_LEN
Enter the maximum number of characters permitted for
conference passwords.
Possible values: 0 – 16
16 (default) - Conference password maximum length is
16 characters.
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_MAX_LEN
Enter the maximum number of characters permitted for
chairperson passwords.
Possible values: 0 – 16
16 (default) - chairperson password maximum length is
16 characters.
21-37
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table 21-7 Automatic Password Generation Flags (Continued)
Flag
Description
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_L
EN
This flag enables or disables the automatic generation of
conference passwords. The length of the automatically
generated passwords is determined by the flag value.
Possible values: 0 – 16, 6 default
Enter 0 to disable the automatic generation of
passwords.
Any value other than 0 enables the automatic generation
of conference passwords provided the flag
HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD is set to NO.
If the default is used, in non-secured mode the system
will automatically generate conference passwords that
contain 6 characters.
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT
_LEN
This flag enables or disables the automatic generation of
chairperson passwords. The length of the automatically
generated passwords is determined by the flag value.
Possible values: 0 – 16, 6 default
Enter 0 to disable the automatic generation of
passwords.
Any value other than 0 enables the automatic generation
of chairperson passwords provided the flag
HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD is set to NO.
If the default is used, in non-secured mode the system
will automatically generate chairperson passwords that
contain 6 characters.
If the default password length defined by the NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_LEN or
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT LEN does not fall within the range defined by the
minimum and maximum length an appropriate fault is added to the Faults list.
21-38
Polycom, Inc.
22
RealPresence Collaboration Server
800s Hardware Monitoring
The status and properties of the MCU hardware components can be viewed and monitored
in the Hardware Monitor list pane.
Viewing the Status of the Hardware Components
The Hardware Monitor pane displays the hardware component, its present status,
temperature and voltage.
To view the status of the Hardware Components on the RealPresence Collaboration
Server 800s:
>> In the RealPresence Collaboration ServerManagement pane, click the Hardware Monitor
button.
The Hardware Monitor pane is displayed.
The Hardware Monitor pane displays the following information:
Table 22-1 Hardware Monitor Pane Columns
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Slot
Displays an icon according to the type of hardware component. The
icon indicates the hardware status as an exclamation point (!)
indicates errors in the hardware component.
Type
The type of the hardware component.
Status
The current status of the hardware component; Normal, Major, or
Critical.
22-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Table 22-1 Hardware Monitor Pane Columns (Continued)
Field
Description
Temperature
Monitors the temperature of the hardware components; Normal,
Major and Critical.
Note: Critical condition invokes a system shut down.
Voltage
The voltage threshold of the hardware component; either Normal or
Major.
Hardware Monitor Toolbar
The following buttons appear in the toolbar of the Hardware Monitor:
Table 22-2 Hardware Monitor Toolbar Buttons
Button
Name
Description
System Reset
Resets and restarts the system. Resetting saves settings and
information that you changed in the system, i.e. IP Services,
etc...
System Shut Down
Shuts down the system into a standby mode. When the user in
the Collaboration Server Manager/Client presses the System
Shut Down (red) button in the Hardware Monitor toolbar, the
system should enter a standby mode and the LED turns ON.
Only the media and control unit cards are in a standby mode.
Shelf Manager remains active.
Turn the system OFF/ON to exit the standby mode.
Viewing the Properties of RealPresence Collaboration
Server 800s Hardware Components
The properties displayed for the hardware components will vary according to the type of
component viewed. These component properties can be grouped as follows:
•
MCU Properties (RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s)
•
Supporting Hardware Components Properties (FANS, LAN)
No properties are provided for Power Supply (PWR).
22-2
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 22-RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Hardware Monitoring
The Hardware Properties dialog box has the following structure:
Slot number
Hardware component type
Component
Information
(changes
according to
selected
type)
To view the MCU Properties:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, either double-click or right-click and select Properties for
RealPresence Collaboration Server, slot 4.
The following information is displayed:
Table 22-3 MCU Properties - General Info
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Hardware Version
The version of the server hardware.
Bios Version
The version of the BIOS installed on the server.
Hardware Serial
Number
The hardware serial number.
Hardware Model
Always blank.
Hardware Part
Number
The hardware part number.
22-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
Table 22-3 MCU Properties - General Info (Continued)
Field
Description
Network Interface Cards (NIC)
2
NIC number (1-4)
The number of the NIC.
NIC MAC Address
The physical address of the NIC.
Click the Active Alarms tab to view alarms related to the RealPresence Collaboration
Server, i.e. temperatures, CPU usage, memory usage, voltages and main power sensors.
The Active Alarms dialog box displays fields that relate to faults and errors detected on
the RealPresence Collaboration Server by sensors. The Active Alarms dialog box is
divided into two sections: Hardware Alarm List and Software Alarm List.
The Hardware Alarms list and software alarm list can each be saved to an Excel file
(*.xls) by clicking the Save hardware Alarm List and Save SW Alarm List buttons
respectively. The severity of the alarms is color coded: Critical (RED), Major (ORANGE)
and Normal (GREEN).
3
Click Close to return to the Hardware Monitor pane.
FAN Properties:
The RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s chassis contains 14 fans that regulate the unit’s
temperature. If the temperature increases, the fans speed will increase and vice-versa. A
“Critical” condition in the fans operation will result in a system shut down.
22-4
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 22-RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Hardware Monitoring
To access the Fan properties:
>> In the Hardware Monitor pane, either double-click or right-click and select Properties for
FANS.
Table 22-4 FANS Properties - General Info
Field
Description
General Settings
Min. Speed Level (rpm)
The minimum speed level of the fans.
Max. Speed Level (rpm)
The maximum speed level of the fans.
Normal Operating Level
(rpm)
The normal operating level defined for the fans.
Current Fan Level (rpm)
The current operating level of the fans.
Fans
Fan number (1-14)
Fan numbering
Speed (rpm)
Present speed of a fan (1-14).
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN4 Properties:
The Collaboration Server unit’s chassis contains 4 external LAN connectors which register
the following information listed below. The information will be refreshed every second and
also contains a peek detector to log the maximal values, since the last peek values reset.
To access the properties of LAN connector:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, double-click anywhere on the line for LANS.
Polycom, Inc.
22-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
The Lan List is displayed:
2
Either double-click or right-click and select Properties for the Lan connector.
The properties for the LAN connector are displayed:
22-6
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 22-RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Hardware Monitoring
Diagnostics
Your system comes with a Hardware Diagnostics USB memory stick. If required for
troubleshooting, Polycom Global Services personnel may ask you to run hardware
diagnostics.
The appliance will not be operational during the running of diagnostics.
The following are required to run the diagnostics:
•
Hardware diagnostics USB memory stick
•
USB Keyboard
•
VGA Monitor
To perform diagnostics:
1 Turn off the RealPresence Collaboration Server.
2
Connect a keyboard and a VGA monitor.
3
Insert the USB memory stick containing the hardware diagnostics utility into any of the
system’s USB ports.
4
Turn on the RealPresence Collaboration Server.
The server boots up.
5
Polycom, Inc.
Press F11.
22-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
The Boot Manager Main Menu loads.
6
Select Bios Boot Menu.
The Bios Boot Manager is displayed.
7
Using the Up/Down arrows go to Hard drive C:.
A window will display showing two options.
8
Select Front USB.
If the USB memory stick is inserted into the back of the server this option will be called Back USB.
22-8
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter 22-RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Hardware Monitoring
The RealPresence Collaboration Server loads the hardware diagnostics utility.
9
Select the desired diagnostic mode.
If none is selected the Loop mpmemory and diagnostic in batch mode tests will be performed
automatically.
The diagnostics will continue running until stopped. One cycle of the diagnostics may
take up to 30 minutes to complete.
The results are saved in a file called auto.txt to the USB memory stick.
10 Press Escape to stop the diagnostics.
11 Remove the USB memory stick.
12 Optional: Disconnect the keyboard and monitor.
If the RealPresence Collaboration Server is in secure mode the keyboard and monitor
must be disconnected, otherwise the RealPresence Collaboration Server will revert to
non-secure mode when the RealPresence Collaboration Server is started.
13 Turn off the RealPresence Collaboration Server, then turn it On.
14 Contact Polycom Global Services for further instructions.
Polycom, Inc.
22-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s
22-10
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix A
Disconnection Causes
If a participant was unable to connect to a conference or was disconnected from a
conference, the Connection Status tab in the Participant Properties dialog box indicates the
call disconnection cause. In some cases, a possible solution may be displayed.
A video participant who is unable to connect the video channels, but is able to connect as an
audio only participant, is referred to as a Secondary participant. For Secondary participants,
the Connection Status tab in the Participant Properties dialog box indicates the video
disconnection cause. In some cases, a possible solution may be indicated.
The table below lists the call disconnection causes that can be displayed in the Call
Disconnection Cause field and provides an explanation of each message
IP Disconnection Causes
Table A-1
Polycom, Inc.
Call Disconnection Causes
Disconnection Cause
Description
Disconnected by User
The user disconnected the endpoint from the
conference.
Remote device did not open the
encryption signaling channel
The endpoint did not open the encryption signaling
channel.
Remote devices selected encryption
algorithm does not match the local
selected encryption algorithm
The encryption algorithm selected by the endpoint does
not match the MCU's encryption algorithm.
Resources deficiency
Insufficient resources available.
Call close. Call closed by MCU
The MCU disconnected the call.
H323 call close. No port left for audio
Insufficient audio ports.
H323 call close. No port left for video
The required video ports exceed the number of ports
allocated to video in fixed ports.
H323 call close. No port left for FECC
The required data ports exceed the number of ports
allocated to data in fixed ports.
H323 call close. No control port left
The required control ports exceed the number of ports
allocated to control data in fixed ports.
H323 call close. No port left for videocont
The required video content ports exceed the number of
ports allocated to video content in fixed ports.
A-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1
A-2
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
H323 call closed. Small bandwidth
The gatekeeper allocated insufficient bandwidth to the
connection with the endpoint.
H323 call closed. No port left
There are no free ports left in the IP card.
Caller not registered
The calling endpoint is not registered in the gatekeeper.
H323 call closed. ARQ timeout
The endpoint sent an ARQ message to the gatekeeper,
but the gatekeeper did not respond before timeout.
H323 call closed. DRQ timeout
The endpoint sent a DRQ message to the gatekeeper,
but the gatekeeper did not respond before timeout.
H323 call closed. Alt Gatekeeper failure
An alternate gatekeeper failure occurred.
H323 call closed. Gatekeeper failure
A gatekeeper failure occurred.
H323 call closed. Remote busy
The endpoint was busy. (Applicable only to dial-out)
H323 call closed. Normal
The call ended normally, for example, the endpoint
disconnected.
H323 call closed. Remote reject
The endpoint rejected the call.
H323 call closed. Remote unreachable
The call remained idle for more than 30 seconds and
was disconnected because the destination device did
not answer. Possible causes can be due to network
problems, the gatekeeper could not find the endpoint's
address, or the endpoint was busy or unavailable (for
example, the “do not disturb” status is selected).
H323 call closed. Unknown reason
The reason for the disconnection is unknown, for
example, the endpoint disconnected without giving a
reason.
H323 call closed. Faulty destination
address
Incorrect address format.
H323 call closed. Small bandwidth
The gatekeeper allocated insufficient bandwidth to the
connection with the endpoint.
H323 call closed. Gatekeeper reject
ARQ
The gatekeeper rejected the endpoint's ARQ.
H323 call closed. No port left
There are no ports left in the IP card.
H323 call closed. Gatekeeper DRQ
The gatekeeper sent a DRQ.
H323 call closed. No destination IP
address
For internal use.
H323 call. Call failed prior or during the
capabilities negotiation stage
The endpoint did not send its capabilities to the
gatekeeper.
H323 call closed. Audio channels didn't
open before timeout
The endpoint did not open the audio channel.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter A-Disconnection Causes
Table A-1
Polycom, Inc.
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
H323 call closed. Remote sent bad
capability
There was a problem in the capabilities sent by the
endpoint.
H323 call closed. Local capability wasn't
accepted by remote
The endpoint did not accept the capabilities sent by the
gatekeeper.
H323 failure
Internal error occurred.
H323 call closed. Remote stop
responding
The endpoint stopped responding.
H323 call closed. Master slave problem
A People + Content cascading failure occurred.
SIP bad name
The conference name is incompatible with SIP
standards.
SIP bad status
A general IP card error occurred.
SIP busy everywhere
The participant's endpoints were contacted successfully,
but the participant is busy and does not wish to take the
call at this time.
SIP busy here
The participant's endpoint was contacted successfully,
but the participant is currently not willing or able to take
additional calls.
SIP capabilities don't match
The remote device capabilities are not compatible with
the conference settings.
SIP card rejected channels
The IP card could not open the media channels.
SIP client error 400
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 400 (Bad Request)
response.
The request could not be understood due to malformed
syntax.
SIP client error 402
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 402 (Payment
Required) response.
SIP client error 405
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 405 (Method Not
Allowed) response.
The method specified in the Request-Line is understood,
but not allowed for the address identified by the
Request-URI.
SIP client error 406
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 406 (Not
Acceptable) resources.
The remote endpoint cannot accept the call because it
does not have the necessary responses. The resource
identified by the request is only capable of generating
response entities that have content characteristics not
acceptable according to the Accept header field sent in
the request.
A-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1
A-4
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
SIP client error 407
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 407 (Proxy
Authentication Required) response.
The client must first authenticate itself with the proxy.
SIP client error 409
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 409 (Conflict)
response.
The request could not be completed due to a conflict
with the current state of the resource.
SIP client error 411
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 411 (Length
Required) response.
The server refuses to accept the request without a
defined Content Length.
SIP client error 413
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 413 (Request Entity
Too Large) response.
The server is refusing to process a request because the
request entity is larger than the server is willing or able
to process.
SIP client error 414
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 414 (Request-URI
Too Long) response.
The server is refusing to service the request because
the Request-URI is longer than the server is willing to
interpret.
SIP client error 420
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 420 (Bad
Extension) response.
The server did not understand the protocol extension
specified in a Require header field.
SIP client error 481
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 481 (Call/
Transaction Does Not Exist) response.
SIP client error 482
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 482 (Loop
Detected) response.
SIP client error 483
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 483 (Too Many
Hops) response.
SIP client error 484
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 484 (Address
Incomplete) response.
The server received a request with a To address or
Request-URI that was incomplete.
SIP client error 485
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 485 (Ambiguous)
response.
The address provided in the request (Request-URI) was
ambiguous.
SIP client error 488
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 488 (Not
Acceptable Here) response.
Polycom, Inc.
Chapter A-Disconnection Causes
Table A-1
Polycom, Inc.
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
SIP forbidden
The SIP server rejected the request.
The server understood the request, but is refusing to
fulfill it.
SIP global failure 603
A SIP Global Failure 603 (Decline) response was
returned.
The participant's endpoint was successfully contacted,
but the participant explicitly does not wish to or cannot
participate.
SIP global failure 604
A SIP Global Failure 604 (Does Not Exist Anywhere)
response was returned.
The server has authoritative information that the user
indicated in the Request-URI does not exist anywhere.
SIP global failure 606
A SIP Global Failure 606 (Not Acceptable) response
was returned.
SIP gone
The requested resource is no longer available at the
Server and no forwarding address is known.
SIP moved permanently
The endpoint moved permanently. The user can no
longer be found at the address in the Request-URI.
SIP moved temporarily
The remote endpoint moved temporarily.
SIP not found
The endpoint was not found.
The server has definitive information that the user does
not exist at the domain specified in the Request-URI.
SIP redirection 300
A SIP Redirection 300 (Multiple Choices) response was
returned.
SIP redirection 305
A SIP Redirection 305 (Use Proxy) response was
returned.
The requested resource MUST be accessed through the
proxy given by the Contact field.
SIP redirection 380
A SIP Redirection 380 (Alternative Service) response
was returned.
The call was not successful, but alternative services are
possible.
SIP remote cancelled call
The endpoint canceled the call.
SIP remote closed call
The endpoint ended the call.
SIP remote stopped responding
The endpoint is not responding.
SIP remote unreachable
The endpoint could not be reached.
SIP request terminated
The endpoint terminated the request.
The request was terminated by a BYE or CANCEL
request.
SIP request timeout
The request was timed out.
A-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1
A-6
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
SIP server error 500
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 500 (Server
Internal Error) response.
The server encountered an unexpected condition that
prevented it from fulfilling the request.
SIP server error 501
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 501 (Not
Implemented) response.
The server does not support the functionality required to
fulfill the request.
SIP server error 502
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 502 (Bad
Gateway) response.
The server, while acting as a gateway or proxy, received
an invalid response from the downstream server it
accessed in attempting to fulfill the request.
SIP server error 503
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 503 (Service
Unavailable) response.
The server is temporarily unable to process the request
due to a temporary overloading or maintenance of the
server.
SIP server error 504
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 504 (Server
Time-out) response.
The server did not receive a timely response from an
external server it accessed in attempting to process the
request.
SIP server error 505
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 505 (Version Not
Supported) response.
The server does not support, or refuses to support, the
SIP protocol version that was used in the request.
SIP temporarily not available
The participant's endpoint was contacted successfully
but the participant is currently unavailable (e.g., not
logged in or logged in such a manner as to preclude
communication with the participant).
SIP remote device did not respond in the
given time frame
The endpoint did not respond in the given time frame.
SIP trans error TCP Invite
A SIP Invite was sent via TCP, but the endpoint was not
found.
SIP transport error
Unable to initiate connection with the endpoint.
SIP unauthorized
The request requires user authentication.
SIP unsupported media type
The server is refusing to service the request because
the message body of the request is in a format not
supported by the requested resource for the requested
method.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix B
Alarms and Faults
Alarms
Table B-1
Alarms
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
A new activation key was loaded. Reset
the system.
A new activation key was loaded:
Reset the MCU.
A new version was installed. Reset the
system.
A new version was installed:
Reset the MCU.
Alarm generated by a Central Signaling
component
A system alert was generated by a component of the Central Signaling.
Alarm generated by an internal
component
A system alert was generated by an internal system component.
Automatic reset is unavailable in Safe
Mode
The system switches to safe mode if many resets occur during startup. To
prevent additional resets, and allow the system to complete the startup
process the automatic system resets are blocked.
Backup of audit files is required
If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is set to YES and a Cyclic
File reaches a file retention time or file storage capacity limit, the user is
alerted that audit files need to be backed up.
Backup of CDR files is required
If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is set to YES and a Cyclic
File reaches a file retention time or file storage capacity limit, the user is
alerted that CDR files need to be backed up.
Backup of log files is required
If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is set to YES and a Cyclic
File reaches a file retention time or file storage capacity limit, the user is
alerted that log files need to be backed up.
Central signaling component failure
Possible explanations:
• Central signaling component failure; unit type:
[NonComponent\CSMngnt\CSH323\CSSIP]
Central Signaling indicating Faulty status
•
Central signaling component failure; unit type: (invalid:
[NonComponent\CSMngnt\CSH323\CSSIP])
•
Central signaling component failure - Invalid failure type. Unit id: [id], Type:
[NonComponent\CSMngnt\CSH323\CSSIP], Status:
[Ok\Failed\Recovered]
•
Central signaling component failure - Invalid failure type
Central signaling failure detected in IP Network Service.
Central Signaling indicating Recovery
status
Polycom, Inc.
B-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Central Signaling startup failure
Configuration of external database did not
complete.
CPU IPMC software was not updated.
CPU slot ID not identified
The CPU slot ID required for Ethernet Settings was not provided by the Shelf
Management.
D channel cannot be established
DEBUG mode enabled
Possible explanations:
• System is running in DEBUG mode.
•
System DEBUG mode initiated.
DEBUG mode flags in use
System is using DEBUG CFG flags.
DMA not supported by IDE device
Possible explanations:
• DMA (direct memory access) not supported by IDE device: Incompatible
flash card / hard disk being used.
•
Flash card / hard drive are not properly connected to the board / one of the
IDE channels is disconnected.
•
DMA was manually disabled for testing.
DNS configuration error
DNS not configured in IP Network Service
Encryption Server Error. Failed to
generate the encryption key
FIPS 140 test failed while generating the new encryption key.
Error in external database certificate
Error reading MCU time
Failed to read MCU time configuration file ([status]).
External NTP servers failure
Network error or configuration error
Failed to access DNS server
Failed to access DNS server.
Failed to configure the Media card IP
address
Possible reasons for the failure:
• Failure type: [OK Or Not supported.
•
•
•
Does not exist Or IP failure.
Duplicate IP Or DHCP failure.
VLAN failure Or Invalid: [status_Number].
Failed to configure the Users list in Linux
External NTP server failure:
NTP server failure: [server0_ip], [server1_ip], [server2_ipStr].
Failed to connect to application server
Possible reasons for the failure:
• Failed to connect to application server:
•
B-2
Failed to establish connection to server, url = [url].
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix B-Alarms and Faults
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Failed to connect to recording device
The MCU could not connect to any of the defined NTP server for
synchronization due to the remote server error.
Failed to connect to SIP registrar
Cannot establish connection with SIP registrar.
Failed to create Default Profile
Possible reasons for the failure:
• Failed to validate the Default Profile.
•
Failed to initialize the file system
Failed to add the Default Profile.
Possible reasons for the failure:
Failed to initialize the file system.
•
•
Failed to initialize the file system and create the CDR index.
Failed to open Users list file
Failed to register with DNS server
Failure in initialization of SNMP agent.
Fallback version is being used
Fallback version is being used. Restore current version. Version being used:
[running version]; Current version: [current version].
File error
Possible reasons for the file error:
• XML file does not exist [file name]; Error no: [error number].
•
•
•
Not authorized to open XML file [file name]; Error no: [error number].
Unknown problem in opening XML file [file name]; Error no: [error number].
Failed to parse XML file [file name].
File system scan failure
File system scan failure:
Failed to scan [file system path].
File system space shortage
File system space shortage:
Out of file system space in [file system path]; Free space: [free space
percentage]% ([free space] Blocks) - Minimum free space required: [minimum
free space percentage]% ([minimum free space] Blocks).
Polycom, Inc.
B-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Gatekeeper failure
Possible reasons for the Gatekeeper failure:
• Failed to register to alternate Gatekeeper.
Gatekeeper failure (cont.)
•
Gatekeeper discovery state.
- Check GK IP address (GUI, ping)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gatekeeper DNS Host name not found.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to Generic Data.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid terminal alias.
Gatekeeper Registration Timeout.
Gatekeeper rejected GRQ due to invalid revision.
Gatekeeper rejected GRQ due to resource unavailability.
Gatekeeper rejected GRQ due to Terminal Exclusion.
Gatekeeper rejected GRQ due to unsupported feature.
Gatekeeper rejected GRQ. Reason 18.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to Discovery Required.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to duplicate alias.
- Check duplicate in aliases or in prefixes
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid alias.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid call signaling address.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid endpoint ID.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid RAS address.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid revision.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid state.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to resource unavailability.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to Security Denial.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to terminal type.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported Additive Registration.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported feature.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported QOS transport.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported transport.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ. Full registration required.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ. Reason 18.
Gatekeeper Unregistration State.
Registration succeeded.
GUI System configuration file is invalid
xml file
The XML format of the system configuration file that contains the user interface
settings is invalid.
Hard disk error
Hard disk not responding.
Insufficient resources
Insufficient resources.
Insufficient UDP Ports
B-4
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix B-Alarms and Faults
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Internal System configuration during
startup
System configuration during startup.
Invalid System Configuration
IP addresses of Signaling Host and
Control Unit are the same
IP Network Service configuration modified
IP Network Service was modified.
Reset the MCU.
IP Network Service deleted
IP Network Service was deleted.
Reset the MCU.
IP Network Service not found
Possible explanations:
• IP Service not found in the Network Services list.
•
m_StatusRead IpServiceList.
License not found
Management Network not configured
Missing Central Signaling configuration
MPL startup failure. Authentication not
received.
MPL startup failure. Management
Network configuration not received.
No default IVR Service in IVR Services
list
No default IVR Service in IVR Services list: Ensure that one conference IVR
Service and one EQ IVR Service are set as default.
No IP Network Services defined
IP Network Service parameters missing.
No response from Central Signaling
No connection with central signaling.
No usable unit for audio controller
Port configuration was modified
Power off
Product activation failure
Product Type mismatch. System is
restarting.
The user is alerted to a mismatch between the product type that is stored in
MCU software and the product type received from another system component.
In such a case the system is automatically restarted.
Recording device has disconnected
unexpectedly
Resource process failed to request the
Meeting Room list during startup.
Without the Meeting Rooms list, the system cannot allocate the appropriate
dial numbers, Conference ID etc. and therefore cannot run conferences.
Restore Failed
Restoring the system configuration has failed as the system could not locate
the configuration file in the selected path, or could not open the file.
Polycom, Inc.
B-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Restore Succeeded
Restoring the system configuration has succeeded. Reset the MCU.
Restoring Factory Defaults. Default
system settings will be restored once
Reset is completed
Default system settings will be restored once Reset is completed.
Secured SIP communication failed
Security mode failed. Certificate has
expired.
Security mode failed. Certificate host
name does not match the RMX host
name.
Security mode failed. Certificate is about
to expire.
Security mode failed. Certificate not yet
valid.
Security mode failed. Error in certificate
file.
SIP registrations limit reached
SIP registrations limit reached.
SIP TLS: Certificate has expired
The current TLS certificate files have expired and must be replaced with new
files.
SIP TLS: Certificate is about to expire
The current TLS certificate files will expire shortly and will have to be replaced
to ensure the communication with the OCS.
SIP TLS: Certificate subject name is not
valid or DNS failed to resolve this name
This alarm is displayed if the name of the MCU in the certificate file is different
from the FQDN name defined in the OCS.
SIP TLS: Failed to load or verify certificate
files
This alarm indicates that the certificate files required for SIP TLS could not be
loaded to the MCU. Possible causes are:
SIP TLS: Registration handshake failure
B-6
•
Incorrect certificate file name. Only files with the following names can be
loaded to the system: rootCA.pem, pkey.pem, cert.pem and
certPassword.txt
•
Wrong certificate file type. Only files of the following types can be loaded to
the system: rootCA.pem, pkey.pem and cert.pem and certPassword.txt
•
The contents of the certificate file does not match the system parameters
This alarm indicates a mismatch between the security protocols of the OCS
and the MCU, preventing the Registration of the MCU to the OCS.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix B-Alarms and Faults
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
SIP TLS: Registration server not
responding
This alarm is displayed when the MCU does not receive a response from the
OCS to the registration request in the expected time frame. Possible causes
are:
SIP TLS: Registration transport error
•
The MCU FQDN name is not defined in the OCS pool, or is defined
incorrectly.
•
The time frame for the expected response was too short and it will be
updated with the next data refresh. The alarm may be cleared
automatically the next time the data is refreshed.
•
The MCU FQDN name is not defined in the DNS server. Ping the DNS
using the MCU FQDN name to ensure that the MCU is correctly registered
to the DNS.
This alarm indicates that the communication with the SIP server cannot be
established. Possible causes are:
•
•
•
Incorrect IP address of the SIP server
The SIP server listening port is other than the one defined in the system
The OCS services are stopped
SSH is enabled
SWITCH not responding
System Configuration modified
System configuration flags were modified.
Reset the MCU.
Temperature Level - Critical
Possible explanations:
• Temperature has reached a critical level.
Temperature Level - Major
Possible explanations:
• Temperature has reached a problematic level and requires attention.
The software contains patch(es)
The software contains patch(es).
User initiated MCU reset
MCU reset was initiated by a system user.
Version upgrade is in progress
Voltage problem
Possible reasons for the problem:
• Card voltage problem.
•
Voltage problem
Yellow Alarm
Polycom, Inc.
B-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
B-8
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C
CDR Fields - Unformatted File
The CDR (Call Detail Records) utility is used to retrieve conference information to a file. The
CDR utility can retrieve conference information to a file in both formatted and unformatted
formats.
Unformatted CDR files contain multiple records. The first record in each file contains
information about the conference in general, such as the conference name and start time. The
remaining records each contain information about one event that occurred during the
conference, such as a participant connecting to the conference, or a user extending the length
of the conference. The first field in each record identifies the event type, and this is followed
by values containing information about the event. The fields are separated by commas.
Formatted files contain basically the same information as unformatted files, but with the
field values replaced by descriptions. Formatted files are divided into sections, each
containing information about one conference event. The first line in each section is a title
describing the type of event, and this is followed by multiple lines, each containing
information about the event in the form of a descriptive field name and value.
The field names and values in the formatted file will appear in the language being used for the
RealPresence Collaboration Server Web Client user interface at the time when the CDR information is
retrieved.
The value of the fields that support Unicode values, such as the info fields, will be stored in the CDR
file in UTF8. The application that reads the CDR file must support Unicode.
The MCU sends the entire CDR file via API or HTTP, and the Collaboration Server or
external application does the processing and sorting. The Collaboration Server ignores
events that it does not recognize, that is, events written in a higher version that do not exist in
the current version. Therefore, to enable compatibility between versions, instead of adding
new fields to existing events, new fields are added as separate events, so as not to affect the
events from older versions. This allows users with lower versions to retrieve CDR files that
were created in higher versions.
This appendix describes the fields and values in the unformatted CDR records.
Although the formatted files contain basically the same information, in a few instances a single field in
the unformatted file is converted to multiple lines in the formatted file, and in other cases, multiple
fields in the unformatted file are combined into one line in the formatted file.
In addition, to enable compatibility for applications that were written for the MGC family, the
unformatted file contains fields that were supported by the MGC family, but are not supported by the
Collaboration Server, whereas these fields are omitted from the formatted file.
Polycom, Inc.
C-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Conference Summary Record
The conference summary record (the first record in the unformatted CDR file) contains the
following fields:
Table C-1
Conference Summary Record Fields
Field
Description
File Version
The version of the CDR utility that created the file.
Conference Routing
Name
The Routing Name of the conference.
Internal Conference ID
The conference identification number as assigned by the system.
Reserved Start Time
The time the conference was scheduled to start in Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT). The reservation time of a reservation that was started
immediately or of an ongoing conference is the same as the Actual Start
Time.
Reserved Duration
The amount of time the conference was scheduled to last.
Actual Start Time
The actual time the conference started in GMT.
Actual Duration
The actual conference duration.
Status
The conference status code as follows:
1 - The conference is an ongoing conference.
2 - The conference was terminated by a user.
3 - The conference ended at the scheduled end time.
4 - The conference ended automatically because no participants joined
the conference for a predefined time period, or all the participants
disconnected from the conference and the conference was empty for a
predefined time period.
5 - The conference never started.
6 - The conference could not start due to a problem.
8 - An unknown error occurred.
9 - The conference was terminated by a participant using DTMF codes.
Note: If the conference was terminated by an MCU reset, this field will
contain the value 1 (ongoing conference).
C-2
File Name
The name of the conference log file.
GMT Offset Sign
Indicates whether the GMT Offset is positive or negative. The possible
values are:
0 - Offset is negative. GMT Offset will be subtracted from the GMT Time.
1 - Offset is positive. GMT Offset will be added to the GMT Time.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-1
Conference Summary Record Fields (Continued)
Field
Description
GMT Offset
The time zone difference between Greenwich and the Collaboration
Server’s physical location in hours and minutes.
Together with the GMT Offset Sign field the GMT Offset field is used to
define the Collaboration Server local time. For example, if the GMT
Offset Sign is 0 and GMT Offset is 3 hours then the time zone of the
Collaboration Server’s physical location is -3, which will be subtracted
from the GMT time to determine the local time. However, if the GMT
Offset Sign is 1 and GMT Offset is 4 hours then the time zone of the
Collaboration Server’s physical location is +4, which will be added to the
GMT time to determine the local time.
File Retrieved
Indicates if the file has been retrieved and saved to a formatted file, as
follows:
0 - No
1 - Yes
Event Records
The event records, that is, all records in the unformatted file except the first record, contain
standard fields, such as the event type code and the time stamp, followed by fields that are
event specific.
The event fields are separated by commas. Two consecutive commas with nothing between
them (,,), or a comma followed immediately by a semi-colon (,;), indicates an empty field, as
in the example below:
Standard Event Record Fields
All event records start with the following fields:
Polycom, Inc.
•
The CDR event type code. For a list of event type codes and descriptions, refer to
Table C-2, “CDR Event Types,” on page C-4.
•
The event date.
•
The event time.
•
The structure length. This field is required for compatibility purposes, and always
contains the value 0.
C-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Event Types
The table below contains a list of the events that can be logged in the CDR file, and indicates
where to find details of the fields that are specific to that type of event.
The event code identifies the event in the unformatted CDR file, and the event name identifies the
event in the formatted CDR file.
Table C-2
CDR Event Types
Event Code
Event Name
Description
1
CONFERENCE
START
The conference started.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-3, “Event
Fields for Event 1 - CONFERENCE START,” on page C-10.
Note: There is one CONFERENCE START event per
conference. It is always the first event in the file, after the
conference summary record. It contains conference details,
but not participant details.
2
CONFERENCE
END
The conference ended.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-8, “Event
Fields for Event 2 - CONFERENCE END,” on page C-15.
Note: There is one CONFERENCE END event per
conference, and it is always the last event in the file.
7
10
PARTICIPANT
DISCONNECTED
A participant disconnected from the conference.
DEFINED
PARTICIPANT
Information about a defined participant, that is, a participant
who was added to the conference before the conference
started.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-11, “Event
Fields for Event 7 - PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED,” on
page C-15.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-13, “Event
Fields for Events 10, 101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT,
USER ADD PARTICIPANT, USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT,”
on page C-16.
Note: There is one event for each participant defined before
the conference started.
C-4
15
H323 CALL
SETUP
Information about the IP address of the participant.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-16, “Event
fields for Event 15 - H323 CALL SETUP,” on page C-19.
17
H323
PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED
An H.323 participant connected to the conference.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-17, “Event
Fields for Events 17, 23 - H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED,
SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED,” on page C-20.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
18
NEW
UNDEFINED
PARTICIPANT
A new undefined participant joined the conference.
BILLING CODE
A billing code was entered by a participant using DTMF codes.
20
For more information about the fields, see Table C-18, “Event
Fields for Event 18 - NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT,” on
page C-22.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-20, “Event
Fields for Event 20 - BILLING CODE,” on page C-24.
21
22
23
26
SET
PARTICIPANT
DISPLAY NAME
A user assigned a new name to a participant, or an end point
sent its name.
DTMF CODE
FAILURE
An error occurred when a participant entered a DTMF code.
SIP
PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED
A SIP participant connected to the conference.
RECORDING
LINK
A recording event, such as recording started or recording
resumed, occurred.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-21, “Event
Fields for Event 21 - SET PARTICIPANT DISPLAY NAME,” on
page C-25.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-22, “Event
Fields for Event 22 - DTMF CODE FAILURE,” on page C-25.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-17, “Event
Fields for Events 17, 23 - H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED,
SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED,” on page C-20.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-23, “Event
fields for Event 26 - RECORDING LINK,” on page C-25.
28
30
SIP PRIVATE
EXTENSIONS
Contains SIP Private Extensions information.
GATEKEEPER
INFORMATION
Contains the gatekeeper caller ID, which makes it possible to
match the CDR in the gatekeeper and in the MCU.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-24, “Event
Fields for Event 28 - SIP PRIVATE EXTENSIONS,” on
page C-26.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-25, “Event
Fields for Event 30 - GATEKEEPER INFORMATION,” on
page C-26.
31
Polycom, Inc.
PARTICIPANT
CONNECTION
RATE
Information about the line rate of the participant connection.
This event is added to the CDR file each time the endpoint
changes its connection bit rate. For more information about the
fields, see Table C-26, “Event fields for Event 31 PARTICIPANT CONNECTION RATE,” on page C-26.
C-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
33
PARTY CHAIR
UPDATE
Participants connect to the conferences as standard
participants and they are designated as chairpersons either by
entering the chairperson password during the IVR session
upon connection, or while participating in the conference using
the appropriate DTM code.
For more information about the fields, see see “Event fields for
Event 33 - PARTY CHAIR UPDATE” on page C-27.
34
PARTICIPANT
MAXIMUM
USAGE
INFORMATION
This event includes information of the maximum line rate,
maximum resolution and maximum frame rate used by H.323
or SIP participant during the conference.
35
SVC SIP
PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED
An SVC user connected over SIP.
USER
TERMINATE
CONFERENCE
A user terminated the conference.
USER ADD
PARTICIPANT
A user added a participant to the conference during the
conference.
100
101
For more information about the fields, see Table C-30, “Event
Fields for Event 35 - SVC SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED,”
on page C-27.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-31, “Event
Fields for Event 100 - USER TERMINATE CONFERENCE,”
on page C-28.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-13, “Event
Fields for Events 10, 101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT,
USER ADD PARTICIPANT, USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT,”
on page C-16.
102
103
104
C-6
USER DELETE
PARTICIPANT
A user deleted a participant from the conference.
USER
DISCONNECT
PARTICIPANT
A user disconnected a participant.
USER
RECONNECT
PARTICIPANT
A user reconnected a participant who was disconnected from
the conference.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-32, “Event
Fields for Events 102,103, 104 - USER DELETE
PARTICIPANT, USER DISCONNECT PARTICIPANT, USER
RECONNECT PARTICIPANT,” on page C-28.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-32, “Event
Fields for Events 102,103, 104 - USER DELETE
PARTICIPANT, USER DISCONNECT PARTICIPANT, USER
RECONNECT PARTICIPANT,” on page C-28.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-32, “Event
Fields for Events 102,103, 104 - USER DELETE
PARTICIPANT, USER DISCONNECT PARTICIPANT, USER
RECONNECT PARTICIPANT,” on page C-28.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
105
USER UPDATE
PARTICIPANT
A user updated the properties of a participant during the
conference.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-13, “Event
Fields for Events 10, 101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT,
USER ADD PARTICIPANT, USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT,”
on page C-16.
106
Polycom, Inc.
USER SET END
TIME
A user modified the conference end time.
107
OPERATOR
MOVE PARTY
FROM
CONFERENCE
The participant moved from an Entry Queue to the destination
conference or between conferences.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-34, “Event
Fields for Events 107 and 109 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY
FROM CONFERENCE and OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY,” on
page C-29.
108
OPERATOR
MOVE PARTY
TO
CONFERENCE
The Collaboration Server User moved the participant from an
ongoing conference to another conference.
For more information, see Table C-35, “Event Fields for
Events 108, 112 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO
CONFERENCE, OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO
CONFERENCE,” on page C-29.
109
OPERATOR
ATTEND PARTY
The Collaboration Server User moved the participant to the
Operator conference.
For more information, see Table C-34, “Event Fields for Events
107 and 109 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY FROM
CONFERENCE and OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY,” on
page C-29.
111
OPERATOR
BACK TO
CONFERENCE
PARTY
The Collaboration Server User moved the participant back to
his Home (source) conference.
For more information, see Table C-36, “Event Fields for Event
111 - OPERATOR BACK TO CONFERENCE PARTY,” on
page C-33.
112
OPERATOR
ATTEND PARTY
TO
CONFERENCE
The Collaboration Server User moved the participant from the
Operator conference to another conference.
For more information, see Table C-35, “Event Fields for
Events 108, 112 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO
CONFERENCE, OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO
CONFERENCE,” on page C-29.
1001
NEW
UNDEFINED
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1
Additional information about a NEW UNDEFINED
PARTICIPANT event.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-33, “Event
Fields for Event 106 - USER SET END TIME,” on page C-29.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-19, “Event
Fields for Event 1001 - NEW UNDEFINED PARTY
CONTINUE 1,” on page C-24.
C-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-2
Event Code
Event Name
Description
2001
CONFERENCE
START
CONTINUE 1
Additional information about a CONFERENCE START event.
2007
2010
PARTICIPANT
DISCONNECTED
CONTINUE 1
For more information about the fields, see Table C-4, “Event
Fields for Event 2001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1,”
on page C-11.
Additional information about a PARTICIPANT
DISCONNECTED event.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-12, “Event
Fields for Event 2007 - PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED
CONTINUE 1,” on page C-15.
DEFINED
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1
Additional information about a DEFINED PARTICIPANT event.
2011
RESERVED
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE PV6
ADDRESS
Additional information about a DEFINED PARTICIPANT event
that includes the IPv6 addressing of the defined participant.
For more details, see "Event Fields for Events 2011, 2012, and
2016” on page C-33.
2012
RESERVED
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2
Additional information about a DEFINED PARTICIPANT event.
USER ADD
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1
Additional information about a USER ADD PARTICIPANT
event.
USER ADD
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2
Additional information about a USER ADD PARTICIPANT
event.
USER UPDATE
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1
Additional information about a USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT
event.
2101
2102
2105
C-8
CDR Event Types (Continued)
For more information about the fields, see Table C-14, “Event
Fields for Events 2010, 2011, 2015 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1,
USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1,” on page C-18.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-15, “Event
Fields for Event 2011 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2, Event 2012 - USER ADD PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2, Event 2016 - USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2,” on page C-19.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-14, “Event
Fields for Events 2010, 2011, 2015 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1,
USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1,” on page C-18.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-15, “Event
Fields for Event 2011 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2, Event 2012 - USER ADD PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2, Event 2016 - USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2,” on page C-19.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-14, “Event
Fields for Events 2010, 2011, 2015 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1,
USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1,” on page C-18.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
2106
USER UPDATE
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2
Additional information about a USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT
event.
PARTICIPANT
INFORMATION
The contents of the participant information fields.
3010
5001
CONFERENCE
START
CONTINUE 4
For more information about the fields, see Table C-15, “Event
Fields for Event 2011 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2, Event 2012 - USER ADD PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2, Event 2016 - USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2,” on page C-19.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-38, “Event
Fields for Event 3010 - PARTICIPANT INFORMATION,” on
page C-33.
Additional information about a CONFERENCE START event.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-5, “Event
Fields for Event 5001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4,”
on page C-13.
Note: An additional CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4
event will be written to the CDR each time the value of one of
the following conference fields is modified:
• Conference Password
•
•
•
Chairperson Password
Info1, Info2 or Info3
Billing Info
These additional events will only contain the value of the
modified field.
6001
CONFERENCE
START
CONTINUE 5
Additional information about a CONFERENCE START event.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-6, “Event
Fields for Event 6001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 5,”
on page C-14.
11001
CONFERENCE
START
CONTINUE 10
Additional information about a CONFERENCE START event.
This event contains the Display Name.
For more information about the fields, see Table C-7, “Event
Fields for Event 11001 - CONFERENCE START
CONTINUE 10,” on page C-14.
This list only includes events that are supported by the Collaboration Server. For a list of MGC
Manager events that are not supported by the Collaboration Server, see "MGC Manager Events that
are not Supported by the Collaboration Server” on page C-36.
Polycom, Inc.
C-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Event Specific Fields
The following tables describe the fields which are specific to each type of event.
Some fields that were supported by the MGC Manager, are not supported by the Collaboration
Server. In addition, for some fields the Collaboration Server has a fixed value, whereas the MGC
Manager supported multiple values. For more information about the MGC Manager fields and values,
see the MGC Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Appendix A.
Table C-3
C-10
Event Fields for Event 1 - CONFERENCE START
Field
Description
Dial-Out Manually
Indicates whether the conference was a dial-out manually conference or not.
Currently the only value is:
0 - The conference was not a dial-out manually conference, that is, the MCU
initiates the communication with dial-out participants, and the user does not
need to connect them manually.
Auto Terminate
Indicates whether the conference was set to end automatically if no
participant joins the conference for a predefined time period after the
conference starts, or if all participants disconnect from the conference and
the conference is empty for a predefined time period.
Possible values are:
0 - The conference was not set to end automatically.
1 - The conference was set to end automatically.
Line Rate
The conference line rate, as follows:
0 - 64 kbps
6 - 384 kbps
12 - 1920 kbps
13 - 128 kbps
15 - 256 kbps
23 - 512 kbps
24 - 768 kbps
26 - 1152 kbps
29 - 1472 kbps
32 - 96 kbps
Line Rate (cont.)
33 - 1024 kbps
34 - 4096 kbps
Restrict Mode
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Algorithm
The audio algorithm.
Currently the only value is:
255 - Auto
Video Session
The video session type.
Currently the only value is:
3 - Continuous Presence
Video Format
The video format.
Currently the only value is:
255-Auto
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-3
Field
Description
CIF Frame Rate
The CIF frame rate.
Currently the only value is:
255 -Auto
QCIF Frame Rate
The QCIF frame rate:
Currently the only value is:
255 -Auto
LSD Rate
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
HSD Rate
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
T120 Rate
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Table C-4
Polycom, Inc.
Event Fields for Event 1 - CONFERENCE START (Continued)
Event Fields for Event 2001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1
Field
Description
Audio Tones
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Alert Tone
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Talk Hold Time
The minimum time that a speaker has to speak to become the video source.
The value is in units of 0.01 seconds.
Currently the only value is 150, which indicates a talk hold time of 1.5
seconds.
Audio Mix Depth
The maximum number of participants whose audio can be mixed.
Currently the only value is 5.
Operator
Conference
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Video Protocol
The video protocol.
Currently the only value is:
255 -Auto
Meet Me Per
Conference
Indicates the Meet Me Per Conference setting.
Currently the only value is:
1 - The Meet Me Per Conference option is enabled, and dial-in participants
can join the conference by dialing the dial-in number.
Number of Network
Services
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
C-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-4
C-12
Event Fields for Event 2001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 (Continued)
Field
Description
Chairperson
Password
The chairperson password for the conference.
Chair Mode
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Cascade Mode
The cascading mode.
Currently the only value is:
0 - None
Master Name
Not supported.
This field remains empty.
Minimum Number
of Participants
The number of participants for which the system reserved resources.
Additional participants may join the conference without prior reservation until
all the resources are utilized.
Currently the only value is 0.
Allow Undefined
Participants
Indicates whether or not undefined dial-in participants can connect to the
conference.
Currently the only value is:
1 - Undefined participants can connect to the conference
Time Before First
Participant Joins
Note: This field is only relevant if the Auto Terminate option is enabled.
Time After Last
Participant Quits
Note: This field is only relevant if the Auto Terminate option is enabled.
Conference Lock
Flag
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Maximum Number
of Participants
The maximum number of participants that can connect to the conference at
one time.
The value 65535 (auto) indicates that as many participants as the MCU’s
resources allow can connect to the conference, up to the maximum possible
for the type of conference.
Audio Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
Audio Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
Video Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
An empty field “” means that no chairperson password was assigned to the
conference.
Indicates the number of minutes that should elapse from the time the
conference starts, without any participant connecting to the conference,
before the conference is automatically terminated by the MCU.
Indicates the number of minutes that should elapse after the last participant
has disconnected from the conference, before the conference is
automatically terminated by the MCU.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-4
Event Fields for Event 2001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 (Continued)
Field
Description
Video Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
Data Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
Data Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
Message Service
Type
The Message Service type.
Currently the only value is:
3 - IVR
Conference IVR
Service
The name of the IVR Service assigned to the conference.
Note: If the name of the IVR Service contains more than 20 characters, it will
be truncated to 20 characters.
Lecture Mode Type
Indicates the type of Lecture Mode, as follows:
0 - None
1 - Lecture Mode
3 - Presentation Mode
Lecturer
Note: This field is only relevant if the Lecture Mode Type is Lecture Mode.
The name of the participant selected as the conference lecturer.
Time Interval
Note: This field is only relevant if Lecturer View Switching is enabled.
The number of seconds a participant is to be displayed in the lecturer window
before switching to the next participant.
Currently the only value is 15.
Lecturer View
Switching
Note: This field is only relevant when Lecture Mode is enabled.
Audio Activated
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Lecturer ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 4294967295.
Table C-5
Indicates the lecturer view switching setting, as follows:
0 - Automatic switching between participants is disabled.
1 - Automatic switching between participants is enabled.
Event Fields for Event 5001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4
Field
Description
Note: When this event occurs as the result of a change to the value of one of the event fields, the
event will only contain the value of the modified field. All other fields will be empty.
Conference ID
Polycom, Inc.
The conference ID.
C-13
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-5
Field
Description
Conference
Password
The conference password.
Chairperson
Password
The chairperson password.
Info1
Info2
Info3
The contents of the conference information fields.
These fields enable users to enter general information for the conference,
such as the company name, and the contact person’s name and telephone
number.
The maximum length of each field is 80 characters.
Billing Info
The billing code.
Table C-6
An empty field “” means that no conference password was assigned to the
conference.
An empty field “” means that no chairperson password was assigned to the
conference.
Event Fields for Event 6001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 5
Field
Description
Encryption
Indicates the conference encryption setting, as follows:
0 - The conference is not encrypted.
1 -The conference is encrypted.
Table C-7
C-14
Event Fields for Event 5001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4 (Continued)
Event Fields for Event 11001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 10
Field
Description
Display Name
The Display Name of the conference.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-8
Event Fields for Event 2 - CONFERENCE END
Field
Description
Conference End
Cause
Indicates the reason for the termination of the conference, as follows:
1 - The conference is an ongoing conference or the conference was
terminated by an MCU reset.
2 - The conference was terminated by a user.
3 - The conference ended at the scheduled end time.
4 - The conference ended automatically because no participants joined the
conference for a predefined time period, or all the participants disconnected
from the conference and the conference was empty for a predefined time
period.
5 - The conference never started.
6 - The conference could not start due to a problem.
8 - An unknown error occurred.
9 - The conference was terminated by a participant using DTMF codes.
Table C-11 Event Fields for Event 7 - PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Call Disconnection
Cause
The disconnection cause. For more information about possible values, see
Table C-39, “Disconnection Cause Values,” on page C-33.
Q931 Disconnect
Cause
If the disconnection cause is “No Network Connection” or “Participant Hang
Up”, then this field indicates the Q931 disconnect cause.
Table C-12 Event Fields for Event 2007 - PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED CONTINUE 1
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Rx Synchronization
Loss
The number of times that the general synchronization of the MCU was lost.
Tx Synchronization
Loss
The number of times that the general synchronization of the participant was
lost.
Rx Video
Synchronization
Loss
The number of times that the synchronization of the MCU video unit was
lost.
Tx Video
Synchronization
Loss
The number of times that the synchronization of the participant video was
lost.
Mux Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
C-15
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-12 Event Fields for Event 2007 - PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED CONTINUE 1
Field
Description
Mux Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Codec Board
ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Codec Unit
ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Bridge Board
ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Bridge Unit
ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Video Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Video Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
T.120 Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
T.120 Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
T.120 MCS Board
ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
T.120 MCS Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
H.323 Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
H323 Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Table C-13 Event Fields for Events 10, 101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT, USER ADD
PARTICIPANT, USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT
C-16
Field
Description
User Name
The login name of the user who added the participant to the conference, or
updated the participant properties.
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Dialing Direction
The dialing direction, as follows:
0 - Dial-out
5 - Dial-in
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-13 Event Fields for Events 10, 101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT, USER ADD
PARTICIPANT, USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT (Continued)
Field
Description
Bonding Mode
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Number Of
Channels
Not applicable.
Net Channel Width
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Network Service
Name
The name of the Network Service.
An empty field “” indicates the default Network Service.
Restrict
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Only
Indicates the participant’s Audio Only setting, as follows:
0 - The participant is not an Audio Only participant
1 - The participant is an Audio Only participant
255 - Unknown
Default Number
Type
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN participants.
The type of telephone number, as follows:
0 - Unknown
1 - International
2 - National
3 - Network specific
4 - Subscriber
6 - Abbreviated
255 - Taken from Network Service, default
Note: For dial-in participants, the only possible value is:
255 - Taken from Network Service
Polycom, Inc.
Net Sub-Service
Name
Not supported.
This field remains empty.
Number of
Participant Phone
Numbers
Not applicable.
Number of MCU
Phone Numbers
Not applicable.
Party and MCU
Phone Numbers
Not applicable.
C-17
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-13 Event Fields for Events 10, 101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT, USER ADD
PARTICIPANT, USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT (Continued)
Field
Description
Identification
Method
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-in participants.
Meet Me Method
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-in participants.
The method by which the destination conference is identified, as follows:
1 - Called IP address or alias
2 - Calling IP address or alias
The meet-me per method. Currently the only value is:
3 - Meet-me per participant
Table C-14 Event Fields for Events 2010, 2011, 2015 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1,
USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1, USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1
C-18
Field
Description
Network Type
The type of network between the participant and the MCU, as follows:
2 - H.323
5 - SIP
H.243 Password
Not supported.
This field remains empty.
Chair
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Video Protocol
The video protocol used by the participant, as follows:
1 - H.261
2 - H.263
4 - H.264
255 - Auto
Broadcasting
Volume
The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant.
The value is between 1 (lowest) and 10 (loudest).
Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume by 3 dB.
Undefined
Participant
Indicates whether are not the participant is an undefined participant, as
follows:
0 - The participant is not an undefined participant.
2 - The participant is an undefined participant.
Node Type
The node type, as follows:
0 - MCU
1 - Terminal
Bonding Phone
Number
Not applicable.
Video Bit Rate
The video bit rate in units of kilobits per second.
A value of 4294967295 denotes auto, and in this case, the rate is computed
by the MCU.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-14 Event Fields for Events 2010, 2011, 2015 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1,
USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1, USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1
Field
IP Address
Signaling Port
H.323 Participant
Alias Type/SIP
Participant Address
Type
Description
The IP address of the participant.
An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the
participant, and the gatekeeper is used for routing. In all other cases the
address overrides the gatekeeper.
The signaling port used for participant connection.
For H.323 participants, the alias type, as follows:
7 - E164
8 - H.323 ID
13 - Email ID
14 - Participant number
For SIP participants, the address type, as follows:
1 - SIP URI
2 - Tel URL
H.323 Participant
Alias Name/SIP
Participant Address
For H.323 participants:
The participant alias.
The alias may contain up to 512 characters.
For SIP participants:
The participant address.
The address may contain up to 80 characters.
Table C-15 Event Fields for Event 2011 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2, Event 2012 - USER
ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2, Event 2016 - USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2
Field
Description
Encryption
Indicates the participant’s encryption setting as follows:
0 - The participant is not encrypted.
1 - The participant is encrypted.
2 - Auto. The conference encryption setting is applied to the participant.
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Table C-16 Event fields for Event 15 - H323 CALL SETUP
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
C-19
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-16 Event fields for Event 15 - H323 CALL SETUP (Continued)
Field
Description
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Connect Initiator
Indicates who initiated the connection, as follows:
0 - MCU
1 - Remote participant
Any other number - Unknown
Min Rate
The minimum line rate used by the participant.
The data in this field should be ignored. For accurate rate information, see
CDR event 31.
Max Rate
The maximum line rate achieved by the participant.
The data in this field should be ignored. For accurate rate information, see
CDR event 31.
Source Party
Address
The IP address of the calling participant.
A string of up to 255 characters.
Destination Party
Address
The IP address of the called participant.
A string of up to 255 characters.
Endpoint Type
The endpoint type, as follows:
0 - Terminal
1 - Gateway
2 - MCU
3 - Gatekeeper
4 - Undefined
Table C-17 Event Fields for Events 17, 23 - H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED, SIP PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED
C-20
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
An empty field “” denotes an unidentified participant or a participant whose
name is unspecified.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-17 Event Fields for Events 17, 23 - H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED, SIP PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED (Continued)
Field
Description
Participant Status
The participant status, as follows:
0 -Idle
1 -Connected
2 - Disconnected
3 - Waiting for dial-in
4 – Connecting
5 - Disconnecting
6 - Partially connected. Party has completed H.221 capability exchange
7 - Deleted by a user
8 -Secondary. The participant could not connect the video channels and is
connected via audio only
10 - Connected with problem
11 - Redialing
Capabilities
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Remote
Communication
Mode
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Secondary Cause
Note: This field is only relevant if the Participant Status is Secondary.
The cause for the secondary connection (not being able to connect the video
channels), as follows:
0 - Default
11 - The incoming video parameters are not compatible with the conference
video parameters
13 - The conference video settings are not compatible with the endpoint
capabilities
14 - The new conference settings are not compatible with the endpoint
capabilities
15 - Video stream violation due to incompatible annexes or other
discrepancy
16 - Inadequate video resources
17 - When moved to a Transcoding or Video Switching conference, the
participant’s video capabilities are not supported by the video cards
18 - Video connection could not be established
24 - The endpoint closed its video channels
25 - The participant video settings are not compatible with the conference
protocol
26 - The endpoint could not re-open the video channel after the conference
video mode was changed
27 - The gatekeeper approved a lower bandwidth than requested
28 - Video connection for the SIP participant is temporarily unavailable
255 - Other
Polycom, Inc.
C-21
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-18 Event Fields for Event 18 - NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Dialing Direction
The dialing direction, as follows
0 - Dial-out
5 - Dial-in
Bonding Mode
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Number of
Channels
Not applicable
Net Channel Width
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Network Service
Name
The name of the Network Service.
An empty field “” indicates the default Network Service.
Restrict
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Only
Indicates the participant’s Audio Only setting, as follows:
0 - The participant is not an Audio Only participant
1 - The participant is an Audio Only participant
255 - Unknown
Default Number
Type
Not applicable.
Net Sub-Service
Name
Not supported.
This field remains empty.
Number of
Participant Phone
Numbers
Not applicable.
Number of MCU
Phone Numbers
Not applicable.
Party and MCU
Phone Numbers
Not applicable.
Identification
Method
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-in participants.
Meet Me Method
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-in participants.
The method by which the destination conference is identified, as follows:
1 - Called IP address or alias
2 - Calling IP address or alias
The meet-me per method, as follows:
3 - Meet-me per participant
C-22
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-18 Event Fields for Event 18 - NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT (Continued)
Field
Description
Network Type
The type of network between the participant and the MCU, as follows:
2 - H.323
5 - SIP
H.243 Password
Not supported.
This field remains empty.
Chair
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Video Protocol
The video protocol, as follows:
1 - H.261
2 - H.263
4 - H.264
255 -Auto
Broadcasting
Volume
The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant.
The value is between 1 (lowest) and 10 (loudest).
Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume by 3 dB.
Undefined
Participant
Indicates whether are not the participant is an undefined participant, as
follows:
0 - The participant is not an undefined participant.
2 - The participant is an undefined participant.
Node Type
The node type, as follows:
0 - MCU
1 - Terminal
Bonding Phone
Number
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN participants.
Video Bit Rate
The video bit rate in units of kilobits per second.
A value of 4294967295 denotes auto, and in this case, the rate is computed
by the MCU.
IP Address
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
The phone number for Bonding dial-out calls.
Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two up to thirty 64
Kbps B channels together, to look like one large bandwidth channel.
The IP address of the participant.
An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the
participant, and the gatekeeper is used for routing. In all other cases the
address overrides the gatekeeper.
Signaling Port
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
The signaling port used for participant connection.
A value of 65535 is ignored by MCU.
Polycom, Inc.
C-23
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-18 Event Fields for Event 18 - NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT (Continued)
Field
H.323 Participant
Alias Type/SIP
Participant Address
Type
Description
For H.323 participants, the alias type, as follows:
7 - E164
8 - H.323 ID
13 - Email ID
14 - Participant number
For SIP participants, the address type, as follows:
1 - SIP URI
2 - Tel URL
H.323 Participant
Alias Name/SIP
Participant Address
For H.323 participants:
The participant alias.
The alias may contain up to 512 characters.
For SIP participants:
The participant address.
The address may contain up to 80 characters.
Table C-19 Event Fields for Event 1001 - NEW UNDEFINED PARTY CONTINUE 1
Field
Description
Encryption
Indicates the participant’s encryption setting as follows:
0 - The participant is not encrypted.
1 - The participant is encrypted.
2 - Auto. The conference encryption setting is applied to the participant.
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Table C-20 Event Fields for Event 20 - BILLING CODE
C-24
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant who added the billing code.
Participant ID
The identification number, as assigned by the MCU, of the participant who
added the billing code.
Billing Info
The numeric billing code that was added (32 characters).
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-21 Event Fields for Event 21 - SET PARTICIPANT DISPLAY NAME
Field
Description
Participant Name
The original name of the participant, for example, the name automatically
assigned to an undefined participant, such as, “<conference name>_(000)”.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Display Name
The new name assigned to the participant by the user, or the name sent by
the end point.
Table C-22 Event Fields for Event 22 - DTMF CODE FAILURE
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Incorrect Data
The incorrect DTMF code entered by the participant, or an empty field “” if
the participant did not press any key.
Correct Data
The correct DTMF code, if known.
Failure Type
The type of DTMF failure, as follows:
2 - The participant did not enter the correct conference password.
6 - The participant did not enter the correct chairperson password.
12 - The participant did not enter the correct Conference ID.
Table C-23 Event fields for Event 26 - RECORDING LINK
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the Recording Link participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the Recording Link participant by the
MCU.
Recording
Operation
The type of recording operation, as follows:
0 - Start recording
1 - Stop recording
2 - Pause recording
3 - Resume recording
4 - Recording ended
5 - Recording failed
Initiator
Not supported.
C-25
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-23 Event fields for Event 26 - RECORDING LINK (Continued)
Field
Description
Recording Link
Name
The name of the Recording Link.
Recording Link ID
The Recording Link ID.
Start Recording
Policy
The start recording policy, as follows:
1 - Start recording automatically as soon as the first participant connects to
the conference.
2 - Start recording when requested by the conference chairperson via DTMF
codes or from the Collaboration Server Web Client, or when the operator
starts recording from the Collaboration Server Web Client.
Table C-24 Event Fields for Event 28 - SIP PRIVATE EXTENSIONS
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The participant’s identification number as assigned by the system.
Called Participant
ID
The called participant ID.
Asserted Identity
The identity of the user sending a SIP message as it was verified by
authentication.
Charging Vector
A collection of charging information.
Preferred Identity
The identity the user sending the SIP message wishes to be used for the PAsserted-Header field that the trusted element will insert.
Table C-25 Event Fields for Event 30 - GATEKEEPER INFORMATION
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Gatekeeper Caller
ID
The caller ID in the gatekeeper records. This value makes it possible to
match the CDR in the gatekeeper and in the MCU.
Table C-26 Event fields for Event 31 - PARTICIPANT CONNECTION RATE
C-26
Field
Description
Participant Name
The participant name.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-26 Event fields for Event 31 - PARTICIPANT CONNECTION RATE (Continued)
Field
Description
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Participant Current
Rate
The participant line rate in Kbps.
Table C-28 Event fields for Event 33 - PARTY CHAIR UPDATE
Field
Description
Participant Name
The participant name.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Chairperson
Possible values:
• True - participant is a chairperson
•
False - Participant is not a chairperson participant (is a standard
participant)
Table C-29 Event fields for Event 34 - PARTICIPANT MAXIMUM USAGE INFORMATION
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Maximum Bit Rate
The maximum bit rate used by the participant during the call.
Maximum Resolution
The maximum resolution used by the participant during the call.
Note: The reported resolutions are: CIF, SD, HD720, and HD1080.
Other resolutions are roundED up to the nearest resolution. For
example, 2SIF is reported as SD resolution.
Maximum Frame Rate
The maximum frame rate used by the participant during the call.
Participant Address
For H.323 participants, the participant alias. The alias may contain up to
512 characters.
For SIP participants, the participant address. The address may contain
up to 80 characters.
Table C-30 Event Fields for Event 35 - SVC SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
An empty field "" denotes an unidentified participant or a participant whose
name is unspecified
C-27
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-30 Event Fields for Event 35 - SVC SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED (Continued)
Field
Description
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Participant Status
The participant status, as follows:
0 - Idle
1 - Connected
2 - Disconnected
3 - Waiting for dial-in
4 - Connecting
5 - Disconnecting
6 - Partially connected. Party has completed H.221 capability exchange
7 - Deleted by a user
8 - Secondary. The participant could not connect the video channels and is
connected via audio only
10 - Connected with problem
11 - Redialing
Receive line rate
Negotiated reception line rate
Transmit line rate
Negotiated transmission line rate
Uplink Video
Capabilities
a.Number of uplink streams
b.Video stream (multiple streams)
i.Resolution width
ii.resolution height
iii.max frame rate
iv.max line rate
Audio Codec
SAC, Other
Secondary Cause
Table C-31 Event Fields for Event 100 - USER TERMINATE CONFERENCE
Field
Description
Terminated By
The login name of the user who terminated the conference.
Table C-32 Event Fields for Events 102,103, 104 - USER DELETE PARTICIPANT, USER
DISCONNECT PARTICIPANT, USER RECONNECT PARTICIPANT
C-28
Field
Description
User Name
The login name of the user who reconnected the participant to the
conference, or disconnected or deleted the participant from the conference.
Participant Name
The name of the participant reconnected to the conference, or disconnected
or deleted from the conference.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-33 Event Fields for Event 106 - USER SET END TIME
Field
Description
New End Time
The new conference end time set by the user, in GMT time.
User Name
The login name of the user who changed the conference end time.
Table C-34 Event Fields for Events 107 and 109 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY FROM CONFERENCE
and OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY
Field
Description
Operator Name
The login name of the user who moved the participant.
Party Name
The name of the participant who was moved.
Party ID
The identification number of the participant who was moved, as assigned by
the MCU.
Destination Conf
Name
The name of the conference to which the participant was moved.
Destination Conf ID
The identification number of the conference to which the participant was
moved.
Table C-35 Event Fields for Events 108, 112 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE,
OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE
Field
Description
Operator Name
The login name of the operator who moved the participant to the conference.
Source Conf Name
The name of the source conference.
Source Conf ID
The identification number of the source conference, as assigned by the
MCU.
Party Name
The name of the participant who was moved.
Party ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU.
Connection Type
The connection type, as follows:
0 - Dial-out
5 - Dial-in
Bonding Mode
Not applicable.
Number Of
Channels
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN participants.
The number of channels, as follows:
255 - Auto
Otherwise, in range of 1 - 30
Polycom, Inc.
C-29
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-35 Event Fields for Events 108, 112 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE,
OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE (Continued)
Field
Description
Net Channel Width
The bandwidth of each channel.
This value is always 0, which represents a bandwidth of 1B, which is the only
bandwidth that is currently supported.
Net Service Name
The name of the Network Service.
An empty field “” indicates the default Network Service.
Restrict
Indicates whether or not the line is restricted, as follows:
27 - Restricted line
28 - Non restricted line
255 - Unknown or not relevant
Voice Mode
Indicates whether or not the participant is an Audio Only participant, as
follows:
0 - The participant is not an Audio Only participant
1 - The participant is an Audio Only participant
255 - Unknown
Number Type
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-out, ISDN/PSTN participants.
The type of telephone number, as follows:
0 - Unknown
1 - International
2 - National
3 - Network specific
4 - Subscriber
6 - Abbreviated
255 - Taken from Network Service, default
Net SubService
Name
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-out, ISDN/PSTN participants.
The network sub-service name.
An empty field “” means that MCU selects the default sub-service.
Number of Party
Phone Numbers
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN participants.
The number of participant phone numbers.
In a dial-in connection, the participant phone number is the CLI (Calling Line
Identification) as identified by the MCU.
In a dial-out connection, participant phone numbers are the phone numbers
dialed by the MCU for each participant channel.
Number of MCU
Phone Numbers
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN participants.
The number of MCU phone numbers.
In a dial-in connection, the MCU phone number is the number dialed by the
participant to connect to the MCU.
In a dial-out connection, the MCU phone number is the MCU (CLI) number
as seen by the participant.
C-30
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-35 Event Fields for Events 108, 112 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE,
OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE (Continued)
Field
Description
Party and MCU
Phone Numbers
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN participants.
The participant phone numbers are listed first, followed by the MCU phone
numbers.
Ident. Method
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-in participants.
The method by which the destination conference is identified, as follows:
0 - Password
1 - Called phone number, or IP address, or alias
2 - Calling phone number, or IP address, or alias
Meet Method
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-in participants.
The meet-me per method, as follows:
1 - Meet-me per MCU-Conference
3 - Meet-me per participant
4 - Meet-me per channel
Net Interface Type
The type of network interface between the participant and the MCU, as
follows:
0 - ISDN
2 - H.323
5 - SIP
H243 Password
The H.243 password, or an empty field “” if there is no password.
Chair
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Video Protocol
The video protocol, as follows:
1 - H.261
2 - H.263
3 - H.264*
4 - H.264
255 -Auto
Audio Volume
The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant.
The value is between 1 (lowest) and 10 (loudest).
Undefined Type
The participant type, as follows:
0 - Defined participant. (The value in the formatted text file is “default”.)
2 - Undefined participant. (The value in the formatted text file is “Unreserved
participant “.)
Node Type
The node type, as follows:
0 - MCU
1 - Terminal
Bonding Phone
Number
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN participants.
The phone number for Bonding dial-out calls.
Polycom, Inc.
C-31
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-35 Event Fields for Events 108, 112 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE,
OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE (Continued)
Field
Description
Video Rate
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
The video rate in units of kilobits per second.
A value of 4294967295 denotes auto, and in this case, the rate is computed
by the MCU.
IP Address
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
The IP address of the participant.
An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the
participant, and the gatekeeper is used for routing. In all other cases the
address overrides the gatekeeper.
Call Signaling Port
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
The signaling port used for participant connection.
A value of 65535 is ignored by MCU.
H.323 Party Alias
Type/SIP Party
Address Type
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
For H.323 participants, the alias type, as follows:
7 - E164
8 - H.323 ID
11 - URL ID alias type
12 - Transport ID
13 - Email ID
14 - Participant number
For SIP participants, the address type, as follows:
1 - SIP URI
2 - Tel URL
H.323 Party Alias/
SIP Party Address
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
For H.323 participants, the participant alias. The alias may contain up to 512
characters.
For SIP participants, the participant address. The address may contain up to
80 characters.
C-32
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-36 Event Fields for Event 111 - OPERATOR BACK TO CONFERENCE PARTY
Field
Description
Operator Name
The login name of the operator moving the participant back to the
conference.
Party Name
The name of the participant being moved.
Party ID
The identification number, as assigned by the MCU, of the participant being
moved.
Table C-37 Event Fields for Events 2011, 2012, and 2016
Field
Description
IP V6
IPv6 address of the participant’s endpoint.
Table C-38 Event Fields for Event 3010 - PARTICIPANT INFORMATION
Field
Description
Info1
Info2
Info3
Info4
The participant information fields.
These fields enable users to enter general information about the participant,
such as the participant’s e-mail address.
The maximum length of each field is 80 characters.
VIP
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Disconnection Cause Values
For an explanation of the disconnection causes, see Appendix A: "Disconnection Causes” on
page A-1.
Table C-39 Disconnection Cause Values
Polycom, Inc.
Value
Call Disconnection Cause
0
Unknown
1
Participant hung up
2
Disconnected by User
5
Resources deficiency
6
Password failure
C-33
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-39 Disconnection Cause Values (Continued)
C-34
Value
Call Disconnection Cause
20
H323 call close. No port left for audio
21
H323 call close. No port left for video
22
H323 call close. No port left for FECC
23
H323 call close. No control port left
25
H323 call close. No port left for video content
51
A common key exchange algorithm could not be established between the MCU and the
remote device
53
Remote device did not open the encryption signaling channel
59
The remote devices’ selected encryption algorithm does not match the local selected
encryption algorithm
141
Called party not registered
145
Caller not registered
152
H323 call close. ARQ timeout
153
H323 call close. DRQ timeout
154
H323 call close. Alt Gatekeeper failure
191
H323 call close. Remote busy
192
H323 call close. Normal
193
H323 call close. Remote reject
194
H323 call close. Remote unreachable
195
H323 call close. Unknown reason
198
H323 call close. Small bandwidth
199
H323 call close. Gatekeeper failure
200
H323 call close. Gatekeeper reject ARQ
201
H323 call close. No port left
202
H323 call close. Gatekeeper DRQ
203
H323 call close. No destination IP value
204
H323 call close. Remote has not sent capability
205
H323 call close. Audio channels not open
207
H323 call close. Bad remote cap
208
H323 call close. Capabilities not accepted by remote
209
H323 failure
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-39 Disconnection Cause Values (Continued)
Polycom, Inc.
Value
Call Disconnection Cause
210
H323 call close. Remote stop responding
213
H323 call close. Master slave problem
251
SIP timer popped out
252
SIP card rejected channels
253
SIP capabilities don’t match
254
SIP remote closed call
255
SIP remote cancelled call
256
SIP bad status
257
SIP remote stopped responding
258
SIP remote unreachable
259
SIP transport error
260
SIP bad name
261
SIP trans error TCP invite
300
SIP redirection 300
301
SIP moved permanently
302
SIP moved temporarily
305
SIP redirection 305
380
SIP redirection 380
400
SIP client error 400
401
SIP unauthorized
402
SIP client error 402
403
SIP forbidden
404
SIP not found
405
SIP client error 405
406
SIP client error 406
407
SIP client error 407
408
SIP request timeout
409
SIP client error 409
410
SIP gone
411
SIP client error 411
413
SIP client error 413
C-35
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table C-39 Disconnection Cause Values (Continued)
Value
Call Disconnection Cause
414
SIP client error 414
415
SIP unsupported media type
420
SIP client error 420
480
SIP temporarily not available
481
SIP client error 481
482
SIP client error 482
483
SIP client error 483
484
SIP client error 484
485
SIP client error 485
486
SIP busy here
487
SIP request terminated
488
SIP client error 488
500
SIP server error 500
501
SIP server error 501
502
SIP server error 502
503
SIP server error 503
504
SIP server error 504
505
SIP server error 505
600
SIP busy everywhere
603
SIP global failure 603
604
SIP global failure 604
606
SIP global failure 606
MGC Manager Events that are not Supported by the
Collaboration Server
The following MGC Manager events are not supported by the Collaboration Server:
For details of these events see the MGC Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Appendix A.
C-36
•
Event 8 - REMOTE COM MODE
•
Event 11 - ATM CHANNEL CONNECTED
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Polycom, Inc.
•
Event 12 - ATM CHANNEL DISCONNECTED
•
Event 13 - MPI CHANNEL CONNECTED
•
Event 14 - MPI CHANNEL DISCONNECTED
•
Event 15 - H323 CALL SETUP
•
Event 16 - H323 CLEAR INDICATION
•
Event 24 - SIP CALL SETUP
•
Event 25 - SIP CLEAR INDICATION
•
Event 27 - RECORDING SYSTEM LINK
•
Event 110 - OPERATOR ON HOLD PARTY
•
Event 113 - CONFERENCE REMARKS
•
Event 2108 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 1
•
Event 3001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 2
•
Event 3108 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 2
•
Event 4001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 3
•
Event 4108 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 3
C-37
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
C-38
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix D
Ad Hoc Conferencing and External
Database Authentication
The RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Ad Hoc conferencing feature enables participants
to start ongoing conferences on-the-fly, without prior definition when dialing an Ad Hocenabled Entry Queue. The created conference parameters are taken from the Profile assigned
to the Ad Hoc-enabled Entry Queue.
Ad Hoc conferencing is available in two modes:
•
Ad Hoc Conferencing without Authentication
Any participant can dial into an Entry Queue and initiate a new conference if the
conference does not exist. This mode is usually used for the organization’s internal Ad
Hoc conferencing.
•
Ad Hoc Conferencing with External Database Authentication
In this mode, the participant’s right to start a new conference is validated against a
database.
The external database application can also be used to validate the participant’s right to join
an ongoing conference. Conference access authentication can be:
•
Part of the Ad Hoc conferencing flow where the participants must be authorized before
they can enter the conference created in the Ad Hoc flow.
•
Independent of Ad Hoc conferencing where conference access is validated for all
conferences running on the MCU regardless of the method in which the conference was
started.
Ad Hoc Conferencing without Authentication
A participant dials in to an Ad Hoc-enabled Entry Queue and starts a new conference based
on the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue. In this configuration, any participant connecting
to the Entry Queue can start a new conference, and no security mechanism is applied. This
mode is usually used in organizations where Ad Hoc conferences are started from within the
network and without security breach.
Starting a conference uses the following method:
1 The participant dials in to the Ad Hoc-enabled Entry Queue.
Polycom, Inc.
2
The Conference ID is requested by the system.
3
The participant inputs a Conference ID via his/her endpoint remote control using
DTMF codes.
D-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
The MCU checks whether a conference with the same Conference ID is running on the
MCU. If there is such a conference, the participant is moved to that conference. If there
is no ongoing conference with that Conference ID, the system creates a new conference,
based on the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue, and connects this participant as the
conference chairperson.
IP Endpoint
MCU
92
51
00
0
IP Endpoint
Maple_Room
Conference ID: 1001
MCU Prefix in
Gatekeeper - 925
925DefaultEQ
1001
1001
Network
On Going
Conference
with this ID?
1300
92
0
00
51
Name: DefaultEQ
Numeric ID: 1000
IP Endpoint
New Conference
ID: 1300
Figure D-1 Ad Hoc Conference Initiation without Authentication
To enable this workflow, the following components must be defined in the system:
•
An Entry Queue IVR Service with the appropriate audio file requesting the Conference
ID
•
An Ad Hoc-enabled Entry Queue with an assigned Profile
Ad Hoc Conferencing with Authentication
The MCU can work with an external database application to validate the participant’s right
to start a new conference. The external database contains a list of participants, with their
assigned parameters. The conference ID entered by the participant is compared against the
database. If the system finds a match, the participant is granted the permission to start a new
conference.
To work with an external database application to validate the participant’s right to start a
new conference, the Entry Queue IVR Service must be configured to use the external
database application for authentication. In the external database application, you must
define all participants (users) with rights to start a new conference using Ad Hoc
conferencing. For each user defined in the database, you enter the conference ID,
Conference Password (optional) and Chairperson Password (when applicable), billing code,
Conference general information (corresponding to the User Defined 1 field in the Profile
properties) and user’s PIN code. The same user definitions can be used for conference access
authentication, that is, to determine who can join the conference as a participant and who as
a chairperson.
D-2
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix D-Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication
Entry Queue Level - Conference Initiation Validation with an External
Database Application
Starting a new conference with external database application validation entails the
following steps:
IP Endpoint
MCU
92
51
00
0
IP Endpoint
MCU Prefix in
Gatekeeper - 925
925DefaultEQ
Network
1001
1200
On Going
Conference
with this ID?
1300
9
00
10
25
Name: DefaultEQ
Numeric ID: 1000
IP Endpoint
New Conference
ID: 1300
Figure D-2 Conference Initiation Validation with External Database Application
1
The participant dials in to an Ad Hoc-enabled Entry Queue.
2
The participant is requested to enter the Conference ID.
3
The participant enters the conference ID via his/her endpoint remote control using
DTMF codes. If there is an ongoing conference with this Conference ID, the participant
is moved to that conference where another authentication process can occur, depending
on the IVR Service configuration.
4
If there is no ongoing conference with that Conference ID, the MCU verifies the
Conference ID with the database application that compares it against its database. If the
database application finds a match, the external database application sends a response
back to the MCU, granting the participant the right to start a new ongoing conference.
If this Conference ID is not registered in the database, the conference cannot be started
and this participant is disconnected from the Entry Queue.
5
The external database contains a list of participants (users), with their assigned
parameters. Once a participant is identified in the database (according to the conference
ID), his/her parameters (as defined in the database) can be sent to the MCU in the same
response granting the participant the right to start a new ongoing conference. These
parameters are:
—
—
—
—
Polycom, Inc.
Conference Name
Conference Billing code
Conference Password
Chairperson Password
D-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
— Conference Information, such as the contact person name. These fields correspond
to Info 1, 2 and 3 fields in the Conference Properties - Information dialog box.
— Maximum number of participants allowed for the conference
— Conference Owner
These parameters can also be defined in the conference Profile. In such a case,
parameters sent from the database overwrite the parameters defined in the Profile. If
these parameters are not sent from the external database to the MCU, they will be taken
from the Profile.
6
A new conference is started based on the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue.
7
The participant is moved to the conference.
If no password request is configured in the Conference IVR Service assigned to the
conference, the participant that initiated the conference is directly connected to the
conference, as its chairperson.
If the Conference IVR Service assigned to the conference is configured to prompt for the
conference password and chairperson password, without external database
authentication, the participant has to enter these passwords in order to join the
conference.
To enable this workflow, the following components must be defined in the system:
•
A Conference IVR Service with the appropriate prompts. If conference access is also
validated with the external database application it must be configured to access the
external database for authentication.
•
An Entry Queue IVR Service configured with the appropriate audio prompts
requesting the Conference ID and configured to access the external database for
authentication.
•
Create a Profile with the appropriate conference parameters and the appropriate
Conference IVR Service assigned to it.
•
An Ad Hoc-enabled Entry Queue with the appropriate Entry Queue IVR Service and
Conference Profile assigned to it.
•
An external database application with a database containing Conference IDs associated
with participants and their relevant properties.
•
Define the flags required to access the external database in System Configuration.
For more information, see Figure , “MCU Configuration to Communicate with an External
Database Application” on page D-9.
Conference Access with External Database
Authentication
The MCU can work with an external database application to validate the participant’s right
to join an existing conference. The external database contains a list of participants, with their
assigned parameters. The conference password or chairperson password entered by the
participant is compared against the database. If the system finds a match, the participant is
granted the permission to access the conference.
To work with an external database application to validate the participant’s right to join the
conference, the Conference IVR Service must be configured to use the external database
application for authentication.
D-4
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix D-Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication
Conference access authentication can be performed as:
•
Part of the Ad Hoc conferencing flow where the participants must be authorized before
they can enter the conference created in the Ad Hoc flow
•
Independent of Ad Hoc conferencing where conference access is validated for all
conferences running on the MCU regardless of the method in which the conference was
started.
Conference access authentication can be implemented for all participants joining the
conference or for chairpersons only.
Conference Access Validation - All Participants (Always)
Once the conference is created either via an Ad Hoc Entry Queue, or a standard ongoing
conference, the right to join the conference is authenticated with the external database
application for all participants connecting to the conference.
MCU
IP Endpoint
Correc t
Password?
92
51
00
0
MCU Prefix in
Gatekeeper - 925
IP Endpoint
925DefaultEQ
Network
1001
1001
On Going
Conference
with this ID?
1300
51
92
00
0
Name: DefaultEQ
Numeric ID: 1000
IP Endpoint
New Conference
ID: 1300
Figure D-3 Conference Access - Conference Password validation with External Database Application
Joining the conference entails the following steps:
•
When the conference is started (either in the Ad Hoc flow or in the standard method),
all participants connecting to the conference are moved to the Conference IVR queue
where they are prompted for the conference password.
•
When the participant enters the conference password or his/her personal password, it
is sent to the external database application for validation.
•
If there is a match, the participant is granted the right to join the conference. In addition,
the external database application sends to the MCU the following parameters:
— Participant name (display name)
— Whether or not the participant is the conference chairperson
— Participant Information, such as the participant E-mail. These fields correspond to
Info 1, 2, 3 and 4 fields in the Participant Properties - Information dialog box.
If there is no match (i.e. the conference or personal password are not defined in the
database), the request to access the conference is rejected and the participant is
disconnected from the MCU.
Polycom, Inc.
D-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
•
If the Conference IVR Service is configured to prompt for the chairperson identifier and
password, the participant is requested to enter the chairperson identifier.
— If no identifier is entered, the participant connects as a standard, undefined
participant.
If the chairperson identifier is entered, the participant is requested to enter the
chairperson password. In this flow, the chairperson password is not validated with the
external database application, only with the MCU.
— If the correct chairperson password is entered, the participant is connected to the
conference as its chairperson.
— If the wrong password is entered, he/she is disconnected from the conference.
To enable conference access validation for all participants the following conferencing
components are required:
•
The external database must hold the conference password or the participant personal
password/PIN code or the participant’s Alias.
•
The Conference IVR Service assigned to the conference (defined in the Profile) must be
configured to authenticate the participant’s right to access the conference with the
external database application for all requests. In addition it must be configured to
prompt for the Conference Password.
Conference Access Validation - Chairperson Only (Upon Request)
An alternative validation method at the conference level is checking only the chairperson
password with the external database application. All other participants can be checked only
with the MCU (if the Conference IVR Service is configured to prompt for the conference
password) or not checked at all (if the Conference IVR Service is configured to prompt only
for the chairperson password).
MCU
IP Endpoint
Chairperson
Password?
92
51
00
0
MCU Prefix in
Gatekeeper - 925
IP Endpoint
925DefaultEQ
Network
Enters the
c onferenc e as
Chairperson
1001
1001
Enters the
c onferenc e as
standard
partic ipant
On Going
Conference
with this ID?
1300
51
92
0
00
Name: DefaultEQ
Numeric ID: 1000
IP Endpoint
New Conference
ID: 1300
Figure D-4 Conference Access - Chairperson Password validation with external database application
Joining the conference entails the following steps:
•
D-6
When the conference is started (either in the Ad Hoc flow or in the standard method),
all participants connecting to the conference are moved to the conference IVR queue
where they are prompted for the conference password.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix D-Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication
•
•
•
•
•
If the Conference IVR Service is configured to prompt for the Conference password, the
participant is requested to enter the conference password. In this flow, the conference
password is not validated with the external database application, only with the MCU.
— If the wrong password is entered, he/she is disconnected from the conference.
If the correct conference password is entered, the participant is prompted to enter the
chairperson identifier key.
— If no identifier is entered, the participant is connected to the conference as a
standard participant.
If the chairperson identifier is entered, the participant is prompted to enter the
chairperson password.
When the participant enters the chairperson password or his/her personal password, it
is sent to the external database application for validation.
— If the password is incorrect the participant is disconnected from the MCU.
If there is a match, the participant is granted the right to join the conference as
chairperson. In addition, the external database application sends to the MCU the
following parameters:
— Participant name (display name)
— Participant Information, such as the participant E-mail. These fields correspond to
Info 1, 2, 3 and 4 fields in the Participant Properties - Information dialog box.
To enable conference access validation for all participants the following conferencing
components are required:
•
The external database must hold the Chairperson Password or the participant’s Alias.
•
The Conference IVR Service assigned to the conference (defined in the Profile) must be
configured to check the external database for the Chairperson password only when the
participant enters the chairperson identifier key (either pound or star). In addition, it
must be configured to prompt for the chairperson identifier key and password.
System Settings for Ad Hoc Conferencing and External
Database Authentication
Ad Hoc Settings
Before a participant can initiate an Ad Hoc conference (with or without authentication), the
following components must be defined:
•
Profiles
Defines the conference parameters for the conferences that will be initiated from the Ad
Hoc-enabled Entry Queue. For more details, see "Conference Profiles” on page 2-1.
•
Entry Queue IVR Service with Conference ID Request Enabled
The Entry Queue Service is used to route participants to their destination conferences,
or create a new conference with this ID. For details, see "IVR Services” on page 17-1.
In Ad Hoc conferencing, the Conference ID is used to check whether the destination
conference is already running on the MCU and if not, to start a new conference using
this ID.
Polycom, Inc.
D-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
Ad Hoc - enabled Entry Queue
Ad Hoc conferencing must be enabled in the Entry Queue and a Profile must be
assigned to the Entry Queue. In addition, an Entry Queue IVR Service supporting
conference ID request. For details, see "Entry Queues” on page 7-1.
Authentication Settings
•
MCU Configuration
Usage of an external database application for authentication (for starting new
conferences or joining ongoing conferences) is configured for the MCU in the System
Configuration. For details, see "MCU Configuration to Communicate with an External
Database Application” on page D-9.
•
Entry Queue IVR Service with Conference Initiation Authentication Enabled
Set the Entry Queue IVR Service to send authentication requests to the external
database application to verify the participant’s right to start a new conference according
to the Conference ID entered by the participant. For details, see "Enabling External
Database Validation for Starting New Ongoing Conferences” on page D-10.
•
Conference IVR Service with Conference Access Authentication Enabled
Set the Conference IVR Service to send authentication requests to the external database
application to verify the participant’s right to connect to the conference as a standard
participant or as a chairperson. For details, see "Enabling External Database Validation for
Conferences Access” on page D-10.
•
External Database Application Settings
The external database contains a list of participants (users), with their assigned
parameters. These parameters are:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
D-8
Conference Name
Conference Billing code
Conference Password
Chairperson Password
Conference Information, such as the contact person name. These fields correspond
to Info 1, 2 and 3 fields in the Conference Properties - Information dialog box.
Maximum number of participants allowed for the conference
Conference Owner
Participant name (display name)
Participant Information, such as the participant E-mail. These fields correspond to
Info 1, 2, 3 and 4 fields in the Participant Properties - Information dialog box.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix D-Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication
MCU Configuration to Communicate with an External Database
Application
To enable the communication with the external database application, several flags must be
set in the System Configuration.
To set the System Configuration flags:
1 On the Setup menu, click System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
Modify the values of the following flags:
Table D-1 Flag Values for Accessing External Database Application
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description and Value
ENABLE_EXTERNAL_
DB_ACCESS
The flag that enables the use of the external database application.
EXTERNAL_DB_IP
The IP address of the external database application server. default
IP: 0.0.0.0.
EXTERNAL_DB_POR
T
The port number used by the MCU to access the external
application server.
Default Port = 80.
EXTERNAL_DB_LOGI
N
The user name defined in the external database application for the
MCU.
EXTERNAL_DB_PASS
WORD
The password associated with the user name defined for the MCU
in the external database application.
EXTERNAL_DB_DIRE
CTORY
The URL of the external database application.
3
Click OK.
4
Reset the MCU for flag changes to take effect.
D-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Enabling External Database Validation for Starting New Ongoing
Conferences
The validation of the participant’s right to start a new conference with an external database
application is configured in the Entry Queue IVR Service - Global dialog box.
>> Set the External Server Authentication field to Numeric ID.
Enabling External Database Validation for Conferences Access
The validation of the participant’s right to join an ongoing conference with an external
database application is configured in the Conference IVR Service - Global dialog box.
You can set the system to validate all the participants joining the conference or just the
chairperson.
>> Set the External Server Authentication field to:
—
Always - to validate the participant’s right to join an ongoing conference for all
participants
— Upon Request - to validate the participant’s right to join an ongoing conference as
chairperson
D-10
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix E
Participant Properties Advanced
Channel Information
The following appendix details the properties connected with information about audio and
video parameters, as well as, problems with the network which can affect the audio and
video quality.
Table E-1 Participant Properties - Channel Status Advanced Parameters
Field
Description
Media Info
Polycom, Inc.
Algorithm
Indicates the audio or video algorithm and protocol.
Frame per packet (audio
only)
The number of audio frames per packet that are transferred between the
MCU and the endpoint. If the actual Frame per Packets are higher than
Frame per Packets declared during the capabilities exchange, a Faulty
flag is displayed.
Resolution
(video only)
Indicates the video resolution in use. If the actual resolution is higher than
resolution declared in the capabilities exchange, the Faulty flag is displayed. For example, if the declared resolution is CIF and the actual resolution is 4CIF, the Faulty flag is displayed.
Frame Rate
(video only)
The number of video frames per second that are transferred between the
MCU and the endpoint.
Annexes (video only)
Indicates the H.263 annexes in use at the time of the last RTCP report. If
the actual annexes used are other than the declared annexes in the capabilities exchange, the Faulty flag is displayed.
Channel Index
For Polycom Internal use only.
E-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Table E-1 Participant Properties - Channel Status Advanced Parameters
Field
Description
RTP Statistics
Actual loss
Out of Order
E-2
The number of missing packets counted by the IP card as reported in the
last RTP Statistics report. If a packet that was considered lost arrives
later, it is deducted from the packet loss count. Packet loss is displayed
with the following details:
• Accumulated N - number of lost packets accumulated since the
channel opened.
•
Accumulated % - percentage of lost packets out of the total number
of packets transmitted since the channel opened.
•
Interval N - number of packets lost in the last RTP report interval
(default interval is 5 minutes).
•
Interval % - percentage of lost packets out of the total number of
packets transmitted in the last RTP report interval (default interval is 5
minutes).
•
Peak - the highest number of lost packets in a report interval from the
beginning of the channel's life span.
The number of packets arriving out of order. The
following details are displayed:
• Accumulated N - total number of packets that arrived out of order
since the channel opened.
•
Accumulated % - percentage of packets that arrived out of order out
of the total number of packets transmitted since the channel opened.
•
Interval N - number of packets that arrived out of order in the last RTP
report interval (default interval is 5 minutes).
•
Interval % - percentage of packets that arrived out of order out of the
total number of packets transmitted in the last RTP report interval
(default interval is 5 minutes).
•
Peak - the highest number of packets that arrived out of order in a
report interval from the beginning of the channel's life span.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix E-Participant Properties Advanced Channel Information
Table E-1 Participant Properties - Channel Status Advanced Parameters
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Fragmented
Indicates the number of packets that arrived to the IP card fragmented
(i.e., a single packet broken by the network into multiple packets). This
value can indicate the delay and reordering of fragmented packets that
require additional processing, but is not considered a fault.
The Fragmented information is displayed with the following details:
• Accumulated N - total number of packets that were fragmented since
the channel opened.
•
Accumulated % - percentage of fragmented packets out of the total
number of packets transmitted since the channel opened.
•
Interval N - number of fragmented packets received in the last RTP
report interval (default interval is 5 minutes).
•
Interval % - percentage of fragmented packets out of the total number
of packets transmitted in the last RTP report interval (default interval is
5 minutes).
•
Peak - the highest number of fragmented packets in a report interval
from the beginning of the channel's life span.
E-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
E-4
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix F
Configuring Direct Connections to
RealPresence Collaboration Server
Direct connection to the RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) is necessary if you want
to:
•
Modify the Collaboration Server’s Factory Default Management Network settings without
using the USB memory stick.
•
Connect to the Collaboration Server’s Alternate Management Network for support
purposes.
•
Connect to the Collaboration Server via a modem.
Direct connections to the Collaboration Server are not supported when the Collaboration Server is in
Ultra Secure Mode.
For more information see "Securing an External Database” on page F-7.
Management Network (Primary)
If you do not want to use the USB memory stick method of modifying the Collaboration
Server’s Management Network parameters, it is necessary to establish a direct connection
between a workstation and the Collaboration Server.
Configuring the Workstation
The following procedures show how to modify the workstation’s networking parameters
using the Windows New Connection Wizard.
For non-Windows operating systems an equivalent procedure must be performed by the
system administrator.
Before connecting directly, you must modify the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway
settings of the workstation to be compatible with either the Collaboration Server’s Default
Management Network or Alternate Management Network.
To modify the workstation’s IP addresses:
1 On the Windows Start menu, select Settings > Network Connections.
Polycom, Inc.
F-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
F-2
2
In the Network Connections window, double-click the Local Area Connection that has
Connected status.
3
In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click the Properties button.
4
In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, select Internet Protocol [TCP/IP] >
Properties.
5
In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box, select Use the following IP
address.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix F-Configuring Direct Connections to RealPresence Collaboration Server
6
Enter the IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway for the workstation.
The workstation’s IP address should be in the same network neighborhood as the
Collaboration Server’s Control Unit IP address.
Example: IP address – near 192.168.1.nn
None of the reserved IP addresses listed in Table F-1 should be used for the IP Address.
The Subnet mask and Default gateway addresses should be the same as those for the
Collaboration Server’s Management Network.
The addresses needed for connection to either the Collaboration Server’s Default
Management Network or Alternate Management Network are listed in Table F-1.
For more information about connecting to the Alternate Management Network, see
"Connecting to the Collaboration Server via Modem” on page F-6.
Table F-1
Reserved IP Addresses
IP Address
Network Entity
Management
Network
(Factory Default)
Alternate Network
Control Unit IP Address
192.168.1.254
169.254.192.10
Control Unit Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.240.0
Default Router IP Address
192.168.1.1
169.254.192.1
Shelf Management IP Address
192.168.1.252
169.254.192.16
Shelf Management Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.240.0
192.168.1.1
169.254.192.1
Shelf Management Default Gateway
7
Polycom, Inc.
Click the OK button.
F-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Connecting to the Management Network
To connect directly to the Collaboration Server:
1
Connect one LAN cable between the PC and LAN 1 on the Collaboration Server’s back
panel.
2
Connect the power cable and power the Collaboration Server On.
3
Start the RP Collaboration Server Web Client application on the workstation, by entering
the factory setting Management IP address in the browser’s address line and pressing
Enter.
4
In the RP Collaboration Server Web Client Login screen, enter the default Username
(POLYCOM) and Password (POLYCOM) and click the Login button.
The Fast Configuration Wizard starts.
If no USB memory stick is detected and either: this is the First Time Power-up or the
Default IP Service has been deleted and the Collaboration Server has been reset, the
following dialog box is displayed:
For more information about First-time Power-up and the Fast Configuration Wizard see
the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Procedure 1: First-time
Power-up” on page 2-8.
5
6
F-4
Enter the following parameters using the information supplied by your network
administrator:
— Control Unit IP Address
— Shelf Management IP Address
— Control Unit Subnet Mask
— Default Router IP Address
Click the Save & Close button.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix F-Configuring Direct Connections to RealPresence Collaboration Server
The system prompts you to sign in with the new Control Unit IP Address.
7
Disconnect the LAN cable between the workstation and the LAN 1 Port on the
Collaboration Server’s back panel.
8
Connect LAN 1 Port on the Collaboration Server’s back panel to the local network using
a LAN cable.
9
Enter the new Control Unit IP Address in the browser’s address line, using a workstation
on the local network, and press Enter to start the RP Collaboration Server Web Client
application.
10 In the RP Collaboration Server Web Client Login screen, enter the default Username
(POLYCOM) and Password (POLYCOM) and click the Login button.
Polycom, Inc.
F-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Connecting to the Collaboration Server via Modem
Remote access to the Collaboration Server’s Alternate Management Network is supported via
an external PSTN <=> IP modem.
To connect via modem to the Alternate Management Network the following procedures must
be performed:
1
Procedure 1: Install the RMX Manager – the web client enables direct access to the
Collaboration Server for support purposes.
2
Procedure 2: Configure the modem – by assigning it an IP address on a specific subnet
in the Alternate Management Network.
3
Procedure 3: Create a dial-up connection – using the Windows New Connection Wizard.
4
Procedure 4: Connect to the Collaboration Server – via the RMX Manager.
Procedure 1: Install the RMX Manager
Before installing the RMX Manager, verify that you have at least 150Mb of free space on your
workstation.
For more information see "Installing the RMX Manager” on page 19-2.
Procedure 2: Configure the Modem
Configure the modem as follows:
• IP address – near 169.254.192.nn
•
Subnet Mask – 255.255.240.0
None of the reserved IP addresses listed in Table F-1 on page F-3 should be used for the IP
Address.
F-6
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix F-Configuring Direct Connections to RealPresence Collaboration Server
Procedure 3: Create a Dial-up Connection
To create a dial-up connection:
This procedure is performed once. Only the Dial field in the Connect applet (see step 10 on
page F-10) is modified for connection to different modems.
Polycom, Inc.
1
In Windows, navigate via the Control Panel to the Network Connections applet and select
Create a new connection.
2
When the New Connection Wizard is displayed, click the Next button.
3
In the Network Connection Type box, select Connect to the Internet and click the Next
button.
F-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
F-8
4
In the Getting Ready box, select Set up my connection manually and click the Next
button.
5
In the Internet Connection box, select Connect using dial-up modem and click the Next
button.
6
In the Connection Name box, enter a Name for the modem connection (e.g. Modem
Connection) and click the Next button.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix F-Configuring Direct Connections to RealPresence Collaboration Server
Polycom, Inc.
7
In the Phone Number to Dial box, enter the Phone Number for the modem and click the
Next button.
8
In the Connection Availability box, select Anyone’s use and click the Next button.
9
In the Internet Account Information box, complete the Username, Password and Confirm
Password fields and click the Next button.
F-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
10 The Connection applet is displayed with the field values filled in as specified by the New
Connection Wizard.
11 Click the Dial button to establish a connection to LAN 3 Port via the modem.
The Windows – Network Connections applet displays Connected status for the new
connection.
F-10
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix F-Configuring Direct Connections to RealPresence Collaboration Server
Procedure 4: Connect to the Collaboration Server
To Connect using the RMX Manager:
To use the browser:
4 In the browser’s command line, enter http://<MCU Control Unit IP Address>/
RmxManager.html and press Enter.
To use the Windows Start menu:
1 Click Start.
a
If the Collaboration Server Manager is displayed in the recently used programs list,
click RMX Manager in the list to start the application.
or
b
Click All Programs.
The All Programs list is displayed.
a
Select Polycom and then select RMX Manager.
The RMX Manager – Welcome screen is displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
F-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
F-12
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix G
Secure Communication Mode
The RealPresence Collaboration Server can be configured to work in Secure Mode by
configuring the Collaboration Server and the Collaboration Server Web Client to work with
SSL/TLS.
In this mode, a SSL/TLS Certificate is installed on the MCU, setting the MCU Listening Port
to secured port 443.
TLS is a cryptographic protocol used to ensure secure communications on public networks.
TLS uses a Certificate purchased from a trusted third party Certificate Authority to authenticate
public keys that are used in conjunction with private keys to ensure secure communications
across the network.
The Collaboration Server supports:
•
TLS 1.0
•
SSL 3.0 (Secure Socket Layer)
SSL 3.0 utilizes 1024-bit RSA public key encryption.
TLS certificates can be generated using the following methods: CSR, PFX and PEM; each
giving different options for Encryption Key length. Table G-1 lists the SIP TLS Encryption Key
length support for the various system components.
Table G-1
SIP TLS - Encryption Key Support by System Component
System Component
Key Generation Method
Key Length (bits)
Key generated by
CSR
2048
Collaboration
Server
PFX / PEM
1024 or 2048
User
CSR
2048
Collaboration
Server
SIP Signaling
Management
LDAP
Certificate Configuration and Management
All Polycom devices used in a Maximum Security Environment require security certificates.
Certificate Template Requirements
The specific security certificate requirements for Collaboration Servers used in Maximum
Security Environments are:
•
Polycom, Inc.
Support of 2048-bit encryption keys.
G-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
•
Support of Extended Key Usage (EKU) for both:
— Client Authentication
— Server Authentication
The certificate template used by your CA server may need modification to meet the
Collaboration Server requirements.
Certificate Requirements for Polycom Devices
Each Polycom device must have security certificates for the entire Chain Of Trust.
The Collaboration Server must have:
•
The public certificate of each server in the CA Chain or hierarchy that issued its
certificate.
For example: RootCA  IntermediateCA  SubCA
The public certificates of the chain that issued the administrator’s identity certificate. For
example: UserRootCA  UserIntermediateCA  UserSubCA
Configure Certificate Management
Within a PKI environment, certificate revocation policies are used to ensure that certificates
are valid. Certificates can expire or be revoked for various reasons (RFC 5280).
The Collaboration Server enforces these certificate revocation policies through Certificate
Revocation Lists (CRLs). CRLs are required for each CA Chain in use by the Collaboration
Server. These CRL files must be kept current
Switching to Secure Mode
The following operations are required to switch the Collaboration Server to Secure Mode:
•
Purchase and Install the SSL/TLS certificate
•
Modify the Management Network settings
•
Create/Modify the relevant System Flags
Purchasing a Certificate
Once a certificate is purchased and received it is stored in the Collaboration Server and used
for all subsequent secured connections.
To create/purchase a certificate:
1 In the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > RMX Secured Communication >
Create certificate request.
G-2
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix G-Secure Communication Mode
The Create Certificate Request dialog box is displayed.
2
Enter information in all the following fields:
Table G-2 Create Certificate Request
3
Polycom, Inc.
Field
Description
Country Name
Enter any 2 letter code for the country name.
State or Province
Enter the full name of the state or province.
Locality
Enter the full name of the town/city/location.
Organization
Enter the full name of your organization for which the certificate
will be issued.
Organizational Unit
Enter the full name of the unit (group or division) for which the
certificate will be issued.
Common Name (DNS/
IP)
Enter the DNS MCU Host Name. This MCU Host Name must also
be configured in the Management Network Properties dialog box.
Hash Method
Select the Hash method for the certificate.
Click Send Details.
G-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Collaboration Server creates a New Certificate Request and returns it to the Create
Certificate Request dialog box along with the information the user submitted.
4
Click Copy Request to copy the New Certificate Request to the workstation’s clipboard.
5
Connect to your preferred Certificate Authority’s website using the web browser.
6
Follow the purchasing instructions at the Certificate Authority’s website.
Paste (Ctrl + V) the New Certificate Request as required by the Certificate Authority.
The Certificate Authority issues the TLS/SSL certificate, and sends the certificate to you
by e-mail.
Installing the Certificate
To install the certificate:
After you have received the certificate from the Certificate Authority:
G-4
1
Copy (Ctrl + C) the certificate information from the Certificate Authority’s e-mail to the
clipboard.
2
In the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > RMX Secured Communication > Send
Certificate.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix G-Secure Communication Mode
3
Click Paste Certificate to paste the clipboard content into the Send Certificate dialog box.
4
Click the Send Certificate button to send the certificate to the Collaboration Server.
The MCU validates the certificate.
— If the certificate is not valid, an error message is displayed.
— If the certificate matches the private key, and the task is completed, a confirmation
message indicating that the certificate was created successfully is displayed.
A System Restart is not required at this point.
The certificate expiry date is checked daily. An active alarm is raised two weeks before
the certificate is due to expire, stating the number of days to expiry.
If the certificate expires, the Collaboration Server continues to work in secure mode and
an Active Alarm is raised with Security mode failed – Certificate expired in the description
field.
Certificates are deleted when an administrator performs a Restore Factory Defaults with the
Comprehensive Restore option selected.
Creating/Modifying System Flags
The following System Flags in system.cfg control secure communications.
•
RMX_MANAGEMENT_SECURITY_PROTOCOL
•
EXTERNAL_DB_PORT
Table G-3, below, lists both flags and their settings.
If the System Flag, RMX_MANAGEMENT_SECURITY_PROTOCOL does not exist in the system, it
must be created by using the Setup menu.
For more information see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
Table G-3 System Flags
Polycom, Inc.
Flag
Description
RMX_MANAGEMENT_S
ECURITY_PROTOCOL
Enter the protocol to be used for secure communications.
Default: TLSV1_SSLV3 (both).
Default for U.S. Federal licenses: TLSV1.
G-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table G-3 System Flags (Continued)
Flag
Description
EXTERNAL_DB_PORT
The external database server port used by the Collaboration Server to
send and receive XML requests/responses.
For secure communications set the value to 443.
Default: 5005.
The Collaboration Server must be restarted for modified flag settings to take effect.
Enabling Secure Communication Mode
After the SSL/TLS Certificate is installed, secure communications are enabled by modifying
the properties of the Management Network in the Management Network properties dialog box.
When Secure Communications Mode is enabled:
•
Only https:// commands from the browser to the Control Unit IP Address of the
Collaboration Server are accepted.
•
The Collaboration Server listens only on secured port 443.
•
All connection attempts on port 80 are rejected.
•
A secure communication indicator ( ) is displayed in the browser’s status bar.
To enable secure communications mode:
1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane, click IP Network Services.
2
In the IP Network Services list pane, double-click the Management Network entry.
3
Click the Security tab.
The Management Security Properties dialog box is displayed.
G-6
4
Select the Secured Communication check box.
5
Click OK.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix G-Secure Communication Mode
Securing an External Database
TLS 1.0 is used when securing communications between the Collaboration Server and an
external database. The certificate is installed on the database server and the Collaboration
Server is the client. When the certificate is installed on the database server, all client requests
and responses are transferred via secure port 443.
It is important to verify that the external database application is operating in secure mode
before enabling secure external database communications on the Collaboration Server. The
Collaboration Server checks the validity of external database’s certificate before
communicating. If there is a certificate error an Active Alarm is raised with Error in external
database certificate in the description field.
To enable secure Collaboration Server Communications with an External Database:
4
Set the Collaboration Server to communicate with the database server via port 443 by
setting the value of the System Flag EXTERNAL_DB_PORT in system.cfg to 443.
For more information see "Modifying System Flags” on page 21-1.
MS Active Directory Integration
It is possible to configure direct interaction between the Collaboration Server and Microsoft
Active Directory for Authentication and Authorization of Management Network users.
The following diagram shows a typical user authentication sequence between a User,
Collaboration Server and Active Directory.
Directory and Database Options
Standard Security Mode
Internal Collaboration Server database + External Database
First authentication is via the internal Collaboration Server database. If it is not successful,
authentication is via the External Database.
Polycom, Inc.
G-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Internal Collaboration Server database + External Database + Active Directory
• Management Logins
First authentication is via the internal Collaboration Server database. If it is not
successful, authentication is via the Active Directory.
•
Conference Queries (Chairperson Password, Numerical ID etc.)
First authentication is via the internal Collaboration Server database. If it is not
successful, authentication is via the External Database.
Guidelines
•
•
The Collaboration Server maintains a local record of:
— Audit Events – users that generate these events are marked as being either internal
or external.
— Successful user logins
— Failed user login attempts
User passwords and user lockout policy for external users are managed via Active
Directory’s integration with the user’s host machine.
•
Enabling or disabling Active Directory integration does not require a reset.
•
In Standard Security Mode multiple accounts of all user types are supported.
•
Multiple Machine Accounts with various roles are supported.
•
Microsoft Active Directory is the only directory service supported.
•
Active Directory integration is configured as part of the Management Network.
•
In Standard Security Mode, the Active Directory can be queried using NTLM with or
without TLS encryption.
•
Server and client certificate validation requests use LDAP with or without TLS
encryption.
When using LDAP over TLS, in addition to using port 389 with STARTTLS, the administrator has
the option of using port 636.
G-8
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix G-Secure Communication Mode
Enabling Active Directory Integration
To configure Directory Services:
1 On the Collaboration Server Menu, click Setup > Directory Services.
The Directory Services - Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2
Modify the following fields.
Table G-4 Directory Services - Configuration
Field
Description
Connect to the
Enterprise Directory
Server
Select this check box to enable or disable the Active Directory feature.
IP Address or DNS
Name
Enter the IP address or DNS name of the Enterprise Directory Server
(Active Directory).
Port
Select the Port according to the Authentication Protocol to be used:
• 389 - NTLM over TCP
•
Polycom, Inc.
636 - NTLM over TLS
Search Base DN
Enter the starting point when searching for User and Group
information in the Active Directory.
For example if the Domain Name is:
mainoffice.bigcorp.com.uk
The entry in this field should be:
CN=Users,DC=mainoffice,DC=bigcorp,DC=come,DC=uk
Authentication Type
Only NTLM can be used.
G-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
3
Click the Role Mapping tab.
The Directory Services - Role Mapping dialog box is displayed.
Each of the Collaboration Server user types: Administrator, Administrator Read-Only,
Auditor, Operator and Chairperson can be mapped to only one Active Directory Group or
Role according to the customer’s specific implementation.
4
— A Collaboration Server user that belongs to multiple Active Directory Groups is
assigned to the Group with the least privileges.
Map the Collaboration Server User Types, to their Active Directory roles by modifying the
following fields.
Table G-5 Directory Services - Role Mapping
Field
Description
Administrator
Administrator Read-Only
Operator
At least one of these User Types must be mapped to an
Active Directory Role.
Chairperson
Auditor
5
G-10
Click OK.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix H
Restoring Defaults and System
Recovery
The USB port of a RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s in secure mode can be used to:
•
Restore the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s to Factory Security Defaults mode
(https  http).
•
Perform a Comprehensive Restore to Factory Defaults
•
Perform an Emergency CRL (Certificate Revocation List) Update
Restore to Factory Security Defaults
Restore to Factory Security Defaults can be performed by either:
•
Inserting a USB device such as a mouse or a keyboard into any USB port of the
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s causing it to exit secure mode and return to
Factory Security Defaults mode. After performing this procedure, logins to the
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s use the http command and not the https
command.
or
•
Using the Polycom USB key that came with the RealPresence Collaboration Server.
To restore the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s to Factory Security Defaults using a
USB device:
1 Insert a USB device into any USB port of the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s.
2
Power the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Off and then On.
3
Login using http://<Control Unit IP Address>.
To restore the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s to Factory Security Defaults using
the Polycom USB key:
1 Inset the Polycom USB key that came with the RealPresence Collaboration Server into
your computer.
The Polycom Documentation window is displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
a
Select Open Folder to view files using Windows Explorer.
b
Double-click the index.hta file.
H-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Language Menu is displayed, offering a choice of several languages.
2
Click the documentation language of your choice.
An End-User Licence Agreement for Polycom Software is displayed.
H-2
3
Read the agreement and click the Accept Agreement button.
4
In the Product Type window, select RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix H-Restoring Defaults and System Recovery
5
In the Initial Setup Utility dialog box, click the Restore to Factory Security Defaults link.
The Restore to Factory Security Defaults dialog box is displayed.
6
Click OK.
7
Remove the USB key from the PC workstation.
8
Insert the USB key in any USB port of the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s.
9
Turn off the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s, then turn it on.
10 Start the RealPresence Collaboration Server Web Client application on the workstation.
a
In the browser’s address line, enter the IP address of the Control Unit in the format:
http://<Control Unit IP Address>.
b
Polycom, Inc.
Click Enter.
H-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
When the RealPresence Collaboration Server Web Client Login window is displayed, the
system was successfully restored to the factory security mode.
11 Remove the USB key from the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s.
Comprehensive Restore to Factory Defaults
The Comprehensive Restore to Factory Defaults deletes the following files:
•
CDR
•
Address Book
•
Log Files
•
Faults
•
Dump Files
•
Notes
In addition, all the conferencing entities are deleted:
•
Entry Queues
•
Profiles
•
Meeting Rooms
•
IVR Services
•
Default Network IP Service
•
Log Files
•
CFS license information
•
Management Network Service
The RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s is restored to the settings it had when shipped
from the factory. The Product Activation Key is required to re-configure the Management
Network Service during the First Entry Configuration.
H-4
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix H-Restoring Defaults and System Recovery
Comprehensive Restore to Factory Defaults Procedure
Restoring the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s to Factory Defaults consists of the
following procedures:
A Backup Configuration Files
— These files will be used to restore the system in Procedure C.
B
Restore to Factory Defaults
— Restart the system with the configured Polycom USB key plugged into any USB
port.
C Optional. Restore the System Configuration From the Backup
— Apply the backup file created in procedure A.
— Restart the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s.
(If the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s is unresponsive after these procedures, a
further restart may be necessary.)
Procedure A: Backup Configuration Files
The Software Management menu is used to backup and restore the configuration files of the
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s and to download MCU software.
To backup configuration files:
1 On the Collaboration Server Menu, click Administration > Software Management >
Backup Configuration.
The Backup Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2
Click Browse.
3
Browse to the Backup Directory Path and then click Ok.
4
Click Backup.
Procedure B: Restore to Factory Defaults
To perform a Comprehensive Restore to Factory Default perform the following steps:
1 Insert the Polycom USB key that came with the RealPresence Collaboration Server into
your computer.
The Polycom Documentation window is displayed.
Polycom, Inc.
a
Select Open Folder to view files using Windows Explorer.
b
Double-click the index.hta file.
H-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The Language Menu is displayed, offering a choice of several languages.
2
Click the documentation language of your choice.
An End-User Licence Agreement for Polycom Software is displayed.
H-6
3
Read the agreement and click the Accept Agreement button.
4
In the Product Type window, select RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix H-Restoring Defaults and System Recovery
5
In the Initial Setup Utility window, click the Restore to Factory Defaults link.
The Restore to Factory Security Defaults dialog box is displayed.
6
Recommended: Click the Lan Configuration check box and modify the following
parameters in the utility’s dialog box using the information supplied by your network
administrator.
— Control Unit IP Address
— Subnet Mask
— Default Router IP Address
The restore to Factory Defaults removes the Management Network Service. If the above fields
addresses are not set, the Control Unit IP Address of the Management Network Service will be
192.168.1.254.
Polycom, Inc.
H-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
7
Click OK.
8
Remove the USB key from the PC.
9
Insert the USB key in any USB port of the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s.
10 Turn off the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s, then turn it On.
11 Start the RealPresence Collaboration Server Web Client application on the workstation.
a
In the browser’s address line, enter the IP address of the Control Unit in the
following format: http://<Control Unit IP Address>,
as defined in the USB key. If no Control Unit IP Address was defined, the IP address
will be 192.168.1.254.
b
Click Enter.
When the RealPresence Collaboration Server Web Client Login window is displayed, the
system was successfully restored to factory defaults.
12 Optional. Restore the system using Procedure C: Restore the System Configuration From the
Backup below.
Procedure C: Restore the System Configuration From the Backup
To restore configuration files:
1 On the Collaboration Server Menu, click Administration > Software Management >
Restore Configuration.
2
Browse to the Restore Directory Path where the backed up configuration files are stored.
3
Click the Restore button.
4
When the Restore is complete, restart the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s.
RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s system settings, with the exception of User
data, are restored.
5
H-8
Restore User data by repeating Step 1 to Step 3 of this procedure.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix H-Restoring Defaults and System Recovery
System Recovery Using the Recovery DVD
You can use the system recovery disk to re-install the Polycom RealPresence Collaboration
Server 800s application in case of system crashes or server hard disk damage.
Two DVDs are shipped with the Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s, the Polycom
Recovery DVD, and the Dell Diagnostics DVD.
Preparation for System Recovery
Before performing the recovery procedure it is necessary to modify the Factory Default
Management Network Settings on the USB Utilities and Documentation memory stick. For
details, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Modifying the
Factory Default Management Network Settings on the USB Memory Stick” on page 2-5.
Performing the Recovery Process
To re-install the system using the System Recovery DVD:
1
Turn off the RealPresence Collaboration Server.
2
Insert the USB memory stick into any USB slot.
3
Connect a USB keyboard and monitor.
4
Turn on the RealPresence Collaboration Server.
5
Insert the Polycom Recovery DVD that comes with your system.
The RealPresence Collaboration Server loads the Polycom Recovery DVD.
Polycom, Inc.
6
Press 2 and then Enter.
7
The RealPresence Collaboration Server installation starts.
H-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
The whole procedure may take 15 minutes. When the installation completes, the system
reboots.
When the system reboots the DVD is ejected.
8
Remove the DVD from the server and close the DVD drive.
Completing the System Configuration
To complete the system configuration:
9 Connect to the MCU using the default Polycom user name and Polycom password. For
details, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide, "Procedure 3:
Connection to MCU” on page 2-9.
10 Enter the activation key.
11 Define the IP Network Service for the media and signaling using the Fast Configuration
Wizard. For details, see the RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Getting Started Guide,
"Fast Configuration Wizard” on page 2-11.
12 Optional: Restore the system configuration. For details, see "Software Management” on
page 20-39.
13 Remove the USB memory stick from the RealPresence Collaboration Server.
The system recovery is complete.
H-10
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I
Setting the Collaboration Server for
Integration Into Microsoft
Environment
Integration into Microsoft environment (using Lync endpoints) is supported in CP Conferencing Mode
only.
Overview
•
The Polycom® Visual Communications offers high quality video and audio multipoint
conferencing by integrating the Polycom network devices and endpoints into
Microsoft® platforms. The Polycom® RealPresence® Collaboration Server
(Collaboration Server) system can be integrated into Lync Server 2010 environment
(Microsoft Wave 14).
Point-to-point and multipoint audio and video meetings can be initiated from Lync client,
Windows Messenger and Polycom video endpoints (HDX and VSX) when the environment
components are installed and configured.
•
Multipoint calls are enabled when the Collaboration Server is installed in the Microsoft
environment and is configured for unified communications. Routing to conferences can
be performed by the Lync Server by Matched URI dialing - using the SIP URI address.
Only TLS connections to the Collaboration Server will work, TCP connections will not work.
The Collaboration Server does not support working with multiple Edge servers.
TLS certificates can be generated using the following methods: CSR, PFX and PEM; each
giving different options for Encryption Key length. Table I-1 lists the SIP TLS Encryption Key
length support for the various system components.
Table I-1
SIP TLS - Encryption Key Support by System Component
System Component
Key Generation Method
Key Length (bits)
Key generated by
CSR
2048
Collaboration
Server
PFX / PEM
1024 or 2048
User
SIP Signaling
Polycom, Inc.
I-1
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table I-1
SIP TLS - Encryption Key Support by System Component (Continued)
System Component
Management
LDAP
Key Generation Method
Key Length (bits)
Key generated by
CSR
2048
Collaboration
Server
Conferencing Entities Presence
Conferencing entities (Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP Factories) can be registered
with the SIP server (Lync server) enabling the addition of these conferencing entities to the
buddy list while displaying their presence (availability status: Available, Offline, or Busy).
Lync Server client users can connect to conferencing entities directly from the buddy list.
The configuration of the environment to enable Presence, is usually done once the basic
configuration is completed.
For more details, see "Adding Presence to Conferencing Entities in the Buddy List” on page I-22.
Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE)
Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE) provides a structure/protocol to unify the
various NAT Traversal techniques that are used to cross firewalls.
It enables SIP based endpoints to connect while traversing a variety of firewalls that may
exist between the calling endpoint (local) and the MCU or called endpoint (remote). It is the
only way for remote Lync users to call into the enterprise without a VPN.
ICE Guidelines
•
Collaboration Server ICE implementation complies with Microsoft ICE
implementation.
•
ICE can be implemented in an environment that includes a STUN server and a Relay
server (for example, Microsoft AV Edge server).
•
The firewall must be UDP enabled.
When ICE over UDP is blocked in the firewall UDP port, the ICE connection through the TCP
protocol is automatically used instead of UDP for fallback.
I-2
•
The Collaboration Server must have a unique account in the Active Directory and must
be registered with the Lync server.
•
ICE is supported with Collaboration Server Multiple Networks.
•
Ensure that the Collaboration Server system SIP signaling domain has been allowed on
the Lync Server edge server to which you are federating (if your deployment does not
include a DMA system).
•
Content sharing (BFCP protocol) is not supported in ICE environment.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
Connecting to the Collaboration Server in ICE Environment
The dialing methods that can be used by an endpoint to connect to another endpoint
depends on the ICE environment: Local, Remote or Federation.
Figure I-1 ICE Environment
Local connection - a connection between the Collaboration Server and endpoints that reside
within the same organization. For example, an endpoint in Zone A calls the Collaboration
Server in Zone A.
Branch Office - a connection between an endpoint that is behind a firewall and the
Collaboration Server that reside in the same zone. The user in the Branch Office can also
place and receive calls from other enterprises and remote users. For example, Enterprise A
also contains a branch office, which in this example is a Polycom HDX user who is behind
more than one firewall.
Remote - a connection between Collaboration Server that resides within the organization and
an endpoint that resides outside of the organization (on a WAN). For example, an endpoint
on the internet that calls the Collaboration Server in Zone A. In such a case, the call has to
traverse at least one firewall.
Federation - a connection between Collaboration Server that resides within one organization
and an endpoint that resides within another organization. For example, an endpoint in Zone
A calls the Collaboration Server in Zone B. The call has to traverse two or more firewalls.
Dialing Methods
The ICE protocol enables remote and federation connections using the registered user name
for dialing. The endpoint connects to the Collaboration Server by entering the Collaboration
Server registered user name in the following format:
[Collaboration Server registered user name]@[Lync server domain name]
For example: rmx111@ilsnd.vsg.local
The call reaches the Transit Entry Queue of the Collaboration Server and via IVR is routed to
the destination conference.
This method is added to the local connections and the Numerical Dialing method available in
the Lync server environment.
The following table summarizes the dialing methods and its availability in the various
configurations.
Table I-2
Polycom, Inc.
Available dialing methods per Connection Type
Matched URI Routing
Numerical Dialing
Registered User Name
Local



Branch office

X

I-3
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table I-2
Available dialing methods per Connection Type (Continued)
Matched URI Routing
Numerical Dialing
Registered User Name
Remote

X

Federation

X

* To enable the Matched URI dialing in the federated environment to be able to connect to the
Collaboration Server SIP signaling domain, you must also configure the Office Communications
Server/Lync Server.
When federating a Lync Edge server with another Lync server environment, you need to
include the FQDN of the Lync Edge server as well as the SIP signaling domain for federated
environment. The SIP signaling domain is the FQDN of the Polycom DMA system or a
Polycom Collaboration Server system (when your deployment does not include a DMA
system).
For example, if company B wants to set up federation with company A and receive and send
SIP calls that will be handled by the Polycom SIP signaling domain in company A, you need
to add the FQDN of the company A Office Communications Server domain as well as the
SIP signaling domain of company A to the list of internal SIP Server domains supported by
the company B Office Communications Server/Lync Server environment.
For more information, see the Microsoft documentation and the Polycom® Unified
Communications Deployment Guide for Microsoft® Environments.
I-4
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
Collaboration Server Integration into the Microsoft Lync
Server 2010
The In the Lync Server 2010 environment, only the Matched URI dialing (using the SIP URI
address) is available as the call routing method.
Non-Lync endpoints connected to the same CP-based conference as Lync endpoints running on the
Collaboration ServerCollaboration Server, cannot participate in the desktop sharing session initiated
by Lync participants.
Configuring the Polycom-Microsoft Solution
See the Polycom Unified Communications Deployment Guide for Microsoft Environments,
“Deployment Process for Polycom Collaboration Server Systems” for detailed steps on how to
deploy a Polycom Collaboration Server system for use with the video conferencing solution
in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 environment.
Call Admission Control (CAC)
Microsoft Call Admission Control (CAC), a protocol that enables bandwidth management
via the Policy Server in federated (ICE) environment, is supported on the Collaboration
Server.
The Policy server functionality enables the Lync server to manage the bandwidth allocated
to the Lync client when connecting to another Lync client or a video conference running on
the Collaboration Server. The bandwidth allocated by the Policy server may be the same or
lower than the bandwidth requested by the Lync client, which is based on the line rate of the
conference.
Guidelines
•
Microsoft CAC is available only with:
•
— A Lync server (Wave 14)
— Call Policy functionality enabled
— The Call Admission Control enabled for the Lync Clients
— ICE environment
— Local network
Microsoft CAC is applicable only to dial-in calls
•
Additional configuration on the Microsoft side is not required. It is based on the
existing ICE environment configuration.
•
Additional configuration (setting a system flag) may be required on the Collaboration
Server to modify the system behavior when CAC is enabled in a local network; closing
the ICE channel or keeping it open.
•
Setting an additional system flag may be required on the Collaboration Server when
running Video Switching conferences.
For more details, see "Collaboration Server Configuration for CAC Implementation” on page I-31.
Polycom, Inc.
I-5
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Media Over TCP
Media is automatically transmitted through TCP when UDP, the default transport protocol,
is not available. Media over TCP is supported using the Microsoft ICE environment.
The media transport protocol type (UDP/TCP) is displayed in the Participant Properties Channel Status - Advanced dialog box.
The media transport protocol type is displayed for the following IP addresses:
•
Collaboration Server IP Address
•
Participant IP Address
•
ICE Collaboration Server IP Address - only when ICE is functional
•
ICE Participant IP Address - only when ICE is functional
Network Error Recovery
When a short network error occurs, for example 5 seconds, Collaboration Server
automatically recovers, enabling calls in Microsoft Lync to continue the video or audio
conference without disconnecting. However, when a longer network error occurs, the call is
disconnected. The presence status mode is correctly updated from Busy to Available. There is
no configuration required for this procedure.
SIP Dialog Recovery
Collaboration Server has the ability to automatically recover from a SIP dialog failure, which
can occur in long duration calls in Meeting Rooms using the Microsoft Lync client. There is
no configuration required for this procedure.
I-6
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
Configuring the RealPresence Collaboration Server for
Microsoft Integration
The Collaboration Server is integrated in and Microsoft Lync Server environments by
setting its Transport Type (in the SIP server configuration) to TLS and creating a certificate
that is sent to the Collaboration Server. This procedure is also required when encryption of
SIP signaling is used.
In addition, if the DNS server was not enabled in the Network Management Service on the
Collaboration Server, it must be enabled for the integration in the Lync Server (Wave 14)
environments.
Modify the Collaboration Server Management Network Service to Include
the DNS Server
The Management Network that is defined during first entry setup does not include the
definition of the DNS which is mandatory in Microsoft environment and has to be modified.
In Multiple Networks configurations, a DNS server can be specified for each IP Network Service and
for the Collaboration Server Management Network Service.
To add the definition of the DNS to the Management Network in the Collaboration
Server:
1 Using the Web browser, connect to the Collaboration Server.
Polycom, Inc.
2
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list and click IP
Network Services ( ).
3
In the IP Network Services pane, double-click the Management Service
The Management Network Properties - IP dialog box opens.
.
I-7
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
4
Click the DNS tab.
5
In the DNS field, select Specify to define the DNS parameters.
6
View or modify the following fields:
Table 10
Management Network Properties – DNS Parameters
Field
Description
MCU Host Name
Enter the name of the MCU on the network. This name must be
identical to the FQDN name defined for the Collaboration Server in
the OCS and DNS.
Default name is Collaboration Server.
Shelf Management
Host Name
Displays the name of the entity that manages the Collaboration
Server hardware. The name is derived from the MCU host name.
Default is RMX_SHM.
DNS
Select:
• Off – if DNS servers are not used in the network.
•
Specify – to enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers.
Note: The IP address fields are enabled only if Specify is selected.
I-8
Register Host Names
Automatically to DNS
Servers
Select this option to automatically register the MCU Signaling Host
and Shelf Management with the DNS server.
Local Domain Name
Enter the name of the domain where the MCU is installed as defined
in the Office Communications Server/Lync Server.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
Table 10
Management Network Properties – DNS Parameters (Continued)
Field
Description
DNS Servers Addresses:
Primary Server
Secondary Server
Tertiary Server
7
The static IP addresses of the DNS servers (the same servers
defined in the Office Communications Server/Lync Server).
A maximum of three servers can be defined.
Click OK.
Defining a SIP Network Service in the Collaboration Server and Installing
the Security Certificate
Your RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) 1500/2000/4000 system should be installed
according to standard installation procedures. For details, see the RealPresence Collaboration
Server 800s Getting Started Guide.
When configuring the Default IP Network Service on first entry, or when modifying the
properties of the existing Default IP Network Service, the SIP environment parameters must be
set as described in this section.
The Security Certificate
There are two methods to create and send the security certificate that is required for
configuration of the integration of the Collaboration Server in the Microsoft environment:
•
The CSR method
•
The PFX method (Recommended method for Lync Server, Wave 14)
The CSR Method
In the CSR method, the security certificate is created as part of the SIP Server configuration
in the IP Network Service configuration.
Using the CSR Method, the following processes are performed:
•
Creating the certificate request (in the Default IP Network Service - SIP Server dialog box).
•
Sending the certificate request to a Certificate Authority.
•
Receiving the certificate from the Certificate Authority.
•
Installing the certificate in the Collaboration Server (in the Default IP Network Service SIP Server dialog box).
The PFX Method
In the PFX method, the security certificate is created in advance, in the Lync Server
environment.
For detailed description of this procedure in the Lync Server environment, see the Polycom
Unified Communications Deployment Guide for Microsoft Environments..
Certificates are deleted when an administrator performs a Restore Factory Defaults with the
Comprehensive Restore option selected.
Polycom, Inc.
I-9
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Configuring the Collaboration Server IP Network Service
To configure the Collaboration Server IP Network Service:
1 Using the Web browser, connect to the Collaboration Server.
2
In the Collaboration Server Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list and click IP
Network Services ( ).
3
In the IP Network Services pane, double-click the Default IP Service (
entry.
,
, or
)
The Default IP Service - Networking IP dialog box opens.
4
Make sure the IP Network Type is set to H.323 & SIP even though SIP will be the only
call setup used with Office Communications Server 2007.
5
Make sure that the correct parameters are defined for the Signaling Host IP Address and
Subnet Mask.
Make sure that the IP address of the Collaboration Server Signaling Host is the same one defined as
a trusted host in Lync Server 2010.
I-10
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
6
Click the SIP Servers tab.
7
In the SIP Server, select Specify.
8
In the SIP Server Type, select Microsoft.
9
Enter the IP address of the Office Communications Server 2007 or Lync Server 2010 and
the Server Domain Name as defined in the OCS/Lync Server and in the Management
Network for the DNS.
10 If not selected by default, change the Transport Type to TLS.
The Create Certificate and Send Certificate buttons are enabled.
11 If you are using the CSR method, and the CSR option is not selected by default, change
the Certificate Method to CSR.
If you are using the PFX method, in the Certificate Method field select PEM/PFX.
At this point the procedure changes according to the selected certificate method.
If you have selected PEM/PFX, skip to step 27 on page I-15.
Polycom, Inc.
I-11
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
CSR Method - Creating the Certificate
12 Click the Create Certificate button.
The Create Certificate Request dialog box is displayed.
13 Enter information in all the following fields:
Table I-1
Create Certificate Request
Field
Description
Country Name
Enter any 2 letter code for the country name.
State or Province
Enter the full name of the state or province.
Locality
Enter the full name of the town/city/location.
Organization
Enter the full name of your organization for which the certificate
will be issued.
Organizational Unit
Enter the full name of the unit (group or division) for which the
certificate will be issued.
Common Name (DNS/
IP)
Enter the DNS MCU Host Name. This MCU Host Name must
also be configured in the Management Network Properties
dialog box.
Hash Method
Select the hash method to be used to hash the certificate
request.
14 Click Send Details.
I-12
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
The Collaboration Server creates a New Certificate Request and returns it to the Create
Certificate Request dialog box along with the information the user submitted.
15 Click Copy Request to copy the New Certificate Request to the workstation’s clipboard.
16 Connect to your preferred Certificate Authority’s website using the web browser.
17 Follow the purchasing instructions at the Certificate Authority’s website.
18 Paste (Ctrl + V) the New Certificate Request as required by the Certificate Authority.
When creating the certificate request in the Certificate Authority site, make sure that the Web Server
option is selected as the Certificate Template, as shown in the example below.
The Certificate Authority issues the TLS/SSL certificate, and sends the certificate to you
by e-mail.
If the process of purchasing the certificate is short, you may leave the IP Network Service - SIP
Servers dialog box open. Otherwise, close it without saving the changes to the Transport Type and
Certificate Method.
Polycom, Inc.
I-13
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
CSR Method - Sending the certificate
After you have received the certificate from the Certificate Authority:
If you have closed the IP Network Service - SIP Servers dialog box, repeat steps 1 to 11 in the
procedure "Defining a SIP Network Service in the Collaboration Server and Installing the Security
Certificate” on page I-9.
19 Open the Certificate Authority e-mail and Copy (Ctrl + C) the certificate information
from the Certificate Authority’s e-mail to the clipboard.
20 In the IP Network Service - SIP Servers dialog box, click the Send Certificate button.
The Send Certificate dialog box opens.
21 Click Paste Certificate to paste the clipboard content into the Send Certificate dialog box.
22 Click the Send Certificate button to send the certificate to the Collaboration Server.
23 Click the Close button.
24 In the IP Network Service - SIP Servers dialog box, complete the SIP Servers definitions.
25 Click OK.
The MCU validates the certificate.
— If the certificate is not valid, an error message is displayed.
I-14
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
— If the certificate matches the private key, and the task is completed, a confirmation
message indicating that the certificate was created successfully is displayed.
Once the certificate is installed in the Collaboration Server you can complete the definition procedure
or continue with the Collaboration Server configuration for ICE dialing. For details, see "Configuring
the Collaboration Server for Federated (ICE) Dialing” on page I-34.
26 If no additional configuration is required, reset the Collaboration Server.
PFX Method - Sending the Certificate
The PFX certificate request is created in the Lync server. This certificate is received from the
Certificate Authority it can be sent to the Collaboration Server, as described in the following
procedure:
27 Click the Send Certificate button.
The Install File dialog box opens.
Polycom, Inc.
I-15
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
28 Click the Browse button.
The Open dialog box appears, letting you select the certificate file(s) to send to the MCU.
Depending on the method used when the certificate file(s) were created, send the
certificate file(s) to the Collaboration Server according to the contents of the file set that
was created:
— The certificate files pkey.pem, cert.pem and a certPassword.txt. The files were created
by a Certificate Authority and are sent as is to the Collaboration Server together
with the required password contained in the certPassword.txt file.
This is the recommended method.
— The files pkey.pem and cert.pem. The certificate files were created by a Certificate
Authority and are sent as is to the Collaboration Server.
— A *.pfx file and a certPassword.txt file. The file certPassword.txt is manually created if
the *.pfx file was created by the OCS using a password. The *.pfx file will be
converted internally by the Collaboration Server using the password included in
the certPassword.txt into three certificate files named pkey.pem and cert.pem.
— A *.pfx file if the certificate file was created in the OCS without using a password.
The *.pfx file will be converted internally by the Collaboration Server into three
certificate files named pkey.pem and cert.pem.
29 In the file browser, select all files to be sent in one operation according to the contents of
the set:
— One *.pfx file, or
— Two files: one *.pfx file and certPassword.txt, or
— Three files:pkey.pem, cert.pem and certPassword.txt
30 Click Open.
The selected file(s) appear in the Install Files path.
31 Click Install.
The files are sent to the Collaboration Server and the Install File dialog box closes.
32 In the Default IP Service - Networking IP dialog box, click OK.
I-16
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
33 In the Reset Confirmation dialog box, click No to modify the required system flags before
resetting the MCU, or click Yes if the flag was already set.
Reset can be performed after setting the system flags (for example, setting the MS_ENVIRONMENT
flag). Sometimes the system fails to read the *.pfx file and the conversion process fails, which is
indicated by the active alarm “SIP TLS: Registration server not responding” and/or “SIP TLS:
Registration handshake failure”. Sending *.pfx file again, as described in this procedure and then
resetting the system may resolve the problem.
Polycom Collaboration Server System Flag Configuration
Enabling the Microsoft Environment
The Collaboration Server can be installed in Microsoft R2 environments. To adjust the
Collaboration Server behavior to the Microsoft environment in each release, system flags
must be set.
To configure the system flags on the Polycom Collaboration Server system:
1 On the Collaboration Server menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
The System Flags - MCMS_PARAMETERS_USER dialog box opens.
2
Scroll to the flag MS_ENVIRONMENT and click it.
The Edit Flag dialog box is displayed.
3
In the Value field, enter YES to set the Collaboration Server SIP environment to
Microsoft solution.
Collaboration Server set to MS_ENVIRONMENT=YES supports SIP over TLS only and not over
TCP.
4
Click OK to complete the flag definition.
5
When prompted, click Yes to reset the MCU and implement the changes to the system
configuration. After system reset the Collaboration Server can register to the OCS
server and make SIP calls.
Sometimes the system fails to read the *.pfx file and the conversion process fails, which is indicated
by the active alarm “SIP TLS: Registration server not responding” and/or “SIP TLS: Registration
handshake failure”. Sending *.pfx file again, as described in this procedure and then resetting the
system may resolve the problem.
Polycom, Inc.
I-17
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
In some configurations, the following flags may require modifications when
MS_ENVIRONMENT flag is set to YES:
Table I-2 Additional Microsoft Environment Flags in the Collaboration Server
MCMS_PARAMETERS_USER Tab
Flag Name
Value and Description
SIP_FREE_VIDEO_RESOURCES
Default value in Microsoft environment: NO.
When set to NO, video resources that were allocated to
participants remain allocated to the participants as long as
they are connected to the conference even if the call was
changed to audio only. The system does not allocate the
resources to other participants ensuring that the participants
have the appropriate resources in case they want to return to
the video call.
The system allocates the resources according to the
participant’s endpoint capabilities, with a minimum of one CIF
video resource.
When this flag is set to YES, video ports are dynamically
allocated or released according to the in the endpoint
capabilities. For example, when an audio Only call is
escalated to Video and vice versa or when the resolution is
changed.
SIP_FAST_UPDATE_INTERVAL_
ENV
Default setting is 0 to prevent the Collaboration Server from
automatically sending an Intra request to all SIP endpoints.
Enter n (where n is any number of seconds other than 0) to
let the Collaboration Server automatically send an Intra
request to all SIP endpoints every n seconds.
It is recommended to set the flag to 0 and modify the
frequency in which the request is sent at the endpoint level
(as defined in the next flag).
Setting the audio protocol for the Microsoft Client running on a single
core PC
By default, Lync Clients are connected to conferences using the G.722.1 audio algorithm.
However, when these clients are hosted on single processor workstations, they may
experience audio quality problems when this algorithm is used.
The System Flag FORCE_AUDIO_CODEC_FOR_MS_SINGLE_CORE is used to force the
use of a specific Audio algorithm such as G.711 when a Lync Client is detected as being
hosted on a single core processor.
This flag can be set to:
•
AUTO – No forcing occurs and the Collaboration Server negotiates a full set of Audio
algorithm during capabilities exchange.
•
G711A/U or G722 – Set this flag value according to the hosting workstation capabilities.
If the Collaboration Server detects single core host during capabilities exchange it will
assign a G.711 or G.722 Audio algorithm according to the flag value.
Possible values: AUTO, G711A, G711U, G722
Default: G711A
I-18
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
Controlling Resource Allocations for Lync Clients Using the RTV Video
Protocol
The number of resources used by the system to connect a Lync client with RTV is
determined according to the conference line rate and the Maximum video resolution set in
the Conference Profile.
The system flag MAX_RTV_RESOLUTION enables you to override the Collaboration
Server resolution selection and limit it to a lower resolution. Resource usage can then be
minimized the 1 or 1.5 video resources per call instead of 3 resources, depending on the
selected resolution.
Possible flag values are: AUTO (default), QCIF, CIF, VGA or HD720.
For example, if the flag is set to VGA, conference line rate is 1024Kbps, and the Profile
Maximum Resolution is set to Auto, the system will limit the Lync RTV client to a resolution
of VGA instead of HD720p and will consume only 1.5 video resources instead of 3
resources.
When set to AUTO (default), the system uses the default resolution matrix based on the
conference line rate.
To change the default flag setting, add the MAX_RTV_RESOLUTION flag to the System
Configuration flags and set its value. For information, see .
The following table summarizes the Collaboration Server resources allocated to a Lync
Client based on the MAX_RTV_RESOLUTION flag setting, the connection line rate and the
video resolution.
Table I-3
Selected Video Resolution Per Core Processor
Maximum
Resolution
Value
Line Rate
AUTO
HD720p
VGA
Polycom, Inc.
Selected video resolution based on flag setting and conference line rate and core
processor
Quad
Dual
Single
> 600 kbps
HD720p 30fps
VGA 30fps
VGA 15fps
250 kbps - 600 kbps
VGA 30fps
VGA 30fps
VGA 15fps
180 kbps - 249 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
64 kbps - 179 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
> 600 kbps
HD720p 30fps
HD720p 13fps
VGA 15fps
250 kbps - 600 kbps
VGA 30fps
VGA 30fps
VGA 15fps
180 kbps - 249 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
64 kbps - 179 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
> 600 kbps
VGA 30fps
VGA 30fps
VGA 15fps
250 kbps - 600 kbps
VGA 30fps
VGA 30fps
VGA 15fps
180 kbps - 249 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
64 kbps - 179 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
I-19
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Table I-3
Selected video resolution based on flag setting and conference line rate and core
processor (Continued)
Selected Video Resolution Per Core Processor
Maximum
Resolution
Value
Line Rate
CIF
QCIF
Quad
Dual
Single
> 600 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
250 kbps - 600 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
180 kbps - 249 kbps
CIF
CIF
CIF
64 kbps - 179 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
> 600 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
250 kbps - 600 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
180 kbps - 249 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
64 kbps - 179 kbps
QCIF
QCIF
QCIF
When the MAX_ALLOWED_RTV_HD_FRAME_RATE flag equals 0 (default value), Table 1-1 for the
MAX_RTV_RESOLUTION flag applies. When the MAX_ALLOWED_RTV_HD_FRAME_RATE flag
does not equal 0, see "Threshold HD Flag Settings using the RTV Video Protocol” on page 3-30 for
more information.
The following table describes the number of allocated video resources for each video
resolution when using the RTV protocol.
Table I-4
I-20
Allocated video resolutions per video resolution
Selected Video Resolution
Number of Allocated Video Resources
HD720p
3
VGA
1.5
CIF
1
QCIF
1
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
HD Frame Rate Flag Settings using the RTV Video Protocol
The system flag MAX_ALLOWED_RTV_HD_FRAME_RATE defines the threshold Frame
Rate (fps) in which RTV Video Protocol initiates HD resolutions.
Flag values are as follows:
•
Default: 0 (fps) - Implements any Frame Rate based on Lync RTV Client capabilities
If the MAX_RTV_RESOLUTION flag is set to AUTO dual core systems always view VGA. For more
information on Lync RTV Client capabilities, see , "Controlling Resource Allocations for Lync Clients
Using RTV Video Protocol” on page 2-26 for more information.
•
Range: 0-30 (fps)
For example, when the flag is set to 15 and the Lync RTV Client declares HD 720P at 10fps,
because the endpoint’s frame rate (fps) of 10 is less than flag setting of 15, then the
endpoint’s video will open VGA and not HD.
In another example, when the flag is set to a frame rate of 10 and the Lync RTV Client
declares HD 720P at 13fps, because the endpoint’s frame rate (fps) of 13 is greater than flag
setting of 10, then the endpoint’s video will open HD and not VGA.
•
•
•
•
Polycom, Inc.
Single core PC’s cannot view HD and always connect in VGA.
Dual Core Processor - The threshold for flag settings on Dual Core systems is 13 (fps) and less
for viewing HD. When system flag is set to 14 (fps) or higher, the RTV Video Protocol shall
connect in VGA.
Quad Core PC systems always view HD, even when flag settings are set anywhere from to 0-30.
The number of resources used by the system to connect a Lync client with RTV is determined
according to the conference line rate and the maximum video resolution set in the Conference
Profile. For more information, see "Microsoft RTV Video Protocol Support in CP Conferences”
on page 2-24.
I-21
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
Adding Presence to Conferencing Entities in the Buddy
List
Registration of conferencing entities (Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP Factories) with
the SIP server adds these conferencing entities to the buddy list with their presence. It
enables the LYNC Server client users to see the availability status (Available, Offline, or
Busy) of these conferencing entities and connect to them directly from the buddy list.
Right-click the
conferencing
entity and then
select Call or
Start a Video
Call
conferencing
entity status:
Available
Offline
Busy
Guidelines
•
Registration with Presence of up to 100 conferencing entities to a single SIP Server is
supported. When this number is exceeded, the additional conferencing entity may
appear to be successfully registered but the presence status will be shown as 'Offline' in
Lync for any entities beyond the limit.
•
Lync endpoints cannot connect to conferencing entities that their presence is “offline”.
•
The Conferencing Entity (Meeting Room or Entry Queue or SIP Factory) has to be
added to the Active Directory as a User.
Make sure that a unique name is assigned to the conferencing entity and it is not
already used for another user account in the Active Directory.
I-22
•
The conferencing entity name must not include any upper case letters.
•
When the MCU system is shutting down while a Meeting Room is still active, as
indicated by its presence, the status remains active for 10 minutes during which Lync
endpoints cannot connect to the Meeting Room. After 10 minutes, the Meeting Room
Status changes to “offline”.
•
Registration of the conferencing entity is defined in the Conference Profile (and not in
the IP Network Service), enabling you to choose the conferencing entity to register.
•
In Multiple Networks configuration, an IP Network Service that is enabled for
registration in a Conference Profile cannot be deleted.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
Enabling the Registration of the Conferencing Entities
The creation of the various conferencing entities is described in the following chapters:
•
"Meeting Rooms” on page 6-1
•
"Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories” on page 7-1
Registration with presence of conferencing entities with the SIP Server is enabled by
performing the following processes:
•
Creating an Active Directory Account for the Conferencing Entity.
•
Enabling the Conferencing Entity User Account for Lync Server
•
Defining the Microsoft SIP Server in the IP Network Service
•
Enabling Registration in the Conference Profile
Creating an Active Directory Account for the Conferencing Entity
The User account created for the Conferencing entity is used for registration with the Lync
server and to automatically synchronize with the STUN and relay (Edge) servers.
To add the conferencing entity user to the Active Directory:
1 Go to Start > Run and enter dsa.msc to open the Active Directory Users and Computers
console.
2
Polycom, Inc.
In the console tree, select Users > New > User.
I-23
Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s Administrator’s Guide
3
In the New User wizard, define the following parameters:
Table I-5
Active Directory - New User Parameters for the Collaboration Server
Field
Description
First Name
Enter the name of the conferencing entity user. This name will
appear in the buddy list of the Office Communication Server or Lync
server. For example, vmr10.
Notes:
• This name must be the identical to the Routing Name assigned
to the conferencing entity in the Collaboration Server system. It
must also be the User Login Name in the Active Directory.
•
The name can include only lower case characters and/or
numbers.
Full Name
Enter the same name as entered in the First Name field.
User Login Name
Enter the same name as entered in the First Name field and select
from the drop down list the domain name for this user. It is the
domain name defined for the Office Communication Server or Lync
server.
4
Click Next.
5
Enter the password that complies with the Active Directory conventions and confirm
the password.
6
Select the options: User cannot change password and Password never expires.
Clear the other options.
7
Click Next.
The system displays summary information.
8
Click Finish.
The new User is added to the Active Directory Users list.
9
I-24
Repeat for each Collaboration Server conferencing entity.
Polycom, Inc.
Appendix I-Setting the Collaboration Server for Integration Into Microsoft Environment
Enabling the Conferencing Entity User Account for Lync Server
The new Conferencing Entity user must be enabled for registration with the Lync Server.
To enable the Conferencing Entity User Account for Lync Server:
1 On the computer running the Lync Server 2010, go to Start->All Programs->Microsoft
Lync Server 2010>Lync Server Control Panel.
Windows Security window opens.
2
Enter your User name and Password as configured in the Lync Server and click OK.
The Microsoft Lync Server 2010 Control Panel window opens.
3
Click the Users tab.
4
In the User Search pane, click the Enable Users heading.
The New Lync Server User pane opens.
5
Click the Add button.
The Select from Active Directory dialog box opens.
6
Enter the conferencing entity user name as defined in the Active Directory, and then
click the Find button.
The requested user is listed in the Select From Active Directory dialog box.
Polycom, Inc.
7
Select the listed user (conferencing entity user) and click OK.
The selected user appears in the New Lync Server User pane.
8
Select the following parameters:
I-25
Polycom